Tender Notification 008

Tender Notification for
DESIGN, ENGINEERING, CIVIL WORKS,

SUPPLY, ERECTION, TESTING, &
COMMISSIONING OF NEW 33/11KV GIS &
POWER TRANSFORMER ALONG WITH ALLIED
EQUIPMENTS AND WORKS OF SYSTEM
UPGRADATION ON TURNKEY BASIS AT MOTIA
KHAN GRID SUBSTATION, NEW DELHI FOR
BYPL, DELHI (INDIA)
NIT NO CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008
Due Date for Submission: 23.05.2019, 14:30 HRS
BSES YAMUNA POWER LIMITED (BYPL)

SHAKTI KIRAN BUILDING, KARKARDOOMA,
DELHI-110032
CIN: U40109DL2001PLC111525
TEL: 011 3999 7111
WEBSITE: www.bsesdelhi.com
GSTIN: 07AABCC8569N1Z0
NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 1 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

SECTION – I: REQUEST FOR QUOTATION
1.00 Event Information
1.01 BSES Yamuna Power Ltd (hereinafter referred to as “BYPL”) invites sealed tenders in 2
envelopes for DESIGN, ENGINEERING, CIVIL WORKS, SUPPLY, ERECTION, TESTING, &
COMMISSIONING OF NEW 33/11KV GIS & POWER TRANSFORMER ALONG WITH ALLIED
EQUIPMENTS AND WORKS OF SYSTEM UPGRADATION ON TURNKEY BASIS AT MOTIA
KHAN GRID SUBSTATION, NEW DELHI FOR BYPL, DELHI (INDIA). The bidder must
qualify the requirements as specified in clause 2.0 stated below. All envelopes shall be
duly superscribed as — “DESIGN, ENGINEERING, CIVIL WORKS, SUPPLY,
ERECTION, TESTING, & COMMISSIONING OF NEW 33/11KV GIS & POWER
TRANSFORMER ALONG WITH ALLIED EQUIPMENTS AND WORKS OF SYSTEM
UPGRADATION ON TURNKEY BASIS AT MOTIA KHAN GRID SUBSTATION, NEW
DELHI FOR BYPL, DELHI (INDIA)” “NIT NO CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 DUE
ON 23.05.2019, 14:30 HRS”
Cost of Delivery &
Sl. Estimated
Description EMD Qty. Installation
No. Cost (₹)
(₹) at
Survey, design, engineering,
manufacture, shop testing,
inspection, packing, dispatch,
loading, unloading and storage
at site, transit/storage and
construction insurance,
assembly, erection, civil,
AS PER
structural, architectural
BOQ
work, complete pre- MOTIA
(Bidder is
commissioning checks, KHAN
requested
testing & commissioning at GRID, NEW
11.44 11.44 to verify
1 site, obtaining statutory DELHI FOR
Crore Lakh the same
clearance & certification from BYPL,
before
State Electrical Inspector, and DELHI
bidding by
handing over to the Owner (INDIA)
visiting
after satisfactory
the site)
commissioning of new
33/11kv gis & power
transformer along with allied
equipments and works of
system upgradation on
Turnkey basis conforming to
Technical Specification & SOW
1.02 The schedule of specifications with detail terms & conditions can be obtained from
address given below against submission of non-refundable demand draft of Rs.1,180/-
drawn in favour of BSES Yamuna Power Ltd, payable at Delhi. The tender papers will be
issued on all working days upto 23.05.2019, 17:00 P.M. The tender documents &
detail terms and conditions can also be downloaded from the website
www.bsesdelhi.com --> BSES YAMUNA POWER LTD --> Tender --> Open
Tenders
In case tender papers are downloaded from the above website, then the bidder has to
enclose a demand draft covering the cost of bid documents.

1.03 Offers will be received upto 23.05.2019, 14:30 PM. at the address given below. Part A
of the Bid shall be opened on 23.05.2019, 15:30 PM. Part B of the Bid will be opened
in case of Techno-Commercially qualified Bidders and the date of opening of same shall
be intimated in due course. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that the
bid documents reach this office on or before the last date.
Head of Department
Contracts & Materials Deptt.
BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
3rd Floor, A Block
Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma
Delhi 110032
1.03 Bid will be summarily rejected if:

(i) Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) of requisite value & validity.
(ii) Tender fee of requisite value.
(iii) The offer does not contain “FOR NEW DELHI” prices indicating break-up towards all
taxes & duties.
(iv) Complete Technical details are not enclosed.
(v) Tender is received after due date and time.
2.00 Qualification Criteria
The prospective bidder must qualify all of the following requirements and shall be eligible
to participate in the bidding who meets following requirements and management has a
right to disqualify those bidders who do not meet these requirements.
a) The bidder should be a manufacture of any two major equipments out of three –
33/11KV 20/25 MVA Power Transformer, 33KV GIS and 11KV AIS.
b) The bidder should have infrastructure in India for providing service & spare
support to BYPL. The relevant documents including details of manufacturing
units, locations and works from where supply & spares against this tender shall
be proposed to be furnished.
c) The bidder should have established project management, field quality assurance
system & safety organization designed to achieve high level of reliability at
various stages of field services required for successful erection, testing &
commissioning. The bidder should have successfully designed, supplied, installed
& commissioned minimum two 33KV GIS Grid substations or higher rating
projects in last 5 years. Details of these projects including customer name, PO
number (with date), date of completion and rating (Capacity/Voltage etc) shall
be provided.
d) Performance certificate for 1 (One) year satisfactory performance from at least 2
executed projects of 33KV GIS or higher voltage rating should be submitted.
e) Bidder shall procure equipment’s from the approved vendor list of BYPL for
individual items (attached in Scope of work - SP-SWGIS-124-R1). The bidder is
supposed to have agreement with manufacturer/service provider to provide
support to BYPL for any service & spares related issues for time stipulated in the
specification or service life of the equipments. The bidder must submit the
undertaking for the same.
f) The bidder must have adequate Financial Stability and status to meet the
financial obligation pursuant to the scope of work and shall have average annual
turnover of minimum Rs 200 Crores during last three (3) Financial Years
preceding the date of opening of bid, duly certified CA certificate to be
submitted.

g) The bidder should possess valid Electrical Contractor License issued by
competent statutory agency to undertake work in NCT Delhi. In case bidder is
not having this license, Bidder to give the undertaking that it will be obtained by
them before the start of the work at site or suitable sub-contractor having the
valid license shall be engaged for works at site where copy of valid license shall
be submitted to BYPL before the start of the work.
h) An undertaking (self certificate) that the bidder has not been
blacklisted/debarred by any central/state government institution including
electricity boards.
i) The bidder should have registered under GST ACT and shall submit PAN, EPF
and GST Registration Number, in addition to other statuary compliances. The
bidder must submit the copy of registrations and submit an undertaking that the
bidder shall comply all the statutory compliances as per the applicable laws/rules
etc before the start of the work.
Notwithstanding anything stated above, BYPL reserves the right to assess bidder’s
capability to perform the contract, assess the capability and installed capacity of the
Bidder for carrying out the supplies, should the circumstances warrant such assessment
in the overall interest of the purchaser. In this regard the decision of the purchaser is
final.
3.00 Bidding and Award Process

Bidders are requested to submit their offer strictly in line with this tender document. NO
DEVIATION IS ACCEPTABLE. BYPL shall response to the clarifications raised by
various bidders and the will be distributed to all participating bidders through website.
3.01 BID SUBMISSION
The bidders are required to submit the bids in 2(two) parts and submitted in 1
original + Duplicate to the following address:
Head of Department
Contracts & Material Deptt.
3rd Floor, A Block
Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma
Delhi 110032
PART A :: TECHNICAL BID comprising of following

 EMD in prescribed format
 Non-refundable demand draft for Rs 1180/- in case the
forms are downloaded from website
 Details of constitution of the company
(Proprietary/Limited/etc along with the details)
 Memorandum of Association of the company
• Documentary evidence in support of qualifying criteria
i.e, Copies of the following for last 3 years i) Balance
sheet ii) Annual profit & loss statement iii) Annual turn
over, iv) Capacity, v) CA certificate etc
• Copies of following i) Orders ii) Execution/Performance
Certificates, & other documents to support the QC as per
Clause 2.0
 Technical Literature/ GTP/Type test report etc
 Organization Chart/Qualified Manpower available
 Testing Facilities

 Original Tender documents duly stamped & signed on
each page as token of acceptance
 Acceptance to Commercial Terms and Conditions viz.
Delivery schedule/period, Payment terms, BG, Power-of-
Attorney etc
PART B :: FINANCIAL BID comprising of
 Price strictly in the Format enclosed indicating Break up
of basic price, taxes & duties, Freight etc
3.02 TIME SCHEDULE

The bidders should complete the following within the dates specified as under:
S.No. Steps Due date

1 Last Date of Sale of Bid Documents 22.05.2019, 17:00 HRS
2 Last Date of Queries, if any 13.05.2019, 15:00 HRS
3 Pre-Bid Meeting 13.05.2019, 15:00 HRS
4 Last Date of Receipt of Bid Documents 23.05.2019, 14:30 HRS

Date & Time of Opening of PART A - Technical
5 23.05.2019, 15:30 HRS
and Commercial Bid
NOTE: In case last date of submission of bids & date of opening of bids is declared as
holiday in BYPL office, the last date of submission will be following working day at the
same time.
This is a two part bid process. Bidders are to submit the bids in 2(Two) parts
Both these parts should be furnished in separate sealed covers super scribing NIT no.
DUE DATE OF SUBMISSION, with particulars as PART-A TECHNICAL BID &
COMMERCIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS and Part-B FINANCIAL BID and these
sealed envelopes should again be placed in another sealed cover which shall be
submitted before the due date & time specified.
Part – A:: Technical Bid should not contain any cost information whatsoever and shall
be submitted within the due date.
PART B:: This envelope will be opened internally after techno-commercial evaluation
and only of the qualified bidders.
REVERSE AUCTION CLAUSE :: Purchaser reserves the right to use reverse auction as
optional tool through SAP – SRM as an integral part of the entire tendering process. All
the bidders who are techno-commercially qualified on the basis of tender requirements
shall participate in reverse auction.
Notwithstanding anything stated above, the Purchaser reserves the right to assess
bidder’s capability to perform the contract, should the circumstances warrant such
assessment in the overall interest of the purchaser. In this regard the decision of the
purchaser is final.
BIDS RECEIVED AFTER DUE DATE AND TIME MAY BE LIABLE TO REJECTION

4.00 Award Decision
4.01 Purchaser intends to award the business on a lowest bid basis, so suppliers are
encouraged to submit the bid competitively. The decision to place purchase
order/LOI solely depends on purchaser on the cost competitiveness across multiple
lots, quality, delivery and bidder‘s capacity, in addition to other factors that
Purchaser may deem relevant.
4.02 The purchaser reserves all the rights to award the contract to bidder so as to meet
the delivery requirement or nullify the award decision without any reason.
4.03 In the event of your bid being selected by purchaser (and / or its affiliates) and you
subsequent DEFAULT on your bid; you will be required to pay purchaser (and / or
its affiliates) an amount equal to the difference in your bid and the next lowest bid
on the quantity declared in NIT/RFQ.
4.04 In case any bidder is found unsatisfactory during the Project execution, the award
will be cancelled and BYPL reserves the right to award other bidders who are found
fit.
4.05 Bidders are requested to quote their lowest No-Regret prices since BYPL would not
prefer to negotiate the price further.
5.00 Market Integrity

We have a fair and competitive marketplace. The rules for bidders are outlined in the
Terms & Conditions. Bidders must agree to these rules prior to participating. In addition
to other remedies available, we reserves the right to exclude a bidder from participating
in future markets due to the bidder’s violation of any of the rules or obligations contained
in the Terms & Condition. Bidders who violate the marketplace rules or engage in
behavior that disrupts the fair execution of the marketplace restricts a bidder to length of
time, depending upon the seriousness of the violation. Examples of violations include,
but are not limited to:
• Failure to honor prices submitted to the marketplace.
• Breach of the terms of the published in Request For Quotation/NIT.
6.00 Supplier Confidentiality

All information contained in this RFQ is confidential and shall not be disclosed, published
or advertised in any manner without written authorization from BYPL. This includes all
bidding information submitted.
All RFQ documents remain the property of BYPL and all suppliers are required to return
these documents to BYPL upon request.
Suppliers who do not honor these confidentiality provisions will be excluded from
participating in future bidding events.
7.0 Contact Information
Technical clarification, if any, as regards this RFQ shall be sought in writing and sent by
post/courier to following address. The same shall not be communicated through phone
Technical Commercial
Contact Mr Ashwani Aggarwal Mr Rakesh Bansal & Rajesh
Person Copy to : Mr. Rakesh Bansal Srivastava
C&M Deptt. 3rd Floor , A-Block,
BSES Yamuna Power Ltd , 3rd floor, B
Address Block, Shaktikiran Building,
Shaktikiran Building,
Karkardooma, Delhi 110032
Karkardooma, Delhi 110032
rakesh.bansal@relianceada.com
E-Mail
ashwani.aggarwal@relianceada.com rajesh.r.srivastava@relianceada.c
ID
om

SECTION – II: INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
A. GENERAL
1.00 BSES Yamuna Power Ltd, hereinafter referred to as “The Purchaser“ are desirous of
implementing the various Systems Improvement/Repair & Maintenance works at their
respective licensed area in Delhi. The Purchaser has now floated this tender for
procurement of material notified earlier in this bid document.
2.00 SCOPE OF WORK

2.01 The scope shall include design, engineering, civil works, supply, erection, testing, &
commissioning of new 33/11kv gis & power transformer along with allied equipments and
works of system upgradation on turnkey basis at motia khan grid substation, new delhi
for bypl, delhi (india)
3.0 DISCLAIMER
3.01 This Document includes statements, which reflect various assumptions, which may or
may not be correct. Each Bidder/Bidding Consortium should conduct its own estimation
and analysis and should check the accuracy, reliability and completeness of the
information in this Document and obtain independent advice from appropriate sources in
their own interest.
3.02 Neither Purchaser nor its employees will have any liability whatsoever to any Bidder or
any other person under the law or contract, the principles of restitution or unjust
enrichment or otherwise for any loss, expense or damage whatsoever which may arise
from or be incurred or suffered in connection with anything contained in this Document,
any matter deemed to form part of this Document, provision of Services and any other
information supplied by or on behalf of Purchaser or its employees, or otherwise a rising
in anyway from the selection process for the Supply.
3.03 Though adequate care has been taken while issuing the Bid document, the Bidder should
satisfy itself that Documents are complete in all respects. Intimation of any discrepancy
shall be given to this office immediately.
3.04 This Document and the information contained herein are Strictly Confidential and are for
the use of only the person(s) to whom it is issued. It may not be copied or distributed by
the recipient to third parties (other than in confidence to the recipient‘s professional
advisors).
4 COST OF BIDDING
The Bidder shall bear all cost associated with the preparation and submission of its Bid
and Purchaser will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs.
B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
5.01 The Scope of Work, Bidding Procedures and Contract Terms are described in the Bidding
Documents. In addition to the covering letter accompanying Bidding Documents, the
Bidding Documents include:

(a) Request for Quotation (RFQ) - Section - I
(b) Instructions to Bidders (ITB) - Section - II
(c) Terms & Conditions of SUPPLY (T&C) - Section -III
(d) Price Format - Supply - Section IV
(e) Summary T&C - Supply - Section V
(f) Bid Form - Section VI
(g) Acceptance Form RA - Section VII
(h) EMD BG Format - Section VIII
(i) Terms & Conditions of SERVICES (T&C) - Section –IX
(j) Price Format – ETC - Section –X
(k) GRAND SUMMARY OF THE QUOTED PRICE- Section –XI
(l) Vendor Code of Conduct - Section –XII
(m) Appendix
(n) Technical Specifications (TS) - Section –XIII
5.02 The Bidder is expected to examine the Bidding Documents, including all Instructions,
Forms, Terms and Specifications. Failure to furnish all information required by the
Bidding Documents or submission of a Bid not substantially responsive to the Bidding
Documents in every respect will may result in the rejection of the Bid.
6.0 AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
6.01 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of Bids, the Purchaser may for any
reasons, whether at its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a
prospective Bidder, modify the Bidding Documents by Amendment.
6.02 The Amendment shall be part of the Bidding Documents, pursuant to Clause 5.01, and it
will be notified in web site www.bsesdelhi.com and the same will be binding on them.
6.03 In order to afford prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take the Amendment
into account in preparing their Bids, the Purchaser may, at its discretion, extend the
deadline for the submission of Bids. The same shall be published as a corrigendum in
website www.bsesdelhi.com
6.04 Purchaser shall reserve the rights to following:

a) extend due date of submission,
b) modify tender document in part/whole,
c) cancel the entire tender
6.05 Bidders are requested to visit website regularly for any

modification/clarification/corrigendum/addendum of the bid documents.
C. PREPARATION OF BIDS
7.0 LANGUAGE OF BID
The Bid prepared by the Bidder, and all correspondence and documents relating to the
Bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Purchaser, shall be written in the English Language.
Any printed literature furnished by the Bidder may be written in another Language,
provided that this literature is accompanied by an English translation, in which case, for
purposes of interpretation of the Bid, the English translation shall govern.
8.0 DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID

The Bid prepared and submitted by the Bidder shall comprise the following components:
(a) Bid Form, Price & other Schedules (STRICTLY AS PER FORMAT) and Technical Data
Sheets completed in accordance with Technical Specification.
(b) All the Bids must be accompanied with the required EMD as mentioned in the Section-I
against each tender.
(c ) Tender documents duly stamped and signed on each page by authorized signatory.
8.0 BID FORM

8.01 The Bidder shall submit one ”Original”, “Copy- 1”, of the Bid Form, Supporting
Documents & Technical Data Sheets duly filled in as per attached specification/BOM etc
enclosed.
9.0 EMD
9.01 The bidder shall furnish, as part of its bid, an EMD amounting as specified in the RFQ.
The EMD is required to protect the Purchaser against the risk of Bidder‘s conduct which
would warrant forfeiture.
The EMD shall be denominated in any of the following form:
(a) Bank Guarantee drawn in favour of BSES Yamuna Power Ltd, payable at Delhi.
(b) EMD shall be valid for One Hundred Fifty (150) days after due date of submission
drawn in favour of BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
The EMD may be forfeited in case of:
(a) the Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of specified bid validity
or
(b) the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder does not
(i) accept the Purchase Order, or
(ii) furnish the required contract performance BG.
10.0 BID PRICES
10.01 Bidders shall quote for the entire Scope of Supply/Work with a break-up of prices for
individual items and Taxes & Duties. The total Bid Price shall also cover all the Supplier's
obligations mentioned in or reasonably to be inferred from the Bidding Documents in
respect of Design, Supply, Transportation to site, all in accordance with the requirement
of Bidding Documents. The Bidder shall complete the appropriate Price Schedules
included herein, stating the Unit Price for each item & total Price with taxes, duties &
freight upto destination.
10.02 The prices offered shall be inclusive of all costs as well as Duties, Taxes and Levies paid
or payable during execution of the supply work, breakup of price constituents, should be
there.
10.03 Prices quoted by the Bidder shall be “Firm” and not subject to any price adjustment
during the performance of the Contract. A Bid submitted with an adjustable price/

Price Variation Clause will be treated as non-responsive and rejected.
10.04 The qty break-up shown else-where in Price Schedule is tentative. The bidder shall
ascertain himself regarding material required for completeness of the entire work. Any
item not indicated but is required to complete the job, shall be deemed to be included in
the prices quoted.
11.0 BID CURRENCIES
11.01 Prices shall be quoted in Indian Rupees Only.
12.0 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS
12.01 Bids shall remain valid for 150 days from the due date of submission of the Bid.
12.02 Notwithstanding Clause12.01 above, the Purchaser may solicit the Bidder’s consent to an
extension of the Period of Bid Validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be
made in writing and sent by post/courier/e-mail.
13.0 ALTERNATIVE BIDS
Bidders shall submit Bids, which comply with the Bidding Documents. Alternative Bids will
not be considered. The attention of Bidders is drawn to the provisions regarding the
rejection of Bids in the terms and conditions, which are not substantially responsive to
the requirements of the Bidding Documents.
14.0 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID
14.01 The original Bid Form and accompanying documents, clearly marked "Original Bid" plus
copy1, m u s t be received by the Purchaser at the date, time and place specified
pursuant to Clauses 15.0 and 16.0. In the event of any discrepancy between the original
and the copies, the original shall govern.
14.02 The original and copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be
signed by the Bidder or a person or persons duly authorized to sign on behalf of the
Bidder. Such authorization shall be indicated by written Power-of-Attorney accompanying
the Bid.
14.03 The Bid shall contain no interlineations, erasures or overwriting except as necessary to
correct errors made by the Bidder, in which case such corrections shall be initialed by the
person or persons signing the Bid.
15.0 SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS
15.01 Bid submission: One original, & copy1 (hard copies) of all the Bid Documents shall be
sealed and submitted to the Purchaser before the closing time for submission of the bid.
15.02 The Technical Documents and the EMD shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope and the
said envelope shall be superscribed with —“Technical & EMD”. The price bid shall be
inside another sealed envelope with superscribed “Financial Bid”. Both these envelopes
shall be sealed inside another big envelope. All the envelopes should bear the Name and
Address of the Bidder and marking for the Original, & copy1. The envelopes should be
superscribed with —“Tender Notice No. & Due date of opening”.

15.03 The Bidder has the option of sending the Bids in person. Bids submitted by
Email/Telex/Telegram /Fax will be rejected. No request from any Bidder to the Purchaser
to collect the proposals from Courier/Airlines/Cargo Agents etc shall be entertained by the
Purchaser.
16.0 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS
16.01 The original Bid, together with the required copies, must be received by the Purchaser at
the address specified earlier.
16.02 The Purchaser may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Bids by
amending the Bidding Documents, in which case all rights and obligations of the
Purchaser and Bidders previously subject to the deadline will there after be subject to the
deadline as extended.
17.0 ONE BID PER BIDDER
Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid by itself. No Joint venture is acceptable. A Bidder
who submits or participates in more than one Bid will cause all those Bids to be rejected.
18.0 LATE BIDS
Any Bid received by the Purchaser after the deadline for submission of Bids prescribed by
the Purchaser, pursuant to Clause 16.0, will be declared "Late" and may be rejected and
returned unopened to the Bidder.
19.0 MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
19.01 The Bidder is not allowed to modify or withdraw its Bid after the Bid’s submission.
E. EVALUATION OF BID
20.0 PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL
Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Bids

and recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any
other persons not officially concerned with such process. Any effort by a Bidder to
influence the Purchaser's processing of Bids or award decisions may result in the rejection
of the Bidder's Bid.
21.0 CLARIFICATION OF BIDS
To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of Bids, the Purchaser may, at
its discretion, ask the Bidder for a clarification of its Bid. All responses to requests for
clarification shall be in writing and no change in the price or substance of the Bid shall be
sought, offered or permitted.
22.0 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF BIDS / RESPONSIVENESS
22.01 Purchaser will examine the Bids to determine whether they are complete, whether any
computational errors have been made, whether required sureties have been furnished,
whether the documents have been properly signed, and whether the Bids are generally in
order. Purchaser may ask for submission of original documents in order to verify the
documents submitted in support of qualification criteria.

22.02 Arithmetical errors will be rectified on the following basis. If there is a discrepancy
between the unit price and the total price per item that is obtained by multiplying the unit
price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the total price per item will be
corrected. If there is a discrepancy between the Total Amount and the sum of the total
price per item, the sum of the total price per item shall prevail and the Total Amount will
be corrected.
22.03 Prior to the detailed evaluation, Purchaser will determine the substantial responsiveness
of each Bid to the Bidding Documents including production capability and acceptable
quality of the Goods offered. A substantially responsive Bid is one, which conforms to all
the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents without material deviation.
22.04 Bid determined as not substantially responsive will be rejected by the Purchaser and/or
the Purchaser and may not subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by correction
of the non -conformity.
23.0 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS
23.01 The evaluation of Bids shall be done based on the delivered cost competitiveness basis.
23.02 The evaluation of the Bids shall be a stage-wise procedure. The following stages are
identified for evaluation purposes: In the first stage, the Bids would be subjected to a
responsiveness check. The Technical & qualifying Proposals and the Conditional ties of
the Bidders would be evaluated.
Subsequently, the Financial Proposals along with Supplementary Financial Proposals, if

any, of Bidders with Techno-commercially Acceptable Bids shall be considered for final
evaluation.
23.03 The Purchaser's evaluation of a Bid will take into account, in addition to the Bid price, the
following factors, in the manner and to the extent indicated in this Clause:
(a ) Delivery Schedule
(b) Conformance to Qualifying Criteria
(c ) Deviations from Bidding Documents
Bidders shall base their Bid price on the terms and conditions specified in the Bidding
Documents.
The cost of all quantifiable deviations and omissions from the specification, terms and
conditions specified in Bidding Documents shall be evaluated. The Purchaser will make
its own assessment of the cost of any deviation for the purpose of ensuring fair
comparison of Bids.
23.04 Any adjustments in price, which result from the above procedures, shall be added for the
purposes of comparative evaluation only to arrive at an "Evaluated Bid Price". Bid Prices
quoted by Bidders shall remain unaltered.
F. AWARD OF CONTRACT
24.0 CONTACTING THE PURCHASER
24.01 If any Bidder wishes to contact the Purchaser on any matter related to the Bid, from the

time of Bid opening to the time of contract award, the same shall be done in writing only.
24.02 Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Purchaser and/or in the Purchaser‘s decisions in
respect of Bid evaluation, Bid comparison or Contract Award, will result in the rejection of
the Bidder‘s Bid.
25.0 THE PURCHASER’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID AND TO REJECT ANY OR ALL
BIDS
The Purchaser reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid and to annul the Bidding
process and reject all Bids at anytime prior to award of Contract, without thereby
incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or any obligation to inform the
affected Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for the Purchaser‘s action.
26.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT
The Purchaser will award the Contract to the successful Bidder whose Bid has been
Determined to be the lowest-evaluated responsive Bid, provided further that the Bidder
has been determined to be qualified to satisfactorily perform the Contract. Purchaser
reserves the right to award order to other bidders in the tender, provided it is required for
timely execution of project & provided he agrees to come to the lowest rate.
Though the contract is for Turnkey in nature, the Purchaser intends to issue 2 (two)
separate Purchase/Works Orders viz.
a) Purchase Order for Supply Portion.
b) Work Order for Installation, Testing & Commissioning.
c) Work Order for Civil Works.
All individual contracts will contain cross fall breach clause (i.e., a breach of one will
constitute breach of the others)
27.0 THE PURCHASER’S RIGHT TO VARY QUANTITIES
The Purchaser reserves the right to vary the quantity i.e. increase or decrease the
numbers/quantities without any change in terms and conditions during the execution of
the Order.
28.0 LETTER OF INTENT/ NOTIFICATION OF AWARD
The letter of intent/ Notification of Award shall be issued to the successful Bidder whose
bids have been considered responsive, techno-commercially acceptable and evaluated to
be the lowest (L1). The successful Bidder shall be required to furnish a letter of
acceptance with in 7 days of issue of the letter of intent /Notification of Award by
Purchaser. The date of LOI/LOA shall be treated as Start date of Project.
29.0 CONTRACT PERFORMANCE BANK GAURANTEE
Within 15 days of the receipt of Notification of Award/ Letter of Intent/PO from the
Purchaser, the successful Bidder shall furnish Contract Performance Bank Guarantee
towards faithful performance of Contract for an amount of 10% (Ten percent) of the
Contract Price. The Performance Bond shall be valid upto completion period/handing
over, whichever is earlier plus 3 months claim period. Upon submission of the
performance security, the EMD shall be released. 03 (three) nos. separate CPBG’s shall
be submitted against Supply, ETC & Civil Contract.

30.0 CORRUPT OR FRADULENT PRACTICES
30.01 The Purchaser requires that the Bidders observe the highest standard of ethics during the
procurement and execution of the Project. In pursuance of this policy, the Purchaser:
(a ) Defines, for the purposes of this provision , the terms set forth below as follows:
(i) "Corrupt practice" means behavior on the part of officials in the public or private
sectors by which they improperly and unlawfully enrich themselves and/or those
close to them ,or induce others to do so, by misusing the position in which they are
placed, and it includes the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of
value to influence the action of any such official in the procurement process or in
contract execution; and
(ii) "Fraudulent practice" means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a
procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the
Purchaser, and includes collusive practice among Bidders (prior to or after Bid
submission ) designed to establish Bid prices at artificial non -competitive levels and
to deprive the Purchaser of the benefits of free and open competition .
(b) Will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for award
has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contract in question ;
(c) Will declare a firm ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be
awarded a contract if it at any time determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or
fraudulent practices in competing for, or in executing, a contract.
30.02 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in the Terms and Conditions
of Contract.
31.0 COMPLETION PERIOD (PROJECT)
31.01 10 months from the date of issuance of LOI/PO’s.

SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1.01 Bidders are requested to visit the site to understand the scope of work, site conditions
and requirements prior to Bidding. Hence, no price/time escalation shall be admissible on
these accounts.
1.02 As this is the Turnkey Project, so additional cost will not be paid to successful bidders
even if the size and quantity of cables or other minor material mentioned in BOM
changed as per the site requirements.
1.03 Statutory variation will be allowed for direct supplies only wherever breakup of Taxes & Duties are
available in Price Bid.
1.04 Bidder has to submit the technical parameters with details of Spares for each rating with
catalogue, reference codes etc.
1.05 Bidder has to submit the item wise price bifurcation in bid. Unprice copy must be
attached with the Part A. Reverse Auction will be carried out on Lump sum Basis/Total Landed
Cost i.e. Supply + ETC + Civil Works.
1.06 Successful bidder has to compliance the statutory compliance.
1.07 In case of any major deviation, deletion or addition which bidder may feel is relevant to
this project & for its safe operation and completion of works; Bidder may clearly highlight
and communicate the same to the purchaser with his bid.
1.08 Necessary Statutory Clearances & any other authority for energizing the substation shall
be in the scope of this tender. However, any statutory fees shall be borne by BYPL on
production of documentary evidence.
1.09 Problem Troubleshooting & Restoration In Warranty Period For A Particular Equipment:
a) Service Engineer Availability to Attend, Identify & Restore Defects (Minor) Of Grid
Equipments under Guarantee Period within 48 Working Hours (Exclusion of Material
Support Cases)
b) Spare Material Delivery For Restoration Of Grid Equipment (Major Defect) Under
Guarantee Period Within Two Weeks. Seller must keep Requisite Inventory of Critical
Switchgear Spares & Other Equipment’s Covered in Guarantee Period to Restore
Equipment within Two Weeks.
c) In Case Of Complete Replacement of Equipment, Complete Equipment to Be Replaced
Within a Period Of 4 Weeks.
1.10 PROJECT INFORMATION & COMPLETION
The contractor shall be fully responsible to complete the project in time. It is desired that
the total project should complete in 180 days from the date of LOI or purchase order
whichever is earlier. The detail completion schedule shall be prepared by vendor and
shall be submitted at the time of detailed engineering for approval. Vendor has to submit
the progress report fortnightly in the format attached with this tender/as asked by the
Purchaser.
1.11 PROJECT IMPLEMETATION & EXECUTION CONTROL
The bidders are requested to submit the following along with the bid, about the project
implementation & execution methodology.
a) Write up/overview of project Plan
b) Implementation Methodology
The successful Bidder shall be required to prepare detailed Network(s) and project
implementation plans & programmes and finalize the same with the Employer as per
requirement specified in Technical Specifications, which shall form a part of the Contract.

SECTION III
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS – SUPPLY
1.0 General Instructions
1.01 All the Bids shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with these instructions.
1.02 Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and delivery of its Bid, and the
Purchaser will in no case shall be responsible or liable for these costs.
1.03 The Bid should be submitted by the Bidder in whose name the bid document has been
issued and under no circumstances it shall be transferred /sold to the other party.
1.04 The Purchaser reserves the right to request for any additional information and also
reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Bidder, if in the opinion of the Purchaser,
the data in support of RFQ requirement is incomplete.
1.05 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms & conditions and
specifications in the Bid Documents. Failure to furnish all information required in the Bid
Documents or submission of a Bid not substantially responsive to the Bid Documents in
every respect may result in rejection of the Bid. However, the Purchaser’s decision in
regard to the responsiveness and rejection of bids shall be final and binding without any
obligation, financial or otherwise, on the Purchaser.
2.0 Definition of Terms
2.01 “Purchaser” shall mean BSES Yamuna Power Limited, on whose behalf this bid enquiry is
issued by its authorized representative / officers.
2.02 “Bidder” shall mean the firm who quotes against this bid enquiry issued by the
Purchaser. “Supplier” or “Supplier” shall mean the successful Bidder and/or Bidders
whose bid has been accepted by the Purchaser and on whom the “Letter of Acceptance”
is placed by the Purchaser and shall include his heirs, legal representatives, successors
and permitted assigns wherever the context so admits.
2.03 “Supply” shall mean the Scope of Contract as described.
2.04 “Specification” shall mean collectively all the terms and stipulations contained in those
portions of this bid document known as RFQ, Commercial Terms & Condition,
Instructions to Bidders, Technical Specifications and the Amendments, Revisions,
Deletions or Additions, as may be made by the Purchaser from time to time.
2.05 “Letter of Acceptance” shall mean the official notice issued by the Purchaser notifying the
Supplier that his proposal has been accepted and it shall include amendments thereto, if
any, issued by the Purchaser. The “Letter of Acceptance” issued by the Purchaser shall
be binding on the “Supplier” The date of Letter of Acceptance shall be taken as the
effective date of the commencement of contract.
2.06 “Month” shall mean the calendar month and “Day” shall mean the calendar day.

2.07 “Codes and Standards” shall mean all the applicable codes and standards as indicated in
the Specification.
2.08 “Offer Sheet” shall mean Bidder's firm offer submitted to BYPL in accordance with
the specification.
2.09 “Contract” shall mean the “Letter of Acceptance/Purchase Order” issued by the
Purchaser.
2.10 “Contract Price” shall mean the price referred to in the “Letter of Acceptance/Purchase
Order”.
2.11 “Contract Period” shall mean the period during which the “Contract” shall be executed
as agreed between the Supplier and the Purchaser in the Contract inclusive of extended
contract period for reason beyond the control of the Supplier and/or Purchaser due to
force majeure.
2.12 “Acceptance” shall mean and deemed to include one or more of the following as will
be stipulated in the specification:
a) The written acceptance of material by the inspector at suppliers works to ship
the materials.
b) Acceptance of material at Purchaser site stores after its receipt and due
inspection/ testing and release of material acceptance voucher.
c) Where the scope of the contract includes supply, acceptance shall mean issue of
necessary equipment / material takeover receipt after installation & commissioning
and final acceptance.
3.0 Contract Documents & Priority
3.01 Contract Documents: The terms and conditions of the contract shall consist solely of
these RFQ conditions and the offer sheet.
4.0 Scope of Supply -General
4.01 The “Scope of Supply” shall be on the basis of Bidder’s responsibility, completely covering
the obligations, responsibility and supplies provided in this Bid enquiry whether implicit or
explicit.
4.02 Bidder shall have to quote for the Bill of quantities as listed elsewhere.
4.03 All relevant drawings, data and instruction manuals.
5.0 Quality Assurance and Inspection
5.01 Immediately on award of contract, the bidder shall prepare detailed quality assurance
plan/test procedure identifying the various stages of manufacture, quality checks
performed at each stage, raw material inspection and the Customer hold points. The
document shall also furnish details of method of checking, inspection and acceptance
standards / values and get the approval of Purchaser before proceeding with
manufacturing. However, Purchaser shall have right to review the inspection reports,
quality checks and results of suppliers in house inspection department which are not
Customer hold points and the supplier shall comply with the remarks made by purchaser
or his representative on such reviews with regards to further testing, rectification or
rejection, etc.

5.02 Witness and Hold points are critical steps in manufacturing, inspection and testing
where the supplier is obliged to notify the Purchaser in advance so that it may be
witnessed by the Purchaser. Final inspection is a mandatory hold point. The supplier
to proceed with the work past a hold point only after clearance by purchaser or a
witness waiver letter from BYPL.
5.03 The performance of waiver of QA activity by Purchaser at any stage of
manufacturing does not relieve the supplier of any obligation to perform in accordance
with and meet all the requirements of the procurement documents and also all the
codes & reference documents mentioned in the procurement document nor shall it
preclude subsequent
rejection by the purchaser.
5.04 On completion of manufacturing the items can only be dispatched after receipt
of dispatch instructions issued by the Purchaser.
5.05 All in-house testing and inspection shall be done with out any extra cost. The in-
house inspection shall be carried out in presence of BSES/BSES authorized third party
inspection agency. Cost of Futile/abortive visit(s) shall be debited from the invoices
5.06 Purchaser reserves the right to send any material being supplied to any
recognized laboratory for testing, wherever necessary and the cost of testing shall be
borne by the Bidder. In case the material is found not in order with the technical
requirement / specification, the charges along with any other penalty which may be
levied is to be borne by the bidder. To avoid any complaint the supplier is advised to
send his representative to the stores to see that the material sent for testing is being
sealed in the presence of bidder’s representative.
6.0 Packing, Packing List & Marking
6.01 Packing: Supplier shall pack or shall cause to be packed all Commodities
in crates/boxes/drums/containers/cartons and otherwise in such a manner as shall be
reasonably suitable for shipment by road or rail to BYPL, Delhi/New Delhi stores/site
without undue risk of damage in transit.
6.02 Packing List: The contents of each package shall be itemized on a detailed list
showing the exact weight, extreme outside dimensions (length, width & weight) of each
container/box/drum/carton, Item SAP Code, PO No & date. One copy of the packing list
shall be enclosed in each package delivered.
7.01 Price basis for supply of materials

a) Bidder to quote their prices on Landed Cost Basis and separate price for each items.
FIRM prices for supply to BYPL Delhi/New Delhi stores inclusive of packing,
forwarding, loading at manufacturer’s premises, payment of GST, Freight, Custom
Duty, any other local charges. Octroi is presently not applicable in Delhi and however
if applicable shall be reimbursed at actual.
b) The above supply prices shall also include unloading at BYPL Delhi/New
Delhi stores/site.
8.0 Terms of payment and billing – SUPPLY
a) 5% of the total supply contract price shall be paid as initial interest free advance
on fulfillment against 1) acceptance of LOI/PO, 2) submission of BG of equivalent
amount valid upto completion period/handing over, whichever is earlier plus 3
months claim period and 3) Submission of Contract Performance Bank Guarantee
of 10% of the contract price valid upto completion period/handing over, whichever
is earlier plus 3 months claim period. In case of delay, the BG shall be extended
suitably. The advance shall be adjusted against R/Bills.

b) 10% of the total supply contract price shall be paid as interest free advance
against submission of BG of equivalent amount valid upto completion
period/handing over, whichever is earlier plus 3 months claim period, approval
of drawings under Category-1 of major drawings (shall be mutually agreed at the
time of award), Quality Plans, Pert Chart, Network Diagram, Field Quality Plan,
posting of project Manager and commencement of the first mile stone of the work
mutually agreed. In case of delay, the BG shall be extended suitably. The advance
shall be adjusted against R/Bills.
c) 60% prorata of supply value shall be payable against R/A bills for supply of
equipment and material within 30 days against receipt & acceptance of material at
site and submission of following documents against dispatch of each consignment
at our Vendor Support Cell (VSC) duly certified by BYPL Project-in-charge:
I. Consignee copy of LR.
II. Detailed invoice showing commodity description, qty, unit & total
price.
III. Original certificate issued by BYPL confirming receipt of material at
site & acceptance.
IV. Dispatch clearance & inspection report issued by the inspection
authority.
V. Packing List, Test Reports.
VI. Guarantee Certificate.
VII. Performance Bank Guarantee equivalent to 10% of Supply value of
the Contract valid upto Defect Liability period plus 3 months Claim
period.
d) 10% prorata on account of supply value of the actual executed value after
completion of installation/erection of equipment duly certified by BYPL Project-in-
charge.
e) Balance 15% on account of supply value of the actual executed value shall be paid
in 30 days after completion of successful acceptance testing, commissioning and
handing over of complete systems duly certified by BYPL Engineer-in-Charge
specified in the tender and on submission of performance Bank Guarantee of 10%
amount, in our format valid up to a defect liability period for 36 months from the
date of handing over of the scheme including submission of Electrical Inspector
Clearance Certificate, Compliance of final punch point, No Demand Certificate,
Letter of Indemnity by the supplier (The format of No Demand Certificate and
Letter of Indemnity are attached as Annexure) and after reconciliation &
adjustments of payments, if any towards quantities of materials issued from
purchaser’s stock and consumed by the contractor for expeditious completion of the
job.
8.02 Purchaser has the right to recover tax loss, interest and penalty suffered due to any non-
compliance of tax laws by the Vendor. In the event, Purchaser is not able to avail any tax
credit due to any short coming on the part of the Vendor (which otherwise should have
been available to Purchaser in the normal course), then the Vendor at his own cost and
effort will get the short coming rectified. If for any reason the same is not possible, then
the Vendor will make ‘good’ the loss suffered by Purchaser due to the tax credit it lost .
In such event, any amount paid to the Vendors shall be first attributable to the tax (GST)
charged in the invoice and the balance shall be considered towards the ‘value’ of supply
of goods/ services.
8.03 Purchaser shall deduct “Tax Deducted at Source” wherever applicable and at the rate
prescribed under the GST Laws or any other Indian law and remit the same to the
Government. Necessary TDS certificates as per law shall be issued by the purchase to the
vendor.

8.04 Any liability arising out of dispute on the tax rate, classification under HSN, calculation
and payment of tax to the Government will be to the Vendor’s account.
8.05 Where the supply of Goods are liable to GST under reverse charge mechanism, then the
supplier should clearly mention the category under which it has been registered and also
that “the liability of payment of GST is on the Recipient of Supply”.
9.0 Price Validity
9.01 All bids submitted shall remain valid, firm and subject to unconditional
acceptance by BYPL Delhi for 150 days from the due date of submission. For
awarded suppliers/contractors, the prices shall remain valid and firm till contract
completion.
10.0 Performance Guarantee
10.01 Bank guarantee shall be drawn in favour of BSES Yamuna Power Ltd as
applicable. The performance Bank guarantee shall be in the format as specified by
BYPL.
11.0 Forfeiture
11.01 Each Performance Bond established under Clause 10.0 shall contain a statement
that it shall be automatically and unconditionally forfeited without recourse and
payable against the presentation by BYPL of this Performance Bond, to the relevant
bank referred to above, together with a simple statement that supplier has failed
to comply with any term or condition set forth in the Contract.
11.02 Each Performance BG established under will be automatically and unconditionally

forfeited without recourse if BYPL in its sole discretion determines that supplier has
failed to comply with any term or condition set forth in the contract.
12.0 Release
12.01 All Performance Bonds will be released without interest within seven (7) days
from the last date up to which the Performance Bond has to be kept valid (as
defined in Clause10.0) except for the case set forth in Clause 21.0.
13.0 Warranty/Defects Liability Period
13.01 The bidder to guarantee the materials/items supplied against any defect of failure, which
arise due to faulty materials, workmanship or design for the entire defects liability period.
The Defect liability period shall be 36 months from the date of handing over of entire
Installation. If during the defects liability period any materials/items are found to be
defective, these shall be replaced or rectified by the bidder at his own cost within 30 days
from the date of receipt of intimation.
14.0 Return, Replacement or Substitution.
14.01 BYPL shall give Supplier notice of any defective Commodity promptly after becoming
aware thereof. BYPL may in its discretion elect to return defective Commodities to
Supplier for replacement, free of charge to BYPL, or may reject such Commodities and

purchase the same or similar Commodities from any third party. In the latter case BYPL
shall furnish proof to Supplier of the cost of such substitute purchase. In either case, all
costs of any replacement, substitution, shipping, labour and other related expenses
incurred in connection with the return and replacement or for the substitute purchase of
a Commodity hereunder should be for the account of Supplier. BYPL may set off such
costs against any amounts payable by BYPL to Supplier. Supplier shall reimburse BYPL
for the amount, if any, by which the price of a substitute Commodity exceeds the price
for such Commodity as quoted in the Bid.
15.0 Effective Date of Commencement of Contract:
15.01 The date of the issuance of the Letter of Acceptance/Purchase Order shall be treated as
the effective date of the commencement of Contract.
16.0 Time – The Essence of Contract
16.01 The time and the date of completion of the “Supply” as stipulated in the Letter of
Acceptance / Purchase order issued to the Supplier shall be deemed to be the essence of
the “Contract”. The Supply has to be completed not later than the aforesaid Schedule
and date of completion of supply.
17.0 The Laws and Jurisdiction of Contract:
17.01 The laws applicable to this Contract shall be the Laws in force in India.
17.02 All disputes arising in connection with the present Contract shall be settled amicably by
mutual consultation failing which shall be finally settled as per the rules of Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996 at the discretion of Purchaser. The venue of arbitration shall be at
Delhi in India.
18.0 Events of Default
18.01 Events of Default. Each of the following events or occurrences shall constitute an event
of default ("Event of Default") under the Contract:
(a) Supplier fails or refuses to pay any amounts due under the Contract;
(b) Supplier fails or refuses to deliver Commodities conforming to this

RFQ/specifications, or fails to deliver Commodities within the period specified in P.O.
or any extension thereof
(c) Supplier becomes insolvent or unable to pay its debts when due, or commits any act
of bankruptcy, such as filing any petition in any bankruptcy, winding-up or
reorganization proceeding, or acknowledges in writing its insolvency or inability to
pay its debts; or the Supplier's creditors file any petition relating to bankruptcy of
Supplier;
(d) Supplier otherwise fails or refuses to perform or observe any term or condition of the
Contract and such failure is not remediable or, if remediable, continues for a period
of 30 days after receipt by the Supplier of notice of such failure from BYPL.

19.0 Consequences of Default.
(a) If an Event of Default shall occur and be continuing, BYPL may forthwith terminate
the Contract by written notice.
(b) In the event of an Event of Default, BYPL may, without prejudice to any other right
granted to it by law, or the Contract, take any or all of the following actions;
(i) present for payment to the relevant bank the Performance Bond;
(ii) Purchase the same or similar Commodities from any third party; and/or
(iii) Recover any losses and/or additional expenses BYPL may incur as a result of
Supplier's default.
20.0 Liquidated Damages
20.01 If supply of items / equipments is delayed beyond the supply schedule as stipulated in
purchase order then the Supplier shall be liable to pay to the Purchaser as penalty for
delay, a sum of 1% (one percent) of the basic (ex-works) price of the contract for every
week delay or part thereof delay until the actual date of completion.
20.02 The total amount for delay under the contract will be subject to a maximum of Ten
percent (10%) of the basic (ex-works) price.
20.03 The Purchaser may, without prejudice to any method of recovery, deduct the amount for
such damages from any amount due or which may become due to the Supplier or from
the Performance Bond or file a claim against the supplier.
21.0 Statutory variation in Taxes and Duties
21.1 The total order value shall be adjusted on account of any variations in Statutory Levies
imposed by Competent Authorities by way of fresh notification(s) within the stipulated
delivery period only. However, in case of reduction in taxes, duties and levies, the
benefits of the same shall be passed on to BUYER.
21.2 No other Taxes, Duties & Levies other than those specified above will be payable by
BUYER except in case of new Levies, Taxes & Duties imposed by the Competent
Authorities by way of fresh notification(s) subsequent to the issue of PURCHASE ORDER
but within the stipulated delivery period.
21.3 Notwithstanding what is stated above, changes in Taxes, Duties & Levies shall apply only
to that portion of PURCHASE ORDER not executed on the date of notification by
Competent Authority. Further, changes in Taxes, Duties & Levies after due date of
Delivery shall not affect PURCHASE ORDER Terms and Value.
21.4 PURCHASE ORDER value shall not be subject to any variation on account of variation in
Exchange rate(s).
21.5 Taxes & Duties on raw materials & bought out components are included in Order Value
and are not subject to any escalation or variation for any reason whatsoever.

21.6 Taxes & Duties on raw materials & bought out components procured indigenously are
included in Order Value and are not subject to any escalation or variation for any reason
whatsoever.
22.0 Force Majeure
22.01 General
An ”Event of Force Majeure" shall mean any event or circumstance not within
the reasonable control directly or indirectly, of the Party affected, but only if and to the
extent that:
(i) Such event or circumstance materially and adversely affects the ability of the
affected Party to perform its obligations under this Contract, and the affected Party
has taken all reasonable precautions, due care and reasonable alternative measures
in order to prevent or avoid the effect of such event on the affected party's ability to
perform its
obligations under this Contract and to mitigate the consequences thereof.
(ii) For the avoidance of doubt, if such event or circumstance would not have materially
and adversely affected the performance of the affected party had such affected party
followed good industry practice, such event or circumstance shall not constitute force
majeure.
(iii) Such event is not the direct or indirect result of the failure of such Party to perform
any of its obligations under this Contract.
(iv) Such Party has given the other Party prompt notice describing such events, the effect
thereof and the actions being taken in order to comply with above clause.
22.02 Specific Events of Force Majeure subject to the provisions of above clause, Events of
Force Majeure shall include only the following to the extent that they or their
consequences satisfy the above requirements :
(i) The following events and circumstances:
a) Effect of any natural element or other acts of God, including but not limited to storm,
flood, earthquake, lightning, cyclone, landslides or other natural disasters.
b) Explosions or fires
(ii) War declared by the Government of India, provided that the ports at Mumbai are
declared as a war zone.
(iii) Dangers of navigation, perils of the sea.
22.03 Notice of Events of Force Majeure If a force majeure event prevents a party from
performing any obligations under the Contract in part or in full, that party shall:
i) Immediately notify the other party in writing of the force majeure events
within 7(seven) working days of the occurrence of the force majeure event
ii) Be entitled to suspend performance of the obligation under the Contract which is
affected by force majeure event for the duration of the force majeure event.
iii) Use all reasonable efforts to resume full performance of the obligation as soon as
practicable
iv) Keep the other party informed of all such efforts to resume full performance of the
obligation on a regular basis.
v) Provide prompt notice of the resumption of full performance or obligation to the
other party.
22.04 Mitigation of Events of Force Majeure Each Party shall:

(i) Make all reasonable efforts to prevent and reduce to a minimum and mitigate the
effect of any delay occasioned by an Event of Force Majeure including recourse
to alternate methods of satisfying its obligations under the Contract;
(ii) Use its best efforts to ensure resumption of normal performance after the
termination of any Event of Force Majeure and shall perform its obligations to
the maximum extent practicable as agreed between the Parties; and
(iii) Keep the other Party informed at regular intervals of the circumstances
concerning the event of Force Majeure, with best estimates as to its likely
continuation and what measures or contingency planning it is taking to mitigate
and or terminate the Event of Force Majeure.
22.05 Burden of Proof In the event that the Parties are unable in good faith to agree that
a Force Majeure event has occurred to an affected party, the parties shall resolve their
dispute in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. The burden of proof as to
whether or not a force majeure event has occurred shall be upon the party claiming
that the force majeure event has occurred and that it is the affected party.
22.06 Termination for Certain Events of Force Majeure. If any obligation of any Party under the
Contract is or is reasonably expected to be delayed or prevented by a Force Majeure
event for a continuous period of more than 3 months, the Parties shall promptly
discuss in good faith how to proceed with a view to reaching a solution on mutually
agreed basis. If a solution on mutually agreed basis cannot be arrived at within a
period of 30 days after the expiry of the period of three months, the Contract shall
be terminated after the said period of 30 days and neither Party shall be liable to the
other for any consequences arising on account of such termination.
22.07 The Purchaser may terminate the contract after giving 15 (Fifteen) days notice if any
of following occurs:
a) Contractor fails to complete execution of works within the approved schedule of
works, terms and conditions.
b) In case the contractor commits any Act of Insolvency, or adjudged insolvent.
c) Has abandoned the contract.
d) Has failed to commence work or has suspended the progress of works.
e) Has failed to proceed the works with due diligence and failed to make such due
progress.
22.08 Limitation of Force Majeure event. The Supplier shall not be relieved of any obligation
under the Contract solely because cost of performance is increased, whether as a
consequence of adverse economic consequences or otherwise.
22.09 Extension of Contract Period due to Force Majeure event The Contract period may be
extended by mutual agreement of Parties by way of an adjustment on account of
any period during which an obligation of either Party is suspended due to a Force
Majeure event.
22.10 Effect of Events of Force Majeure. Except as otherwise provided herein or may further be
agreed between the Parties, either Party shall be excused from performance and
neither Party shall be construed to be in default in respect of any obligations
hereunder, for so long as failure to perform such obligations shall be due to and
event of Force Majeure."

23.0 Transfer and Sub-Letting
23.01 The Supplier shall not sublet, transfer, assign or otherwise part with the Contract or any
part thereof, either directly or indirectly, without prior written permission of the
Purchaser.
24.0 Recoveries
24.01 When ever under this contract any money is recoverable from and payable by the bidder,
the purchaser shall be entitled to recover such sum by appropriating in part or in whole
by detecting any sum due to which any time thereafter may become due from the
supplier in this or any other contract. Should the sum be not sufficient to cover the full
amount recoverable the bidder shall pay to the purchaser on demand the remaining
balance.
25.0 Waiver
25.01 Failure to enforce any condition herein contained shall not operate as a waiver of the
condition itself or any subsequent breach thereof.
26.0 Indemnification
26.01 Notwithstanding contrary to anything contained in this RFQ, Supplier shall at his costs
and risks make good any loss or damage to the property of the Purchaser and/or the
other Supplier engaged by the Purchaser and/or the employees of the Purchaser and/or
employees of the other Supplier engaged by the Purchaser whatsoever arising out of the
negligence of the Supplier while performing the obligations under this contract.
27.01 DOCUMENTATION
The Bidder shall procure all equipment from BYPL approved sources as per attached
specifications. The Bidder’s shall submit 5 copies of Material/Type Test Certificates, O&M
Manuals, and Approved & As-built drawings, related to various equipment. The Bidder’s
shall ensure for the strict compliance to the specifications and Field Quality Procedures
issued by BYPL Engineer in-charge.
27.0 Limitation of Liability
Except as provided otherwise in the Contract and except for willful misconduct or gross
negligence, neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for loss of use of any Works,
loss of profit, loss of any contract or any other indirect or consequential loss or damage
which may be suffered by the other Party in connection with the Contract. The total
liability of the Contractor to the Purchaser under the Contract shall not exceed the
Contract Value. Except that this Clause shall not limit the liability of the Contractor:
(a) Under any other provisions of the Contract which expressly impose a greater
liability,
(b) In cases of fraud, willful misconduct or illegal or unlawful acts, or
(c) In cases of acts or omissions of the Contractor which are contrary to the most
elementary rules of diligence which a conscientious Contractor would have followed in
similar circumstances.
28.0 Liability of Contractors
28.1 Subject to the due discharge of its obligations under the Contract and except in case of
gross negligence or willful misconduct on the part of the Contractor or on the part of any

person acting on behalf of the Contractor, with respect to any loss or damage caused by
the Contractor to the Purchaser’s property or the Site, the Contractor shall not be liable to
the Purchaser for the following:
(a) For any indirect or consequential loss or damage; and
(b) For any direct loss or damage that exceeds:
(i) The total payments made and expected to be made to the Contractor under the
Contract including reimbursements, if any; or
(ii) The insurance claim proceeds which the Contractor may be entitled to receive from
any insurance purchased by the Contractor to cover such a liability, whichever is
higher.
28.2 This limitation of liability shall not affect the Contractor’s liability, if any, for damage to any
third party, caused by the Contractor or any Person or firm acting on behalf of the
Contractor in executing the Works.
28.3 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor shall not be liable for
any gross negligence or willful misconduct on the part of the Purchaser or any of its
affiliates, any vendor, or any party, other than Contractor and/or, its directors, officers,
agents or representatives or its affiliates, or Subcontractor, or the vendor or any third party
engaged by it.
28.4 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, including but not limited to approval
by the Purchaser of any drawings, documents, vendor list, supply of information or data or
the participation of the Purchaser in any meeting and/or discussion or otherwise, shall not
absolve the Contractor from any of its liabilities or responsibilities arising in relation to or
under the Contract.
29.0 Intellectual Property Rights and Royalties
29.1 The Contractor shall indemnify the Purchaser and the Purchaser’s Representative from and
against all claims and proceedings on account of infringement (or alleged infringement) of
any patent rights, registered designs, copyright, design, trademark, trade name, know-how
or other intellectual property rights (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Intellectual
Property Rights") in respect of the Works, Contractor's Equipment, machines, Works
method, Plant, Materials, or anything whatsoever required for the execution of the Works
and from and against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and
expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto. In the event of infringement
of any Intellectual Property Rights of any third party as a result of the execution of the
Works (or any part thereof) by the Contractor, the Contractor shall rectify, modify or
replace, at its own cost, the Works, Plant or Materials or anything whatsoever required for
the Works so that infringement ceases to exist or, in the alternative, the Contractor shall
procure necessary rights/ licenses from the affected third party so that there is no
infringement of Intellectual Property Rights.
29.2 The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim made against the Purchaser. The
Contractor shall, at its cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such claim, and any
litigation or arbitration that may arise from it. The Purchaser or the Purchaser’s
Representative shall not make any admission which might be prejudicial to the Contractor,
unless the Contractor has failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations, litigation or
arbitration within a reasonable time after having been so requested. In the event of
Contractor failing to act at the Purchaser’s Representative’s notice, the Purchaser shall be
at full liberty to deduct any such amount of pending claim from any amount due to the
Contractor under the Contract or any other contract and the balance portion of claim shall
be treated as debt due from the Contractor.

29.3 All Intellectual Property Rights in respect of any Plant, Materials, Drawings and Designs,
plans, documents, specifications, data, materials, know how, charts, information, etc.,
provided to the Contractor by the Purchaser pursuant to this Contract for the execution of
the Works, belongs to and shall continue to belong to the Purchaser and the Contractor
shall not have any rights in the same other than the limited right for its use for the purpose
of execution of the Works.
29.4 Intellectual Property Rights in respect of any Plant, Materials, Drawings and Designs, plans,
calculations, drawings, documents, know-how and information relating to the Works which
are proprietary to the Contractor and/ or its third party licensors ("Contractor's IPR")
shall continue to vest with the Contractor and/ or its third party licensors and the
Contractor shall grant and/ or procure from its third party licensors, at its own cost, a
worldwide, perpetual, royalty free, non-exclusive license (along with the right to sub-
license) to use and reproduce such Contractor's IPR for the use, operation, maintenance
and repair of the Works.
29.5 If any patent, trademark, trade name, registered design or software is developed by the
Contractor or its Subcontractor specifically for the execution of the Works, then all
Intellectual Property Rights in respect of such design, trademark, trade name or software
shall be the absolute property of the Purchaser and shall not be utilized or retained by the
Contractor (or its Subcontractors) for any purpose other than with the prior written consent
of the Purchaser.
29.6 If the Contractor uses proprietary software (whether customized or off the shelf) for the
purpose of storing or utilizing records in relation to the Works, the Contractor shall obtain
at its own expense, the grant of a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual licence or sublicence
(including the right to sublicense) to use such software, in favour of the Purchaser provided
that the use of such software under the licence or the sublicense may be restricted to use
any such software only for the design, construction, reconstruction, manufacture,
installation, completion, reinstatement, extension, repair and operation of the Works or any
part thereof.
29.7 If any software is used by the Contractor for the execution of the Works over which the
Contractor or a third party holds pre-existing title or other rights, the Contractor shall
obtain for the Purchaser, a worldwide, royalty free, perpetual license for the right to use
and apply that software (together with any modifications, improvements and developments
thereof).
30.01 Commissioning Spares
30.01 Commissioning Spares shall be deemed to be included in the quoted prices.
31.0 Tax Indemnity Clause:

31.1 Vendor (along with its affiliates in India or overseas including any agent/ third party
contractor or any other person appointed by such affiliates for the purpose of this
agreement) agrees that it will be solely responsible for performing all compliances and
making payments of all taxes (direct tax or indirect tax including but not limited to
income-tax, transfer pricing, value added tax, SGST, CGST, IGST, UTGST, GST
Compensation Cess custom duty, excise duty, Research and Development Cess, etc.),
cesses, interest, penalties or any other tax/ duty/ amount/ charge/ liability arising either
out of laws/ regulations applicable in India and overseas or because of a demand/
recovery initiated by any revenue authority under laws/ regulations applicable in India or
overseas.
31.2 In case any tax liability (including but not limited to income-tax, transfer pricing, value
added tax, SGST, CGST, IGST, UTGST, GST Compensation Cess custom duty, excise
duty, Research and Development Cess, etc.), cesses, interest, penalties or any other tax/

duty/ amount/ charge/ liability becomes payable by Purchaser due to failure of the
Vendor, or any of its affiliates in India or overseas including any agent/ third party
contractor or any other person appointed by such affiliates for the purpose of this
agreement, to comply with the relevant laws/ regulations applicable in India or overseas,
Vendor undertakes to indemnify Purchaser for an amount equal to amount payable by
Purchaser.
31.3 Further, Vendor undertakes to keep Purchaser indemnified at all times against and from
all other actions, proceedings, claims, loss, damage, costs and expenses which may be
brought against Purchaser or suffered or incurred by Purchaser and which shall have
arisen either directly or indirectly out of or in connection with failure of The Vendor, or
any of its affiliates in India or overseas including any agent/ third party contractor or any
other person appointed by such affiliates for the purpose of this agreement, to comply
with relevant obligations/ compliance under any law/ regulations applicable in India and
overseas.
31.4 The parties agree to follow the following process in case any communication of demand,
arising out non-compliance by Vendor (along with its affiliates in India or overseas
including any agent/ third party contractor or any other person appointed by such
affiliates for the purpose of this agreement), is received by Purchaser :
31.4.1 On Purchaser receiving any communication from a competent authority
demanding tax liability (including but not limited to income-tax, transfer pricing, value
added tax, SGST, CGST, IGST, UTGST, GST Compensation Cess custom duty, excise
duty, Research and Development Cess, etc.), cesses, interest, penalties or any other tax/
duty/ amount/ charge/ liability, Purchaser shall, within 5 common working days from the
date of receipt of such communication (save where the period to respond to the relevant
authority is less than five days, in which case, as soon as reasonably possible) inform
Vendor in writing of such communication.
31.4.2 Pursuant to receiving communication from Purchaser, Vendor shall suggest to
accept the communication and pay the demand amount to the competent authority. In
such an event, Vendor shall reimburse such amount paid to Purchaser within 5 working
days from the date of payment by Purchaser to the competent authority.
31.4.3 If Vendor advises in writing and Purchaser agrees to dispute the demand, then
Purchaser shall dispute the matter with competent authority as per due process
prescribed under the regulations and Purchaser shall not pay the Tax Demand. In such
scenario, cost of litigation including but not limited to Counsel cost, filing fees, other
related charges, should be reimbursed by Vendor to Purchaser. Additionally, If any
coercive steps of recovery are initiated by the department, then Purchaser would pay
such amount (including by way of adjustment of refunds due to it) and the same would
be reimbursed by Vendor within 5 working days from date of such recovery from
Purchaser. Purchaser will take all necessary steps to avoid such recovery measures.
31.4.4 On determination of the demand through an Order issued by a Tribunal or any
other similar Authority, by whatever name called, under any law applicable in India or
overseas, if the demand or any part thereof becomes payable and is paid by Purchaser,
then Vendor undertakes to reimburse such amount to Purchaser within 10 days from the
date of payment. Alternatively, if on determination of the demand through an Order, no
amount is payable by Purchaser then any refund arising to Purchaser due to such an
Order shall be passed on to Vendor within 10 days from the date of receipt of refund.
32.0 TRANSIT INSURANCE:
32.1 Transit Insurance shall be arranged by the Bidder.
32.2 DAMAGE / LOSS OF CARGO IN TRANSIT: Vendor shall be solely responsible for
coordinating with the concerned insurance company for procuring insurance for material
and/or Goods, processing claim lodgment and settlement. Notwithstanding the insurance

cover, in case of loss / damage to material and/or Goods, in any manner and for any
cause whatsoever, Vendor shall cause the damaged cargo to be replaced and delivered
to the Purchaser with new material and/or Goods within 30 days of such loss / damage.
The Vendor shall be solely responsible for all expenses in relation to the replacement and
delivery in such circumstances.
33.0 Acceptance:
33.1 Vendor confirms to have gone through the Policy of BYPL on legal and ethical code
required to be followed by vendors encapsulated in the “Vendor Code of Conduct”
displayed on the official website of BYPL (www.bsesdelhi.com) also, which shall be
treated as a part of the contract/PO/WO.
Vendor undertakes that he shall adhere to the Vendor code of Conduct and also agrees
that any violation of the Vendor Code of Conduct shall be treated as breach of the
contract/PO/WO.
In event of any such breach, irrespective of whether it causes any loss/damage,
Purchaser (BYPL) shall have the right to recover loss/damage from Vendor.
The Contractor/Vendor herby indemnifies and agrees to keep indemnified the Purchaser
(BYPL) against any claim/litigation arising out of any violation of Vendor Code of Conduct
by the Contractor/Vendor or its officers, agents & representatives etc.
33.2 Acceptance of the CONTRACT implies and includes acceptance of all terms and
conditions enumerated in the CONTRACT in the technical specification and drawings
made available to Contractor consisting of general conditions, detailed scope of work,
detailed technical specification, detailed equipment drawing and complete scope of work.
33.3 Contractor and Company contractual obligation are strictly limited to the terms set out in
the CONTRACT. No amendments to the concluded CONTRACT shall be binding unless
agreed to in writing for such amendment by both the parties

SECTION IV
PRICE FORMAT – SUPPLY (A) (Items shown are indicative, Kindly refer BOQ, attached
as Annexure)
UNIT GST &

CESS AS
APPLICABLE
UNIT TOTAL
(CGST &
DESCRIPTION HSN UNIT UNIT LANDED LANDED
QTY UoM SGST/UTGST
OF GOODS CODE RATE FREIGHT COST COST
or IGST)
(₹) (₹)
% AMT
Items as per BOQ i.e. shall be utilized to furnish price break-up.

GRAND TOTAL LANDED COST
In words ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
NOTE:
1) Bidder shall include & indicate any others taxes under the applicable law(s) for supply
and services to be performed in the purchaser’s country.
2) The bidder shall, at its own, handle all imported equipment’s and handle all formalities
for custom clearances, port charges, etc if any.
3) Item-wise breakup of Recommended Spares for 5 years to be indicated as below.
4) All Tools & Tackles, Consumables and Commissioning Spares required to complete the
work shall be included in the quoted rates.
5) Any other items not mentioned above but are required for successful completion of the
substation shall be deemed to be included in the above quoted rates.

SECTION V
SUMMARY COMMERCIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS – SUPPLY
Sl ITEM BIDDER’S
No DESCRIPTION AS PER BYPL CONFIRMATION
1 Validity 150 days from the due date of submission
a) Firm, FOR Delhi store basis. Prices shall be

inclusive of all taxes & duties,
2 Price basis freight upto Delhi stores.
b) Unloading at site stores - in vendor's scope
c) Transit insurance in Bidders scope
3 Payment terms As per Clause 8.0 of Part I, Page 18
4 Completion time 10 months from date of LOI/PO
5 Defect Liability 36 months from the date of Handing over of

period entire Installation.
Liquidated 1% of basic price for every week delay subject to

6 damages maximum of 10% of basic PO value
Contract
10% (Ten percent) of the Contract Price valid
7 Performance
upto completion period/handing over
Bank Guarantee
Performance 10% (Ten percent) of the Contract Price valid

8 Bank upto Defect Liability Period plus 3 months towards
Guarantee claim period
Bidder should furnish the below details for future communication:-
General Information
Full Name of the Company:
Postal Address:
GSTIN:
For Technical Clarification(s)

Name:
Designation:
E-Mail:
Mobile No.:
Telephone No.:
For Commercial Clarification(s)/ Reverse Auction

Name:
Designation:
E-Mail:
Mobile No.:
Telephone No.:

SECTION VI
BID FORM
To
Head of Department
Contracts & Material Deptt.
Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma,
Delhi 110032
Sir,
1 We understand that BYPL is desirous of procuring…………………………………….. for it‘s

licensed distribution network area in Delhi
2 Having examined the Bidding Documents for the above named works, we the
undersigned, offer to deliver the goods in full conformity with the Terms and Conditions and
technical specifications for the sum indicated in Price Bid or such other sums as may be
determined in accordance with the terms and conditions of the contract .The amounts are in
accordance with the Price Schedules attached herewith and are made part of this bid.
3 If our Bid is accepted, we under take to deliver the entire goods as) as per delivery
schedule mentioned in Section IV from the date of award of purchase order/letter of intent.
4 If our Bid is accepted, we will furnish a performance bank guarantee for an amount of
10% (Ten)percent of the total contract value for due performance of the Contract in accordance
with the Terms and Conditions.
5 We agree to abide by this Bid for a period of 150 days from the due date of bid
submission and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the
expiration of that period.
6 We declare that we have studied the provision of Indian Laws for supply of
equipments/materials and the prices have been quoted accordingly.
7 Unless and until Letter of Intent is issued, this Bid, together with your written acceptance
there of, shall constitute a binding contract between us.
8 We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest, or any bid you may receive.
9 There is provision for Resolution of Disputes under this Contract, in accordance with the
Laws and Jurisdiction of Contract.
Dated this............................... day of................................................. 20........
Signature.............................................. In the capacity of ………………………………
..................................................................duly authorized to sign for and on behalf of
(IN BLOCK CAPITALS) ...............................................................................
SECTION VII

ACCEPTANCE FORM FOR PARTICIPATION IN REVERSE AUCTION EVENT
(To be signed and stamped by the bidder)
BSES Yamuna Power Ltd (hereinafter referred to as “BYPL”) intends to use the reverse auction
through SAP-SRM tool as an integral part of the entire tendering process. All the bidders who are
found as techno commercial qualified based on the tender requirements shall be eligible to
participate in the reverse auction event.
The following terms and conditions are deemed as accepted by the bidder on participation in the
bid event:
1. BYPL shall provide the user id and password to the authorized representative of the
bidder. (Authorization letter in lieu of the same be submitted along with the signed and
stamped acceptance form)
2. BYPL will make every effort to make the bid process transparent. However, the award
decision by BYPL would be final and binding on the bidder.
3. The bidder agrees to non-disclosure of trade information regarding the purchase, identity
of BYPL, bid process, bid technology, bid documentation, bid details, and etc.
4. The bidder is advised to understand the auto bid process to safeguard themselves
against any possibility of non-participation in the auction event.
5. In case of bidding through internet medium, bidders are further advised to ensure
availability of the entire infrastructure as required at their end to participate in the
auction event. Inability to bid due to telephone line glitch, internet response issues,
software or hardware hangs; power failure or any other reason shall not be the
responsibility of BYPL.
6. In case of intranet medium, BYPL shall provide the infrastructure to bidders, further,
BYPL has sole discretion to extend or restart the auction event in case of any glitches in
infrastructure observed which has restricted the bidders to submit the bids to ensure fair
& transparent competitive bidding. In case of an auction event is restarted, the best bid
as already available in the system shall become the start price for the new auction.
7. In case the bidder fails to participate in the auction event due any reason whatsoever, it
shall be presumed that the bidder has no further discounts to offer and the initial bid as
submitted by the bidder as a part of the tender shall be considered as the bidder’s final
no regret offer. Any offline price bids received from a bidder in lieu of non-participation in
the auction event shall be out rightly rejected by BYPL.
8. The bidder shall be prepared with competitive price quotes on the day of the reverse
auction event.
9. The prices as quoted by the bidder during the auction event shall be inclusive of all the
applicable taxes, duties and levies and shall be FOR Landed Cost basis at BYPL site.
10. The prices submitted by a bidder during the auction event shall be binding on the bidder.
11. No requests for time extension of the auction event shall be considered by BYPL.
12. The original price bids of the bidders shall be reduced on pro-rata basis against each line
item based on the final all inclusive prices offered during conclusion of the auction event
for arriving at contract amount.
Signature & seal of the Bidder

SECTION VIII
FORMAT FOR EMD BANK GUARANTEE
(To be issued in a Non Judicial Stamp Paper of Rs.50/-purchased in the name of the bank)
Whereas [name of the Bidder] (herein after called the “Bidder“) has submitted its bid dated[date
of submission of bid] for the supply of [name and/or description of the goods] (here after called
the “Bid”).
KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that WE [name of bank] at [Branch Name and
address],having our registered office at[address of the registered office of the bank](herein after
called the “Bank“),are bound unto BSES Yamuna Power Ltd., with it‘s Corporate Office at
Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma, Delhi -110032, (herein after called —the “Purchaser“)in the
sum of Rs……………………… (Rupees………………………………………………………. only) for which
payment well and truly to be made to the said Purchaser, the Bank binds itself, its successors,
and assigns by these presents.
Sealed with the Common Seal of the said Bank this_____ day of________ 20____.
TH E CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
1 If the Bidder withdraws its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on
the Bid Form ; or
2. If the Bidder, having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Purchaser during the
period of bid validity:
(a) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Form ,if required; or
(b) fails or refuses to furnish the performance security, In accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders/ Terms and Conditions;
We undertake to pay to the Purchaser up to the above amount upon receipt of its first written
demand, without the Purchaser having to substantiate its demand, provided that is its demand
the purchaser will note that amount claimed by it is due to it, owing to the occurrence of one or
both of the two condition(s), specifying the occurred condition or condition(s).
This guarantee will remain in force up to and including One Fifty (150) days after the due date of
submission bid, and any demand in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the
above date.
(Stamp & signature of the bank)
Signature of the witness

LITIGATION HISTORY
Details of Cause of
Name of Disputed
Year contract & Litigation/arbitration
client amount
date and dispute
CURRENT CONTRACT COMMITMENTS/ WORK IN PROGRESS
Details of Value of Estimated

Name of
Year contract & outstanding completion
client
date work date
FINANCIAL DATA
(Duly Certified by Chartered Accountant)
Actual in previous 5 financial years
FY 15-16 FY 14-15 FY 13-14 FY 12-13 FY 11-12
Total assets
Current assets
Total Liability
Current Liability
Profit before taxes
Profit after taxes

CHECK LIST
Sr No Description Compliance
1 INDEX YES/NO
2 COVERING LETTER YES/NO
3 BID FORM (UNPRICED) DULY SIGNED YES/NO
4 BILL OF MATERIAL (UNPRICED) YES/NO
5 DOCUMENTS IN SUPPORT OF QUALIFICATION CRITERIA YES/NO
6 TECHNICAL BID YES/NO
7 ACCEPTANCE TO COMMERCIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS YES/NO
8 FINANCIAL BID (IN SEALED ENVELOPE) YES/NO
9 EMD IN PRESCRIBED FORMAT YES/NO
DEMAND DRAFT OF RS 1000/- DRAWN IN FAVOUR OF

10 YES/NO
BSES YAMUNA POWER LTD
POWER OF ATTORNEY/AUTHORISATION LETTER FOR

11 YES/NO
SIGNING THE BID
12 FINANCIAL DATA IN TABULAR FORMAT YES/NO
13 LIST OF CURRENT COMMITMENTS/WORK IN PROGRESS YES/NO
14 BANK SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE YES/NO
15 NO LITIGATION CERTIFICATE YES/NO

SECTION IX
GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS - SERVICES
1. DEFINITIONS and INTERPRETATION
The following terms shall have the following meanings:
1.1 “Company/Employer”: means BSES Yamuna Power Ltd, a company incorporated

under the Companies Act 1956 and having its office at BSES Yamuna Power Limited having its
office at Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma, Delhi -110032, which expression shall include its
authorized representatives, agents, successors and assigns.
1.2 “Contractor”: shall mean the successful Tenderer / vendor to whom the contract
has been awarded
1.3 “Rate”: The unit rates for the work to be carried out at site shall be as per finalized unit
rates through tender. The finalized rates shall be firm for the entire duration of work to be
carried out by the Contractor under the work order and are not subject to escalation for any
reason whatsoever.
1.4. CONTRACT SPECIFICATION: The terms "CONTRACT Specification" shall mean the Technical
specification of the work as agreed by you and description of work as detailed in Annexure-I
enclosed herewith and all such particulars mentioned directly/referred to or implied as such in the
contract.
1.5 SITE: The terms "Site" shall mean the working location in BYPL area. Under this tender,
working location shall be as mentioned elsewhere.
1.6 ENGINEER IN CHARGE: "Engineer In-charge" means the Company's authorized

representative for the purpose of carrying out the work.
1.7 PRIORITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:

The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one
another, but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies, the same shall be explained and adjusted by
the Employer, who shall thereupon issue to the Contractor, instructions thereon. In such event,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the priority of the documents forming the Contract
shall be as follows:
1.1. SAP Work Order duly acknowledged by Contractor
1.2. Price Schedule
1.3. Special Condition of Contract
1.4. Technical specification and Tender Drawing
1.5. Erection Conditions of Contract
1.6. General Conditions to the Contract
2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND LOCAL CONDITIONS:
The contractor is deemed to have visited the site of the work and ascertained therefore all site
conditions and information pertaining to his work. The company shall not accept any claim
whatsoever arising out of the difficult site/terrain/local conditions, if any.
3. LANGUAGE AND MEASUREMENT:

The CONTRACT issued to the contractor by the company and all correspondence and documents
relating to the CONTRACT placed on the Contractor shall be written in English language.
Metric System shall be followed for all dimension, units etc.
4. SCOPE OF WORK:
The scope of work shall be as per SOW a t Site, New Delhi”. Schedule of work shall be as
mentioned in the Bill of quantity attached herewith.
Free Issue Material as required for the completion of work under the scope of the Contract shall
be issued free of cost by the Employer / Owner from its stores. Transportation from store to the
work area shall be in scope of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall requisition the free issue materials in the prescribed format(s) to the
Employer and Employer shall arrange to issue the same on Free of Cost basis.
The Contractor shall take proper care of the materials supplied to the Contractor and protect the
same from weathering and any other damages. Any material rendered unserviceable or damaged
while in Contractor's custody shall be replaced by the Contractor at his cost as determined by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall have to furnish an Indemnity Bond (Annexure attached) for the materials
supplied free of cost by the Employer / Owner. Further, he shall be responsible for the safe
custody of materials till the materials are utilized, fabricated, erected and accounted for in all
respect in the Project.
After completion of work of above grid, contractor has to obtain the Electrical
Inspectorate's Clearance from the Electrical Inspector of Delhi Govt. However the Electrical
Inspectors clearance fees shall be paid by the company.
Engineer In-Charge shall arrange any permission like Road cutting clearance etc. from the Delhi
Civic authorities like MCD,DDA, PWD and DJB. However, the contractor shall make follow up with
local authorities and other connected persons that may be required to carry out the job under
this work order.
All the labour, plant appliance, ladder, scaffoldings, materials, cranes, tool and tackles, and
technical supervision etc. are including in your scope of work. Adequate number of engineers,
supervisors and labours (skilled & unskilled) shall be posted at site and the list of the same along
with certificate of Qualification of technical staff should be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer In Charge for checking the adequacy immediately (with in seven days) after award of
contract.
The Contractor shall also make his own arrangement for the accommodation/conveyance
requirements for its staff at site. Company will provided at site the adequate open space for
contractor's site store for storing the materials, tools, tackles etc. The entire Contractor's storage
will be within the site premises. All the incoming and outgoing materials, equipment, tools,
tackles and any other items related to said work shall be entered into the register kept for this
purpose and shall be in the custody of Contractor, however company does not hold any
responsibility for any loss or damage of Contractor's material etc.
All loading/unloading, of materials at work-site shall be your responsibility. Involvement of

Crane/Hydra/Tractor/Trailer for this type of work shall be in your scope. Adequate weather

protection shall be provided by the contractor to keep the materials safe from sun & rain by
providing covered storage space as well as using tarpaulins.
The Contractor will make his own arrangement for electricity and water requirement from Local
sources for construction requirements.
The Contractor will be required to make his own arrangement for distribution of water/power on
the site by erecting temporary lines. All such work shall be carried out according to local
regulation. The temporary lines will be removed forthwith after the completion of work. If there is
hindrance caused to the other work done to the alignment of these lines, the contractor will re-
route and remove the temporary lines at his own cost
Under no circumstances the delay in work shall be attributed to non-availability or inadequate

power and / water supply.
5. SITE MOBILIZATION:
5.1 Contractor shall commence the work as per the plan.

5.2 Contractor shall submit deployment plan for the T&P and Man power required for the project.
If the Contractor is not able to deploy the required T&P, manpower & construction materials,
Employer, at its sole discretion, may opt to arrange the same on behalf of Contractor and an
amount of cost plus 20% shall be deducted from any amount due or becoming due to the
Contractor.
5.3 Quality Assurance Plan: Contractor to submit QAP / FQP for the complete scope within 02
weeks of issue of order for Employers / Owners Approval. Works to be executed as per approved
QAP.
5.5 Schedule of work to be performed shall be as per implementation schedule (to be finalized
during kick-off meeting).
The Network so finalised shall also be used for the purpose of contract execution, monitoring
progress of work, payments and operation of all other terms and conditions of the Contract
strictly.
The Schedules shall be reviewed periodically with the Employer / Owner to ensure that the
completion dates for different milestones will be met and to institute all corrective steps such as
mobilising additional resources in terms of labour, materials, equipment, tools and plant, night
work etc. at no extra cost to the Employer / Owner to achieve any accelerated progress at any
time to the extent required to adhere to the completion dates. The Employer / Owner reserves
the right to revise the work schedule at his discretion in order to ensure completion date and to
suit the project requirements and such alterations shall not entitle the Contractor to any extra
payment.
6. RATES:
The rates finalized for this order shall be firm for the entire duration of work carried out by the
Contractor under the order and are not subject to any variation and escalation for any reason
whatsoever.
Rate for all the extra items shall be mutually negotiated and fixed on the basis of cost of
materials, consumables, labour and T&P expenses plus overhead expenses and profit upto
maximum 10%.
The cost of insurance during loading/unloading of materials/ equipments during its storage and
handling/erection at site for installation is included in the contractor's scope and value is included
in the unit rates finalized.
The unit rates finalized are also inclusive of barricading and watch & ward during execution and
no separate charges shall be paid for the same.

7. TAXES AND DUTIES:
Prices are inclusive of all taxes and duties including labour cess and GST as applicable. However,
IT as per applicable rate will be deducted from your bills as Tax Deduction at Source (TDS).
The total order value shall remain FIRM and shall only be adjusted on account of any
variations in Statutory Taxes, duties and Levies imposed by Competent Authorities by way of
fresh notification(s) within the stipulated delivery period.
8. BILL SUBMISSION PROCEDURE:
All bills shall be submitted to the Engineer In charge / Package Engineer for certification. Bills
shall be complete in all respect including ESI / HR compliance, Quality compliance, HSE
compliance, Store compliance, Finance compliance etc. An established procedure is followed at
site. Incomplete bills / invoices will not be considered for processing payments.
9. POWER TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT BY EMPLOYER:

9.1 Employer shall have power to withhold payment of RA Bill in full or in parts for the reason of
non compliance of major contract terms and conditions such as quality of work, progress of work
etc as per the discretion of Engineer In Charge.
9.2 Such withholding of payment neither relieve the contractor to execute the work with due
diligence and speed, nor entitle contractor to claim any interest, loss of anticipated profit, etc
there on.
9.3 All the compliances to be done by the Contractor before next RA bill and hold amount to be
released. In case contractor is not able to do the compliance before next RA bill such hold
amount shall be released as and when such compliances are fulfilled to the satisfaction of
Employer.
9.4 If the work is not performed in strict accordance with the contract ,or if the work of any other
contract between the contractor herein and the Employer is not performed in strict accordance
with its terms ,or if the Employer has a claim against the contractor herein for any other reason
whatsoever ,or if any claim ,just or unjust (including claims for wrongful death and for injuries to
person property), which arises out of the performance of work is made against the Employer, the
Employer shall have the right to withhold out of any payment, final or otherwise, such sums as
the Employer may deem ample to protect it against delays or loss or to assure the payment of
such claims.
9.5 Deduction of Defective Work as Alternative to Requiring Corrections: If the Employer deems it
inexpedient to require the Contractor to Correct Work damaged or not done in accordance with
the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract Price shall be made by agreement
between the Contractor and Employer. In the event of failure of said parties to reach an
agreement, the amount to be so deducted shall be settled in accordance with the procedure
hereinafter provided for the settlement of disputes. Until such settlement, the Employer may
withhold such sum as it deems just and reasonable from monies, if any, due the Contractor.
10. TERMS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made to you as under:
(i) 5% of the total services contract price shall be paid as initial interest free advance on
fulfillment against 1) acceptance of LOI/PO, 2) submission of BG of equivalent amount
valid upto completion period/handing over, whichever is earlier plus 3 months claim
period and 3) Submission of Contract Performance Bank Guarantee of 10% of the
contract price valid upto completion period/handing over, whichever is earlier plus 3
months claim period. In case of delay, the BG shall be extended suitably. The advance
shall be adjusted against R/Bills.
(ii) 80% prorata of total services value shall be payable against R/A bills payable withi n
30 days after completion duly certified by Engineer in charge.
(iii) Balance 15% on account of total services value of the actual executed value shall be paid
in 30 days after completion of successful acceptance testing, commissioning and handing

over of complete systems duly certified by BYPL Engineer-in-Charge specified in the
tender and on submission of performance Bank Guarantee of 10% amount, in our format
valid up to a defect liability period for 36 months from the date of handing over of the
scheme including submission of Electrical Inspector Clearance Certificate, Compliance of
final punch point, No Demand Certificate, Letter of Indemnity by the supplier (The
format of No Demand Certificate and Letter of Indemnity are attached as Annexure) and
after reconciliation & adjustments of payments, if any towards quantities of materials
issued from purchaser’s stock and consumed by the contractor for expeditious
completion of the job.
All the Bank guarantees shall be submitted as per Company’s format (Appendix I) and from any
scheduled Bank approved by Company.
Company shall make payments of the bills either; By crossed cheque or by electronic transfer
directly to Contractor's designated bank account.
8. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD:
Work executed shall be guaranteed against any defect or failure which may arise due to faulty
materials, design or workmanship for a period of 36 months from the date of handing over of the
entire installation.
If during the Defect Liability Period any materials/ items are found to be defective, these shall be
replaced or rectified by the bidder at his own cost within 30 days from the date of receipt of
intimation.
9. COMPLETION PERIOD:
You are required to mobilize your manpower and Tools & Tackles and furnish a list of equipments
to be used for erection and commence the execution activity as per instructions of Engineer In-
charge. The entire erection work should be completed within project completion of 05
months from the date of issue of LOI/WO. The detailed schedule and milestone completion
dates would be as per the contract schedules given from time to time by Engineer In-charge at
site. You shall submit a weekly progress report to Engineer In charge.
10. CLEANLINESS:
All debris shall be removed and disposed of at assigned areas on daily basis. Surplus excavated
earth shall be disposed of in an approved manner. In short, you shall be fully responsible for
keeping the work site clean at all times. In case of non- compliance, company shall get the same
done at Contractor's risk and costs.
11. COMMISSIONING & ACCEPTANCE TEST:
After completion of the work, the Contractor shall conduct trial run/ operation in the presence of
Engineer In charge. During such trial run the system shall be operated under the supervision of
the Contractor. If any rectification/modification required during this period the Contractor shall do
all necessary measures.
On satisfactory completion of above, the system shall be deemed to have energized and placed
in commercial operation. The Engineer In Charge will issue an acceptance certificate.
12. WORK COMPLETION CERTIFICATION, HANDING OVER:
The work carried out by the Contractor under this order has to be certified by Engineer In-charge
for satisfactory completion of work allotted to the contractor with respect to specifications / Field
Quality Procedures as per applicable standards. In case of modification/correction to be carried
out, contractor shall carry out the said modifications/correction without additional cost. The

Contractor shall remain in close contact with Engineer In-Charge at site to report the general
findings of the fieldwork during the initial as well as later stage of the work at site.
13. RECONCILIATION:
Reconciliation of free issue material, BOQ items shall be done on monthly basis and same shall
form part of the running bills. The contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record
detailing out the list of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record
open for the inspection of the company. All measurement of works shall be done in The Joint
Measurement Book, jointly signed by Engineer In Charge / Package Owner and contractor’s
representative. Copy of measurement sheet shall form part of both running bill and final bill.
The contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortage or damage of materials issued to them
handling of and / or in storage and erection at site and cost of the same will be recovered from
the contractor as certified by Engineer In-Charge.
14. PUNCH LIST AND OUTSTANDING WORK:

14.1 The Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Employer / Owner, prepare and update on a
continuing basis during the period between completion of structure and final completion, punch
lists (based on the preliminary punch list) of outstanding items requiring completion or
rectification.
14.2 The Contractor shall rectify or complete to the standards specified in the Contract and in
accordance with the schedule stated in the punch list any outstanding items of work or plant
noted as requiring rectification or as incomplete. In the event that the Contractor fails to
commence and / or diligently proceed with the execution of any such outstanding items of work
in accordance with such schedule, the Employer / owner may arrange for the outstanding work to
be done and reasonable cost thereof shall be certified by the Employer / Owner and deducted
from the contract price or paid by the Contractor to the Employer / Owner.
14.3 The parties may in any event agree that any outstanding items of work shall be carried out
by the Employer / Owner or shall otherwise be deleted from the punch list referred to above,
subject to the agreement of any appropriate sum to be paid or allowed by the Contractor to the
Employer / Owner in respect of such outstanding item.
14.4 Rectification / Correction and Replacement of faulty / defective / damaged work
The Employer may reject defective or unsatisfactory work or materials. The Contractor shall
proceed immediately with the correction of rejected, defective, or unsatisfactory workmanship or
materials and shall have all objectionable materials and defective work removed from the site (or
any place used for storing materials for use on the work) and replaced.
15. REMEDY FOR CONTRACTOR'S DEFAULT:

In case the quality of works performed by the Contractor is found to be not meeting the
requirements of the contract, then the Employer / Owner shall have the right to demolish such
work and get it re-executed at the risk and cost of the contractor. In case the contractor is not
able to perform as per the time schedule and other requirements of the contract, then, the
Employer / Owner, upon giving a notice of 7 (seven) days to the contractor, can get the works
rectified/completed by some other agency, at the risk and cost of the contractor.
16. DEMOBILIZATION:
16.1 Prior to Handing over, the contractor shall remove all the belonging from the site.
16.2 Debris, Rubbish etc. so as to take all practical measures to prevent damage to the site or
any other property on or near the site or work area. As soon as reasonably practicable, but in any
event prior to handing over, the contractor shall remove or dispose of in accordance with
applicable laws all such rubbish, debris, etc. and all contractor’s Equipment, supplies, materials
and wastes brought or produced by the contractor on the site or the work area.
16.3 Labour and Hutments: Labour and work men engaged by the contractor for the works along
with their hutments, sheds and dwellings, notwithstanding the foregoing, the contractor shall be
responsible for the removal of all its temporary structures built at site.

17. CONTRACT CLOSURE:
As per Annexure - Contract closure document
18. CODES AND STANDARD:

All required codes and standard detailed in the specifications are to be adhered to. The plant
equipment material and works shall be completely furnished in all the respects in accordance with
the technical specification as per the acceptable codes & standards.
20. PENALTY AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
20.1 Penalty: A penalty of 2.5% of bill amount shall be levied in each case of non-compliance of
safety practices and site cleanliness.
20.2 Liquidated Damages: In the event of any delay in completion of the work beyond the
stipulated time given by in order due to reasons solely attributable to the Contractor, the
Contractor shall pay to the Company liquidated damages.
If the Contractor failed perform the services within the time period specified in the order, the
Company shall, without prejudice to its other remedies under the contract, deduct liquidated
damages a sum equivalent to 1 % of the work value (basic) for each week or part there of delay
until the actual date of completion up to a maximum deduction of 10% of order value (basic).
Once the maximum is reached to Company may consider termination of contract without any
liabilities to Company.
20.3 The Liquidated Damages shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from any of its
obligations to complete the Work or from any other obligations and liabilities of the Contractor
under the Contract.
20.4 Notwithstanding the above, in the event the Contractor fails to complete the package as per
the schedule; and delays the Employer ‘Handing Over’ of the plant / Structure / unit(s) up to a
period for which the Liquidated Damages for time delay becomes more than 5% of the Contract
Price, then the Employer at his sole discretion, shall be entitled to treat the failure as an act of
default by the Contractor and same shall entitle the Employer to terminate the Contract and get
the work done by some other agency, at the Risk & Cost of Contractor.
20.5 Employer shall issue notice to Contractor in writing before recommending any risk & cost to
contractor. The Contractor shall immediately provide an action plan to make good of any balance
Work/deficient Work within seven (07) days of receiving such notice. Any non response by the
Contractor to the Risk and Cost proposal of the Employer or failure to provide an action plan shall
be deemed as acceptance of the Risk and Cost proposal by the Contractor.
20.6 The Liquidated Damages for delay will be recovered at the sole discretion of the Employer
from the Contract Price or from other securities/ BG’s available with the Employer or jointly.
20.7 Time is essence of the Contract. After issuance of the Work order, the Contractual network /
L2 network will be finalized and approved by the Employer.
Engineer In charge should specifically mention the amount of LD levied on the bill of contractor.
21. MITIGATION OF CONSEQUENCES OF DELAY:

In all cases where such an event for delay has occurred, the Contractor shall advise the Employer
/ Owner of -
21.1 "The extent of the actual and contemplated delay and its anticipated effect upon the date of
"Handing-Over".
21.2 "The Contractor's plans to take steps to overcome or minimize the actual or anticipated delay
and
21.3 The Contractor's plans to adopt any methods suggested by the Employer / Owner to
overcome or minimize the delay, and shall use all reasonable endeavors to take such steps and/or
adopt such methods.

22. SAFETY CODE:
The Contractor shall ensure adequate safety precautions at site as required under the law of the
land and shall be entirely responsible for the complete safety of their workman as well as other
workers at site and premises. The contractor shall not deploy any worker below the age of 18
years.
The contractor shall observe the safety requirements as laid down in the contract and in case of
sub-contract (only after written approval of company), it shall be the responsibility of main
contractor that all safety requirements are followed by the employees and staff of the sub-
contractor.
The contractor employing two hundred employees or more, including contract workers, shall have
a safety co-ordinator in order to ensure the implementation of safety requirements of the contract
and a contractor with lesser number of employees, including contract workers, shall nominate one
of his employees to act as safety co-ordinator who shall liaise with the safety officer on matters
relating to safety and his name shall be displayed on the notice board at a prominent place at the
work site.
The contractor shall be responsible for non-compliance of the safety measures, implications,
injuries, fatalities and compensation arising out of such situations or incidents.
In case of any accident, the contractor shall immediately submit a statement of the same to the
owner and the safety officer, containing the details of the accident, any injury or casualities,
extent of properly damage and remedial action taken to prevent recurrence and in addition, the
contractor shall submit a monthly statement of the accidents to the owner at the end of each
month.
23. STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS:
The Contractor shall take all steps as may be necessary to comply with various Acts, Rules,
including but not limited to The Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act, 1986, The Contract
Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act, 1970. The Employees Pension scheme , The Employees
Provident Funds and miscellaneous provisions Act, 1952 ,The Employees state Insurance
Act,1948,The Equal Remuneration Act, The Industrial Dispute Act,1947, The Maternity Benefit Act
, 1961, The Minimum Wages Act, 1948, The payment of Bonus Act ,1965, The Payment of
Gratuity Act,1972, The Payment of wages Act, 1936, The Shops & Establishment Act, The
Workmen’s Compensation Act , 1923, Building and Other Construction Workers (Employment and
Regulations) Act 1996, Building and Other Construction Workers (Cess) Act 1996, The Employers
Liability Act,1938, Indian Electricity Act, 2003 and Indian Electricity Rules, VAT and GST etc., and
all other applicable laws as amended and rules framed there under including any statutory
approval required from the Central/State Govt. Ministry of Labour. Broadly, the compliance shall
be as detailed below, but not limited to:
a) An Electrical license.
b) PF Code No. and all employees to have PF A/c No. under PF every Act, 1952.
c) All employees to have a temporary or permanent ESI Card as per ESI Act.
d) ESI Registration No.
e) Sales Tax registration number, if applicable.
f) PAN No.
g) Work Contract Tax Registration Number/ VAT Registration.
h) Labour License under Contract Labour Act (R & A) Act 1970.
i) Delhi Building and other Construction Worker (Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Services) Rules, 2002(B.O.C.W.)
(Bidder responsible for execution of the job should obtain a copy of Labour License before start
of the work by the contractor.)

The Contractor must follow:
a) Third party Insurance Policy before start of work.

b) To follow Minimum Wages Act prevailing in the state.
c) The Salary/wages to all deployed manpower is to be distributed through ECS only into the
bank accounts of all individuals and not later than 7th of succeeding month. In case of
unavoidable circumstances the payment may be made through crossed cheques in the
name of the individual and information of all such cases need to be submitted to
HR(CMC).
d) To maintain Wage- cum - Attendance Register.
e) To maintain First Aid Box at Site.
f) Latest P.F. and E.S.I. challans pertaining to the period in which work was undertaken
along with a certificate mentioning that P.F. and E.S.I. applicable to all the employees has
been deducted and deposited with the Authorities within the time limits specified under
the respective Acts.
g) Workman Compensation Policy. {If applicable}.
h) Labour license before start of work. {If applicable}.
Before commencing the work it would be mandatory for the Contractor to furnish the Company
the permanent PF code no and ESI of the employees.
24. WORKMAN COMPENSATION:
The Contactor shall take insurance policy under the Workman Compensation Act to cover such
workers who are not covered under ESI and PF by the Contractor however engaged to undertake
the jobs covered under this order and a copy of this insurance policy will be given to Company
for reference and records. This insurance policy shall be kept valid at all times. In case there are
no worker involve other than those who are covered under ESI and PF by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall certify for the same.
The contractor shall keep the company indemnified at all times, against all claims of
compensation under the provision of Workmen Compensation Act 1923 and as amended from
time to time or any compensation payable under any other law for the time being workman
engaged by the contractor/sub-contractor/sub-agent in carrying out the job involved under this
work order and against costs and expenses, if any, incurred by the company in connection
therewith and without prejudice to make any recovery.
The company shall be entitled to deduct from any money due to or to become due to the
Contractor, moneys paid or payable by way of compensation as aforesaid or cost or expenses in
connection with any claims thereto and the Contractor shall abide by the decision of the
Company as to the sum payable by the Contractor under the provisions of this clause.
25. STAFF AND WORKMAN:
(I) It shall be responsibility of contractor:
(a) To obtain Contract Labour License from the concerned authorities and maintain proper
liaison with them. Necessary Forms for obtaining Labour License would be issued by the
company. However you will bear all expenses for obtaining Labour license and
registration in PF Department for your scope of work. You will deposit PF of your
staff/laborer each month and all related documents should be furnished to us.
(b) To obtain workman insurance cover against deployment of workers etc.
(II) To maintain, proper records relating to workmen employed, in the form of various Registers,
namely.

(a) Register of workmen.
(b) Register of muster roll.
(c) Register of overtime.
(d) Register of wages.
(e) Any other register as per latest amendment Labour Act.
(III) To disburse monthly wages to your workers/ supervisors in time and in the
presence of Company representatives or as directed by the Labour authorities.
(IV) To maintain proper liaison with the Project authorities, local police and all other government
and local bodies.
(V) To pay your workmen at least not less than the minimum prescribed wages as per
state/Central Labour laws as may be, applicable. The contractor shall, be responsible for
compliance of all the provisions of minimum Wages Act, PF, ESIC Act workmen Compensation Act
and Contract Labour Regulation & Abolition Act the rules made there under. In case of non-
Compliance of the statutory requirements. The company would take necessary action at the risk
and cost of the Contractor.
(VI) To employ required number of skilled/semi-skilled and unskilled workmen as per site
requirement to complete the entire project as per schedule. To provide safety shoes, safety
helmets, safety belts, gloves etc. to your worker/staff as per requirement during erection work.
(VII) To employ necessary engineering and supervisory staff for completion of the Project in
time. While day-to-day management of the site and supervision of the works shall be the
responsibility of your Engineer - In charge, he will report to the our Engineer in charge to assist
him to discharge the overall responsibility of the execution of the project.
26. INSURANCE:
Before commencing the execution of the work the Contractor shall take at his own cost Transit
Insurance policy, Third party insurance and suitable insurance policy for his own men and
material. Please note that these insurance policies shall be taken in consultation with the
Employer, where Employer is to be named as Co-insured and a copy of the insurance policy shall
have to be furnished to Employer within 30 days of the date of order. For all the insurance
policies (whether taken by the Employer or Contractor), the Contractor shall be responsible for
settlement of claims with the underwriters without any liability on the Employer / Employer and
will arrange replacements / rectification expeditiously without waiting for settlement of insurance
claim, at contractor’s own cost and this shall arrange the comprehensive Insurance policy for
workmen’s compensation, General liability Insurance, Automobile insurance, Third party insurance
for damage of any movable and immovable properties and lives. This shall not entitle the
Contractor for any extension of time.
Third Party Risk and Public Liability Insurance –

The Contractor, at his own cost, shall take necessary insurance to indemnify third party risk
arising out of the work to be done by him. The contractor shall also take out the following Public
Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance Cover for the entire period of contract as given
below.
A Public Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance Covering All Operations the
contract
Limits for bodily injury or death up to and including Rs. 200000/- for one person and Rs. 500000/-
for each accident.
Limits for property damage up to and including Rs. 500000/- for each accident.
B Automobile Liability Insurance

On all self –propelled vehicles used in connection with this contract, whether owned, non-owned
or hired by the contractor, limits of insurance shall be as follows:
For Public Liability up to and including Rs. 200000/- for one person and Rs. 500000/- for each
accident.
For property damage up to and including Rs. 200000/- for each accident.
Insurance for contractor’s personnel

The contractor shall effect and maintain insurance against liability for claims, damages, losses and
expenses (including legal fees and expenses) arising from injury, sickness, disease or death of
any person employed by the contractor or any other of the Contractor’s personnel.
Before commencing the execution of the work the CONTRACTOR shall take
Accidental insurance policy for the staff engaged by him for this work to insure against any loss of
life which may occur during the contract for the work of the COMPANY. The policy shall have
coverage of Rs. 10 Lacs (Table C- Death + Permanent Total Disability + Partial permanent
Disability due to external accidents). The Contractor shall be responsible for on the spot same day
claim settlement with the victim's legal heirs without waiting for settlement by insurance claim
without any liability on BYPL. The premium amount for such life cover policy shall be borne by the
contractor. The contractor shall furnish copy of policy when demanded by BYPL.
27. SECURITY/WATCH & WARD:
All security rules and safety rules enforced at site by company shall be strictly observed.
28. ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN:
Contractor will make ensure that the Environment, Health & Safety (EHS) requirements are
clearly understood and faithfully implemented at all levels at site as per instruction of Company.
Contractors must comply with these requirements:
a) Comply with all of the elements of the EHS Plan and any regulations applicable to the
work.
b) Comply with the procedures provided in the interests of Environment, Health and Safety.
c) Ensure that all of their employees designated to work are properly trained and
competent.
d) Ensure that all plant and equipment they bring on to site has been inspected and serviced
in accordance with legal requirement and manufacturer’s or suppliers’ instructions.
e) Make arrangements to ensure that all employees designated to work on or visit the site
present themselves for site induction prior to commencement of work.
f) Provide details of any hazardous substances to be brought onsite.
g) Ensure that a responsible person accompanies any of their visitors to site.
All contractor’s staff are accountable for the following:
1. Use the correct tools and equipment for the job and use safety equipment and protective
clothing supplied, e.g. helmets, goggles, ear protection, etc. as instructed.
2. Keep tools in good condition.
3. Report to the Supervisor any unsafe or unhealthy condition or any defects in plant or
equipment.
4. Develop a concern for safety for themselves and for others.
5. Prohibit horseplay.
6. Not to operate any item of plant unless they have been specifically trained and are
authorized to do so.
29. TEST CERTIFICATE & QUALITY ASSURANCE:

The Contractor shall procure all equipment from genuine sources as approved by the Company
and as per Company specifications. The Contractor shall submit all the test certificates and joint
inspection reports related to major equipment wherever applicable. The contractor shall ensure
for the strict compliance to the specifications and Field Quality Procedures issued by company /
Engineer in-charge.
30. SUB-CONTRACTING / SUBLETTING:
CONTRACTOR shall not assign or transfer the whole or any part of this Work Order or any other
benefits accruing there from nor shall it subcontract / sublet the whole or any part of the Works
without the prior written consent of COMPANY.
In the event the contractor assigns this work order, contractor's assignees shall be bound by the
terms and conditions of this work order and shall , if deemed necessary by COMPANY at the time
of such assignment, undertake in writing to be so bound by this Work Order.
Notwithstanding the subletting / subcontracting of any portion of the works, contractor shall
remain wholly responsible for the carrying out, completion and satisfactory execution of Works in
all respects in accordance with this Work Order, specification, approved drawings and data
sheets.
31. INDEMNITY:
Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless COMPANY against and from any and all liabilities,
claims, damages, losses or expenses arising due to or resulting from:
a) Any breach non-observance or non-performance by contractor or its employees or

agents of any of the provisions of this Work Order.
b) Any act or omission of contractor or its employees or agents.
c) Any negligence or breach of duty on the part of contractor, its employees or agents
including any wrongful use by it or them of any property or goods belonging to or by
COMPANY.
Contractor shall at all times indemnify COMPANY against all liabilities to other persons, including
he employees or agents of COMPANY or contractor for bodily injury, damage to property or other
loss which may arise out of or in consequence of the execution or completion of Works and
against all costs charges and expenses that may be occasioned to COMPANY by the claims of
such person.
32. EVENTS OF DEFAULTS:
COMPANY may, without prejudice to any of its other rights or remedies under the Work Order or
in law, terminate the whole or any part of this Work Order by giving written notice to the
Contractor, if in the opinion of COMPANY, contractor has neglected to proceed with the works
with due diligence or commits a breach of any of the provisions of this work order including but
not limited to any of the following cases.
a) Failing to complete execution of work within the terms specified in this work order.
b) Failing to complete works in accordance with the approved schedule of works.
c) Failing to meet requirements of specifications, drawings, and designs as
approved by COMPANY.
d) Failing to comply with any reasonable instructions or orders issued by COMPANY in
connection with the works.
e) Failing to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this work order.

In the event COMPANY terminates this work order, in whole or in part, on the occurrence of any
event of default, COMPANY reserves the right to engage any other subcontractor or agency to
complete the work or any part thereof, and in addition to any other right COMPANY may have
under this work order or in law including without limitation the right to penalize for delay under
clause 15.0 of this work order, the contractor shall be liable to COMPANY for any additional costs
that may be incurred by COMPANY for the execution of the Work.
33. RISK & COST:
If the Contractor fails to execute the work as per specification / as per the direction of Engineer's
In-charge within the scheduled period and even after the extended period, the contract
shall got cancel and company reserves the right to get the work executed from any other
source at the Risk & Cost of the Contractor. The Extra Expenditure so incurred shall be debited to
the Contractor.
34. ARBITRATION:
To the best of their ability, the parties hereto shall endeavor to resolve amicably between
themselves all disputes arising in connection with this LOA. If the same remain unresolved within
thirty (30) days of the matter being raised by either party, either party may refer the dispute for
settlement by arbitration. The arbitration to be undertaken by two arbitrators, one each to be
appointed by either party. The arbitrators appointed by both the parties shall mutually nominate
a person to act as presiding arbitrator before entering upon the reference in the event of a
difference between the two arbitrators and the award of the said presiding arbitrator in such a
contingency shall be conducted in accordance with this provisions of the Indian Arbitration &
Conciliation Act, 1996 and the venue of such arbitration shall be in the city of New Delhi only.
35. FORCE MAJEURE:
27.1 General:
An “Event of Force Majeure” shall mean any event or circumstance not within the reasonable
control, of the Party affected, but only if and to the extent that:
(i) Such event or circumstance, despite the exercise of reasonable diligence, could not have been
prevented, avoided or reasonably foreseen by such Party;
(ii) Such event or circumstance materially and adversely affects the ability of the affected Party to
perform its obligations under this Contract, and the affected Party has taken all reasonable
precautions, due care and reasonable alternative measures in order to prevent or avoid the effect
of such event on the affected parties ability to perform its obligations under this Contract and to
mitigate the consequences thereof. For the avoidance of doubt, if such event or circumstance
would not have materially and adversely affected the performance of the affected party had such
affected party followed good industry practice, such event or circumstance shall not constitute
force majeure.
(iii) Such event is not the direct or indirect result of the failure of such Party to perform any of its
obligations under this Contract; and
(iv) Such Party has given the other Party prompt notice describing such events, the effect thereof
and the actions being taken in order to comply with above clause
27.2 Specific Events of Force Majeure:

Subject to the provisions of above clause, Events of Force Majeure shall include only the following
to the extent that they or their consequences satisfy the above requirements: The following
events and circumstances:
(i) Effect of any natural element or other acts of God, including but not limited to storm, flood,
earthquake, lightning, cyclone, landslides or other natural disasters, and
(ii) Explosions or fires
(iii) Declaration of the Site as war zone
Any order, regulation, directive, requirement from any Governmental, legislative, executive or
judicial authority.
27.3 Notice of Events of Force Majeure:
If a force majeure event prevents a party from performing any obligations under the Contract in
part or in full, that party shall:
(i) Immediately notify the other party in writing of the force majeure events within 2 working days
of the occurrence of the force majeure event
(ii) Be entitled to suspend performance of the obligation under the Contract which is affected by
force majeure event for the duration of the force majeure event
(iii) Use all reasonable efforts to resume full performance of the obligation as soon as practicable
(iv) Keep the other party informed of all such efforts to resume full performance of the obligation
on a regular basis.
(v) Provide prompt notice of the resumption of full performance or obligation to the other party.
27.4 Mitigation of events of force majeure:
The Contractor shall:
(i) Make all reasonable efforts to prevent and reduce to a minimum and mitigate the effect
of any delay occasioned by an Event of Force Majeure, including applying other ways in which to
perform the Contract;
(ii) Use its best efforts to ensure resumption of normal performance after the termination of
any Event of Force Majeure and shall perform its obligations to the maximum extent practicable
as agreed between the Parties; and
(iii) Keep the Company informed at regular intervals of the circumstances concerning the
event of Force Majeure, with best estimates as to its likely continuation and what measures or
contingency planning it is taking to mitigate and or terminate the Event of Force Majeure.
27.5 Burden of proof:

In the event that the Parties are unable in good faith to agree that a Force Majeure event has
occurred to an affected party, the parties shall resolve their dispute in accordance with the
provisions of this Contract. The burden of proof as to whether or not a force majeure event has
occurred shall be upon the party claiming that the force majeure event has occurred and that it is
the affected party.
27.6 Terminations for certain events of force majeure:

If any obligation of any Party under the Contract is or is reasonably expected to be delayed or
prevented by a Force Majeure event for a continuous period of more than 1 (one) month during
the Term of the Contract the Contract shall be terminated at the discretion of the Company and
neither Party shall be liable to the other for any consequences arising on account of such
termination.
36. SECRECY CLAUSE:
The technical information, drawing and other related documents forming part of work order and
the information obtained during the course of investigation under this work order shall be the
Company's executive property and shall not be used for any other purpose except for the
execution of the work order. The technical information drawing, records and other document shall
not be copied, transferred, or divulged and/ or disclosed to third party in full/part, not misused in
any form whatsoever except to the extent for the execution of this work order.
This technical information, drawing and other related documents shall be returned to the
Company with all approved copies and duplicates including drawing/plans as are prepared by the
Bidder during the executions of this work order, if any, immediately after they have been used for
agreed purpose.
In the event of any breach of this provision, the Bidder shall indemnify the Company against any
loss, cost or damage or claim by any party in respect of such breach.
37. TERMINATION:
During the course of the execution, if at any time BSES observe and form an opinion that the
work under the order is not being performed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement,
BSES reserves its right to cancel this Agreement giving 15 days notice mentioning the reason for
the termination of the agreement and BSES will recover all damages including losses occurred due
to loss of time from Contractor.
38. QUALITY:
Contractor shall ensure that strict quality is maintained and execution of works under this Work
Order and Works are executed in conformity with the Specification.
All tools, tackles, instruments and other equipments used in the execution of the Works shall be
duly calibrated as required and Contractor shall maintain proper records of such tools, tackles,
instruments and / or equipment.
39. PROGRESS REPORT INCLUDING PHOTOGRAPH:
39.1 During the various stages of erection and commissioning of the critical equipments in the
pursuance of the Contract, the Contractor shall at its own cost submit periodic progress reports as
may be reasonably required by the Employer (Format Attached as per Annexure- ) with such
materials as charts, networks, photographs, test certificates, etc. Such progress reports shall be in
the form and size as may be required by the Employer and shall be submitted in adequate
number of copies to be notified by the Employer
39.2 The quantitative progress report of the works by reference to the project schedule in
sufficient detail should permit the Employer to assess performance, plan witness dates and
evaluate forecasts, including reports on key Sub-contracts (as applicable). Within 10 days of the
submission of each such report and at such other times as the Employer may reasonably request,
the Contractor and the Employer shall meet to discuss progress. Contractor has to submit daily
manpower, T&P, & work done report. Weekly MIS is required to be submitted by Contractor, at
the end of each weekday (On Every Monday). Each monthly progress report shall be submitted
not later than the 3rd day of the month following that in respect of which it is made, but may
report on actual progress only up to the 25th day of the month and anticipated progress
thereafter. Monthly progress reports shall include the following section
39.2.1 Executive summary

39.2.2 Description of the work and services performed and erection / commissioning activities
completed during the preceding month
39.2.3 Necessary photographs of erection and commissioning activities which shall be taken when
and where indicated by the Employer. Photographs shall be approximately 100 x 125 mm in size
including a margin of 5 mm side for fixing. Adequate numbers of photographs shall be submitted
indicating various stages of erection / commissioning. Each photograph shall contain the date, the
name of the Contractor and the title of the view taken
39.2.4 Updated project schedule showing progress to the end of the month (as percentages
completed of the Contractor's activities broken down into significant elements of the works), and
the current schedule of activities and the targets for the next month including catch up plan, if
required.
39.2.5 Identification of areas with foreseeable problems which in the opinion of the Contractor
may affect the project schedule
39.2.6 Such other information and supporting documentation as the Employer may require
satisfying himself about the timely erection and commissioning of equipment as per Contract.
39.2.7 The Employer shall advise the Contractor about the number of copies of progress reports
and, where relevant, photographs to be submitted each month together with the names and
addresses of persons to whom they are to be sent. Employer will also advise the Contractor
regarding the format of the Monthly Progress report as per Annexure – VII.
39.2.8 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge on a daily basis details of
Contractor’s and subcontractors’ personnel (classified by trade), equipment and construction
materials on Site; progress of Work under the Contract; and safety issues.
39.3 Monthly/Fortnightly Progress Report - Format
39.3.1 Project Overview
39.3.2 Executive Summary
i. Performance Highlights during the period
ii. Issues needing Attention
39.3.3 Schedule Analysis
i. Progress Curves: Attach – Engineering progress curve, procurement progress curve,
Erection & commissioning curve and overall progress curve Schedule Analysis
ii. Brief write up on major gains and shortfall in each schedule.
iii. One page summary schedule indicating target and forecast delivery dates of major
equipment.
iv. Overview of critical inputs to be provided by Contractor to Employer and vice versa.
39.3.4 Critical areas/ issues needing attention
Bring out any critical issue that needs attention/action of project team including Contractor,
Employer & its Consultants. Suggest action required from concerned on the critical issues and
impact of the decision on project schedule & cost (if any). Bring out specifically the previous
agreed date for issue of deliverable/delivery of equipment or a decision on the issue.
39.3.5 Recovery Plan:
Bring out the areas that are delayed by over 2 weeks from the schedule or current requirement.
Provide action taken for recovery of schedule and meet the delivery dates.
39.3.6 Engineering Progress
i. Major highlights during the month.
ii. Goals for next month
iii. Updated project schedule – 12 weeks rolling plan. Target Vs Actual/ Forecast
iv. Detailed schedule analysis
v. Critical areas and action taken recovery plan.
vi. List of inputs required from Contractor to Employer and vice versa – Plan Vs Actual.
vii. Plan for next month
39.3.7 Procurement Schedule
i. Major highlights during the month
ii. Updated detailed manufacturing and delivery schedule. 12 weeks rolling plan. Target Vs
Actual/ Forecast
iii. Detailed delivery report – Indicate list of all material supplied and plan for next 3 months
as annexure.
iv. Critical areas, Impact of delays, action taken and recovery plan

v. List of purchase orders placed, with vendor name, order no., and date
vi. Transport & logistics Plan
vii. QA & Inspection plan
viii. Plan for next month
39.3.7 Erection & Commissioning Schedule
i. Major highlights during the month
ii. Updated detailed erection schedule. 12 weeks rolling plan. Target Vs Actual/ Forecast
iii. Resource mobilization plan Vs Actual, Constraints
iv. Critical areas, Constraints, Impact of delays, action taken and recovery plan
v. QA & Inspection plan
vi. Plan for next month
39.3.8 Financial Summary
Invoice raised, Payments received
39.3.9 Fortnightly Progress Report
The fortnightly progress report shall consist of executive summary, critical areas and updated
project schedule.
Vendor shall submit the progress report latest by 3rd day of every month.
39.4 Meetings At Site
i. Meetings shall be convened weekly or at other intervals as deemed necessary by the
Engineer-in-Charge during the period of Work under the Contract and such meetings shall be held
on Site during the period of Site work. The meetings shall be attended by the Senior
Representatives of both Employer and the Contractor.
ii. The meetings shall ascertain Work progress, safety issues, any problems related to
manpower, equipment or Site conditions, and provide early notice of any potential claims for
Contract variations. Meetings shall be minutes by the Employer Representative / Engineer-in-
Charge. Copies of the minutes shall be supplied to attendees and a standard list of addressees
and the Employer.
40. REVIEW MEETING:

The contractor has to attend weekly review meeting at site level and bi-monthly review meeting
at corporate level. MIS and Resources planning shall be prepared and monitored showing
progress and quantity completion along with S-curve.
41. ACCEPTANCE:
Acceptance of this work order implies and includes acceptance of all terms and conditions
enumerated in this work order in the technical specification and drawings made available to you
consisting of general conditions, detailed scope of work, detailed technical specification &
detailed equipment, drawing. Complete scope of work and the Bidder’s and Company's
contractual obligation are strictly limited to the terms set out in the work order. No amendments
to the concluded work order shall be binding unless agreed to in writing for such amendment by
both the parties.
However, during the course of the execution of the work order, if at any time the Company's
representative observe and form an opinion that the work under the work order is not being
performed in accordance with the terms of this work order, the company reserves its right to
cancel this work order forthwith without assigning any reason and the Company will recover all
damages including losses occurred due to loss of time from the Bidder.
We request you to please sign the duplicate copy of this work order as a token of your
acceptance and return to us.

SECTION X
PRICE FORMAT – (E/T/C) (Items shown are indicative, Kindly refer BOQ, attached as
Annexure)
UNIT GST &

CESS AS
APPLICABLE
UNIT TOTAL
(CGST &
DESCRIPTION SAC UNIT RATE LANDED LANDED
QTY UoM SGST/UTGST or
OF SERVICES CODE COST COST
IGST)
(₹) (₹)
% AMT

In words ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
NOTE:
1) Bidder shall include & indicate any others taxes under the applicable law(s) for supply
and services to be performed in the purchaser’s country.
2) Any other items not mentioned above but are required for successful completion of the
substation shall be deemed to be included in the above quoted rates.

PRICE FORMAT – CIVIL WORKS (Items shown are indicative, Kindly refer BOQ,
attached as Annexure)
UNIT GST &

CESS AS
APPLICABLE
UNIT TOTAL
(CGST &
DESCRIPTION SAC UNIT RATE LANDED LANDED
QTY UoM SGST/UTGST or
OF SERVICES CODE COST COST
IGST)
(₹) (₹)
% AMT

In words ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
NOTE:
1. Kindly refer the relevant layout drawing of existing foundations in Annexure of tender
document. Site visit is advisable prior to submission of quotation.

SECTION XI
GRAND SUMMARY OF THE QUOTED PRICE
Total price for Total for

Total for Civil
supply F.O.R Erection, Testing Grand Total
DESCRIPTION Works incl all
site incl all & Comm incl all (₹)
Taxes
duties, taxes Taxes
Survey, design, engineering,

manufacture, shop testing,
inspection, packing, dispatch,
loading, unloading and storage
at site, transit/storage and
construction insurance,
assembly, erection, civil,
structural, architectural work,
complete pre-commissioning
checks, testing & commissioning
at site, obtaining statutory
clearance & certification from
State Electrical Inspector, and
handing over to the Owner after
satisfactory commissioning
of new 33/11kv gis & power
transformer along with allied
equipments and works of system
upgradation on Turnkey basis
conforming to Technical
Specification & SOW
In words …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
We declare that the following are our quoted prices in INR for the entire project.
Date: Bidders Name:
Place: Bidders Address:
Signature: ………………………………………………………………
Printed Name: ………………………………………………………..
Designation: …………………………………………………………..
Common Seal: ……………………………………………………….

SECTION XII
VENDOR CODE OF CONDUCT
Purchaser is committed to conducting its business in an ethical, legal and socially responsible
manner. To encourage compliance with all legal requirements and ethical business practices,
Purchaser has established this Vendor Code of Conduct (the "Code") for Purchaser’s Vendors. For
the purposes of this document, "Vendor" means any company, corporation or other entity that
sells, or seeks to sell goods or services, to Purchaser, including the Vendor's employees, agents and
other representatives.
Fundamental to adopting the Code is the understanding that a business, in all of its activities, must
operate in full compliance with the laws, rules and regulations of the countries in which it operates.
This Code encourages Vendors to go beyond legal compliance, drawing upon internationally
recognized standards, in order to advance social and environmental responsibility.
I. Labour and Human Rights
Vendors must uphold the human rights of workers, and treat them with dignity and respect as
understood by the international community.
. Fair Treatment - Vendors must be committed to a workplace free of harassment. Vendors shall
not threaten workers with or subject them to harsh or inhumane treatment, including sexual
harassment, sexual abuse, corporal punishment, mental coercion, physical coercion, verbal abuse
or unreasonable restrictions on entering or exiting company provided facilities.
. Antidiscrimination - Vendors shall not discriminate against any worker based on race, colour,
age,gender,sexual orientation, ethnicity, disability, religion, political affiliation, union membership,
national origin, or marital status in hiring and employment practices such as applications for
employment, promotions, rewards, access to training, job assignments, wages, benefits, discipline,
and termination. Vendors shall not require a pregnancy test or discriminate against pregnant
workers except where required by applicable laws or regulations or prudent for workplace safety.
In addition, Vendors shall not require workers or potential workers to undergo medical tests that
could be used in a discriminatory way except where required by applicable law or regulation or
prudent for workplace safety.
. Freely Chosen Employment - Forced, bonded or indentured labour or involuntary prison labour is
not to be used. All work will be voluntary, and workers should be free to leave upon reasonable
notice. Workers shall not be required to hand over government-issued identification, passports or
work permits as a condition of employment.
. Prevention of Under Age Labor - Child labor is strictly prohibited. Vendors shall not employ
children. The minimum age for employment or work shall be 15 years of age, the minimum age for
employment in that country, or the age for completing compulsory education in that country,
whichever is higher. This Code does not prohibit participation in legitimate workplace
apprenticeship programs that are consistent with Article 6 of ILO Minimum Age Convention No. 138
or light work consistent with Article 7 of ILO Minimum Age Convention No. 138.
.Juvenile Labor - Vendors may employ juveniles who are older than the applicable legal minimum
age for employment but are younger than 18 years of age, provided they do not perform work
likely to jeopardize their health, safety, or morals, consistent with ILO Minimum Age Convention
No. 138.
. Minimum Wages - Compensation paid to workers shall comply with all applicable wage laws,
including those relating to minimum wages, overtime hours and legally mandated benefits. Any
Disciplinary wage deductions are to conform to local law. The basis on which workers are being
paid is to be clearly conveyed to them in a timely manner.
. Working Hours - Studies of good manufacturing practices clearly link worker strain to reduced
productivity, increased turnover and increased injury and illness. Work weeks are not to exceed

maximum set by local law. Further, a work week should not be more than 60 hours per week,
including overtime, except in emergency or unusual situations. Workers should be allowed at least
one day off per seven-day week.
. Freedom of Association - Open communication and direct engagement between workers and
management are the most effective ways to resolve workplace and compensation issues. Vendors
are to respect the rights of workers to associate freely and to communicate openly with
management regarding working conditions without fear of reprisal, intimidation or harassment.
Workers’ rights to join labour unions seek representation and or join worker’s councils in
accordance with local laws should be acknowledged.
II. Health and Safety
Vendors must recognize that in addition to minimizing the incidence of work-related injury and
illness, a safe and healthy work environment enhances the quality of products and services,
consistency of production and worker retention and morale. Vendors must also recognize that
ongoing worker input and education is essential to identifying and solving health and safety issues
in the workplace.
The health and safety standards are:
. Occupational Injury and Illness - Procedures and systems are to be in place to prevent, manage,
track and report occupational injury and illness, including provisions to: a) encourage worker
reporting; b) classify and record injury and illness cases; c) provide necessary medical treatment;
d) investigate cases and implement corrective actions to eliminate their causes; and e) facilitate
return of workers to work.
. Emergency Preparedness - Emergency situations and events are to be identified and assessed,
and their impact minimized by implementing emergency plans and response procedures, including:
emergency reporting, employee notification and evacuation procedures, worker training and drills,
appropriate fire detection and suppression equipment, adequate exit facilities and recovery plans.
. Occupational Safety - Worker exposure to potential safety hazards (e.g., electrical and other
energy sources, fire, vehicles, and fall hazards) are to be controlled through proper design
engineering and administrative controls, preventative maintenance and safe work procedures
(including lockout/ragout), and ongoing safety training. Where hazards cannot be adequately
controlled by these means, workers are to be provided with appropriate, well-maintained, personal
protective equipment. Workers shall not be disciplined for raising safety concerns.
. Machine Safeguarding - Production and other machinery is to be evaluated for safety hazards.
Physical guards, interlocks and barriers are to be provided and properly maintained where
machinery presents an injury hazard to workers.
.Industrial Hygiene - Worker exposure to chemical, biological and physical agents is to be
identified, evaluated, and controlled. Engineering or administrative controls must be used to control
overexposures. When hazards cannot be adequately controlled by such means, worker health is to
be protected by appropriate personal protective equipment programs.
.Sanitation, Food, and Housing - Workers are to be provided with ready access to clean toilet,
facilities potable water and sanitary food preparation, storage, and eating facilities. Worker
dormitories provided by the Participant or a labour agent are to be maintained clean and safe, and
provided by the Participant or a labour egress, hot water for bathing and showering, and
adequate heat and ventilation and reasonable personal space along with reasonable entry and exit
privileges.
. Physically Demanding Work - Worker exposure to the hazards of physically demanding tasks,
including manual material handling and heavy or repetitive lifting, prolonged standing and highly
repetitive or forceful assembly tasks is to be identified, evaluated and controlled.
III. Environmental

Vendors should recognize that environmental responsibility is integral to producing world class
products In manufacturing operations, adverse effects on the environment and natural resources
are to be minimized while safeguarding the health and safety of the public.
The environmental standards are:
. Product Content Restrictions - Vendors are to adhere to applicable laws and regulations regarding
prohibition or restriction of specific substances including labeling laws and regulations for recycling
and disposal. In addition, Vendors are to adhere to all environmental requirements specified by
Purchaser.
. Chemical and Hazardous Materials -Chemical and other materials posing a hazard if released to
the environment are to be identified and managed to ensure their safe handling, movement
storage, recycling or reuse and disposal.
. Air Emissions - Air emissions of volatile organic chemicals, aerosols, corrosives, particulates, ozone
depleting chemicals and combustion by-products generated from operations are to be
characterized, monitored, controlled and treated as required prior to discharge.
. Pollution Prevention and Resource Reduction -Waste of all types, including water and energy, are
to reduced or eliminated at the source or by practices such as modifying production, maintenance
and facility processes, materials substitution, conservation, recycling and re-using materials.
. Wastewater and Solid Waste - Wastewater and solid waste generated from operations industrial
processes and sanitation facilities are to be monitored, controlled and treated as required prior to
discharge or disposal.
. Environmental Permits and Reporting - All required environmental permits (e.g. discharge
monitoring) and registrations are to be obtained, maintained and kept current and their operational
and reporting requirements are to be followed.
IV. Ethics
Vendors must be committed to the highest standards of ethical conduct when dealing with workers,
Vendors, and customers.
. Corruption, Extortion, or Embezzlement - Corruption, extortion, and embezzlement, in any form,
are strictly prohibited. Vendors shall not engage in corruption, extortion or embezzlement in any
form and violations of this prohibition may result in immediate termination as an Vendor and in
legal action.
. Disclosure of Information - Vendors must disclose information regarding its business activities,
structure financial situation, and performance in accordance with applicable laws and regulations
and prevailing industry practices.
. No Improper Advantage - Vendors shall not offer or accept bribes or other means of obtaining
undue or improper advantage.
. Fair Business, Advertising, and Competition - Vendors must uphold fair business standards in
advertising, sales, and competition.
. Business Integrity - The highest standards of integrity are to be expected in all business
interactions. Participants shall prohibit any and all forms of corruption, extortion and
embezzlement. Monitoring and enforcement procedures shall be implemented to ensure
conformance.
. Community Engagement - Vendors are encouraged to engage the community to help foster social
and economic development and to contribute to the sustainability of the communities in which they
operate.
. Protection of Intellectual Property - Vendors must respect intellectual property rights; safeguard
customer information; and transfer of technology and know-how must be done in a manner that
protects intellectual property rights.

V. Management System
Vendors shall adopt or establish a management system whose scope is related to the content of
this Code. The management system shall be designed to ensure (a) compliance with applicable
laws, regulations and customer requirements related to the Vendors’ operations and products; (b)
conformance with this Code; and (c) identification and mitigation of operational risks related to this
Code. It should also facilitate continual improvement.
The management system should contain the following elements:

. Company Commitment - Corporate social and environmental responsibility statements affirming
Vendor’s commitment to compliance and continual improvement.
. Management Accountability and Responsibility - Clearly identified company
representative[s]responsible for ensuring implementation and periodic review of the status of the
management systems.
. Legal and Customer Requirements - Identification, monitoring and understanding of applicable
laws, regulations and customer requirements.
. Risk Assessment and Risk Management - Process to identify the environmental, health and safety
and labour practice risks associated with Vendor’s operations. Determination of the relative
significance for each risk and implementation of appropriate procedural and physical controls to
ensure regulatory compliance to control the identified risks.
.Performance Objectives with Implementation Plan and Measures - Areas to be included in a risk
assessment for health and safety are warehouse and storage facilities, plant/facilities support
equipment, laboratories and test areas, sanitation facilities (bathrooms), kitchen/cafeteria and
worker housing /dormitories. Written standards, performance objectives, and targets an
implementation plans including a periodic assessment of Vendor’s performance against those
objectives.
. Training - Programs for training managers and workers to implement Vendor’s policies,
procedures and improvement objectives.
. Communication - Process for communicating clear and accurate information about Vendor’s
performance, practices and expectations to workers, Vendors and customers.
. Worker Feedback and Participation - Ongoing processes to assess employees’ understanding of
and obtain feedback on practices and conditions covered by this Code and to foster continuous
improvement.
. Audits and Assessments - Periodic self-evaluations to ensure conformity to legal and regulatory
requirements, the content of the Code and customer contractual requirements related to social and
environmental responsibility.
. Corrective Action Process - Process for timely correction of deficiencies identified by internal or
external assessments, inspections, investigations and reviews.
. Documentation and Records - Creation of documents and records to ensure regulatory compliance
and conformity to company requirements along with appropriate confidentiality to protect privacy.
The Code is modeled on and contains language from the Recognized standards such as
International Labour Organization Standards (ILO), Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR),
United Nations Convention against Corruption, and the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) were used as
references in preparing this Code and may be useful sources of additional information

APPENDIX
Annexure-Contract closure document:
After completion of works, as per scope and specification of contract, process for contract
closure will be initiated.
Following are major activities to be carried out for contract closure.
i. Completion of Works and issuance of Work Certificate by Employer.
ii. Closure Of Punch Points.
iii. Finalization of Measurements with certification from Engineer In Charge / Engineering.
iv. Joint Final Material reconciliation of Free Issue material (FIM) between contractor and
Employer
v. Joint finalization of delay analysis & LD value if applicable between contractor and Employer.
vi. No Demand Certificate from Contractor
vii. Indemnity Bond from Contractor
viii. Contract Payment Register with accounts duly reconciled between Contractor and Employer.

Annexure – Weekly / Monthly Progress Report: Format
Agenda Project Progress review of Meeting No

Date
Time Start : Time End: Issue Date
Attendees:
BYPL Team Contractor
Action By Action By Remark/

S.No Points Discussed Description
Contractor Reliance Status
A Construction
1
2
3
B Payment
1
2
3
Hinderence / Issues
C if any like front,
drawing etc
1
2
3
D Amendment
1
2
3
Delay if any (&
E
attributable to )
F Other points, if any

--------------------------------------------------------XXXXX--------------------------------
------------------
Annexure – FORMAT OF ADVANCE BANK GUARANTEE

(To be executed on a Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of appropriate value)
This Guarantee made at _______ this [___] day of [_____] 20XX
1. WHEREAS M/s. ______________(Pl specify the name of the Company)_,, a Company within
the meaning of the Companies Act, 1956 having its Registered Office at __________________
hereinafter referred to as the “ Purchaser”, (which expression shall unless repugnant to the
context or meaning thereof include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns).
2. AND WHEREAS the Purchaser has entered into a contract for ____________(Please specify
the nature of contract here ) vide Contract No. __________dated __________(hereinafter
referred to as the “Contract”) with M/s.________________, (hereinafter referred to as “the
Supplier”, which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof be deemed
to mean and include its successors and assigns) for providing of the Goods and/or services on
the terms and conditions as more particularly detailed therein.
3. AND WHEREAS in conformity with the provisions of clause _____ of Special conditions of
Contract/GTC, the Supplier has agreed to furnish a Bank Guarantee for an amount equivalent to
the Advance Payment of Rs…………… extended by the Purchaser to the Supplier for the faithful
execution of the Contract.
4. AND WHEREAS the Supplier has agreed to provide the Purchaser and the Purchaser has
agreed to accept the Advance Bank Guarantee for ____ percent (____%) of the total Contract
Value from [_____________] (pl. specify the name of Bank) having its head/registered office at
[____________] through its branch in ______(pl. specify the name of Branch through which B.G
is issued) hereinafter referred to as “the Bank”, (which expression shall unless it be repugnant to
the context or meaning thereof be deemed to include its successors and permitted assigns).
5. NOW THEREFORE, in consideration inter alia of the Purchaser granting the Suppliers the
Contract, the Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees and undertakes, on a
written demand, to immediately pay to the Purchaser any amount so demanded (by way of one or
more claims) not exceeding in the aggregate [Rs. ].……………)in words) without any demur,
reservation, contest or protest and/or without reference to the Supplier and without the Purchaser
needing to provide or show to the Bank ,grounds or reasons or give any justification for such
demand for the sum/s demanded.
6. The decision of the Purchaser as to whether the Supplier has fulfilled its obligation or not
towards set-off of Advance Payment extended by the Purchaser to the Supplier shall be final and
binding on the Bank and the Supplier. The Bank acknowledges that any such demand by the
Purchaser of the amounts payable by the Bank to the Purchaser shall be final, binding and
conclusive evidence in respect of the amounts payable by the Supplier to the Purchaser. Any
such demand made by the Purchaser on the Bank shall be conclusive and binding,
notwithstanding any difference between the Purchaser and the Supplier or any dispute raised,
invoked, threatened or pending before any court, tribunal, arbitrator or any other authority.
7. The Bank also agrees that the Purchaser at its option shall be entitled to enforce this
Guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor without proceeding against the Supplier
notwithstanding any other security or other guarantee that the Purchaser may have in relation to
the Supplier’s liabilities.

8. The Bank hereby waives the necessity for the Purchaser first demanding the aforesaid
amounts or any part thereof from the Supplier before making payment to the Purchaser and
further also waives any right the Bank may have of first requiring the Purchaser to use its legal
remedies against the Supplier, before presenting any written demand to the Bank for payment
under this Guarantee.
9. The Bank’s obligations under this Guarantee shall not be reduced by reason of any partial
performance of the Contract. The Bank’s obligations shall not be reduced by any failure by the
Purchaser to timely pay or perform any of its obligations under the Contract.
10. The Bank further unconditionally and unequivocally agrees with the Purchaser that the
Purchaser shall be at liberty, without the Bank’s consent and without affecting in any manner its
rights and the Bank’s obligation under this Guarantee, from time to time, to:
i. vary and/or modify any of the terms and conditions of the Contract;
ii. forebear or enforce any of the rights exercisable by the Purchaser against the Supplier under
the terms and conditions of the Contract; or and the Bank shall not be relieved from its liability by
reason of any such act or omission on the part of the Purchaser or any indulgence shown by the
Purchaser to the Supplier or any other reason whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties
would, but for this provision, have the effect of relieving the Bank of its obligations under this
Guarantee.
11. This Guarantee shall not be discharged by any change in the constitution or composition of
the Supplier, and this Guarantee shall not be affected or discharged by the liquidation, winding-
up, bankruptcy, reorganisation, dissolution or insolvency of the Supplier or any of them or any
other circumstances whatsoever.
12. This Guarantee shall be in addition to and not in substitution or in derogation of any other
security held by the Purchaser to secure the obligations of the Supplier under the Contract.
13. NOTWITHSTANDING anything herein above contained, the liability of the BANK under this
Guarantee shall be restricted to _________________(insert an amount equal to ___ percent
(__%) of the Contract Value) and this Guarantee shall be valid and enforceable and expire on
_____________(pl. specify date) or unless a suit or action to enforce a claim under this
Guarantee is filed against the Bank on or before the date of expiry.
14. On termination of this Guarantee, all rights under the said Guarantee shall be forfeited and
the Bank shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities hereunder.
15. The Bank undertakes not to revoke this Guarantee during its validity except with the prior
written consent of the Purchaser and agrees that any change in the constitution of the Bank or
the Supplier shall not discharge our liability hereunder.
16. Purchaser may assign this Guarantee to any Person or body whether natural, incorporated or
otherwise under intimation to the Bank. The Bank shall be discharged of its obligations hereunder
by performance in accordance with the terms hereof to such assignee without verifying the
validity / legality / enforceability of the assignment.
17. This Guarantee shall be governed by the laws of India. Any suit, action, or other proceeding
arising out of, connected with, or related to this Guarantee or the subject matter hereof shall be
subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of ________ (pl. specify the city ) , India.
Dated this ………… day of ………….. …20XX at …………….
(Signature)
.....................................................................
(Name)
.....................................................................

(Designation with Bank Stamp)
Attorney as per
Power of Attorney No...................................
Date............................................................
Annexure – FORMAT OF PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

(To be executed on a Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of appropriate value)
This Guarantee made at __________ this [___] day of [_____] 20XX
1. WHEREAS M/s. ______________(Pl specify the name of the Company)_, a Company within
the meaning of the Companies Act, 1956 having its Registered Office at
________________________ hereinafter referred to as the “ Purchaser ”, (which expression
shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its successors, administrators,
executors and assigns).
2. AND WHEREAS the Purchaser has entered into a contract for ____________(Please specify
the nature of contract here ) vide Contract No. __________dated __________(hereinafter
referred to as the “Contract”) with M/s.________________, (hereinafter referred to as “the
Supplier”, which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof be deemed
to mean and include their successors and assigns) for providing Goods and/or services on the
terms and conditions as more particularly detailed therein.
3. AND WHEREAS as per clause ____ of Special conditions of Contract/GTC, the Supplier is
obliged to provide to the Purchaser an unconditional bank guarantee for an amount equivalent to
_______ percent (__%) of the total Contract Value for the timely completion and faithful and
successful execution of the Contract from [____________] pl. specify the name of Bank) having
its head/registered office at [____________] through its branch in ______(pl. specify the name of
Branch through which B.G is issued) hereinafter referred to as “the Bank”, (which expression
shall unless it be repugnant to the context or meaning thereof be deemed to include its
successors and permitted assigns).
4. NOW THEREFORE, in consideration inter alia of the Purchaser granting the Suppliers the
Contract, the Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees and undertakes, on a
written demand, to immediately pay to the Purchaser any amount so demanded (by way of one or
more claims) not exceeding in the aggregate [Rs. ].…………………(in words) without any demur,
reservation, contest or protest and/or without reference to the Supplier and without the Purchaser
needing to provide or show to the Bank ,grounds or reasons or give any justification for such
demand for the sum/s demanded.
5. The decision of the Purchaser to invoke this Guarantee and as to whether the Supplier has not
performed its obligations under the Contract shall be binding on the Bank. The Bank
acknowledges that any such demand by the Purchaser of the amounts payable by the Bank to
the Purchaser shall be final, binding and conclusive evidence in respect of the amounts payable
by the Supplier to the Purchaser. Any such demand made by the Purchaser on the Bank shall be
conclusive and binding, notwithstanding any difference between the Purchaser and the Supplier
or any dispute raised, invoked, threatened or pending before any court, tribunal, arbitrator or any
other authority.
6. The Bank also agrees that the Purchaser at its option shall be entitled to enforce this
Guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor without proceeding against the Supplier
notwithstanding any other security or other guarantee that the Purchaser may have in relation to
the Supplier’s liabilities.
7. The Bank hereby waives the necessity for the Purchaser first demanding the aforesaid
amounts or any part thereof from the Supplier before making payment to the Purchaser and

further also waives any right the Bank may have of first requiring the Purchaser to use its legal
remedies against the Supplier, before presenting any written demand to the Bank for payment
under this Guarantee.
8. The Bank’s obligations under this Guarantee shall not be reduced by reason of any partial
performance of the Contract. The Bank’s obligations shall not be reduced by any failure by the
Purchaser to timely pay or perform any of its obligations under the Contract.
9. The Bank further unconditionally and unequivocally agrees with the Purchaser that the
Purchaser shall be at liberty, without the Bank’s consent and without affecting in any manner its
rights and the Bank’s obligation under this Guarantee, from time to time, to:
(i) vary and/or modify any of the terms and conditions of the Contract;
(ii) Forebear or enforce any of the rights exercisable by the Purchaser against the Supplier under
the terms and conditions of the Contract; or
(iii) Extend and/or postpone the time for performance of the obligations of the Supplier under the
Contract;
and the Bank shall not be relieved from its liability by reason of any such act or omission on the
part of the Purchaser or any indulgence shown by the Purchaser to the Supplier or any other
reason whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would, but for this provision, have the
effect of relieving the Bank of its obligations under this Guarantee.
10. This Guarantee shall be a continuing bank guarantee and shall not be discharged by any
change in the constitution or composition of the Supplier, and this Guarantee shall not be affected
or discharged by the liquidation, winding-up, bankruptcy, reorganisation, dissolution or insolvency
of the Supplier or any of them or any other circumstances whatsoever.
11. This Guarantee shall be in addition to and not in substitution or in derogation of any other
security held by the Purchaser to secure the performance of the obligations of the Supplier under
the Contract.
12. NOTWITHSTANDING anything herein above contained, the liability of the BANK under this
Guarantee shall be restricted to ___________________(insert an amount equal to ___ percent
(__%) of the Contract Value) and this Guarantee shall be valid and enforceable and expire on
_____________(pl. specify date) or unless a suit or action to enforce a claim under this
Guarantee is filed against the Bank on or before the date of expiry.
13. On termination of this Guarantee, all rights under the said Guarantee shall be forfeited and
the Bank shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities hereunder.
14. The Bank undertakes not to revoke this Guarantee during its validity except with the prior
written consent of the Purchaser and agrees that any change in the constitution of the Bank or
the Supplier shall not discharge its liability hereunder.
15. Purchaser may assign this Guarantee to any Person or body whether natural, incorporated or
otherwise under intimation to the Bank. The Bank shall be discharged of its obligations hereunder
by performance in accordance with the terms hereof to such assignee without verifying the
validity / legality / enforceability of the assignment.
16. This Guarantee shall be governed by the laws of India. Any suit, action, or other proceeding
arising out of, connected with, or related to this Guarantee or the subject matter hereof shall be
subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of ________ (pl. specify the city ) , India.
Dated this ………… day of ………….. …20XX at …………….
(Signature)
.....................................................................

(Name)
.....................................................................
(Designation with Bank Stamp)
Attorney as per
Power of Attorney No...................................
Date....................................................

Beneficiary's bank detail with IFSC Code:
1. Name of the Bank: Axis Bank Limited
2. Branch Name & Full Address: C-58, Basement & Ground Floor, Preet Vihar, Main
Vikas Marg, New Delhi 110092
3. Branch Code: 055
4. Bank Account No: 911020005246567
5. IFSC Code: UTIB0000055
Annexure – FORMAT OF WARRANTY/GUARANTEE CERTIFICATE-SUPPLY
BSES YAMUNA POWER LIMITED, Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma, Delhi -110032.
Ref. Purchase Order No. :
Dear Sir,
We hereby confirm that the.................dispatched to BSES YAMUNA POWER LTD vide
invoice no.......... DT..........is exactly of the same nature and description as per above
mentioned Purchase Order.
We further confirm that we will replace/repair our........free of cost If found any
manufacturing defect during......months from the date of dispatch of material
or......months from the data of commissioning whichever is earlier.
Vendors Name & Signature
Annexure – WARRANTY / DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD –SERVICE
Performance requirements of the works completed is as per detailed specifications and standards
specified and to be adhered to strictly. In-case of deficiency, the same is to be rectified / redone
to meet the specifications by the contractor within stipulated schedule or any extension thereof.
The Contractor shall be liable to rectify all defects except those arising out of normal wear and
tear, in the works done by the Contractor under this contract, or from any act or omission of the
contractors for a period of 36 months will depend on individual contract period package to
package from the date of Handing over the works to the Employer / Owner.

Annexure – NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE FORMAT
NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE BY CONTRACTOR

(To be issued on letterhead of Contractor)
To ,
BSES YAMUNA POWER LIMITED,

Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma,
Delhi -110032.
Name of the Project:

Contract No.:
Date of Contract:
Name of the Contractor:
We, M/s
____________________________________________________________(Contractor) do
hereby acknowledge and confirm that we have claimed Rs. ________________________
(Rs.
________________________________________________________________________)
towards full and final settlement of our claims from BSES Yamuna Power Limited, in respect
of the aforesaid WO/PO/Contract No.: #######. Dated. ####. including all amendments, if
any, to the said Contract, to our entire satisfaction and we further confirm that we have no
claim whatsoever pending with BSES Yamuna Power Limited under or in respect of the said
Contract.
Notwithstanding any protest, note or objection recorded or raised by us in any
correspondence, documents, measurement books and / or final bills etc.
(a) we confirm that BSES Yamuna Power Limited stands fully discharged of all its obligations,
(b) we shall make no claim of any nature on BSES Yamuna Power Limited or any of its
affiliates or personnel, and
(c) we waive all our rights to lodge any claim or protest in future, in respect of the said
Contract.
We have paid in full all applicable duties, levies, taxes and statutory and other amounts
payable by us in connection with the above-mentioned Contract and amounts payable to or in
relation to third parties engaged by us including our contractors, suppliers, employees and
labour. No payment in this regard is pending or unpaid and we have no (and shall have no)
claim against BSES Yamuna Power Limited in this regard.
No refund has been received/ is envisaged to be received or reasonably believed to be
receivable on account of taxes, duties or any other payment made by us in respect of the
Contract. In case any refund corresponding to any amount paid or reimbursed by BSES
Yamuna Power Limited is received in the future, the same will be passed on to BSES Yamuna
Power Limited promptly and without any demand from them in this regard.
We are issuing this "NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE" in favor of BSES Yamuna Power Limited
with full knowledge of its contents and with our free consent without any influence,
misrepresentation, coercion etc.
Date: Signature:
Place: Name:
Designation:
(Company Seal)

Annexure – FORMAT FOR LETTER OF INDEMNITY
Format for Letter of Indemnity

(Notes: Preferably shall be obtained on Stamp paper of appropriate value as applicable at the
place of execution, if not, then at least on the letterhead of the Contractor)
Place:_______________
Date: ________________
To,
BSES Yamuna Power Limited, Shaktikiran Building, Karkardooma, Delhi -110032.
Dear Sirs,
WO/PO/Contract No. _______________Dated _/__/___
For __________________________________________________________
Settlement of Dues
In consideration of your awarding the subject Work Order/Purchase Order/Contract to us and
in further consideration of your having agreed to pay our final bill towards settlement of the
dues in respect of the subject Work Order/Purchase Order/Contract, inter alia, on our
assurances and representations that :
(a) We have paid in full all amounts payable by us including but not limited to duties, levies,
taxes, cess, octroi, royalties, statutory payments, amounts payable to or in relation to third
parties engaged by us including our contractors, suppliers, employees and labour, and
(b) we have fully complied with all requirements under applicable laws in connection with the
subject Purchase Order/Work Order/Contract,
We_____________________________________________________________________,
unconditionally and irrevocably agree and undertake, to pay and/or settle entirely at our own
cost and indemnify, defend and hold harmless you, your affiliates and your/your affiliates'
personnel, directors and representatives, (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Indemnified
Parties") from and against any and all liabilities, judgments, damages, losses, claims, costs
and expenses, claimed, suffered or incurred or, likely to be claimed, suffered or incurred at
any time by or against the Indemnified Parties or any of them as a result of, or arising out of,
or in any way related to any failure or delay in payment of any of the amounts or compliances
by us as aforesaid for any reason whatsoever.
Any notice(s) or communication(s) by you shall be sufficient proof that the Indemnified Parties
have suffered or incurred loss, damages, liabilities etc. as aforesaid and we shall upon receipt
of such notice(s) or communication(s) immediately, without any delay or demur or contest,
make payment to you of the entire amount demanded under the said notice(s) or
communication(s).
This letter of indemnity shall be in addition to and not in derogation of any other indemnity/
guarantee and/or security which we may have executed in your favor or your rights and
entitlements under the contract.
This letter shall be governed by and construed and interpreted to accordance with the laws of
India, and shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of law at Mumbai.
Yours faithfully,
For M/s______________________
Authorized Signatory

ANNEXURE - SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS
Vendor shall refrain from taking any deviations on this TENDER. Still in case of any deviations, all
such deviations from this tender shall be set out by the Bidder, Clause by Clause in this schedule
and submit the same as a part of the Technical Bid.
Unless specifically mentioned in this schedule, the tender shall be deemed to confirm the
BYPL’s specifications:
SL NO Clause No. Details of deviation with justifications

Scanned by CamScanner
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
SCOPE OF WORK FOR MOTIA KHAN GRID S/S
INDEX
1.0 INTENT.................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.0 SITE DETAILS ...................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 BIDDER’S SCOPE ................................................................................................................................ 3
4.0 FREE ISSUE ITEMS.......................................................................................................................... 13
5.0 APPROVED MAKE LIST ................................................................................................................. 13
6.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM OF 33KV GIS ....................................................................................... 14
Page 2 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
1.0 INTENT
• This document defines the scope for turnkey execution of system upgradation project at
33/11kV Motia Khan Grid Substation. This document shall be read in conjunction with all
technical documents enclosed in the tender.
• In event of any contradiction between the tender documents, the most stringent one shall
govern.
2.0 SITE DETAILS

• 33/11kV Motia Khan Grid Substation is situated Near Mangla Hospital Sadar Bazaar, New
Delhi 110055. Motia Khan Grid is an air insulated (outdoor) substation having one bus with
sectionaliser configuration contains (a) 4 line bays (b) 3 Transformer Bays (c) 1 Bus
Sectionaliser Bay
• Bidder shall depute its representative at site to assess the condition of existing infrastructure
in detail prior to submission of bid.
3.0 BIDDER’S SCOPE

• Bidder’s Scope includes design, engineering, manufacture, shop testing, inspection,
packing, dispatch, supply, loading, unloading, storage at site, assembly, erection, civil,
structural, architectural work, complete pre-commissioning checks, testing & commissioning
at site, obtaining statutory clearance & certification from Electrical Inspector and handing
over of equipment covered under scope of this document to BSES Yamuna Power Ltd.
• Details are given in subsequent sections. It shall be noted that project execution shall ensure
uninterrupted operation of grid.
3.1 DESIGN & ENGINEERING
• Detailed design and engineering of complete project as per tender requirements shall be in
bidder’s scope. General guidelines for design are given below
3.1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
• The bidder shall comply with latest Indian/International standard and CEA regulations. Refer
respective equipment specification for applicable standards.
3.1.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
3.1.2.1 Average grade atmosphere Heavily polluted, Dry

3.1.2.2 Maximum altitude above sea level 1000M
3.1.2.3 Ambient air temperature Highest 50Deg C,Average 40Deg C
3.1.2.4 Minimum ambient air temperature 0 Deg C
3.1.2.5 Relative Humidity 100%
3.1.2.6 Rainfall 750mm concentrated in four months
3.1.2.7 Seismic Condition Zone IV
3.1.2.8 Max. Relative Humidity 100%
3.1.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
3.1.3.1 Nominal Voltage kV 33 11

3.1.3.2 Rated voltage kV 36 12
Page 3 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
3.1.3.3 Power Frequency (kV rms) with stand voltage 70 28

3.1.3.4 Basic Insulation Level KVp 170 75
3.1.3.5 Rated Frequency Hz 50 +/- 5 % 50 +/ - 5 %
3.1.3.6 System Neutral Earthing Solidly Grounded Solidly Grounded
3.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Specification
S No. Items Remarks UOM Qty
Number
33 kV GIS with Double

3.2.1 Bus Bar Arrangement as
per SLD Attached
a) For converting
Incomer Feeder with Outdoor Yard into Indoor
3.2.1.1 Switchgear. Nos 4 SP-MVGIS-24-
Line PT
b) Arrangement also R3
3.2.1.2 Transformer Feeder includes Bus Riser Panel Nos 4
wherever applicable
3.2.1.3 Bus Coupler Nos 1
3.2.1.4 Bus PT Nos 2

25 MVA, 33 kV/11 kV
Power Transformer SP-TRPU-01-
3.2.2 Nos 1
(Including Marshalling R4
Box and NIFPS)
3.2.3 11 kV Switchboard
Incoming panel (with
3.2.3.1 Nos 1
Line PT)
Bus Coupler
Panel(Having Provision
3.2.3.2 for termination of 3 x 1c x Nos 1
1000sqmm cable per
phase)
3.2.3.3 Bus PT Nos 1
Arrangement also includes
SP-HTSWG-
Bus Riser Panel wherever
3.2.3.4 Capacitor Panel Nos 1 01 –R3
applicable
3.2.3.5 Outgoing Panel Nos 8
Adaptor Panel (For
coupling existing 11 kV
switchboard to New 11
kV Switchboard panel.
3.2.3.6 Nos 1
Panel shall have
provision for termination
of 3 x 1c x 1000sqmm
cable per phase.)
11 kV Auto Switched SP-ASCB-82-
3.2.4 Nos 1
Capacitor Bank R2
Page 4 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
Specification
Number
Straight Through Joint For joining power cable and
SP-HCSTJ-03-
3.2.5 for 33kV 3c x 400sqmm extending power cable from Nos 8
R1
cable Yard to GIS Panel Room
GIS termination kit for
3.2.6 33kV, 3c x 400sqmm For termination at 33kV GIS Nos 16
cable
End Termination kit for For connecting cable to the
3.2.7 33kV, 3CX400 sqmm bushing of power Nos 8
Cable Transformers
a) For Terminating 11 kV
Cables at all 11 kv incomer
end(1 New and 3 Existing
Switchgears)
SP-HSGTK-
End termination kit for b) For Terminating 11 kV
04-R1
3.2.8 11kV, 1c x 1000sqmm Cables at all Transformer Set 72
cable end(1 New and 3 Existing
Power Transformers)
c) For coupling bus of
new 11 kV Switchboard and
existing 11 kV Switchboard
For Terminating 11 kV
End Termination kit for
Cables at 11 kV Capacitor
3.2.9 11kV, 3c x 300sqmm Nos 4
Bank end and 11 kV
cable
Capacitor Panel end
400 KVA Station SP-TRDU-01-
3.2.10 Nos 1
Transformer R6
a) On all cable specified
in “Scope of Supply” and
3.2.11 Fire Resistant Coating LOT 1
“Free issue Items”
b) Fire rating-4 hours
For all cables entering and
3.2.12 Cable Sealing System exiting the Proposed LOT 1
Susbtation Building
Mounting Cable for four
3.2.13 Cable Support Structure Power Transformers, LOT 1
Switchgear etc
For All four Power
Clamps, Connectors &
3.2.14 Transformers (One new and LOT 1
Accessories
three Existing)
For 33 kV and 11 kV side
3.2.15 Insulating Sleeves LOT 1
Transformer bus bars
SP-ACDB-
3.2.16 AC Distribution Board Nos 1
113-R0
SP-DCDB-
3.2.17 DC Distribution Board Nos 1
129-R0
SP-SMPSBC-
3.2.18 SMPS Battery Charger Nos 1
153-R0
Page 5 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
Specification
Number
Battery bank shall be
SP-TSLBB-
3.2.19 50 V Li Ion Battery Bank installed at existing Battery Nos 1
137-R0
Bank Room
a) For items specified in
“Scope of Supply” including
interlocks with existing
Control Cables with system
proper ferruling and b) From Marshalling Box SP-EWLP-01-
3.2.20 LOT 1
tagging along with of Existing Power R1
glands and lugs Transformers to 33 KV &
11KV Switchgear Panel
c) For Equipment to be
shifted
“Scope of Supply”
b) For Equipment to be SP-LTPC-63-
3.2.21 LT Power Cable LOT 1
shifted R0
c) Battery charger to Li
Ion Battery Bank
Complete Switchgear SP- INSFLR-
3.2.22 Insulated Floor Coating LOT 1
Room(Newly Built) 103-R0
a) For routing Power, LT
and Control Cables
Cable Tray including b) For items specified in
3.2.23 bends etc with 50% “Scope of Supply” and “Free LOT 1
spare capacity in each Issue Items”
c) 50% spare capacity in
each is tray is required
a) Earthing of all Grid
Substation(Including earthing
of existing equipment and
Newly installed Equipment)
b) Complete earthing of
outdoor yard SP-GES-107-
3.2.24 Complete Grid Earthing LOT 1
c) Joining of new R0
earthing with old one shall
also be in vendor’s scope
d) Soil resistivity test
shall also be in vendor’s
scope
For items specified in “Scope SP-TSFPMK-
3.2.25 Fire protection system LOT 1
of Supply” 134-R0
“Scope of Supply”
Illumination and lighting b) For Proposed SP-TSILS-
3.2.26 LOT 1
system Substation Building 135-R0
c) For Outdoor Yard
Page 6 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
Specification
Number
Exhaust and Ventilation SP-EVS-130-
3.2.27 For Proposed Building LOT 1
system R0
For Outdoor Yard and
3.2.28 Lightning Protection LOT 1
Proposed Substation Building
For Lighting, Ceiling Fans,
3.2.29 Conduits Power Sockets, Exhaust LOT 1
Fans, etc.
As specified in Scope of SP-TSCWMK-
3.2.30 Material for Civil Works LOT 1
Work 132-R1
Motorized De watering
3.2.31 For water seepage LOT 1
Facility
Associated SCADA SP-TSSNI-
3.2.32 LOT 1
Works 136-R0
Painting of Feeder
As per Engineer Incharge
3.2.33 names (SCADA code, LOT 1
Guidance
Asset Code, etc)
Licensed programming
software and
3.2.34 No 1
communication cord for
offered numerical relays
a) One for Tools
Special Tools with
b) One for
3.2.35 almirah (For Storing No 2
Recommended/Mandatory
Spares/Tools)
Spares
3.2.36 SLD of Grid Covered In Acrylic Sheet No 1
Emergency Exit Floor For Proposed Substation
3.2.37 LOT 1
Marking Building
A-Type ladder (3 feet
height) to be supplied.(
3.2.38 No 1
For viewing and
operating Relays)
Recommended/Mandato
3.2.39 ry Spares as per LOT 1
Specification
3.3 SCOPE OF WORK
• Broad scope of work is specified below. Refer respective equipment/work specifications for
detailed scope of work.
S. No Items Remarks Unit Qty

Erection, Testing and
3.3.1 Commissioning of all items LOT 1
specified in “Scope of Supply”
Erection, Testing and
3.3.2 LOT 1
Commissioning of all items
Page 7 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1

specified in “Free Issue Items”
One day classroom training at BYPL

Training Centre and one day onsite
3.3.3 Training on O&M of 33 KV GIS Days 2
training. Training shall be provided by
Domain experts only
Training on application, One day classroom training at BYPL
programming, testing and Training Centre and one day onsite
3.3.4 Days 2
commissioning of Numerical training. Training shall be provided by
Relays Domain experts only
Training on commissioning,
3.3.5 operations and maintenance of Days 2
11KV Switchgear
Domain experts only
Training on commissioning,
3.3.6 operations and maintenance of Days 2
NIFPS
Domain experts only
a) For details refer spec no. SP-
TSCWMK-132-R1
3.3.7 Civil Works
b) For items specified in “Scope
of Supply” , “Free issue Items”
3.3.7.1 Foundation Works LOT 1
3.3.7.2 Channel angle arrangement LOT 1
3.3.7.3 Leveling LOT 1
3.3.7.4 Soil Testing For Designing Purpose LOT 1
3.3.7.5 Designing and Drawing LOT 1

Demolishing of Building Consisting of
Cash office and its nearby Area of
3.3.7.6 Demolishing of Building to FGL Motia Khan Grid S/S. Area to be LOT 1
demolished is 23.5m X 5.5 mm X
Height (As per Site Condition)
3.3.7.7 Trench LOT 1
3.3.7.8 Checkered Plate LOT 1

a) Joining of all Power
Transformer (Existing + Proposed)
3.3.7.9 Sump Pit No 1
with Respective Soak Pit
b) Capacity=20000 Litre
3.3.7.10 Soak Pit For New Power Transformer No 1
3.3.7.11 Fire Walls LOT 1
Page 8 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
3.3.7.12 Fencing LOT 1
3.3.7.13 New Gate For Power Transformer Entry and Exit No 1
3.3.7.14 Road For Power Transformer Entry and Exit LOT 1
3.3.7.15 Yard Development For Complete outdoor Yard Area LOT 1
a) ACDB, DCDB, Station

Transformer, Outdoor Yard (including
Foundations, Structures, Battery
Charger, BMKs, CTs, PTs, CVT,s,,
Dismantling of Old items
LAs, Isolators, Circuit Breakers etc)
mentioned and
3.3.7.16 CRPs, RTCC Panels, cables, Battery LOT 1
shifting/disposing as per Site
Bank and its structure
Engineer
b) It also includes disconnection
and reconnection of Power and
Control cable of equipment specified
above
a) Existing Cash Office has to be
shifted in the same grid S/S
b) It includes dismantling of
Existing Cash office and Construction
of cash office within Grid Premise with
3.3.7.17 Shifting of Cash Office Dimension 3.5 m x 7m x 3.5 m LOT 1
c) Cash office shall have 2 Cash
Counters, Computer, UPS, Almirah,
Water cooler, AC, Place for customer
to stand. Fans, tube lights, power
points.
a) If required, Tree cutting shall
be in vendor’s scope
3.3.7.18 Tree Cutting b) Permission for the same from LOT 1
competent authority shall also be in
vendor’s scope
3.3.7.19 Substation Building At the place of demolished Area No 1
3.3.7.19.1 Foundation LOT 1
3.3.7.19.2 Windows LOT 1
3.3.7.19.3 Doors LOT 1

a) For Power Cables and control
cables in cable cellar room
3.3.7.19.4 Support Structure LOT 1
b) For Cables terminating at 11
kV and 33 kV switchgear
Page 9 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
3.3.7.19.5 Staircase LOT 1
3.3.7.19.6 Flooring LOT 1
3.3.7.19.7 Finishing LOT 1
3.4 SCOPE DEMARCATION
Bidder's
S. No Head BYPL Remarks
Scope
3.4.1 Testing Equipments
3.4.2 Lighting Arrangement
Construction Power and
3.4.3
Construction Water
Safety and Security of
3.4.4 Manpower( Labor, Engineers,
Supervisors etc)
Various Tools and Tackles
3.4.5
related to Job
It includes transportation of
Loading, Unloading and dismantled equipment to BYPL
3.4.6
Transportation of Material store in stacked manner. It also
includes Free Issue Items
Cleanliness around work
3.4.7
premises
3.4.8 Document/Drawing Submission
3.4.9 Document/Drawing Approval
Security and Safety of material
3.4.10
until handover
Various Machines e.g. Crane,
3.4.11 Hydra, JCB etc to complete the
Job
Maintenance of Equipments
3.4.12 Until Handover to Engineer
Incharge and EHV O&M
Only statutory fees will be borne
3.4.13 Electrical Inspector Clearance by BYPL
Permit issuing agency for
3.4.14
Works inside BYPL Premises
Permit Should be applied to
Engineer In charge prior to start
of work. Isolation & permit of only
3.4.15 Permit requesting Agency one Feeder at a time, shall be
given at a time, during final hook
up. All necessary preparation
Page 10 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
Bidder's
S. No Head BYPL Remarks
Scope
works to be made, in order to
minimize the Shutdown Time.
After handing over the

equipments, contractor has to
Temporary office near work
3.4.16
premises evacuate the premises within one
week otherwise deemed fit action
will be taken
Temporary store near work
3.4.17
premises
Yard aesthetics at work place
Disposal of Scrap/Debris etc from
should be maintained at the
3.4.18
time and after the completion of site and complete cleaning of
working area till handover
Work
Any damages done to the
3.4.19 existing system, shall be
repaired/ rectified/ replaced
Clearance Certificate shall be
taken from BYPL Departments
(Quality, Safety, Protection, O&M,
SCADA, EHV, Civil, etc ) before
3.4.20 Clearance certificate Final Charging of the Systems.
Any Site Observations/ Punch
points, observed during
execution, shall be attended.
Various compliances pertaining
3.4.21
to Job IE rules, CEA Regulation 2010
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
• Following drawing/document are required for all equipment specified in “Scope of Supply”
(Refer equipment specification for details)
• Deficient/ improper document/ drawing submission shall be liable for rejection.
• Document check sheet compliance shall be provided at respective stage i.e. Technical bid,
Drawing Approval, Pre Dispatch, Pre closure.
• No submission is acceptable without check list compliance.
• Order of documents shall be stricty as per the technical bid check list.
• Note- Any drawing not included in the above table but necessary for detailed engineering
shall be deemed to be included in bidder’s scope.
Technical Drawing Pre- Pre-

S. No. Description
Bid Approval Dispatch Closure
3.5.1 Tender No. Required
3.5.2 Communication Details
3.5.2.1 Name of the Bidder Required
3.5.2.2 Name of Authorized contact Required
Page 11 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1

S. No. Description
person
Contact No. of Authorized contact
3.5.2.3 Required
person
E-mail id of Authorized contact
3.5.2.4 Required
person
3.5.3 Document Submission Format
Documents shall be submitted in
3.5.3.1 Box file/spiral binding. Any other Required
format is not acceptable
Index of documents with page
3.5.3.2 Required
numbers for each document
Separator with document
3.5.3.3 description shall be provided Required
before each document
Qualifying Requirement
3.5.4
Compliance
Summary of compliance of
qualifying criteria in tabular form
3.5.4.1 Required
along with summary of
documentary proof provided
Detailed Documents supporting
3.5.4.2 Required
compliance of qualifying criteria
Drawings/ Documents as per
3.5.5
Technical Specification.
Signed copy of technical
3.5.5.1 Required
specification
Type Test reports of offered
3.5.5.2 Required Required
model/ type/ rating
3.5.5.3 Deviation Sheet Required
3.5.5.4 Detailed Drawings Required Required
Other drawing/ documents
3.5.5.5 mentioned in technical Required Required
specification
Soft copy of complete technical
3.5.5.6 Required
bid in pen drive
Samples as per technical
3.5.5.7 Required
specification.
3.5.5.8 Design Calculation Required
Manufacturer's quality assurance
3.5.5.9 Required
plan
3.5.5.10 GTP Required
3.5.5.11 Inspection Reports Required
3.5.5.12 As manufacturing Drawings Required
Operation and Maintenance
3.5.5.13 Required
Manual
Page 12 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1

S. No. Description
3.5.5.14 As built Drawings Required
3.5.6 Soft Copy
3.5.6.1 Technical Bid in Pen drive Required
3.5.6.2 Through Mail Required Required Required
4.0 FREE ISSUE ITEMS
S No. Description UOM Qty Remarks

a) For extending incoming supply from
33 kV 3CX400 XLPE insulated, outdoor yard to 33 kV incoming panels
4.1 stranded aluminum conductor, LOT 1 b)For connecting all four power
PVC outer sheath Power cable Transformer (One new and three Existing)
from 33 kV Trafo panel
a) For 11 kV Bus Coupling by Adaptor
11 kV 1CX1000 sqmm XLPE
panel & Bus Coupler panel
insulated, stranded Aluminium
4.2 LOT 1 b) All four Power transformer (One new
conductor, PVC outer sheath
and three Existing) to 11 kV incoming
cable
Panel
11 kV 3CX300 sqmm XLPE
insulated, stranded aluminum
4.3 LOT 1 For 11 kV Capacitor Bank
conductor, PVC outer sheath
Power cable
5.0 APPROVED MAKE LIST

• Following table contains Approved Make List. Although, Any make other than specified in
table shall be subject to BSES Yamuna Power Limited Approval.
S. No Equipment MAKE
ABB/Schneider/Siemens/Transformer & Rectifiers/
5.1 Power Transformer
EMCO/ Bharat Bijlee/ BHEL/Toshiba/Voltamp/CGL
5.2 33 kV GIS ABB/Siemens/Schneider
5.3 11 kV AIS ABB/Siemens/Schneider/CGL
11 kV Auto Switched Capacitor
5.4 ABB/ EPCOS/Shreem
bank
5.5 Control cable Universal/KEI/GEMSCAB/Polycab/Torrent/Sterlite
ABB (R series), Siemens (Siprotec series) and
5.6 Numerical relays
Schneider / Alstom (Micom Series)
5.7 Cable sealing system Roxtec, MCT Brattberg
5.8 Fire retardant coating for cables 3M/Demech/Stanvac
5.9 Floor coating 3M/Demech/Stanvac
Page 13 of 14
SP-SWGIS-124-R1
1
SCOPE OF WORK
WOR FOR MOTIA KHAN GRID S/S
6.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM OF 33

33kV GIS
Page 14 of 14
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33KV GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
INDEX
1.0 REVISION RECORD .............................................................................................. 3

2.0 SCOPE ................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 4
4.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................ 4
5.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 4
6.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION...................................................................................... 5
7.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER & THREE POSITION DISCONNECTOR ............................. 8
8.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 9
9.0 BUSBARS .............................................................................................................. 9
10.0 EARTHING ........................................................................................................... 10
11.0 SURGE SUPPRESSOR....................................................................................... 11
12.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER ............................................................................... 11
13.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER................................................................................ 11
14.0 CABLE TERMINATION ........................................................................................ 11
15.0 METERS ............................................................................................................... 12
16.0 MULTIFUNCTION METER .................................................................................. 12
17.0 INDICATIONS & ALARMS ................................................................................... 12
18.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS ..................................................... 13
19.0 INTERNAL WIRING ............................................................................................. 13
20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS ............................................................................................ 14
21.0 PROTECTION AND CONTROL .......................................................................... 14
22.0 SPACE HEATERS, SOCKETS & ILLUMINATION LAMPS ................................. 19
23.0 NAMEPLATES AND MARKING ........................................................................... 19
24.0 FINISH .................................................................................................................. 21
25.0 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS ........................................................... 21
26.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING .............................................................................. 21
27.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX ..................................................... 22
28.0 PACKING ............................................................................................................. 24
29.0 SHIPPING ............................................................................................................ 25
30.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE................................................................................ 25
31.0 PROGRESS REPORTING................................................................................... 25
32.0 DEVIATION .......................................................................................................... 25
33.0 ACCESSORIES & SPARES ................................................................................ 26
ANNEXURE – A – TRANSFORMER MONITORING CUM AVR RELAY....................... 26
ANNEXURE – B – TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY PURCHASER) ................ 28
ANNEXURE – C – MANDATORY ACCESSORIES FOR EACH SWITCHBOARD SET 30
ANNEXURE – D – SPARES REQUIREMENT ............................................................... 30
ANNEXURE – E– GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY BIDDER) 31
ANNEXURE- F -SLD (F1-F6)………………………………………………………………..39
Page 2 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
1.0 REVISION RECORD

S. Item/
Change/ Addition Reason of Change/Addition
No Clause No
Introduction of Alarm and Lockout Stage Provision of two stage alert
1.1 6.3.1
in pressure indicators for gas pressure
1.2 6.12 Panel Dimension details specified For standardization
Inclusion of provision for manual
1.3 7.2.2 Operational flexibility
operation of three position disconnector
Current Transformer Type has been
Inclusion of all solid insulated
1.4 12.1 changed from cast resin to Solid
CTs
insulation with class of E or better.
Power Cable Termination from front/rear
1.5 14.1.1 For ease of Maintenance
only
1.6 14.1.2 Inclusion of Adaptor Plug For ease of Maintenance
Space requirement for energy meter
1.7 15.8 For energy meter installation
specified
Metering data integration with
1.8 16.0 Multifunction Meter included
SCADA
Inclusion of IEC 61850 Communication Adoption of latest protocol for
1.9 21.1.6
protocol in Relays relay communication
Inclusion of Back up distance protection
in Incomer relay if line differential relay is
1.10 21.2.1 taken as primary protection. Provision of For Backup Protection
relay at both ends have also been
included
To streamline
Inclusion of Drawing and Data
1.11 27 drawing/document
Submission Matrix
submission
Annex A Inclusion of IEC 61850 Communication Adoption of latest protocol for
1.12
(S.no 1.7) protocol in AVR relay communication
Annex D
1.13 SCADA Spares To meet contingency
(S.no 23)
2.0 SCOPE
a. This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply, erection &
commissioning of 33kV, Gas Insulated (GIS), metal-enclosed and factory
assembled switchgear.
b. This specification shall be used in conjunction with all specifications, switchgear
data sheets, 33kV switchgear single line diagrams, and other drawings attached to
the specification / purchase requisition.
Page 3 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS

Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of switchboards shall conform to
the latest edition of following –
3.1 Indian Electricity Rules 1956 Latest edition
3.2 Indian Electricity act 1910 Latest edition
IEC : 60694, IEC: 60298, IEC : 62271-200,
3.3 Switchgear and control gear IEC : 60529, IS: 3427, IS: 12729, IS:
12063, IS: 13947, IS: 9046
3.4 Circuit breaker IEC 62271 - 100, IS 13118, IS 2516
3.5 Isolators & earthing switches IEC 62271 - 102
3.6 Current transformers IS:2705, IEC:60185
3.7 Voltage transformer IS:3156, IEC:60186,
3.8 Indicating Instruments IS:1248
3.9 Energy meters IS 13010
3.10 Relays IS:8686, IS:3231, IS:3842
3.11 Control switches and push buttons IS 6875
3.12 HV fuses IS 9385
Arrangement of Switchgear bus bars,
3.13 IS:375
main connections and auxiliary wiring
Code of practice for phosphating iron &
3.14 IS 6005
steel
3.15 Colours for ready mixed paints IS 5
Code of practice for installation and
3.16 IS 3072
maintenance of switchgear
4.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS

4.1 Location Indoor
4.2 Average grade atmosphere Heavily polluted, Dry
4.3 Maximum altitude above sea level 1000M
4.4 Ambient air temperature Highest 500C Average 400 C
4.5 Minimum ambient air temperature 00C
4.6 Relative Humidity 100%
4.7 Rainfall 750mm concentrated in four months
4.8 Seismic Zone IV
5.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5.1 Type Switchgear shall be 33kV, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50Hz,
5.2 Earthing type Solidly Earth
5.3 Fault Current 26.3 kA for 3 sec
5.4 Rating As per Annexure –B (Technical Particulars) and
Annexure-F (SLD)
Page 4 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
6.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

6.1 Structural Requirements Switchgear shall be an indoor gas insulated and
metal-clad cubicle design with single/double bus bar
system in accordance with tender requirement. Refer
technical particulars given in Annexure-B and SLDs
given in annexure-F for details. Each Panel shall be
metal enclosed, free standing, floor mounting, flush
fronted and arranged to form a single structure with a
common bus bar assembly. Construction, including
cable entry, shall be vermin proof.
6.2 Compartments Switchgear should be completely partitioned from
panel to panel. Also, each panel should have separate
compartments for the following-
a. Busbars
b. Circuit breakers
c. Incoming/Outgoing power cables
d. LV compartment
6.3 High Voltage All high voltage parts (Including bus bars, core module
Compartments for Busbar with built in circuit breaker etc.) shall be located in a
and CB metal enclosure filled with an insulating inert gas. Gas
leakage rate for all gas filled compartments should be
less than 0.5 % per annum. Bidder shall specify the
type, quantity and operating pressure for all gas filled
compartments or equipment. Degree of protection for
HV compartment should be IP65.
6.3.1 Pressure Indicators A pressure indicator shall be provided for each gas
filled compartment and include a set of changeover
contacts with two stage alert i.e alarm and lockout.
Alarm stage shall be set appropriately to alert the
operator of the reduction in gas pressure. Lockout
stage shall be set to avoid any mal-operation in
absence of gas pressure.
6.4 HV Cable compartment Each panel shall have an air-insulated cable
connection compartment. Cable connection
compartment shall contain the cable sockets
accessible for fitting of the power cable plugs and the
test cable sockets. Cable compartment shall also
include provisions for conventional VT plug in
connections. Cable compartment should be IP4X
compliant.
6.5 Low voltage compartment It should contain the switch operating mechanisms
and all secondary equipment including the protection
and control system. All operating mechanisms shall be
motorized. Manual operation switches and mechanical
position indicators shall also be provided. Degree of
protection for LV compartment should be IP4X.
Page 5 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
6.6 Safety from Internal faults The structure, including doors and panels, shall be
capable of withstanding the internal pressures created
by faults within the structure (equal to the maximum
fault-current rating) without danger to the operating
personnel. Type test reports regarding internal arc
withstand performance shall be available with bids.
6.6.1 Passive Protection from A passive safety section shall ensure that hot gases
shall be guided via pressure relief disks from each
internal faults
compartment. The pressure relief duct ends shall be
guided to open air or fitted with absorbers to cool the
hot gases. Relief into a cable basement or cavity
below a false floor is not acceptable. Hazards to
persons or risk of fire shall be reliably prevented. An
arcing fault in one compartment should not cause
major damage to other compartments. Structure shall
be provided with barriers to prevent the transfer of
ionized gases between two adjacent compartments
except bus chamber. Separate pressure relief vents
shall be provided in bus bar, cable and circuit breaker
compartments to release arc fault pressure quickly
and safely. The orientation of pressure relief vents and
gas exhaust ducts as necessary shall be coordinated
with BUYER at the bid stage.
6.6.2 Internal arc classification As per Annexure-B (Technical Particulars)
6.7 Workability Switchgear shall be designed and constructed to
facilitate inspection, cleaning, repair and maintenance
and to ensure absolute safety during such work.
Interlocks, busbar shutters and covers shall be
provided to prevent incorrect or unsafe operation and
to prevent access to live parts. It shall be possible to
work safely within individual panels, such as equipping
and commissioning of spare panels as well as
connecting main, control and auxiliary cabling, while
the remainder of the switchgear is energized.
6.8 Interchange-ability Similar parts and components shall be
interchangeable wherever practical. An interlock
system shall be provided to prevent the interchange of
modules with higher current rating with modules of
lower current rating. Replacement of circuit breaker
module shall be without interfering busbar operation
and without gas work.
Page 6 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
6.9 Doors and Covers a. All doors, hinged covers, and hinged panels larger
than 0.36 m2 in area shall open at least 95
degrees and be equipped with doorstops to hold
them in the open position. Door swing must allow
withdrawable equipment to be withdrawn. All such
doors and hinged covers shall be equipped with
handles and secured by captive bolts, lockable
with a key or pad-lockable.
b. Breaker compartment door shall open and close
without obstruction with and without rubber mats
laid in front of the switchgear. Door of one panel
should not cause hindrance for opening of
adjacent panel.
6.10 Cover Plates All cover plates that exceed 0.7 m2 that require
removal for installation or maintenance of the
equipment shall be equipped with lifting handles and
self-supporting lips. With the exception of the backs of
panels cover plates shall not exceed 1.1 m2 in area or
27 kg in weight, unless they are hinged and bolted or
locked. Cover plates shall be secured using captive
bolt fixings.
6.11 Test Facilities Each panel shall be provided with test facilities to
allow for:
a. Voltage testing of the primary circuit at rated
voltage with all parts connected to the facility
b. Current testing of primary circuit (primary injection
test)
c. Protection testing suitable for continuous operation
at maximum current
d. Access for test devices shall be clearly identified
and covers shall be secured using captive fixings
that require the use of a tool for access. Provision
shall be included to secure the test devices in the
test position.
6.12 Panel Dimension Maximum 2700mm, Operating height maximum
1600mm, Width-600 mm, Depth- 1800 mm
6.13 Extensibility Switchgear shall be arranged to permit future
extension at both ends. Bidder shall confirm the
minimum safe operational clearances around the
switchgear.
6.14 Panel Base Frame Steel Base frame as per manufacturer’s standard.
Bidder shall provide facilities for bolting the switchgear
to its foundation. Such facilities shall be suitable for
the specified seismic service.
6.15 Non- tiered construction Incoming and bus-section units shall be located in
non-tiered separate panels.
Page 7 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
7.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER & THREE POSITION DISCONNECTOR
7.1 Circuit Breaker

7.1.1 Interrupting medium Vacuum in SF6 filled compartment
7.1.2 Breaker operation Three separate identical single pole units operated
through a common shaft
7.1.3 Operating Mechanism Re-strike free, Trip free, with electrical anti-pumping
feature
7.1.4 Type Motor wound, spring charged, stored energy type with
manual charging facility
7.1.5 Operation on supply failure One O-C-O operation possible after failure of power
supply to the spring charging motor
7.1.6 Shunt Release For closing and tripping
7.1.7 Number of Trip coils Two
7.1.8 Push buttons a. Manual / mechanical ON/ OFF / Emergency trip
push button
b. Emergency Off push button should be provided
with a protective flap.
c. Mechanical ON shall have padlocking facility
d. Labels giving clear instructions for manual
operation should be provided wherever
appropriate
7.1.9 Mechanical Indications a. On-Off
b. Operation counter
c. Mechanism charge/discharge
7.1.10 Position detection Through proximity sensors/Aux Switches
7.1.11 Breaker Control On panel front only
7.1.12 Technical particulars As per Annexure-B
7.2 Three position disconnector
7.2.1 Functions Three phase, three position suitable for-
a. Connecting
b. Disconnecting
c. Earthing
7.2.2 Type Motorized with provision for local and remote
operation. Operation of earth switch should be through
local only. Provision for Manual operation shall also be
there.
7.2.3 Position detection Through proximity sensors/Aux Switches
7.2.4 Mechanical indications Earthing switch close/open.
7.2.5 Padlocking facility For locking the earthing device in the open and close
position.
7.2.6 Rating Continuous and Short circuit rating should be same as
specified for switchgear.
Page 8 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
8.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

8.1 Mechanical and electrical a. To prevent earthing of an incoming supply which
interlock has not been isolated
b. To prevent switching on an incoming supply which
is earthed
c. To prevent earthing of feeder circuit when the
circuit breaker is in the closed position
d. To prevent switching on a circuit breaker when the
feeder is earthed
8.2 Breaker Operation
8.2.1 Closing from local Only when local/remote selector switch is in local
position
8.2.2 Closing from remote Only when local/remote selector switch is in remote
position
8.2.3 Tripping from local Only when local/remote selector switch is in local
position
8.2.4 Tripping from remote Only when local/remote selector switch is in remote
position
8.2.5 Tripping from protective Irrespective of position of local/remote switch
relays
8.2.6 Trip circuit supervision To be given for breaker close & open condition
8.2.7 Trip circuit supervision For indication, alarm & to inhibit closing of breaker
relay contact
8.2.8 Emergency trip push button Wired directly to trip coil (wired to Master trip relay if
contact second trip coil provided)
8.2.9 Emergency trip push button Wired to inhibit closing of breaker
contact
8.2.10 Master trip relay contact (if Wired to inhibit closing of breaker
given)
8.3 DC control supply bus in all Fed by two DC incoming sources in Bus coupler panel
panels with auto changeover facility
8.4 PT supply bus in all panels Fed normally by bus PT with automatic changeover
facility to incomer line PT
9.0 BUSBARS
9.1 Material Hard drawn electrolytic copper
9.2 Cross section Uniform throughout length of switchgear
9.3 Phase busbars The phase busbars shall be enclosed in individual or a
combined gas filled compartment. Busbars shall be
silver or tin-plated at joints. Provision shall be made at
the bolted connections to enable accessibility for
maintenance and extension where appropriate.
9.4 Marking All busbars and cable connections shall be marked to
indicate the phase colouring, which shall be red,
yellow and blue unless otherwise specified or explicitly
precluded by relevant national standards.
Page 9 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
9.5 Earth busbar An earth busbar, sized for the earth fault rating of the
electrical system and switchgear, shall be provided
along the full length of the switchgear structure. The
earth busbar shall have provision for earth cable
connections at each end.
9.6 Supports All phase and earth busbars and connections shall be
sized, braced and supported to withstand the
dynamic, dielectric stresses and thermal affects
resulting from the switchgear rated short circuit current
over the full length of the switchgear and carry
certification from a recognized testing authority.
9.7 Rating As per Annexure – B (Technical particulars) and
Annexure-F (Single line diagram).
10.0 EARTHING
10.1 Earthing of enclosure & All metallic non-current carrying parts of the
non -current carrying parts switchgear shall be bonded together and connected to
the switchgear earth busbar. The frame of each
functional unit and each device requiring earthing shall
be connected directly to the earth busbar. For direct
connection to the station earthing grid, earthing bolts
of at least 10mm shall be provided at both ends of the
main earth bar.
10.2 Busbar and Feeder Through three position switch
Earthing
10.3 Circuit breaker frame Integral earthing shall be provided on feeder/incoming
earthing circuit breakers for cable earthing, and on incoming or
bus coupler circuit breakers for busbar earthing.
10.4 Earthing of withdrawable Withdrawable parts shall be effectively earthed until
parts they are completely withdrawn with all power and
control connections disconnected.
10.5 Cable armour Earthing Provision shall be made, adjacent to the cable
termination, for connecting earthing cable armouring
to the earth busbar.
10.6 Hinged doors Earthed through flexible copper braid
10.7 Metallic cases of relays, Connected to the earth bus by independent copper
instruments and other LT wires of size not less than 2.5 sq. mm with green
panel mounted equipment colour insulation. For this purpose LT compartment
should have a clear designated earth bus to which
earth connections from all components are to be
connected.
10.8 CT and PT neutral Earthed at one place at the terminal blocks through
links.
10.9 Instructions Clear instructions, preferably pictorial, shall be
provided showing methods of earthing wherever
appropriate.
Page 10 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
11.0 SURGE SUPPRESSOR

11.1 Provision To be provided in all panels except bus coupler and
BPT.
11.2 Type Gapless, metal oxide type
11.3 Technical particulars As per Annexure –B (Technical particulars)
12.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

12.1 Type Solid insulation with class of E or better.
12.2 Location Shall be located outside the gas compartment.
Location shall be suitable for easy access to
secondary terminals, testing and replacement.
12.3 Rating plate Should be located at position so that the details can
be easily read.
Annexure-F (SLD)
13.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

13.1 Type Shall be cast resin type with insulation class of E or
better.
13.2 Disconnection provision Motorised Disconnecting switch with provision for
Manual operation.
Annexure-F (SLD)
14.0 CABLE TERMINATION

14.1 Power Cable termination
14.1.1 Cable entry Front / rear entry only. Socket and plug assembly
shall be provided for the field power cables. Facilities
shall be provided for cable testing including current
and voltage injection.
14.1.2 Adaptor Plug Plug has to be provided for connecting rear cable
directly on panel bushing in absence of front cable.
This will enable easy energization of panel with rear
cable in event the front cable is faulty. needs to be
removed for energizing the panelto bushing ncomer
panel in absence of front cable.
14.1.3 Cable size and nos. of runs 2 runs x 3C x 400sqmm XLPE insulated stranded
aluminium cable
14.1.4 Cable supports Cable supports shall be provided (where practicable)
by bidder to avoid undue strain on the cable
termination.
14.1.5 Gland plates Termination of single core cables shall be through a
non-magnetic metal panel or gland plate. Minimum air
clearances shall be maintained over and above cable
lugs and fixing bolts.
Page 11 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
14.1.6 Armour Earthing Provision should be made for bonding and earthing
any armour and/or concentric earth conductors.
14.2 Control Cable termination
14.2.1 Cable entry Bottom and front entry
14.2.2 Gland plate Undrilled 3mm CRCA
15.0 METERS
15.1 Mounting Flush mounted
15.2 Voltmeter Digital type with programmable ratio
15.3 Size 96x96 mm
15.4 Panels where to be Incomer and bus PT panel
provided
15.5 Voltmeter switch Inbuilt in meter
15.6 Accuracy Class 1.0
15.7 Auxiliary supply Universal type suitable for 230VAC and 50/220VDC
15.8 Energy meter provision Energy meter is not in supplier’s scope. Only space
and CT/PT wiring is to be provided in all panels
except bus coupler and bus PT. Dimension shall be
350(H)x200(W) mm2.
16.0 MULTIFUNCTION METER
16.1 Model Rish Delta Energy

16.2 Make Rishabh
16.3 SCADA Interfacing RS485 rear port suitable for integration on
Modbus Protocol
16.4 Size 96x96 mm2
16.5 Panels where to be provided All panels
16.6 Accuracy Class 1
16.7 Auxiliary Supply 48 – 240VDC and AC i.e universal type.
17.0 INDICATIONS & ALARMS

17.1 Indications Flush mounted, High intensity, clustered LED type
17.1.1 Breaker ON Red
17.1.2 Breaker Off Green
17.1.3 Isolator On Red
17.1.4 Isolator Off Green
17.1.5 Earth switch On Red
17.1.6 Earth switch Off Green
17.1.7 Spring Charged Blue
17.1.8 DC control supply fail Amber
Page 12 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
17.1.9 AC control supply fail Amber

17.1.10 Auto trip Amber
17.1.11 Heater circuit healthy Yellow (Indication with integrated push button for
checking)
17.1.12 Trip circuit healthy White
17.1.13 PT supply as applicable R,Y B
17.2 Alarm scheme with a. For DC fail, TC fail and CB auto trip in 11kV
isolation switch panels
b. For all signals wired to annunciator in 33kV panels
18.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS

18.1 Selector switches Flush mounted on LV compartment door, with
shrouded terminals
18.1.1 TNC switch with pistol grip Lockable, spring return to normal position for CB,
Isolator and earth switch control
18.1.2 Local / SCADA selector 2 pole
switch
18.1.3 Rotary ON/OFF switches For heater / illumination circuit
18.1.4 Rating 16 A
18.2 Push Button Flush mounted on LV compartment door, with
shrouded terminals
18.2.1 Emergency trip push Red color with stay put
button
18.2.2 Accept push buttons Black color – Trip alarm / DC fail alarm
18.2.3 Reset push buttons Yellow color – Trip alarm / DC fail alarm
18.2.4 Rating 10 A
19.0 INTERNAL WIRING

19.1 Grade and type 1100 V, PVC insulated, FRLS type stranded flexible
copper wire.
19.2 Size 2.5 sq mm for CT circuit, 1.5 sq mm for PT & control
circuits
19.3 Colour code
19.3.1 CT & PT R Ph – Red
Y Ph – Yellow
B Ph – Blue
Neutral – Black
19.3.2 Others DC– grey, AC-black, Earth – green
19.4 Ferrules At both ends of wire
19.5 Ferrule type Interlocked type (one additional red colour ferrule for
all wires in trip circuit)
19.6 Lugs Tinned copper, pre-insulated, ring type, fork type and
pin type as applicable. CT circuits should use ring
type lugs only.
Page 13 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
19.7 Spare contacts Spare contacts of relays and contactors etc. should be
wired upto the terminal block.
19.8 Panel wiring Panel wiring shall be on one side of the terminal block
only. No more than two wires shall be connected to a
terminal.
19.9 Interpanel wiring Interpanel wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage
transformer circuits, annunciation circuits and other
common services shall be provided on the same set
of terminals in all the panels with proper segregation.
Wires with ferrule to be terminated in the adjacent
shipping section should be supplied with one end
terminated and the other end bunched and coiled.
19.10 Wiring enclosure Plastic channels for panel wiring, PVC sleeves for
Inter panel wiring. Where wiring enters or passes
through compartments containing high voltage
apparatus, it shall be run in earthed continuous
metallic conduit/trunking without gaps, holes or joints.
20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS
20.1 Rating and Type 1100 V grade, moulded piece, stud type screw driver
operated terminals complete with insulated barriers,
washers, nuts and lock nuts.
20.2 Suitability For termination of minimum 6sqmm flexible copper
conductor.
20.3 Marking and covers White fibre markings strip with clear plastic, slip-on /
clip-on terminal covers to be provided.
20.4 Disconnecting Facility To be provided in CT and PT terminals
20.5 Shorting & Earthing Facility To be provided in CT Terminals
20.6 Spare Terminals 20% in each TB row
20.7 TB shrouds & separators Moulded non- inflammable plastic material
20.8 Clearance between 2 sets 100 mm min
of TB
20.9 Clearance with cable gland 250 mm min
plate
20.10 Clearance between AC / 100 mm min
DC set of TB
20.11 Test terminal blocks Screw driver operated stud type for metering circuit
21.0 PROTECTION AND CONTROL
21.1 Protection Relays – General Features

Numerical , microprocessor based with provision for
21.1.1 Technology and Functionality
multifunction protection, control, metering and monitoring
21.1.2 Mounting Flush Mounting, IP5X
Page 14 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
Hardware and software architecture shall be modular

and disconnectable to adapt the protection and control
21.1.3 Architecture
unit to the required level of complexity as per the
application.
Relay shall utilize a user friendly setting and operating
multi-lingual software in windows environment with
Programming and
21.1.4 menus and icons for fast access to the data required.
configuration
Programming software and communication cord for
offered relays should be included in scope of supply.
Communication Card of Relay shall have galvanic
21.1.5 Communication module Isolation from all other cards to prevent damage during
power system transients/Faults
RS485 rear port for interfacing with SCADA on IEC103
and Dual fibre optic port for interfacing with SCADA on
IEC 61850 with PRP compatibility. Through these ports
relays shall be connected to switches. If relays have any
21.1.6 SCADA Interface port other rear port, hardware/software required to achieve
the above said compatibility will be in supplier’s scope.
Ethernet switches at switchgear end shall be suitably
mounted in an auxiliary compartment in switchgear
panel.
SCADA functions in monitoring direction shall be
executed on SPI (Single Point Input) and DPI (Double
21.1.7 Processing Indications
Point Input). DPI shall only be used in case of Isolator
and Circuit breaker “close” and “open” indication.
Functionality of command processing offered for SCADA
interface shall include the processing of single and
double commands i.e SCO (Single Command Output)
21.1.8 Command Processing
and DCO (Double object command Output). DCO shall
only be used in case of Isolator and Circuit Breaker
close” and “open” command.
Front port (preferably serial) for configuration/data
download using PC. Licensed software and
21.1.9 PC Interface port communication cord, required for programming of
offered protection relays shall be provided with the
switchgear.
An alphanumeric key pad and graphical LCD display
with backlight indicating measurement values and
21.1.10 User Interface operating messages. It should be possible to access and
change all settings and parameters without the use of
PC.
Relay shall integrate all necessary protections for
different applications in accordance with IS and IEC.
21.1.11 Relay Characteristics Relay shall provide wide setting ranges and choice of all
IEC, IEEE and other tripping curves through a minimum
of two setting groups.
Page 15 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
Relay shall have the facility of recording of various

parameters during event/fault with option to set the
duration of record through settable pre fault and post
21.1.12 Event and Fault records fault time. Relay shall store records for last 10 events
and 10 faults (minimum). It should be possible to
download and access all records locally from PC and
remotely from SCADA.
Relay shall be able to detect internal failures. A
21.1.13 Self diagnosis watchdog relay with changeover contact shall provide
information about the failure.
All relays shall be capable of being synchronized with
21.1.14 Time synchronization
the system clock using SCADA interface and PC.
21.1.15 Operation Indicators LEDs with push button for resetting.
21.1.16 Test Facility Inbuilt with necessary test plugs.
50/220 VDC. Relays should be suitable for continuous
21.1.17 Auxiliary supply
operation at 15% overvoltage
21.2 Protection Relays for 33KV Incomer
Distance Protection
Relay 1 (If Distance protection
Sync check function
is considered as primary
PT supervision
protection)
Power swing blocking
Line differential protection with Backup distance
protection
Sync check function
Relay 1 (If Line differential PT supervision
21.2.1
protection is considered as Power swing blocking
primary protection) Software based CT ratio correction
Dedicated port for communication with remote end relay
through optical fibre. This port should be in addition to
PC interface and SCADA interface ports.
Selection of Relay-1 (primary protection) will depend on
Selection of Relay 1 site requirements. In case of Line differential as primary
protection, Relays at both ends shall be provided.
3-phase Directional Overcurrent and Earthfault
protection with IDMT, Definite time and instantaneous
characteristics.
21.2.2 Relay 2
Sync check function, if not provided in relay 1.
Circuit Breaker failure protection
PT supervision, if not provided in relay 1
Relay-1 and Relay-2 should have a total of 32DIs and
16DOs exclusively for SCADA interfacing. DIs and DOs
for tripping and interlocking shall be additional as per
scheme requirement. If DIs and DOs for tripping and
21.2.3 DIs and DOs interlocking are integrated with DIs and DOs meant for
SCADA (may be done to optimize DI/DO configuration),
atleast 4 DIs and 4 DOs (atleast 2DIs and 2DOs per
relay) should be available as spare in each panel for
future use.
Page 16 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
Combining functions of Relay-1 and Relay-2 in single

21.2.4 Note
relay is not acceptable.
21.2.5 SLD Refer annexure – F1/F5
21.3 Protection Relays for 33KV Transformer Feeder Panel
Biased differential protection
REF protection
21.3.1 Relay 1 Software based ratio and vector correction feature
(without ICT)
H2 and H5 harmonic restraint
3-phase Overcurrent and Earthfault protection with
21.3.2 Relay 2 IDMT, Definite time and instantaneous characteristics
Relay-1 and Relay-2 should have a total of 32DIs and
16DOs exclusively for SCADA interfacing. DIs and DOs
for tripping and interlocking shall be additional as per
21.3.3 DIs and DOs interlocking are integrated with DIs and DOs meant for
future use.
21.3.4 Note
21.4 Protection Relays for 33KV Bus-coupler/Bus-sectionalizer Panel
3-phase Overcurrent and earthfault protection with
IDMT, Definite time and instantaneous characteristics.
Sync check function
PT supervision (fuse failure monitoring) for Bus PT-1
Relay should have a total of 32DIs and 16DOs
21.4.1 Relay 1 exclusively for SCADA interfacing. DIs and DOs for
tripping and interlocking shall be additional as per
interlocking are integrated with DIs and DOs meant for
future use.
21.4.2 Relay 2 PT supervision (fuse failure monitoring) for Bus PT-2
21.4.4 Note One Bus PT should be provided for each bus section
21.5 Protection Relays – SCADA Interfacing Philosophy for all panels
Configuration and wiring of DIs DI-1 – TC unhealthy
in Protection Relays for routing DI-2 – CB Autotrip (contact from lockout relay)
21.5.1 status and alarm signals to DI-3 – CB Open
SCADA through SCADA DI-4 – CB Close
interface port DI-5 – Spring Charged
Page 17 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DI-6 – L/R switch in Remote

DI-7 – L/R switch in Local
DI-8 - DC fail
DI-9 - AC Fail
DI-10 – Gas pressure low in CB Compartment
DI-11 –Gas pressure low in busbar compartment
DI-12 – PT MCB trip (metering and protection, for
incomer and bus coupler panel only)
DI-13 – Isolator Open
DI-14 – Isolator Close
DI-15 – Earth Switch Open
DI-16 – Earth Switch Close
DI-17 – Isolator-2 Open (bus coupler panel only)
DI-18 – Isolator -2 Close (bus coupler panel only)
DI-19 – Earth switch -2 Open(bus coupler panel only)
DI-20 – Earth switch -2 Close(bus coupler panel only)
Sequence of DIs should be strictly as mentioned above.
Configuration and wiring of
DOs in Protection relays for DOs should be wired for operation of CB and three
21.5.2 execution of SCADA position disconnectors. Sequence of DO assignment
commands through SCADA should be same in all panels.
interface port
All relays in the switchboard have to be looped to form a
21.5.3 Looping of protection relays
common bus for interfacing with SCADA.
21.5.4 Spare DIs and DOs Should be wired upto terminal block for future use.
21.6 Transformer Monitoring cum AVR Relay
21.6.1 Features As per annexure –A
21.6.2 Requirement To be provided in 33KV Transformer feeder panel
21.7 Auxiliary Relays – General Features
Relays for auxiliary,
21.7.1 supervision, trip and timer Static or electromechanical type.
relays
Reset mechanism for auxiliary
21.7.2 Self reset contacts except for lock-out relays.
relays
Reset mechanism for lockout
21.7.3 Hand reset type.
relays
With hand-reset operation indicators (flags) or LEDs with
21.7.4 Operation indicators
pushbuttons for resetting.
50/220VDC. Relays should be suitable for continuous
21.7.5 Auxiliary supply
operation at 15% overvoltage
21.8 Auxiliary relays – Requirement
Anti pumping (94), lockout (86)
21.8.1 and trip circuit supervision (74) For each breaker
relays
To be provided for selection between Bus PT and Line
21.8.2 PT selection relays
PT of respective sections.
Switchgear with two incomer & Lockout relay (86) contact of each incoming breakers to
21.8.3
bus coupler be wired in series in closing circuit of other incoming
Page 18 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
breakers & bus coupler.

Auxiliary Relays, contact To effect interlocks and to exchange signals of status &
21.8.4
multiplication relays etc. control
Auxiliary relays with indicating flags should be provided
for the following trip and alarm commands –
a. Buchholz trip
b. OSR trip
c. PRV trip
Transformer trouble relays (For d. SPR trip
21.8.5
Transformer feeder panel only) e. WTI Trip
f. OTI Trip
g. Buchholz Alarm
h. Low oil level alarm
i. OTI Alarm
j. WTI Alarm.
21.9 MCBs
Shall be protected by MCB at the point of entry to the
21.9.1 Incoming auxiliary supplies
switchboard
a. All auxiliary supplies (DC, AC, PT supply etc.) shall
be protected by MCB of appropriate rating.
b. Separate MCBs shall be provided for control,
21.9.2 Panel auxiliary supplies
indication and protection circuits of each breaker. For
shunt trip circuits the protection shall be rated atleast
300 % of the load.
22.0 SPACE HEATERS, SOCKETS & ILLUMINATION LAMPS
22.1 Space Heaters

22.1.1 Type Thermostat controlled with switch for isolation
22.1.2 Location In Breaker & HV cable compartment, mounted on an
insulator. Heater position in cable compartment
should be easily accessible after cable termination.
22.2 Illumination lamp with switch For LV & cable chamber
22.3 Universal type (5/15 A) In LV chamber
Socket with Switch
23.0 NAMEPLATES AND MARKING
23.1 Nameplates To be provided as per the following description

a. All equipment mounted on front as well as inside
the panels shall be provided with individual name
plates with equipment designation/description
engraved.
23.1.1 Equipment Nameplates
b. All front mounted equipment shall be also
provided at the rear with individual name plates
engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one
shown in the panel internal wiring to facilitate easy
Page 19 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
tracing of the wiring.
Large and bold name plate carrying feeder

identification/ feeder number shall be provided on the
23.1.2 Feeder Nameplates
top of each panel on front as well as rear side. On
rear side, nameplate should be provided on frame.
Following details are to be provided on Panel rating
plate:
a. Manufacturers name or trade mark
b. Switchgear designation
c. Rated system voltage, phases, wires and
frequency
d. Rated fault current
e. Busbar rating
f. Insulation Gas Type and rated filling pressure for
insulation
g. Alarm pressure for insulation
23.1.3 Panel Rating Plate
h. Minimum functional pressure for insulation
i. Minimum functional pressure for operation
j. Design pressure of gas filled compartment
k. Year of manufacture
l. Warranty Period
m. Purchasers name
n. Serial no
o. Customer – BSES
p. PO No. & Date – As per respective PO.
q. CT rating details
r. PT rating details
a. Type / Model No.
b. Month /Year of Manufacturing
23.1.4 CB Rating Plate
c. Current and voltage rating.
d. Rated fault making and breaking current.
Non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Nameplates
23.1.5 Material shall be black with white engraved lettering. Stickers
are not allowed.
Fixing of rating plates and Shall be riveted to the panels at all four corners.
23.1.6
external nameplates Bolting/screwing is not acceptable.
Internal labels may make use of a durable
Fixing of internal
23.1.7 proprietary labeling system unless specifically
nameplates
indicated otherwise.
Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its
23.2 Markings function. Similar inscription shall also be provided on
each device whose function is not otherwise
Page 20 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
identified. If any switch or device does not bear this

inscription separate nameplate giving its function
shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear
inscription for each position indicating e.g. Trip-
Neutral close, ON-OFF etc.
24.0 FINISH
24.1 Finish The colour and finish may be in accordance with the
Manufacturer standards for the service conditions
specified, subject to BUYER’s approval. The
switchgear shall be fully tropicalized.
25.0 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS
25.1 Numerical Relays R series of ABB, Siprotec series of Siemens, Micom

series of Schneider/Alstom. Numerical relays used in
complete switchboard should be of same make. Use
of two different makes of relays in a switchboard is
not acceptable.
25.2 Transformer monitoring cum A-eberle/Easun-MR
AVR relay
25.3 Electromechanical Relays Alstom/Schneider/Siemens/ABB
25.4 Contact Multiplication Relays Alstom/Schneider/Siemens/ABB
25.5 Contactors ABB/Siemens/Schneider/ Telemechanique
25.6 MCBs Siemens/Schneider/Legrand/ABB
25.7 Control switches Switron/Kaycee
25.8 Test terminal blocks IMP/Schneider/Alstom
25.9 Terminal blocks Elmex/Connectwell
25.10 Indicating lamps Siemens/Teknic/ Binay
25.11 Surge Suppressors Oblum/Tyco
25.12 Cable termination Pfisterer/Sudkabel/ NKT/ Euromold
25.13 Multifunction Meter Rishabh
26.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
26.1 Type Tests The product must be of type tested quality as per
applicable Indian standards / IEC
26.2 Type test report validity Last five years from date of bid submission. Bidder
period with type test report more than 5 years old needs to
re-conduct the tests without any commercial
implication to BSES
26.3 Pressure relief device Test certificate for panel to be submitted
operation
Page 21 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
26.4 Acceptance & Routine tests To be done as per this specification and relevant
standards. Charges for all these tests shall be
deemed to be included in the equipment price. In
addition to these tests, following tests have to be
carried out as acceptance tests -
26.5 Primary injection test To be carried out on panels selected for testing
26.6 Temperature rise test One panel per Purchase order (PO with minimum 10
panels) without any commercial implication to BSES.
In-house testing is acceptable.
26.7 Paint Thickness/ Peel off To be carried out on panels selected for testing
26.8 Inspection The purchaser/owner reserves the right to witness all
the acceptance/routine tests during inspection.
26.9 Notice to purchaser for At least three weeks in advance
conducting type tests
26.10 Test reports before dispatch Six (6) copies of acceptance and routine test reports
for approval
26.11 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval
26.12 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
27.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX
Drawing submission shall be as per the matrix given below. All documents/ drawing shall be
provided on A3/A4 sheet in box file with separators for each section. PDF shall also be provided
of all documents via USB. Language of the documents shall be English only. Deficient/ improper
document/ drawing submission may liable for rejection.
Drawing Pre Pre

S. No Head Bid
Approval Dispatch Closure
Contact Person Name, Email ID
27.1 Required Required
and Mobile Number
27.2 Consolidated Deviation Sheet Required Required
27.3 GTP Required Required
Relevant Type Test as per

27.4 IS/IEC (including internal arc Required
withstand performance)
Power Cable and control cable
27.5 Required
Philosophy and Schedule
Manufacturer's quality assurance
27.6 plan and certification for quality Required
standards
Page 22 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
Sizing Calculation of Associated

27.7 Required
Equipment
Recommended Spares Apart
27.8 from spares stated in Spec(for Required
five years of operation)
27.9 33 kV Switchgear drawing
27.9.1 General Arrangement Required Required
27.9.2 Sectional Layout

27.9.3 Door Layout Required
27.9.4 LV Box Internal Layout Required
27.9.5 Gas Pressure Diagram Required
27.9.6 SLD Required Required
Schematic Circuit diagram and

27.9.7 Required
Scheme of Each type of Panel
27.9.8 Communication Architecture Required
27.9.9 Bus Bar Arrangement Required
27.9.10 QAP Required
27.9.11 Panel wise BOQ Required
27.9.12 Logic Operation Diagram Required
27.9.13 Plan Required
27.9.14 Synch Logic Diagram Required
27.9.15 Foundation Diagram Required
27.9.16 DI sheet Required
27.9.17 DO Sheet Required
27.9.18 TB Details Required
Make of all Component as per
27.9.19 Required
specification
27.10 Drawing of Substation Room Required
Ventilation detail requirement of
27.11 Required
GIS Room
Installation, erection and
27.12 commissioning manual for Required
switchgear
27.13 Inspection Reports Required
27.14 As manufacturing Drawings Required
27.15 Required
Manual
27.16 Trouble shooting manual Required
Page 23 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
27.17 As built Drawings Required
27.18 Test Report Required
28.0 PACKING
28.1 Packing Protection Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains,

breakage and vibration. During transportation/
transit and storage, panels may be subjected to
outdoor conditions. Hence, packing of each panel
shall be weatherproof.
28.2 Packing for accessories and Robust wooden non returnable packing case with
spares all the above protection & identification Label
28.3 Packing Identification Label to be provided on each packing case with the following
details
28.3.1 Individual serial number
28.3.2 Purchaser's name
28.3.3 PO number (along with SAP item code, if any) & date
28.3.4 Equipment Tag no. (if any)
28.3.5 Destination
28.3.6 Project Details
28.3.7 Manufacturer / Supplier's name
28.3.8 Address of Manufacturer / Supplier / it’s agent
28.3.9 Description and Quantity

28.3.10 Country of origin
28.3.11 Month & year of Manufacturing
28.3.12 Case measurements
28.3.13 Gross and net weights in kilograms
28.3.14 All necessary slinging and stacking instructions
Page 24 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
29.0 SHIPPING
29.1 Shipping The bidder shall ascertain at an early date and

definitely before the commencement of manufacture,
any transport limitations such as weights, dimensions,
road culverts, Overhead lines, free access etc. from
the Manufacturing plant to the project site. Bidder
shall furnish the confirmation that the proposed
Packages can be safely transported, as normal or
oversize packages, up to the site. Any modifications
required in the infrastructure and cost thereof in this
connection shall be brought to the notice of the
Purchaser.
The Bidder shall be responsible for all transit damage
due to improper packing.
30.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE
30.1 Handling and Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail

handling & storage instruction sheet / manual needs
to be furnished before commencement of supply.
31.0 PROGRESS REPORTING
31.1 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of

production, inspection, testing, inspection, packing,
dispatch, documentation programme
31.2 Detailed Progress report To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing:
a. Progress on material procurement
b. Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
c. Progress on assembly (As applicable)
d. Progress on internal stage inspection
e. Reason for any delay in total programme
f. Details of test failures if any in manufacturing stages
g. Progress on final box up
h. Constraints / Forward path
32.0 DEVIATION
32.1 Deviation Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in

writing with the tender by reference to the Specification
clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the
alternative offer. In absence of such a statement, it will
be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this
specification. No deviation will be acceptable post
order.
Page 25 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
33.0 ACCESSORIES & SPARES
33.1 Accessories Should be supplied alongwith the switchgear in

accordance with annexure-C
33.2 Spares Should be supplied alongwith the switchgear in
accordance with annexure- D
ANNEXURE – A – TRANSFORMER MONITORING CUM AVR RELAY

1 General features
Technology and Microprocessor based with provision for multifunction
1.1
Functionality control and monitoring.
1.2 Mounting Flush Mounting
1.3 Architecture and disconnectable to adapt the control unit to the
required level of complexity as per the application.
AVR shall utilize a user friendly setting and operating

Programming and
1.4 multi-lingual software in windows environment with
configuration
menus and icons for fast access to the data required.
UMI with an alphanumeric key pad and graphical LCD
display with backlight indicating measurement values
1.5 User Machine Interface
and operating messages. Capability to access and
change all settings and parameters.
Front port (preferably serial) for configuration using PC.
Cost of licensed software and communication cord,
1.6 PC Interface port
required for programming of offered protection relays
using PC, shall be mentioned separately in the bid.
RS485 rear port for interfacing with SCADA on IEC103
and dual fibre optic port for interfacing with SCADA on
IEC 61850 & PRP compatible. Through these ports
relays shall be connected to switches. Protocol shall be
1.7 SCADA Interface port selectable at site. If relays have any other rear port,
hardware/software required to achieve the above said
compatibility will be in supplier’s scope. Ethernet
switches at switchgear end shall be suitably mounted
in an auxiliary compartment in switchgear panel.
Shall be able to detect internal failures. A watchdog
1.8 Self diagnosis relay with changeover contact shall provide information
about the failure.
1.9 Auxiliary supply 220VDC or 48VDC
2 Inputs and Outputs
2.1 CT Input 1/5A selectable through programming
2.2 PT Input 110VAC
Page 26 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
Sixteen programmable binary inputs should be

2.3 Binary Inputs
provided
2.4 Analog Inputs (4-20mA) One input to be provided
2.5 PT-100 direct input Two inputs to be provided
2.6 Direct Resistance Input For tap position indication (18 steps)
2.7 Binary Outputs Ten programmable binary outputs should be provided
3 Control
Ability to implement control functions through
3.1 Control Tasks
programmable logics
3.2 Voltage setting Programmable Voltage set point
Raise/Lower tap position to maintain the preset value
3.3 Voltage Regulation
of voltage.
3.4 Voltage Regulation modes Automatic and Manual
3.5 Operation Modes Local and Remote
3.6 Fan and Pump control To be provided
Capability to parallel transformers whose AVRs are
3.7 Transformer Paralleling
interconnected via a communication network.
4 SCADA Interfacing
DI-1 – Buchholz trip
DI-2 – OSR Trip
DI-3 – PRV trip
DI-4 – SPR trip
DI-5 – OTI trip
DI-6 – WTI trip
Configuration of DIs for DI-7 – Buchholz alarm
4.1 routing alarm/trip signals to DI-8 – Oil Level low larm (MOG alarm)
SCADA. DI-9 – WTI alarm
DI-10 – OTI alarm
DI-11 – Tap changer trouble/stuck/out of step
DI-12 – Tap changer motor supply fail
DI-13 – Tap changer in local control
All signals from DI-1 to DI-10 are to be wired up from
transformer trouble auxiliary relays.
Configuration of Dos for DO-1 – Tap raise
executing commands from DO-2 – Tap lower
4.2
SCADA through interface DO-3 – Fan group 1 control
port/CRP DO-4 – Fan group 2 control
4.3 Spare Dis and Dos To be wired upto the terminal block.
5 Measurement, Event Recording and Monitoring
Measured Quantities Voltage, Current, Active Power, Reactive Power,
5.1
(optional) Apparent Power, Power factor, frequency
Facility for recording parameters during various events
5.2 Event Recording
such as tap change, change in binary input status etc.
Capability to monitor important transformer parameters
such as Oil temperature, Winding Temperature etc and
5.3 Monitoring
give indication/alarm when the value of a particular
parameter exceeds the preset value.
Page 27 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
ANNEXURE – B – TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY PURCHASER)

1.0 SWITCHGEAR
1.1 Type Metal clad, SF6 gas insulated with VCB type circuit
breaker
1.2 Service Indoor
1.3 Mounting Free standing, floor mounted
1.4 System Voltage 33kV
1.5 Voltage variation +/- 10%
1.6 Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%
1.7 Phase 3
1.8 Rated voltage 36 kV
1.9 Rated current As per Single line diagram
1.10 Short time rating for 3 25kA
sec.
1.11 Internal arc classification
and rating
1.11.1 Classification IAC – A – FLR
1.11.2 Rating 25kA for 1 second.
1.12 Insulation level 70 kV/ 170 kV
(PF rms / Impulse peak)
1.13 System ground Effectively earthed Effectively earthed
1.14 Enclosure degree of IP – 65 for gas filled compartments
protection IP – 4X for Cable and LV compartment
1.15 Bus bar – Main Rating as per SLD, Short time rating as per clause
1.10.
1.15.1 Material Copper
1.15.2 Bus bar joint plating As per manufacturer’s standard. Tape on joints is not
acceptable.
1.15.3 Bus identification Colour coded
1.15.4 Temperature rise 40 deg. C for conventional joints.
55 deg. C for silver plated joints
1.16 Auxiliary bus bar Electrolytic grade tinned copper
1.17 Auxiliary DC Supply 220 V DC / 50 V DC
1.18 Auxiliary AC supply 240 V AC 50 Hz
1.19 Hardware Stainless steel.
1.20 Earth bus Aluminium
1.21 Power cable entry From bottom and rear
1.22 Control cable entry From bottom and front (i.e breaker compartment)
1.23 Gas leakage rate Less than 0.5% per annum
2.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2.1 Voltage class, insulation As specified for switchgear

level, short time rating
Page 28 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
2.2 Rated current As per SLD.

2.3 Duty cycle O – 0.3 sec – CO – 3min – CO
2.4 Short circuit rating
2.4.1 A.C sym. Breaking 25kA
current
2.4.2 Short circuit making 62.5kA
current
2.5 Operation time
2.5.1 Break time Not more than 4 cycles
2.5.2 Make time Not more than 5 cycles
2.6 Range of Auxiliary
Voltage
2.6.1 Closing 85% - 110%
2.6.2 Tripping 70% - 110%
2.6.3 Spring Charging 85% - 110%
2.7 No. of spare aux. Minimum 4 NO + 4 NC
Contacts of Breaker, for
Owner’s use.
2.8 Nos. of spare auxiliary Minimum 2 NO + 2 NC
contacts of disconnector
2.9 Nos. of spare auxiliary Minimum 2 NO + 2 NC
contacts of earth switch
3.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
level and short time rating
3.2 Type Solid Insulation
3.3 Class of insulation Class E or better
3.4 Ratio As per SLD
3.5 Number of secondaries As per SLD
3.6 Accuracy class
3.6.1 Protection core 5P20
3.6.2 Protection (Diff. / REF) PS
3.6.3 Metering 0.2s
3.7 Burden (VA) Adequate for the protection & instruments offered i.e
atleast 1.5 times the connected burden.
3.8 Excitation current of PS 30 mA at Vk/4
Class CTs
4.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
4.1 Type Cast resin, single phase unit
4.2 Rated Voltage
4.2.1 Primary 33000/sq.rt.3
4.2.2 Secondary 110V/sq.rt.3
4.3 No. of phases 3
4.4 No. of secondary windings 2
Page 29 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
4.5 Method of connection Star/Star

4.6 Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds
4.8 Accuracy class
4.8.1 Protection 3P
4.8.2 Metering 0.2
5.0 HV FUSES
5.1 Voltage class 36kV
5.2 Rupturing capacity 50kA
5.3 Rated current As per application
6.0 SURGE ARRESTORS
6.1 Rated Voltage 30kV
6.2 Maximum continuous 25kV
operating voltage (MCOV)
6.3 Discharge current 10kA
6.4 Discharge class 3
ANNEXURE – C – MANDATORY ACCESSORIES FOR EACH SWITCHBOARD SET

S No. Description Qty
1 Current test plug/ adapter 2
2 Voltage test plug/ adapter 2
3 Operating Handles 2 sets
4 Adaptor Plug as per clause 14.1.2. 2 sets
5 Gas leak detector – DILO make 1
Cable dummy plugs (if required, depending on type of 1 set per Incomer/Trafo
6 cable termination) panel
Special tools and tackles required for erection, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of the switchboard
7 should be supplied with the switchboard. 1 set
Other accessories required for trouble free operation
8 of switchgear as per manufacturer recommendation. 1 set
ANNEXURE – D – SPARES REQUIREMENT

1 Numerical relay of each type 1
2 Auxiliary Relay of each type 5
3 Contactors of each type 5
4 Contact Multiplication Relay of each type 5
5 Line voltage transformer 3 (1 set)
6 Bus voltage transformer 3 (1 set)
7 GIS End Termination Kit 2
Page 30 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
9 Current transformers suitable for incomer panel 3 (1 set)

10 Current transformers suitable for transformer panel 3 (1 set)
11 Current transformers suitable for bus coupler panel 3 (1 set)
12 Trip Coil 4
13 Closing Coil 4
14 CB Spring charging motor 2
15 Auxiliary switch 2 sets (2 Nos. each type)
16 Disconnector motor for isolator 1
17 Disconnector motor for earthswitch 1
18 Gas density switch 2
19 Bursting disc / pressure relief plate complete 2
20 Capacitive voltage indicator 6 (2 sets)
21 Mobile gas filling and evacuation device -DILO make 1
22 SF6 Gas cylinders 4
23 SCADA Spares 20% of Supplied Items
Other spares recommended by manufacturer may be
24
added to this list
Unit price for all the spares should be indicated in price bid.
ANNEXURE – E– GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY BIDDER)

DATA DATA
S No. DESCRIPTION UNITS SPECIFIED BY PROVIDED BY
PURCHASER BIDDER
1.00 SITE CONDITIONS
1.01 Altitude meters 1 -50
Maximum Ambient
1.02 °C 45
Temperature
Minimum Ambient
1.03 °C 0
Temperature
1.04 Design Ambient Temperature °C 50
1.05 Relative Humidity % 100
2.00 PARAMETERS
2.01 Voltage kV 33
2.02 Phases - 3
2.03 Frequency Hz 50
2.04 Short Time Rating for 3 Sec kA 31.5 / 26.3
2.05 Voltage Class kV 36
Insulation level (PF rms / kVrms /
2.06 70/170
Impulse peak) kVpeak
2.07 Internal arc test
a Rated current and duration kA, sec
b Classification
3.00 ENCLOSURE TYPE IP65 / IP4X
Page 31 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
Manufacturers
3.01 Rear Doors -
Standard
3.02 Indoor / Outdoor - Indoor
3.03 Arc Resistant - YES
3.04 Tamperproof Category YES
3.05 Dust resistant (gasketed) - YES
Gas pressure – busbar
4.01 Bar / MPa
compartment
a Normal gas pressure Bar / MPa
Permitted range of Gas
b Bar / MPa
pressure for safe operation
c Alarm level Bar / MPa
Gas pressure for operation of
d Bar / MPa
PRD
Withstand gas pressure of
e Bar / MPa
enclosure
Number of aux.contacts
f /stages provided
for the gas density meter
Gas pressure – breaker
4.02 Bar / MPa
compartment
a Normal gas pressure Bar / MPa
Permitted range of Gas
b Bar / MPa
pressure for safe operation
c Alarm level Bar / MPa
Gas pressure for operation of
d Bar / MPa
PRD
Withstand gas pressure of
e Bar / MPa
enclosure
Number of aux. contacts
f /stages provided
for the gas density meter
Material and thickness of gas
4.03
enclosure
Total no. of Gas
4.04 No.
compartments per panel
Number of Gas Density
4.05 No.
meters provided per panel
4.06 Rating of Isolator (A) Same as CB rating
4.07 Rating of earthing switch (A) Same as CB rating
Guaranteed Gas leakage
4.07 < 0.5 %
Rate
4.08 Rodent damage protection YES
4.09 Ground and test device YES
Page 32 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
Anodized
4.10 Equipment Labeling
aluminium
4.11 Lift truck If required
4.12 Testing facility
a For Cable Required
b For CT Required
c For PT Required
5.00 BUS INFORMATION
5.01 Material Copper
Manufacturers
5.02 Bus Joint Plating
Standard
5.03 Rated Continuous Current A rms 1250A
31.5kA/ 26.3kA
5.04 Short time Withstand Current A rms
for 3 Sec
BUS SUPPORTS AND
6.00
INSULATION
Manufacturer's Standard & Manufacturers
6.01
Type Standard
Manufacturers
6.02 Material
Standard
POWER CABLE
7.00
ACCOMMODATION
7.01 Power Cable entry Bottom
Socket & Plug for
7.02 Terminal lug type
SF6
As per
Qty of power cables per
7.03 qty specification and
phase per compartment
SLD
7.04 Make of termination
CIRCUIT BREAKER
8.00
INFORMATION
8.01 Manufacturer / Model No.
Manufacturers
8.02 Type (SF6/Vacuum)
Standard
8.03 Rated Short-Circuit Current kA 31.5 kA / 26.3kA
Short circuit-Current
8.04 sec 3
Withstand Time
8.05 Rated Maximum Voltage kV rms 36
Rated Voltage Range Factor,
8.06 1.1
K
Power Frequency Withstand
8.07 kV rms 70
Voltage
Lightning Impulse Withstand
8.08 kV crest 170
Voltage
Page 33 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
As per single line
8.09 Rated Continuous Current A rms
drawing.
Rated Transient Recovery Manufacturers
8.10 microsec
Voltage Time to Peak (T2) Standard
8.11 Switching duty/capability
a Power Transformers (oil filled) Capacity
b Cables Length
c Over head lines Length
8.12 Rated Interrupting Time ms 60
8.13 Time for Opening Operation cycles 3
8.14 Time for Closing Operation cycles 4
Closing and latching Manufacturers
8.15 kA
capability (peak) Standard
Control Power Voltage
8.16 V dc 220/50
Range, Trip Coil
Control Power Voltage
8.17 V dc 220/50
Range, Closing Coil
8.18 Auxiliary Contacts Total qty 12
Min. Auxiliary Contacts for
8.19 qty 6
Customer use
Auxiliary Contact voltage
8.20 V dc 220 / 50
rating
Auxiliary Contact current
8.21 Amps 10
rating
Stored Energy System
8.22 V dc 187
Minimum Voltage
Stored Energy Spring
8.23 Amps MS
Charging Motor Current
Stored Energy Spring
8.24 Amps MS
Charging Motor Inrush
Stored Energy Time to Fully
8.25 seconds MS
Recharge Spring:
O – 0.3Sec – CO
8.26 Rated Operating duty cycle
-3min -CO
Rated out of phase switching
8.27
capability to IEC 56
Operating Power
8.28
Consumption
a Trip Coil Watt
b Closing Coil Watt
c Operating Motor Watt
8.29 Number of trip coils Nos. 2
8.30 Quantity of Gas in CB
a Mass
b Volume at Normal Pressure CuM
Page 34 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
Interrupting Gas Pressure Bar
8.31
Maximum / Normal / Minimum (Absolute)
Number of Close / Open
8.32 Operation No.
possible without re-charging
Number of operations
possible before
8.33
interrupter maintenance
required
a At rated S.C. current Nos.
b At full load current Nos.
c At no load Nos.
Method used to relieve
internal overpressure due
8.34
to short circuit (Bursting disc /
relief valve / none. Etc.)
Operating pressure of
8.35
pressure relief device
9.00 PROTECTIVE RELAYS
9.01 Manufacturer By Seller
9.02 Model no. of each relay
As per
9.03 Relay functions
specification
IEC 103 & IEC
9.04 Relay Communication
61850
10.00 MULTI FUNCTION METER
10.01 Model Rish Delta Energy
10.02 Make Rishabh
RS485 rear port
suitable for
10.03 SCADA Interfacing
integration on
Modbus Protocol
10.04 Size mm2 96x96
10.05 Panels where to be provided All panels
10.06 Accuracy Class 1
48 – 240VDC and
10.07 Auxiliary Supply AC i.e universal
type.
11.00 CONTROL WIRING See Specification
11.01 Type XLPE or PVC
11.02 Control wire Size minimum: 1.5 mm
11.03 Voltage Rating: Vac 600/1000V
11.04 FRLS type Yes
Page 35 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
CURRENT
12.00 As per SLD
TRANSFORMERS
(Details to be furnished for
each type of CT)
12.01 Manufacturer/Model Number:
12.02 Accuracy Class As per SLD
12.03 Ratio As per SLD
12.04 Burden As per SLD
12.05 Knee point voltage As per SLD
12.06 Rct
12.07 Excitation current As per SLD
13.01 Manufacturer
13.02 Model Number
13.03 Accuracy As per SLD
13.04 Primary Fuse Required
13.05 Secondary Fuse/min-breaker: Required
13.06 Burden As per SLD
13.07 Disconnecting switch for VT Required
14.00 PANEL ACCESSORIES
14.01 Indications LED type
14.02 Control switches
a Make
b Type
c Rating
14.03 L/R switch
a Make
b Type
c Rating
14.04 CT & PT Terminal blocks
a Make
b Type Disconnecting
c Size
d Rating
14.05 Terminal blocks
a Make
Non-
b Type
Disconnecting
c Size
d Rating
15.00 HEAT LOSS
15.01 Bus Losses Watts
Heat loss at rated breaker
15.02 W/bkr
current –1250A
Page 36 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
Heat loss of space heater per
15.03 W/vrtl
vertical section
INSTALLATION
16.00
INFORMATION
Mass of heaviest piece to be
16.01 kg
shipped as a unit
Largest section to be shipped
16.02 mm
a unit -Length:
16.03 mm
a unit -Width:
16.04 mm
a unit -Height:
Total Mass of assembly to be
16.05 kg
shipped
Total assembly (breaker line-
16.06 mm
up only) -Length
16.07 mm
up only) -Width
16.08 mm
up only) -Height
Transition section (breaker
16.09 kg
line-up only) -Mass
16.10 mm
line-up only) -Length
16.11 mm
line-up only) -Width
16.12 mm
line-up only) -Height
Total Number of shipping
16.13 qty
sections per line up:
17.00 PANEL DIMENSIONS
Incomer (Width x Depth x
17.01 mm
Height)
Bus-coupler (Width x Depth x
17.02 mm
Height)
Outgoing (Width x Depth x
17.03 mm
Height)
Overall length of Complete
17.04 mm
board
CONTROL AND AUXILIARY
18.00
SUPPLY
220 V / 50V ,
Buyer Control power supply
18.01 +15% & -15%V
(Volts)
DC
18.02 Buyer Control power current 15 A
Page 37 of 44
SP-MVGIS-24-R3
DATA DATA
PURCHASER BIDDER
rating (A)
Buyer control power supply

18.03 30 kA
short circuit level
Buyer AC power supply
18.04 240 V + 10%
(Volts)
Buyer AC power supply
18.05 20A
current rating (A)
Buyer AC power supply short
18.06 50 kA
circuit rating (kA)
19.00 PAINTING / FINISHING
Manufacturer’s
19.01 Manufacturer's Standard Paint Spec doc.
No.
19.02 Color RAL7032
20.00 MODULE REPLACEMENT
Complete panel replacement
20.01 Hours
duration (at site)
CB Module replacement
20.02 Hours
duration (at site)
Bushing Replacement
20.03 Hours
duration (at site)
Page 38 of 44
SP-TRPU-4-R4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POWER TRANSFORMER
INDEX
1.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ................................................................................................................. 3

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS ........................................................................................................... 3
3.0 MAJOR DESIGN CRITERIA & PARAMETERS OF THE TRANSFORMER .............................. 4
4.0 CONSTRUCTION & DESIGN .................................................................................................... 4
5.0 MINIMUM PROTECTIVE DEVICES ON TRANSFORMER ...................................................... 15
6.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ON TRANSFORMER .......................................................... 16
7.0 OLTC ....................................................................................................................................... 19
8.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS ................................................................................. 22
9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................... 23
10.0 PROGRESS REPORTING ....................................................................................................... 24
11.0 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 24
12.0 INSPECTION & TESTING ....................................................................................................... 25
13.0 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE .............................................................. 29
14.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................. 30
15.0 DEVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 300
ANNEXURE – A – SCOPE OF SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 31
ANNEXURE – B – SERVICE CONDITIONS ...................................................................................... 311
ANNEXURE – C – TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY OWNER) ............................................... 32
ANNEXURE – D – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TRANSFORMER OIL .................................. 36
ANNEXURE – E – SPECIFICATION FOR NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ...... 37
ANNEXURE – F – SPECIFICATION FOR SILICAL GEL BREATHER .................................................. 42
SCHEDULE – A – GUARATEED TECHNICAL PARICULAR (DATA BY SELLER) ............................. 45
SCHEDULE – B – GUARATEED TECHNICAL PARICULAR FOR TRANSFORMER OIL.................... 53
Page 2 of 54
SP-TRPU-42-R4
1.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

For scope of supply,refer Annexure A

Material, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of power transformer shall conform
to the latest edition of following:
IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines. (E.g. For Cooler Fan Motors.)

IEC 38 Standard Voltages.
IEC 71 Co-ordination of Insulation.
IEC 76 Power transformers
IEC 156 Method for Determination of the Electric Strength for Insulating Oils.
IEC 44 Current Transformers.
IEC 214 On-Load Tap- Chargers
IEC 242 Standard Frequencies for Centralized Network Control Installations.
IEC 296 Specification for Unused Mineral Insulating Oils for Transformer and
switchgear.
IEC 354 Loading Guide for Oil-Immersed Power Transformers.
IEC 445 Identification of Equipment Terminals and of Terminations of Certain
Designated Conductors, Including General Rules for an Alphanumeric System.
IEC 529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 542 Application Guide for On-Load Tap- changers.
IEC 551 Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels.
IEC 606 Application Guide for Power Transformer.
IEC 616 Terminal and Tapping Markings for Power Transformers.
IEC 947 Low- Voltage Switchgear and Control gear.
IEC 60127 Bushing fo alternating voltages above 1000V
BS 148 Unused Mineral Insulation Oils for Transformers and Switchgear.
BS 223 Bushings for alternating Voltages above 1000 V.
BS 2562 Cable Boxes for Transformers and Reactors.
IS 335 Insulating oil
IS 1271 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IS 2099 Bushing for Alternating voltage above 1000V
IS 2705 Current Transformers
IS 3347 Dimensions for porcelain Transformer bushing
IS 3637 Gas operated relays
IS 3639 Fitting & Accessories for power transformers
IS 4201 Application guide for CT’s
IS 6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
IS 8478 Application guide for On-load tap changer
IS 8468 On-load tap charger
IS 10028 Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of transformers
IS 13947 LV switchgear and control gear part-1
IS 2026 Power transformers
IS 5 Colours for ready mix paints
IS 6272 Industrial Cooling Fans
IS5561 Electrical power connectors
IS 325 Three phase induction motors.
Indian electricity rules
Indian electricity act
Page 3 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
CBIP manual
In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of authority of
documents shall be as follows:
a. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
b. This Specification
c. Referenced Standards
d. Approved Vendor Drawings
e. Other documents
3.0 MAJOR DESIGN CRITERIA & PARAMETERS OF THE TRANSFORMER

3.1 Major design criteria
3.1.1. Voltage variation on supply + / - 10%
side
3.1.2 Frequency variation on + / - 5%
supply side
3.1.2 Transient condition - 20% or + 10% combined variation of voltage and
frequency
3.1.4 Service condition Refer Project data
3.1.5 Insulation level Refer Schedule A
3.1.6 Short circuit withstand level Refer Schedule A
3.1.7 Overload capability Refer Schedule A
3.1.8 Noise level Refer Schedule A
3.1.9 Radio influence voltage Refer Schedule A
3.1.10 Harmonic currents Refer Schedule A
Partial discharge Refer Schedule A
Parallel operation Shall be designed to operate in parallel with
transformer.
Major parameters
Rating Refer Schedule A
Voltage ratio Refer Schedule A
3.2.3 Vector group Refer Schedule A
3.2.4 Impedance Refer Schedule A
3.2.5 Losses Refer Schedule A
3..2.5.1 No load loss Refer Schedule A
.3..2.5.2 Load losses at principal tap Refer Schedule A
3.2.6 Temperature rise top oil Refer Schedule A
3.2.7 Temperature rise winding Refer Schedule A
3.2.8 Flux density Refer Schedule A
3.2.9 Current density Refer Schedule A
3.2.10 Tappings on HV winding Refer Schedule A
3.2.11 Design clearances Refer Schedule A
4.0 CONSTRUCTION & DESIGN

4.1 Type ONAN/ONAF, Copper wound, three phase, oil
immersed with on load tap changer
4.1.1 Essential provision for ONAF See note 1 of Annexure C
cooling
Page 4 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
4.1.2 Provision of mounting cooling Required

fan at site in future at service
condition.
4.1.3 Provision of replacement of Required
cooling fan at site in future at
service condition
4.1.4 Fan guard if fans mounted in Required
future.
4.2 Major parts
4.2.1 Tank
4.2.1.1 Material of construction As per GTP
4.2.1.2 Plate thickness Adequate for meeting the requirements of
pressure and vacuum type tests as per CBIP.
Test will be conducted on each transformer
tank for design validation.
4.2.1.3 Welding features 1) All seams and joints shall be double
welded
2) All welding shall be stress relieved for sheet
thickness greater than 35 mm
3) All pipes, radiators, stiffeners, welded to the
tank shall be welded externally
4.2.1.4 Tank feature 1) Adequate space at bottom for collection of
sediments
2) Stiffeners provided for rigidity and Designed
to prevent accumulation of water
3) No internal pockets in which gas / air can
accumulate
4) No external pockets in which water can
lodge
5) Tank bottom with welded skid base
6) Tank cover sloped to prevent
Retention of rain water
7) Minimum disconnection of pipe
work and accessories for cover lifting
8) Tanks shall be of a strength to prevent
permanent deformation during lifting, jacking,
transportation with oil filled
9) Tank to be designed for oil filling under
vacuum
10) Fitted with lifting lug to lift the tank cover
only
11) Manhole of sufficient size required for
inspection of core and winding
12) Oil level indicator for transportation
4.2.1.5 Flanged type adequately sized 1) HV line bushing
inspection cover rectangular in 2) LV line bushing
shape required for 3) LV neutral bushing and NCT connection
4) OLTC to winding connection from both sides
5) Core assembly ear thing Inspection covers
should be provided with jacking screws &
handle and shall not weigh more than 25 KG .
Overall design shall be in such a way that
Page 5 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
there shall not be any hindrance/overlapping of

some other component, in front of any of the
inspection covers.
4.2.1.6 Fittings and accessories on See under fittings and accessories
main tank
4.2.2 Conservator for the main tank
4.2.2.1 Capacity Adequate between highest and lowest visible
levels to meet the requirement of expansion of
oil volume in the transformer and cooling
equipment from minimum ambient temperature
to 100 °C
4.2.2.2 Conservator oil preservation By flexible rubber bag (air cell) placed inside
system conservator
4.2.2.3 Air cell material Special type of fabric coated with special grade
nitrile rubber, outer surface oil resistant and
inner surface ozone resistant
4.2.2.4 Conservator features 1) Conservator shall be bolted into position so
that it can be removed for cleaning / other
maintenance purposes
2) Main pipe from tank shall project about 20
mm above conservator bottom for creating a
sump for collection of impurities
3) Conservator minimum oil level corresponding
to minimum temperature shall be well above
the sump level
4) It shall be possible to remove and Replace
the air cell if required
5) Conservator to main tank piping shall be
supported at minimum two points.
4.2.2.5 Fittings and accessories on 1) Prismatic oil gauge with NORMAL and
main tank conservator MINIMUM marking.
2) End cover.
3) Oil filling hole with cap
4) Magnetic oil gauge with LOW LEVEL Alarm
contact.
5) Silica Gel dehydrating breather with Oil seal
and dust filter with clear acrylic single piece
clearly transparent cover resistant to UV rays.
6) Drain cum filling valve (gate valve) with
locking rod and position Indicator made of
Brass, 25 mm with Cover plate.
7) Shut off valve (gate valve) with position
indicator made of Brass Located before and
after Buccholz relay, 80 mm.
8) Flange for breather connection.
9) Air release valve on conservator (gate valve)
made of Brass, 25 mm with cover plate
10) Air release plug as required
4.2.2.6 Essential provision for Conservator to be mounted in such a manner
mounting of conservator that the top cover of the transformer can be
lifted without disturbing the conservator
4.2.2.7 Essential provision for 1) Breather body should be Aluminum
Page 6 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
breather pressure die casted, shot blasted and power

coated.
2) Container and oil cup should be 143R
grade UV resistant polycarbonate.
3) All gaskets should be of nitrile cork (RC
70C) rubber.
4) Breather should be flanged type not
threaded type
5) Breather piping shall not have any
Valve placed in between
6) Breather shall be removable type mounted at
a height of 1400 mm from ground level.
7) Silica Gel used in breather should be of
ROUND BALL type & 2.5 mm dia.
8) Breather shall be tested for 0.35 kg/cm for all
joints
4.2.3 Conservator for OLTC &
Diverter Chamber
4.2.3.1 Capacity Adequate between highest and lowest visible
levels to meet the requirement of expansion of
oil volume in the OLTC from minimum ambient
temperature to 100 deg cent. Conservator for
OLTC & Diverter chamber shall be single with
partition inside & with clear visible indication
separately for both OLTC & Diverter chamber.
4.2.3.2 Conservator oil preservation Conventional
system
4.2.3.3 OLTC conservator features Same as 4.2.2.4 except air cell features
4.2.3.4 Fittings and accessories on 1) Prismatic oil gauge with NORMAL
OLTC conservator and MINIMUM marking
2) End cover
3) Oil filling hole with cap
4) Magnetic oil gauge with LOW LEVEL Alarm
contact
5) Silica gel dehydrating breather with oil seal
and dust filter with clear acrylic single piece
clearly transparent cover resistant to UV rays
6) Drain valve (gate valve)With locking rod and
position Indicator made of Brass, 25 mm with
cover plate
7) Shut off valve (gate valve) with Position
indicator made of Brass ocated before oil surge
relay, 25 mm
8) Flange for breather connection
9) Air release plug as required
4.2.3.5 Essential provision for OLTC conservator to be mounted in such a way
mounting of OLTC that the OLTC can be inspected / maintained
conservator without disturbing the OLTC conservator
4.2.3.6 Essential provision for OLTC 1) Breather piping shall not have any
breather valve placed in between
2) Breather piping from conservator shall be
supported in such a manner that the maximum
Page 7 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
unsupported length of the of the breather piping

shall not be more than 3 meters
3) Breathers shall be removable type mounted
at suitable height from ground so that it can be
attended to easily for inspection / maintenance
4.2.4 Radiators
4.2.4.1 Material Pressed Steel
4.2.4.2 Thickness Minimum 1.2 mm
4.2.4.3 Features Detachable type with lifting lugs, air release
plug, drain plug, isolating valve top and bottom
in each radiator, Radiator support from ground
if required
4.2.4.4 Essential provision if radiators Expansion bellow to be provided in the pipes
mounted separately between main tank and radiator headers
4.2.4.5 Essential provision for all type Radiator header pipes shall not originate from
of radiators provided tank top cover to make the tank top cover
removable at site with minimum manpower.
4.2.5 Core
4.2.5.1 Material High grade, non ageing, low loss, high
permeability, grain oriented, cold rolled silicon
steel lamination
4.2.5.2 Grade As per GTP
4.2.5.3 Lamination thickness As per GTP
4.2.5.4 Design flux density at rated As per manufacturers design.
conditions at principal tap
4.2.5.5 Maximum flux density at 10% As per GTP
over excitation / overfluxing
4.2.5.6 Core design features 1) Magnetic circuit designed to avoid
short circuit paths within core or to the
earthed clamping structure
2) Magnetic circuit shall not produce flux
components at right angles to the plane of
lamination to avoid local heating
3) Least possible air gap and rigid clamping for
minimum core loss and noise generation
4) Adequately braced to withstand bolted faults
on secondary terminals without mechanical
damage and damage / dis-placement during
transportation and positioning
5) Percentage harmonic potential with the
maximum flux density under any condition
limited to avoid capacitor overloading in the
system
6) All steel sections used for supporting the
core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting, drilling, welding
7) Provision of lifting lugs for core coil
assembly
8) Supporting framework designed not to
obstruct complete drainage of oil from
transformer
Page 8 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
9) The insulation of core to bolts and core to

clamps plates shall be able to withstand a
voltage of 2 Kvrms for one minute, however
boltless construction shall be preferred to avoid
generation of hot spots and decomposition of
oil as well as to reduce noise level.
4.2.6 Winding
4.2.6.1 Material Electrolytic Copper
4.2.6.2 Maximum current density As per GTP
allowed
4.2.6.3 Winding Insulating material Class A, non catalytic, inert to transformer oil,
free from compounds liable to ooze out, shrink
or collapse
4.2.6.4 Winding Insulation Uniform
4.2.6.5 Design features 1) Stacks of winding to receive adequate
shrinkage treatment before final assembly
2) Connection braced to withstand shock during
transport, switching, short circuit, or other
transients.
3) Minimum out of balance force in the
transformer winding at all voltage ratios.
4) Conductor width on edge exceeding six
times its thickness
5) Transposed at sufficient intervals.
6) Threaded connection with locking facility
7) Winding leads rigidly supported, using guide
tubes if practicable
8) Winding structure and major insulation not to
obstruct free flow of oil through ducts
9) Provision of taps as indicated in the
technical particulars
4.2.6.6 Essential provision for core Core coil assembly shall be mounted on bottom
coil assembly of the tank.
Earthing of core clamping structure and
earthing of magnetic circuit shall be in line with
CBIP reference manuals.
4.2.7 Transformer Oil
Should be in accordance with specification as
per Annex D of this document.
One sample of oil drawn from every lot of
transformer offered for inspection should be
tested at NABL accredited lab for tests as listed
under table 1 of IS 1866(2000).The cost of this
testing should be included within the cost of
transformer.
4.2.8 Bushings and terminations
4.2.8.1 For 33 kV side ( 20/25 MVA) 33kV Plug In Type bushings with T –Type
screened connectors (Nexans/ Euromold
make)
Bushings: M 400AR – 4/J
Connector: -
3x(M 484 TBP2 - 43 - 400.630-14-5)
Page 9 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
Other make equivalent to product specified can

be consider subject to approval from BSES.
4.2.8.2 Type 52kv and above Oil filled porcelin condenser & non oil
communicating type with oil level gauge, oil
filling plug and drain valve if not hermetically
sealed, tap for capacitance and loss factor
measurement, removable without disturbing
bushing CT’S.
4.2.8.3 Arcing horns. Not required.
4.2.8.4 Termination on HV side By bimetallic connectors suitable for
bushing ACSR/AAAC conductor, cable connection
through cable box with disconnecting link as
per annexure A Scope of Supply.
4.2.8.5 Termination on LV side Cable connection through cable box with
bushing disconnecting link as per annexure A, scope
supply.
4.2.8.6 Minimum creepage distance of As per annexure C cl 38.0
bushing
4.2.8.7 Continuous current rating Minimum 20 % higher than the current
corresponding to the minimum tap of the
transformer.
4.2.8.8 Rated thermal short time As per annexure C Cl 38.0
current
4.2.8.1. Atmospheric protection for Hot dip galvanizing as per IS 2633
clamp and fitting of iron and
steel.
4.2.8.11 Bushing terminal lugs in oil Tinner copper.
and air.
4.2.8.12 Sealing washers /gasket ring. RC 70C Nitrile Cork
4.2.9 HV LV, LV Neutral cable box Required /Not required as annexure A Scope of
supply.
4.2.9.1 Material of construction Sheet steel min 4.0 mm thick. Inspection covers
shall be min 3mm thick.
4.2.9.2 Cable entry At bottom through detachable gland plate with
cable clamps of non magnetic material
4.2.9..3 Cable size for HV As pe annexure C Cl 15.4
4.2.9.4 Cable size for LV As per Annexure C Cl 15.5
4.2.9.5 Cable size for LV neutral As per Annexure C
4.2.9.6 Detachable gland plate As per annexure C
material for HV, LV, LV
Neutral box
4.2.9.7 Gland plate thickness for HV, As per GTP
LV, LV Neutral box
4.2.9.7 Cable gland for HV, LV, LV As per GTP
Neutral cables
4.2.9.8 Cable lug for LV Neutral As per CL 4.9 of this spec and suitable for
cables cable size as per GTP
4.2.9.10 Essential parts 1) Disconnecting chamber
2) Flexible disconnecting link of tinned copper
3) Tinned copper busbar for Owner’s cable
termination with busbar supports
4) Detachable gland plate as per Annexure D
Page 10 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
GTP CI. 24.4, 24.5, 25.4, 25.5, 26.4, 26.5

5) Earthing boss for the cable box
6) Earthing link for the gasketted joints at two
points for each joint
7) Earthing provision for cable armour / screen
8) Flange type Inspection cover with handle
for Inspecting bushing and busbars on top as
well as on front cover
9) Removable front cover with handle
10) Drain plug
11) Rainhood on gasketted vertical joint
12) Danger plate made of Anodized aluminum
with white letters on red background on HV
and LV side fixed by rivets.
13) Phase marking plate inside cable box near
termination as well as on front cover of cable
box made of anodized aluminum with black
letters on satin silver background on HV and LV
side fixed by rivets
14 ) Support insulators for the busbars shall be
epoxy resin cast type.
4.2.9.11 Terminal Clearances As per Annexure C technical particulars
4.2.9.12 Termination height required Minimum 1000 mm
for cable termination
4.2.9.13 Essential provision for LV 1) Neutral shall be outdoor bushing type
neutral cable box suitable for connecting 2*75x10 mm size GS
strip and brought down to the bottom of the
transformer supported by suitable support
insulator made of epoxy resin cast(For Delhi
Discom)
2) Neutral shall be provided with cable box
suitable for connecting 2 runs of 1C * 500 Sq
mm.,1.1Kv Aluminum armored XLPE cable(For
Mumbai discom)
3) Box shall have adequately sized inspection
cover suitable for inspection of
bushings/replacement/maintenance of neutral
CT.
4.2.10 Current Transformers
4.2.10.1 WTI CT As per GTP
4.2.10.1.1 Rating As per GTP
4.2.10.1.2 Mounting In the turret of the bushing
4.2.10.1.3 Essential provision 1) CT mounting shall be such that CT can be
replaced without removing tank cover
2) CT secondaries shall be wired upto TB with
TB spec. as per CI. of this specification
4.2.10.2 Neutral CT
4.2.10.2.1 Type Cast resin
4.2.10.2.2 Rating As per Annexure GTP
4.2.10.2.3 Location of NCT Separate box with TB arrangement for
secondary
Bushing type not acceptable.
Page 11 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
4.2.10.2.4 Essential provision 1) CT mounting shall be such that CT can be

replaced without removing the neutral cable
box.
2) CT secondaries shall be wired upto TB
4.2.10.2.5 Size of NCT Box Overal size of NCT box shall not exceed
1200x600x1000 mm including canopy on top.
4.2.11 Marshalling Box Cubicle
4.2.11.1 Material of construction Construction of Marshalling Box should be
stainless steel more than 314 grade with
powder coating of specified colour shed
4.2.11.2 Door hinges of marshalling Required
box should be from inner side
and should not be exposed to
rain.
4.2.11.3 Gland plate mounting should Required
be from inside only.
4.2.11.4 Digital Temp scanner Not Required
4.2.11.5 TTB with LED for all TRIP & Not Required
ALARM signals.
4.2.11.6 Major equipments in 1) Mechanical gauge for WTI -2 No’s
Marshalling box 2) Mechanical gauge for OTI
3) Control & Protection Equipment for Fan
Control
4) Other panel accessories listed elsewhere
4.2.11.7 Gland plate Min. 3 mm thick detachable with knockout
4.2.11.8 Contacts wired to terminal WTI alarm and trip
block OTI alarm and trip
Buchholz relay alarm and trip
Connect Well TTB with LED OSR trip contacts
shall be used for all TRIP & MOG low level alarm
ALARM terminals MOG on OLTC low level alarm
(TTB No.: - DDFL4ULR) PRV main tank trip
PRV OLTC trip
Sudden pressure relay trip
4.2.11.9 Signals to be wired to terminal WTI CT
block NCT
Capillaries for WTI and OTI
4 to 20 mA signals for WTI and OTI repeater
located elsewhere
4.2.11.10 Ingress protection IP 55 plus additional rain canopy to be provided
4.2.11.11 Welding Continuous welding on joints, welding at regular
intervals on joints and filling of gaps with use of
M seal not accepted
4.2.11.12 Cable entry Bottom for all cables
4.2.11.13 Panel internal Access Front only through front door double leaf with
antitheft hinges
4.2.11.14 Pane back access None
4.2.11.15 Mounting of marshalling box Tank / separately mounted as per GTP
4.2.11.16 Panel supply 240 V AC, single phase, 50 Hz
4.2.11.17 Panel accessories 1) Cubicle lamp with door switch and separate
fuse / MCB
2) Approved space heaters controlled by
Page 12 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
thermostat and separate fuse / MCB

3) Incoming fuse switch / MCB for the incoming
supply
4) Panel wiring diagram fixed on back of panel
door on Aluminum plate engraved fixed by rivet
5) Stainless steel door handle with lock &
additional facility for padlock
6) Earthing boss for the marshaling box
7) Single phase power plug industrial type 15/5
Amp. With MCB
8) TTB for all TRIP Commands
4.2.11.18 Fan motors control installed in 1) 2 x 50% fans
marshalling box or separate 2) Complete fan control with fuse switch,
fan control cubicle contactor, Bimetallic relay, in starter circuit with
type 2 coordinated rating as per IS
3) Automatic control from WTI contact
4) Provision for manual control both from local/
remote.
5) Fan Control Cubicle should be separately
mounted.
6) 2RC/2RS type bearings shall be
used instead of ball bearings.
7) Fan enclosure shall be perforated
sheet with holes at motor side with
ground support.
4.3 Hardware
4.3.1 External M16 size & below Stainless Steel & above M16
Hot Dip galvanized steel.
4.3.2 Internal Cadmium plated except special hardware for
frame parts and core assembly as per
manufacturer’s design
4.3.3 Provision of fully enclosed All Oil Surge Relays, Buchholz Relay, Pressure
Aluminium hoods/Canopy for release Valve.
following accessories of power
transformer for
protection against water
ingress.
4.4 Gasket
4.4.1 For transformer, OLTC RC 70C Nitrile Cork
chamber, PT chamber,
surfaces interfacing with oil
like inspection cover etc.
4.4.2 For cable boxes, marshalling RC 70C Nitrile Cork
box, OLTC drive mechanism
etc.
4.4.3 Tank top cover gasket It shall be double O ring type sealing
arrangement seating over a double groove
made in transformer tank & top cover.
4.5 Valves
4.5.1 Material of construction Brass
4.5.2 Type Both end flanged gate valve / butterfly valve
depending on application
Page 13 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
4.5.3 Size As per manufacture’s standard

4.5.4 Essential provision Position indicator, locking rod, padlocking
facility, valve guard, cover plate.
4.6 Cable routing on Transformer Control cable for accessories on transformer
tank to marshalling box and WTI, OTI
Capillaries shall be routed through perforated
Covered GI trays
4.6.1 Control cable specification PVC insulated, extruded PVC inner sheathed,
armoured, extruded PVC outer sheathed 1100
V grade control cable as per latest edition of IS
1554 Part 1 minimum 2.5 sqmm for signals and
4 sqmm for CT with multistrand copper
conductor
4.6.2 Specification of wires to be PVC insulated multistrand flexible copper wires
used inside marshalling box, of minimum 2.5 sqmm size, 1100 V grade as
OLTC drive mechanism. per latest edition of relevant IS
4.6.3 Essential provision for Routing shall be done in such a way that
Capillary routing from adequate protection is available from
transformer to marshalling box mechanical and fire damage.
4.7 Terminal Blocks to be used by Nylon 66 material, minimum 6 sqmm screw
the vendor driver operated stud type for control wiring and
potential circuit. Terminal blocks to be located
in such a way to achieve the termination height
as min 250 mm from grand plate.
4.7.1 Essential provision for CT Sliding link type disconnecting terminal block
terminals screwdriver operated stud type with facility for
CT terminal shorting material of housing
melamine/Nylon66
4.8 Cable glands to used by the Nickel plated brass double compression
vendor weatherproof cable gland
4.9 Cable lugs to be used by the
vendor
4.9.1 For power cables Long barrel medium duty bi-mettalic lug with
knurling on inside surface
4.9.2 For control cable Tinned copper preinsulated Pin Ring, Fork type
as applicable. For CT connection ring type lug
shall be used.
4.10 Painting of transformer,
conservator, OLTC, Radiator,
cable boxes marshalling box.
4.10.1 Surface preparation By 7 tank pretreatment process or shot blasting
method
4.10.2 Finish on internal surfaces of Bright Yellow heat resistance and oil resistant
the transformer interfacing paint two coats. Paint shall neither react nor
with oil dissolve in hot transformer insulating oil.
4.10.3 Frame parts Bright Yellow heat resistance and oil resistant
paint two coats. Paint shall neither react nor
dissolve in hot transformer insulating oil.
4.10.4 Finish on inner surface of the White Polyurethane paint anticondensation type
marshalling boxl two costs, minimum dry film thickness 80
microns
4.10.5 Finish on outer surface of the Siemens Grey (RAL 7032) polyurethane paint
Page 14 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
transformer, conservator, two coats, minimum dry film thickness 80

radiator, cable boxes, micros
marshalling box
5.0 MINIMUM PROTECTIVE DEVICES ON TRANSFORMER

5.1 Spring loaded with detachable Required
diaphragm type pressure relief valve
with two trip contacts for the main
tank of LSM model with limit switch
design IP 65 with additional rain
hood.
5.2 Spring loaded with detachable Required
diaphragm type pressure relief valve
with two trip contacts for OLTC of
LSM model with limit switch design
IP 65 with additional rain hood.
5.3 Double float bucchholz relay with Reed Switch Type shall be required
alarm and trip contacts, service and
test position, with test cock for the
main tank, terminal box shall be IP
65 with drain plug for rainwater
draining. Additional rain hood shall
be provided.
5.4 Oil surge relay with two contacts, Required
services and test position, with test
cock for OLTC tank, terminal box
shall be IP 65 with drain plug for
rainwater draining. Additional rain
hood shall be provided.
5.5 Sudden pressure relay with trip Required
contact for the main tank
5.6 Oil temperature indicator metallic Required
bulb type 150 mm diameter with
maximum reading pointer, potential
free independent adjustable alarm
and trip contacts, resetting device
with temperature sensing element
5.7 Winding temperature indicator 150 Required
mm diameter with maximum reading
pointer, two sets of potential free
independent adjustable alarm and
trip contacts, resetting device with
temperature sensing element,
thermal image coil
5.8 2 No’s PT 100 sensors/RTDs for required
winding emperature indication wired
upto TB’s in marshalling box for
external connection.
Page 15 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
6.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ON TRANSFORMER

6.1 Rating and diagram plate Required
6.1.1 Material Anodized aluminum 16SWG
6.1.2 Background SATIN SILVER
6.1.3 Letters, diagram & boder Black
6.1.4 Process Etching
6.1.5 Name plate details Following details shall be provided on
rating and diagram plate as a minimum
1) Type / kind of transformer with
winding material
2) Standard to which it is manufactured
3) Manufacture’s name
4) Transformer serial number
5) Month and year manufacture
6) Rated frequency in Hz
7) Rated voltages in kv
8) Number of phases
9) Rated power in kVA
10) Type of cooling (ONAN)
11) Rated currents in A
12) Vector group symbol
13) 1.2/50s wave impulse voltage
withstand level in kV
14) Power frequency withstand voltage in
kV
15) Impedance voltage at rated current
and frequency in percentage at principal,
minimum and maximum
tap
16) Load loss at rated current
17) No load loss at rated voltage and
frequency
18) Auxiliary loss
19) Continuous ambient temperature at
which ratings apply in C
20) Top oil and winding temperature rise
at rated load in deg C
21) Temperature gradient of HV and LV
winding
22) Winding connection diagram
23) Weight of radiator
24) Volume and weight of oil in radiator
25) Transport weight of transformer
26) Weight of core and frame
27) Weight of winding
28) Weight of core and winding
29) Weight of tank and fittings
30) Total weight
31) Volume of oil
32) Weight of oil
33) NCT, WCT, details
34) Type of OLTC
Page 16 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
35) Tapping details

36) Name of the purchaser
37) PO no and date
38) Guarantee period
6.2 Instruction plate for OLTC anodized Required
aluminum black lettering on satin
silver background fixed by rivet
6.3 Oil filling instruction plate anodized Required
6.4 Valve schedule plate anodized Required
6.5 Instruction plate anodized aluminum Required
black lettering on satin silver
background for flexible air cell for oil
conservator
6.6 Terminal marking plate for bushing Required
WTI, OTI & RTD anodized
6.7 Company monogram plate Required
6.8 Lifting lugs / bollards with antiskid Required
head to lift complete transformer
with oil
6.9 Lashing lug Required
6.10 Jacking pad with Haulage hole to Required
raise or lower complete transformer
with oil
6.10.1 Essential provision for jacking pads Designed in such a way that jacking of
complete transformer with oil shall be
possible with 3 nos jacking pads out of 4
nos jacking pads provided as minimum
6.11 Detachable bi-directional roller Required
assembly with corrosion resistant
bearing, fitting / nipple for lubrication
or with permanently lubricated
bearing, anti earthquake locking
device. The wheels shall be capable
of swiveling when transformer is
lifted with provision for locking the
swivel movement. Roller shall be
suitable for 90 lb rail. Suitable
antirolling clamp for 90 lb rail
minimum 4 nos. shall be provided
6.12 Pockets for OTI, WTI, & RTD on Required ( with one spare pocket for
tank future use)
6.13 Pockets for ordinary thermometer Required
on tank cover, top and bottom
header of radiator, top of each
radiator
6.14 Ordinary thermometer 4 nos. Required
Page 17 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
6..15 Drain valve (gate valve) for the main Required

tank, 80 mm
6.16 Drain valve (gate valve) for OLTC, Required
50 mm
6.17 Drain valve (gate valve) for all Required
headers, 50 mm
6.18 Filter valve (gate valve) at top and Required
bottom of the main tank, 50 mm
6.19 Sampling valve (gate valve) at top Required
and bottom of the main tank, 15 mm
6.20 Vacuum breaking valve (gate valve), Required
25 mm
6.21 Drain plug on tank base Required
6.22 Air release plug on various fitting Required
and accessories
6.23 Earthing pad on tank for transformer Required
earthing complete with non ferrous
nut, bolt, washers, spring washers
etc.
6.24 Vacuum pulling pipe with blanking Required
plate on main conservator pipe work
6.25 Rainhood (canopy) for Buccholz Required
relay, PRV on main transformer and
OLTC, OSR relay of OLTC
6.26 Rainhood for vertical gasketted Required
joints, in cable boxes
6.27 Oil level gauge on tank for Required
transformer shipment
6.28 Earthing bridge by copper strip Required
jumpers on all gasketted joints at
least two points for electrical
continuity
6.29 Aluminium ladder with anticlimbing Required
device and safety flap, with lockable
hinged plate for at least 1.5 m from
ground level. Ladder shall be
located in such a way that it avoids
any hindrance to operation of
nearby electrical/mechanical
accessories etc.
6.30 Transformer and OLTC monitoring Not in bidder’s scope ( Digital and analog
Relay (Digital RTCC relay) signals shall be provided on transformer
by bidder)
6.31 Skid base welded type Required
6.32 Core, frame to tank earthing Required
6.33 Danger plate made of anodized Required
aluminium white lettering on red
background fixed by rivet
6.34 Identification plate for all Required
accessories, protective devices,
instruments, thermometer / RTD
pockets, earthing terminals, all
Page 18 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
inspection covers, cable boxes,

marshalling boxes etc.made of
anodized aluminium black lettering
on silver background fixed by rivet
7.0 OLTC
.7.1 Requirement Required CTR make or equivalent subject to
purchasers approval for 33 kv. For 66 kv the
type and rating shall be finalized based on
discussion with the vendor.
No in-tank OLTC acceptable.
“For selected locations where space is a
constraint, BSES may accept in tank OLTC”.
7.2 OLTC gear location Side mounted on conservator side not in front
of HV bushing
7.3 Type of OLTC gear The tapings shall be controlled by a high speed
resistor transition type gear in which tap
change is carried out virtually under ‘no volt’ ‘no
ampere’ condition and the selector switches do
not make and break any current, main current
is never interrupted and a resistor is provided
to limit the arching at diverter contacts to a
minimum suitable for outdoor mounting and
continuously rated for operating at all position
including positions in the middle of tap change.
In particulars, the tap change gear shall be
suitable when delivering the full output plus
permissible overload and operating the lowest
voltage tap on the HV side.
The value of the transition resistor shall be
indicated on the rating plate of the OLTC with
continuous current rating with reference to
design ambient temperature specified.
7.4 Tappings As per GTP
7.5 Operation of OLTC gear Selection of local / remote operation by selector
switch on OLTC drive mechanism
7.5.1 local operation From OLTC drive mechanism through pistol
grip rotary switch as well as emergency
mechanical hand operation.
7.5.2 Remote operation From digital RTCC provided by customer
/SCADA depending on the selection of control
on digital RTCC panel.
7.6 Safety interlocks in OLTC Following safety interlock to be provided in
OLTC as minimum
1) Positive completion of tap changing
step once initiated
2) Blocking of reverse tap change command
during a forward tap change already in
progress until the mechanism resets and vice
- versa
3) Cutting of electrical circuits during
Page 19 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
mechanical operation
4) Mechanical stops to prevent overrunning of
the mechanism at the end taps
5) Interlock to avoid continuous tap
change which will cut off motor supply in
such events
6) Raise / lower command in OLTC and
Digital relay shall be positively interlocked
7.7 Feature of OLTC 1) OLTC mechanism and associated controls
shall be housed in an outdoor, IP 55,
weatherproof, vermin proof and dust proof
cabinet
2) It shall be ensured that oil in compartments
containing contacts making and breaking
current compartments containing contacts not
making and breaking current and main
transformer tank does not mix
3) The hand cranking arrangement shall be
such that it can be operated at standing height
from ground level
4) Mechanical indicator to indicate completion
of tap change operation shall be provided with
suitable (Green & Red) colour code to confirm
correct method of completion of tap change
operation
5) Contractors shall be placed in the OLTC
driving mechanism in such a way that the
name-plate shall be visible on opening of door.
6) Protective cover shall be provided for raise
and lower push buttons, external ON-OFF
switch, which are mounted on OLTC driving
mechanism door. This is required to prevent
unauthorized person operating these buttons.
7) It shall be possible to remove the top cover
of the OLTC tank without difficulty. The OLTC
conservator,
piping & oil surge relay shall be placed
accordingly.
8) The tap change equipment shall be so
designed that if the mechanism is struck in an
intermediate position, the transformer shall be
capable of delivering full load without any
damage.
9) Limit switches may be connected in the
control circuit of the operating motor provided
that a mechanical de-clutching mechanism is
incorporated. Otherwise it shall be directly
connected to the operating motor circuit and
mechanical stop.
10) Thermal devices or other means shall be
provided to protect the motor and control
circuits
11) The tap changer shall be capable of
Page 20 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
permitting parallel operation with other

transformer for which necessary wiring and
accessories, if any, shall be provided
12) The control scheme for the tap changer
shall be provided for independent control of the
tap changers when the transformers are in
Independent service. In addition provision shall
be made to enable parallel operation control
also at times so that the tap changer will be
operated simultaneously when one
unit is in parallel with another it will not become
out of step and this will eliminate circulating
current.
Additional features like master /follower and
visual indication during the operation of motor
shall also be incorporated.
13) OLTC shall be suitable for bidirectional
power flow in transformer
14) Mechanical indicator and operation counter
shall be visible through glass window OLTC
drive mechanism door
15) External ON /OFF switch in addition to door
switch
16) All HRC fuses shall be located in such a
way that they are easily replaceable.
17) Motor protection relay shall be provided
with single phasing prevent for both current and
voltage
unbalance.
18) All accessories inside drive mechanism
shall be provided with metallic label, no sticker
permitted.
7.8 Essential BOM for OLTC drive 1) Control circuit transformer 415/55-0-55 V,
mechanism (indicative only, adequate capacity
bidder to provide all necessary 2) Local remote selector switch 1 pole, 2 way,
components to complete the 6A, pistol grip
function of the OLTC) 3) Retaining switch raise / lower
4) Handle interlock switch
5) Raise / lower switch 1 pole, 2way, 6A, pistol
grip
6) Lower limit switch
7) Raise limit switch
8) Tap changer motor, 415 V AC, 3
phase, adequate rating
9) Motor protection relay with single phasing
preventor
10) Motor control contactors raise / lower
11) Stepping relay
12) Out of step switch
13) Tap position indicator
14) Operation counter
15) Emergency stop push button
16) Tap change incomplete scheme with timer
Page 21 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
17) Required indication lamp

7.9 Essential provision of 1) Pressure relief valve
accessories on OLTC 2) Oil surge relay
7.10 Drive mechanism accessories 1) Cubical lamp with door switch and
separate fuse / MCB with external ON /OFF
switch on front cover of OLTC drive mechanism
2) Approved space heaters controlled by
thermostat and separate fuse / MCB
3) Incoming fuse switch / MCB for the
incoming supply
4) Panel wiring diagram fixed on back of panel
door aluminium engraved fixed by rivet
5) Nylon 66 terminal block min 4 sqmm screw
type, with 10% spare terminals
6) Stainless steel door handle with lock &
additional facility for padlock
7) Earthing boss
7.11 Hardware, Gasket, Cables and As per Cl. 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9 of the
Wires, Terminal blocks, Cable specification respectively.
gland, Cable lugs of OLTC drive
mechanism
7.12 OLTC and drive mechanism As per Cl. 4.10 of the specification
painting
7.13 RTCC panel Not in the scope of supply.
8.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS

8.1 Magnetic oil level indicator Sukrut /Yogya/ATVUS
8.2 Pressure relief valve Sukrut / Qualitrol
8.3 Buccholz relay Proyog / ATVUS/ /Yogya
8.4 Oil surge relay Proyog / ATVUS/ EASUN - MR
8.5 Winding Temperature Indicator Precimeasure/perfect controls /pradeep sales.
8.6 Oil Temperature Indicator Precimeasure/perfect controls/pradeep sales.
8.7 Sudden pressure relay. Sukrut / Qualitrol
8.8 Aircell Sukrut / pronol / Rubber product.
8.9 Neutral CT Pragati/ECS /KAPPA/ Reputed equivalent.
8.10 WCT Pragati / ECS /KAPPA/ Reputed equivalent
8.11 Switch L & T (Salzer) / Siemens
8.12 HRC fuse links Siemens / L & T / GE
8.13 Fuse base Siemens / L & T / GE
8.14 AC contractors & O / L relay L & T / Siemens / Schneider
8.15 Terminals Connectwell/Elmex
8.16 Push buttons / Actuator L & T / Siemens
8.17 Thermostat Velco
8.18 Heater Velco
8.19 Voltmeter Selector Switch Siemens
8.20 Control selector switch Siemens
8..21 Auxiliary relays Jyoti / Easun Rayrole
8.22 Timers L & T / Siemens
8.23 Tap position indicator Accord
8.24 Annunciator Accord
Page 22 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
8.25 Digital tap change counter Selectron

8.26 LED cluster type indication lamp MIMIC / Siemens / binay
8.27 33kV Plug In Type bushings Nexans/ Euromold
Note – Any other make of component to be approved by Owner
9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE

9.1 Quality assurance To be submitted before contract award
Program shall contain following
1) The structure of the organization.
2) The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff
ensuring quality of work.
3) the system for purchasing, taking delivery and
verification of materials.
4) The system for ensuring quality of workmanship
5) the system for control of documentation
6) the arrangements for the suppliers internal auditing
7) the system for retention of records.
8)A list of the administration and work procedures
required to achieve and verify contracts quality
requirements. These procedures shall be made readily
available to the purchaser for inspection on request.
9.2 Quality plan Packing To be submitted by the successful bidder for approval.
protection Plan shall contain following as a minimum
1) An outline of the proposed work and programme
sequence
2) the structure of the suppliers organization for the
contract.
3) The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff
ensuring quality of work for he contract.
4) hold and notification points.
5)submission of engineering documents required by
the specification.
6)the inspection of materials and components on
receipt
7)reference to the suppliers work procedures
appropriate to each activity
8)inspection during fabrication /construction.
9) final inspection and test.
10)Successful bidders shall include submittal of Mills
invoice,Bill of lading,Mills test certificate for
grade,physical tests,dimension,specific watt loss per
KG for the core material to the purchaser for
verification in the quality plan suitably.
Page 23 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4

10.1 Online document To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of
producton , inspection,testing,packing dispatch
,documentation programme
10.2 Detailed progress report To be submitted to the purchaser once a month
containing
1)Progress on material procurement
2)progress on fabrication
3)progress on assembly
4) progress on internal stage inspection
5) Reason for any delay in total programme.
6) Details of test failures if any in manufacturing
stages.
7) Progress on final box up.
8)Constraints
9) Forward path.
11.0 SUBMITTALS
11.1 Submittals required 1) Completed technical data schedule.
with bid. 2) Descriptive literature giving full technical details of
equipment offered :
3) Outine dimension drawing for each major component,
general arrangement drawing showing component layout
an general schematic diagrams.
4) Type test certificates ,where available, and sample
routine test reports
5) Detailed reference list of customers already using
equipment offered during the last 5 years with particular
emphasis on units of similar design and rating
6) Details of manufacturers quality assurance standard
and programme and ISO 9000 series or equivalent
national certification.
7) Deviations from this specification. Only deviations
approved in writing before award of contract shall be
accepted.
8)Recommended spare parts and consumable items for
the five years of operation with prices and spare parts
catalogue with price list for future requirements.
9) Transport / shipping dimension and weights, space
required for handling parts for mai11.3ntenance
10) write up on oil preservation system.
11) Write up on OLTC.
12) Quality assurance program.
11.2 Submittals required 1)Programme for production and testing (A)
after award for 2) Guaranteed technical particulars (A)
approval (A), ( R ) 3) General description of the equipment and all
Reference and components ,including brochures(R )
subsequent 4)Calculations to substantiate choice of electrical
Page 24 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
distribution. ,structural,mechanical component size,ratings(A)
5)Detailed dimension drawing for all components

,general arrangement drawing showing detailed
component layout and detailed schematic nd wiring
drawings for all components like marshalling box and
OLTC drive mechanism box.
6)
Detailed loading drawing to enable the purchaser to
design and construct foundations for the transformer.
7)Transport /shipping dimension with weights ,wheel
base details ,untanking height etc.( R)
8) Terminal arrangements and cable box details (A)
9) Flow diagram of cooling system showing no. of
cooling banks.(A )
10) Drawings of major components like bushing ,CT
etc(A )
11) Valve schedule diagram plate(A)
12)Instruction plate for flexible separator (A)
13)Rating and diagram plate with OLTC connection
details.
14 ) Lists of makes of all fittings and accessories (A )
15)Statement drawing attention to all exposed points in
the equipment at which contact with or in close proximity
to other metals and stating clearly what protection is
employed to prevent corrosion at each point (A ).
16) Detailed installation and commissioning instructions .
17) Quality Plan.
11.3 Submittals required at 1) Inspection and test reports carried out in

the final hold point prior manufacturers works (A )
to dispatch. 2) Test certificates of all bought out items.
3) Operation and maintenance instructions as well
as trouble shooting charts.
11.4 Drawing and document Standard paper A0 ,A1 ,A2 ,A3 , A4

sizes
11.5 No of drawings As per Annexure A Scope of Supply.
/documents required at
different stages.
12.0 INSPECTION & TESTING

12.1 Inspection and Testing
during manufacture
12.1.1 Tank and conservator 1) Check correct dimension between
wheels demonstrate turning of wheels
through 90 deg and further
Dimensional check.
2) Check for physical properties of material for lifting
lugs, jacking pads etc. all load bearing welds, including
lifting lug welds shall be subjected to required load tests
Page 25 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
3) Leakage test of the conservator as per CBIP

4) Certification of all test results
5) Oil leakage test on all tanks at normal head of oil plus
35 kn / sqm at the base of the tank for 24 hrs
6) Vacuum and pressure test on tank as type test as per
CBIP
7) Leakage test of radiators as per CBIP.
12.1.2 Core 1) Vendor to submit the documentary evidence for
procurement of CRGO laminations and prove that they
have procured/used new core material..During in
process inspection at lamination subvendor, customer
shall randomly select/seal lamination for testing at
ERDA/CPRI(Accredited NABL labs) for specific core
loss,accelerated geing test ,surface insulation
resistivity,AC permeability and magnetization, stacking
factor,ductility etc.this testing shall be in the scope of
vendor.
2) Check on the quality of varnish if used
on the stampings.
a) Measurement of thickness and hardness of varnish
on stampings
b) Solvent resistance test to check that varnish does
not react in hot oil
c) Check over all quality of varnish by sampling to
ensure uniform hipping color, no bare spot. No
ever burnt varnish layer and no bubbles on
varnished surface
3) Check on the amount of burrs
4) Bow check on stamping
5) Check for the overlapping of tampings. Corners of the
sheet are to be apart
6) Visual and dimensional check during assembly stage.
7) Check on complete core for measurements of iron-
loss and check for any hot spot by exciting the core so
to include the designed value of flux density in the core
8) Check for inter laminar insulation between core
sectors before and after pressing
9) Visual and dimensional check for
straightness and roundness of core,
thickness of limbs and suitability of
clamps
10) High voltage test (2KV for one
minute) between core and clamps
12.1.3 Insulating material 1) Sample check for physical properties
of material
2) Check for dielectric strength
3) Visual and dimensional checks
4) Check for the reaction of hot oil on
insulating materials
12.1.4 Windings 1) Sample check on winding conductor
for mechanical properties and
Page 26 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
electrical conductivity
2) Visual and dimensional check on
conductor for scratches, dept. mark etc.
3) Sample check on insulating paper for
PE value, bursting strength, electric
strength
4) Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating paper
5) Check for the binding of the insulating paper on
conductor
6) Check and ensure that physical condition of all
materials taken for winding is satisfactory and free of
dust
7) Check for absence of short circuit between parallel
strands
8) Check for Brazed joints wherever applicable
9) Measurement of voltage ratio to be carried out when
core / yoke is completely restocked and all connections
are ready
12.1.4.1 Checks before drying 1) Check conditions of insulation on the conductor and
process between the windings
2) Check insulation distance between high voltage
connection cables and earthed and other live parts
3) Check insulation distance between low voltage
connection cables and earthed and other parts
4) Insulation test of core earthing
5) Check for proper cleanliness
6) Check tightness of coils i.e. no free movements
12.1.4.2 Checks during drying 1) Measurement and recording of temperature and

process drying time during vacuum treatment.
2) Check for completeness of drying
3) Certification of all test result.
12.1.5 Oil As per IS 335 and annexure-I
12.1.6 Test on fittings and As per manufacturer’s standard
accessories
12.2 Routine The sequence of routine testing shall be as follows
tests/Acceptance tests 1) Visual and dimension check for completely assembled
transformer
2) Measurements of voltage ratio
3) Measurements of winding resistance at
principal tap and two extreme taps.
4) Vector group and polarity test
5) Measurements of insulation resistance and
polarization index.
6) Separate source voltage withstand test.
7) Measurements of iron losses and exciting current at
rated frequency and 90%, 100% and 110% rated
voltage.
8) Induced voltage withstand test.
9) Load losses measurement.
Page 27 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
10) Impedance measurement at principal tap (HV and

LV) of the transformer.
11) Routine test of tanks
12) Induced voltage withstand test (to be Repeated if
type tests are conducted).
13) Measurement of iron loss (to be repeated if type
tests are conducted).
14) Measurement of capacitance and Tan Delta for
transformer oil (for all transformers).
15) Phase relation test, polarity, angular displacement
and phase sequence.
16) Ratio of HV WTI CT, LV WTI CT and neutral CT
17) Excitation and knee point voltage test on class PS
core of neutral CT.
18) Routine test on on–load tap changer.
19) Oil leakage test on assembled transformer
20) Magnetic balance test
21) Power frequency voltage withstand test on all
auxiliary circuits
22) Temperature rise test.
23) Impulse test on one sample randomly selected.
23) Certification of all test result
a) Insulation resistance measurement shall be carried

out at 5 kv. Value of IR should not be less than 1000M
ohms.
Polarization index (PI = IR10min/IR1min). should not be
less than 1.5 (if one minute IR value is above
5000Mohms and it is not be possible to obtain an
accurate 10 minutes reading, in such cases polarization
index can be disregarded as a measure of winding
condition.)
b) Temperature rise test may be necessary to be carried

out on 100% of the order quantity at the manufacturer’s
works or third party lab.
12.3 Type tests On one transformer of each rating and type (In Govt.
recognized independent test laboratory / Internationally
accredited test lab or at manufacturer’s facility if it is
approved by component authority.
1) Impulse withstand test on all three HV
and LV limbs of the transformers for
chopped wave as per standard
2) Temperature rise test as per IS
3) Dissolved gas analysis before and after
Temperature Rise test
4) Pressure relief device test
5) Pressure and Vacuum test on tank(stage inspection)
12.4 Special tests On one transformer of each rating and type
1) Dynamic & Thermal short circuit test short circuit test
as per IS
2) Measure of zero seq. impedance
(CI.16.10 IS 2026 part-1)
Page 28 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
3) measurement of acoustic noise level

(CI.16.12 IS 2026 part-1)
4) measurement of harmonic level on no
load current
5) High voltage withstand test shall be
performed on the auxiliary equipment
and wiring after complete assembly.
Cost of such tests, if extra, shall be quoted separately by

the bidder.
12.5 Note for special tests Cost of the above tests, if extra, shall be quoted
and type test separately by the bidder which shall be considered in the
price evaluation.
12.6 Notification to biders The product offered must be of type tested design with
valid type test report of not more than 5 years.
In case the product offered is never type tested for tests
as per above list,type tests to be conducted by bidder at
his own cost at Govt. recognized independent test
laboratory / Internationally accredited test lab or at
manufacturer’s facility if it is approved by component
authority.
Valid type test reports for dynamic short circuit test as
per IS may be forwarded for customer’s review and
approval.
In case the product offered is never tested for dynamic
short circuit the same to be conducted by bidder at his
own cost at Govt. recoganised independent test
laboratory/internationally accredited test lab.
13.0 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

13.1 Packing For 3 secs.
13.1.1 Packing protection Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains, breakage and
vibration.
13.1.2 Packing for Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the
accessories and above protection
spares
13.1.3 Packing details On each packing case details required as follows
1) Individual serial number:
2) Purchaser’s name:
3) PO Number:
4) Destination:
5 Suppliers name:
6) Name and address of suppliers agent
7) Description and numbers of contents:
8) Manufacturers name:
9) Country of origin;:
10) Case measurements:
11) Gross and net weights in kilograms
12) All necessary slinging and stacking instructions.
13.2 Shipping The bidder shall ascertain at an early date and definitely
Page 29 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
before the commencement of manufacture, any transport

limitations such as weights, dimensions, roads culverts,
overhead lines, free access etc. from the manufacturing
plant to project site :and furnish to the purchaser
confirmation that the proposed packages can be safely
transported, as normal or oversize packages up to the plant
site. Any modifications required in the infrastructure and cost
thereof in this connection shall be brought to the notice of
the purchaser.
13.3 Handling and As per manufacturers instruction.

storage
14.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
Along with offer For approval Final after Remarks

after award approval /*After
of work completion of
delivery.
14.1 Drawings 3 Copies 4 copies 12 copies + 1 See clause
(Typical drgs) soft copy in CD 11 for
various
drawings
required.
14.2 Calculations 3 Copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft See clause
(Typical) copy in CD 11 for details
14.3 Catalogues 1 copy 12 copies + 1
soft copy in CD
14.4 Instruction 1 copy 12 copies + 1
manual for soft copy in CD
the transformer
14.5 Type test report 2 Copies (Type 12 copies + 1
& Routine test test and sample soft copy in CD
report. Routine Test) Routine Test
Report.
15.0 DEVIATIONS
clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative
offer. In absence of such a statement, it will be assumed
that the bidder complies fully with this specification. No
deviation will be acceptable post order.
Page 30 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
ANNEXURE – A – SCOPE OF SUPPLY

Design, manufacture, assembly, testing at stages of manufacture as per Cl. 12 of this
specification, final testing at manufacturer works on completely assembled transformer before
dispatch, packing, transportation, delivery and submission of all documentation for the Power
transformer with all accessories as below and ratings & requirements as specified in Annex C.
Sr No Description Scope Of Supply

1.0 Fully assembled transformer with all major parts like YES
conservator, Radiators, Marshalling box, Protective devices
as per Clause 5.0 of this specification, Fittings and
accessories as per Clause 6.0 of this specification
1.1 OLTC as per this specification YES

1.2 RTCC panel as per this specification No
1.3 HV, LV ,LV NEUTRAL cable boxes YES
1.4 Support steel material for support of cable boxes from ground YES
1.5 Foundation Bolts for complete transformer YES
1.6 Nickel Plated brass double compression weather proof No
glands for HV and LV cable
1.7 Long barrel medium duty Aluminum lugs for power cables YES
1.8 Nickel Plated brass double compression YES
weatherproof glands and tinned copper lugs for
control cable termination in Marshalling box for
vendor’s cables
1.9 Cables and wires for transformer accessories and internal YES
wiring of marshalling box.
1.10 Touch up paint, minimum 5 liters. YES
1.11 Extra Transformer oil 10 % in non returnable drums YES
1.12 One spare complete set of gaskets. YES

1.13 One set (4 Nos in a set) of anti rolling clamp for 90 lb rail. YES
1.14 Ordinary thermometers 4 Nos’ YES
1.15 Recommended spares as per manufacturer YES
2.0 Routine testing as per Clause 12 of this specification YES
3.0 Type testing as per Clause 12 of this specification YES
4.0 Special testing as per Clause 12 of this specification YES
5.0 Submission of Documentation as per clause 14 of this YES
specification
ANNEXURE – B – SERVICE CONDITIONS

1.0 Delhi Atmospheric condition
1.1 Average grade atmosphere Heavily polluted, dry
1.3 Ambient air temperature 40 deg C
1.4 Relative humidity 90% Max
1.5 Seismic zone 4
1.6 Rainfall 750 mm concentrated in four
months
Page 31 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
ANNEXURE – C – TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY OWNER)

Sr No Description Data by Owner
1.0 Location of equipment OUTDOOR
2.0 Reference design 40 deg C
ambient temperature
3.0 Type Oil immersed, core type, step down
4.0 Type of cooling ONAN / ONAF
5.0 Reference standard IS: 2026
6.0 No. of phases 3
7.0 No. of winding per 2
phase
8.0 Rated frequency (Hz) 50 Hz
9.0 Rated voltage (kV)

9.1 HV winding 33 66
9.2 LV winding 11 11
10.0 Vector group Dyn11 Dyn11
reference
11.0 Nominal continuous
rating, KVA
11.1 For 20/25 MVA
ONAN 20 20
ONAF 25 25
11.2 For 25/31.5 MVA
ONAN 25
ONAF 31.5
12.0 Impedance at principal 12% 12%
tap at rated frequency
with IS tolerance
13.0 Maximum no load loss 12kw (for 25 12kw (for 25
at rated condition MVA), MVA),
allowed without any
positive tolerance kW 14 kw (for
31.5 MVA)
14.0 Maximum load loss at 85 kw (for 85 kw (for
rated condition @ 75 25MVA), 25MVA),
deg C and principal
tap allowed without 115 kw (for
any positive tolerance, 31.5 MVA)
kW
15.0 Terminal connection /
cable / conductor size
15.1 HV side 33kv 66 kv
By 2 runs of By single
3C X400sq /Double
mm A2XFY ACSR
,33kv(E) “ZEBRA”
grade cable conductor
for 20/25 per phase
MVA.
15.2 LV side By 3 runs of By 3 runs of
Page 32 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
1 C X1000sq 1C X1000sq
mm per mm A2XY
phase unarmored
unarmored per phase
A2XY ,11 kv ,11kv (E)
(E) grade grade cable
cable
15.3 LV neutral By G .S. By G.S. strip
strip mim min 2x75x10
2x75x10 mm mm size
size
16.0 Highest system 36 72.5
voltage HV side, kV
17.0 Highest system 12 12
voltage LV side, kV
18.0 Lightning impulse
withstand voltage, kV
peak
18.1 For nominal system 75
voltage of 11 kV
voltage of 33 kV
voltage of 66 kV
19.0 Power frequency
withstand voltage kV
rms
voltage of 11 kV
voltage of 22 kV
voltage of 33 kV
voltage of 66 kV
20.0 Clearances phase to
phase, mm
voltage of 11 kV
voltage of 22 kV
For nominal system 350
voltage of 33 kV
voltage of 66 kV
21.0 Clearances phase to
earth, mm
voltage of 11 kV
voltage of 22 kV
Page 33 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
voltage of 33 kV
voltage of 66 kV
22.0 System fault level, HV 1000 MVA for 22kV
side 1500 MVA for 33 kV
3600 MVA for 66 kV
23.0 System fault level, LV 500 MVA for 11 kV
side
24.0 Short circuit withstand
capacity of the
transformer
24.1 Three phases dead For 3 secs.
short circuit at
secondary terminal
with rated voltage
maintained on the
other side
24.2 Single phase short For 3 secs.
circuit at secondary
terminal with rated
voltage maintained on
the other side
25.0 System earthing
25.1 HV Solidly earthed
25.2 LV Solidly earthed
26.0 Overload capability As per IS 6600
27.0 Noise level Shall not exceed limit as per NEMA TR- 1 with all
accessories running measured as per IEC 551 / NEMA
standard
28.0 Radio influence Maximum 250 microvolt
voltage
29.0 Harmonic suppression Transformer to be designed for suppression of 3rd, 5th, 7th
harmonic voltage and high frequency disturbances
30.0 Partial discharge 10 Pico C
31.0 Loss capitalization As per CBIP manual (see note2)
formulae
31.1 No load loss Rs. 4,09,979 per KW
capitalization figure
31.2 Load loss Rs. 2,26,718 per KW
capitalization figure
32.0 Temperature rise of 40 deg C
top oil by thermometer
33.0 Temperature rise of 45 deg C
winding by resistance
34.0 Note for the bidders (left blank)
35.0 Tapping to be For 33/11 kv & 66/11kvTransformer
provided on HV +5% to -15% @step of 1.25 % 16 taps, 17 tap positions,
winding for OLTC Tap no. 5 is principal tap.
36.0 Maximum flux density 1.9 Tesla
allowed in the core
extreme over
excitation /over fluxing,
Page 34 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
Tesla
37.0 Maximum current 3.0 Amperes per sqmm @ lowest tap.
density allowed
38.0 AVR input voltage/ Not applicable
Auxiliary supply
39.0 Bushing parameters
Rated Current for 1250 A for 33 kv bushing
20/25 MVA Xmer 2000 A for 11kv bushing
39.1 Creepage factor for all 31 mm / kV minimum
bushing mm /KV
39.2 Rated thermal short 25 times rated current for 2 secs
time current for all
bushing
39.2.1 Angle of mounting 0 to 90 degree
39.2.2 Cantilever withstand for 33 kv bushing- as per std. vendor
load 2000N for 11kv bushing
Overall Length for 33 kv bushing- as per std. vendor
(Approx) 503 mm for 11 kv bushing
Diameter of base 100 mm
Note 1: For ONAN and ONAF rating the temperature rise of the transformer shall be within
the values specified at sl .no. 31.0 and 32.0 above. Under ONAF cooling 20 % spare cooling
fans shall be provided .Design of cooling equipment and control shall comply to CBIP clause
no. 2.1.3 of Section A (general)
Note 2: The transformers will be evaluated against no load and load losses guaranteed by the
bidders with capitalization of losses as per figures indicated under sl no. 30.1, 30.2 and 30.6
above. However the maximum loss figure acceptable are as per cl 13.0 14.0 of Annexure C.
In case of deviation in loss figure on higher side, the technical offer won’t be considered for
evaluation. In the event of measured loss figures during testing exceeding the guaranteed loss
figures of the successful bidder penalty shall be levied at a rate of 1.25 times the figures
mentioned above for both no load and load losses.
Page 35 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
ANNEXURE – D – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TRANSFORMER OIL
1.0 Codes and standards
Latest revision of following codes and standards with all amendments-
Cl no. Standard no Title

1.1 IS 335 New insulating oils
1.2 IS1783 Drums for oils
2.0 Properties
2.1 Appearance Clear, transparent and free from

suspended matter or sediments
2.2 Density at 29.5 C 0.89G/CM^3
2.3 Kinematics viscosity Max 16 cSt at 27 C
11cSt at 40 C
2.4 Interfacial tension at 270C, min 0.04N/m
2.5 Flash point Pensky-Marten (Closed),1400C 140 C
Min.
2.6 Pour point Max -15 C

Neutalization value
1) Total acidity ,Max 0.03 mg KOH/ g
ii) Inorganic acidity/ Alkalinity Nil
2.7 Corrosive sulfur Non corrosive

2.8 Electric strength breakdown voltage Average vaue of six samples
1) New unfiltered oil Min 30 Kv rms min
2)After filtration Min 60 Kv rms
2.9 Dieelectric dissipation factor(tan delta) 0.002 at 90 CMax.
0.0005 at 27 C Max
2.10 Specific resistance (resistivity)
1) At 90 C Min 150 x 10^ 12ohm-cm
2) At 27 C Min 3000 x 10^12 ohm-cm
2.11 Oxidatioon stability
1)Neutralization value after oxidation,Max. 0.15mg KOH/g
2)Total sludge ,after oxidation ,Max 0.03%by weight

3) Max Tan Delta at 70 deg C 0.1
2.12 Ageing characterstics after accelerated ageing (open breaker method with
copper catalyst)
1) Specific resistance (resistivity)
a) at 27 DEG C Min 27x 10^12 ohm-cm
b) at 90 deg C Min 2 x 10^12 ohm-cm
2) Dielectric dissipation factor (tan delta)at 90 0.1
deg C Max
3) total acidity,Max 0.05mg KOH /g
4) Total sludge ,Max 0.05% by weight
Page 36 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
2.13 Presence of oxidation inhibitor No antioxidant additives

2.14 Water content ,Max 40 ppm
2.15 Max PCA (Poly cyclic aromatics) 3%
2.16 PCB(Poly chlorinated biphenyl content Not detectable
2.17 Tests As per IS335
ANNEXURE – E – SPECIFICATION FOR NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION

SYSTEM
1.1 General
Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall use nitrogen as fire quenching
medium. The protective system shall prevent transformer/Reactor oil tank explosion and
possible fire in case of internal faults. In the event of fire by external causes such as bushing
fire. OLTC fires, fire from surrounding equipment etc, it shall act as a fast and effective fire
fighter. It shall accomplish its role as fire preventer and extinguisher without employing water
and / or carbon dioxide. Fire shall be extinguished within 3 minutes (Maximum) of system
activation and within 30 seconds (maximum) of commencement of nitrogen injection.
1.2 Codes & Standards
The design and installation of the complete fire protection system shall comply with the
latest applicable Indian standards. Wherever Indian standards are not available relevant British
/ I.E.C. Codes shall be followed. The following standards / codes shall be followed in particular.
a. Approval certificate from Loss Prevention Association (LPA)

b. National fire Codes 1993 of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) USA.
The entire fire protection system shall be designed, erected and commissioned in accordance
with the regulation of Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC). In the absence of TAC regulations
NFPA regulation shall be adhered to.
1.3 Activation of the fire protective system

Mal-functioning of fire prevention/ extinguishing system could lead to interruption in power
supply. The supplier shall ensure that the probability of chances of malfunctioning of the fire
protective system is practically zero. To achieve this objective, the supplier shall plan out his
scheme of activating signals which should not be too complicated to make the fire
protective system inoperative in case of actual need. The system shall be provided with
automatic control for fire prevention and fire extinction. Besides automatic control, remote
electrical push button control at Control box and local manual control in the fire extinguishing
cubicle shall also be provided. The following electrical-signals shall be required for activating
the fire protective system under prevention mode / fire extinguishing mode.
1.3.1 Auto Mode
1.3.1.1 For prevention of fire
a. Differential relay operation
b. Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (Rapid Pressure Rise
Relay)
c. Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer /
reactor is the is the pre-requisite for activation of system.
Page 37 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
1.3.1.2 For extinguishing fire

a. Fire detector
b. Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve (PRV) or sudden pressure
relay (SPR).
c. Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer /
reactor is the pre-requisite for activation of system.
1.3.2 Manual Mode (Local / Remote)
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer / reactor is the
pre-requisite for activation of system.
1.3.3 Manual Mode (Mechanical)
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer / reactor is the
pre-requisite for activation of system.
The system shall be designed to be operated manually in case of failure of power supply to fire
protection system.
1.4 General description
Nitrogen injection fire protection system should be a dedicated system for each oil filled
transformer / reactor. It should have a Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC) placed on a plinth at
suitable distance away from transformer / reactor. The FEC shall be connected to the top of
transformer / reactor oil tank for depressurization of tank and to the oil pit (capacity
approximately equal to 10% of total volume of oil in transformer/reactor tank) from its bottom
through oil pipes. The fire extinguishing cubicle should house a pressurized nitrogen cylinder(s)
which is connected to the oil tank of transformer/reactor oil tank at bottom. The Transformer
conservator Isolation Valve (TCIV) is fitted between the conservator tank and Buchholz relay.
Cable connections are to be provided from signal box to the control box in the control
room, from control box to fire extinguishing cubicle and from TCIV to signal box. Fire detectors
placed on the top of transformer/reactor tank are to be connected in parallel to the signal box by
Fire survival cables. Control box is also to be connected to relay panel in control room for
receiving system activation signals.
1.5 Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, the system shall drain pre-determined volume of hot oil
from the top of tank (i.e top oil layer), through outlet valve, to reduce tank pressure by removing
top oil and simultaneously injecting nitrogen gas at high pressure for stirring the oil at pre-fixed
rate and thus bringing the temperature of top oil layer down. Transformer conservator isolation
valve blocks the flow of oil from conservator tank in case of tank rupture / explosion or bushing
bursting. Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating layer
over oil in the tank and thus preventing aggravation of fire.
1.6 System components
Nitrogen injection fire protection system shall broadly consist of the following
components. However, all other components which are necessary for fast reliable and effective
working of the fire protective system shall deemed to be included in the scope of supply.
1.6.1 Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC)
The FEC shall be made of CRCA sheet of 3 mm (minimum) thick complete with the base frame,
Page 38 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
painted inside and outside with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS-5). It shall have hinged
split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. The degree of protection shall be IP55. The
following items shall be provided in the FEC.
a. Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact
b. manometer.
c. Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
d. Control equipment for draining of oil of pre-determined volume and injecting
regulated volume of nitrogen gas
e. Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release
f. Limit switches for monitoring of the system
g. Butterfly valve with flanges on the top of panel for connecting oil drain pipe and
nitrogen injection pipes for transformer/reactors
h. Panel lighting (CFL Type)
i. Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.
1.6.2 Control box
Control box is to be placed in the control room for monitoring system operation, automatic control
and remote operation. The following alarms, indications, switches, push buttons, audio signal etc.
shall be provided.
a. System on
b. TCIV open
c. Oil drain valve closed
d. Gas inlet valve closed
e. TCIV closed*
f. Fire detector trip *
g. Buchholz relay trip
h. Oil drain valve open*
i. Extinction in progress *
j. Cylinder pressure low *
k. Differential relay trip
l. PRV / SPR trip
m. Transformer/reactor trip
n. System out of service *
o. Fault in cable connecting fault fire detector
p. Fault in cable connecting differential relay
q. Fault in cable connecting Buchholz relay
r. Fault in cable connecting PRV / SPR
s. Fault in cable connecting transformer /reactor trip
t. Fault in cable connecting TCIV
u. Auto/ Manual / Off
v. Extinction release on / off
w. Lamp test
x. Visual/ Audio alarm*
y. Visual/ Audio alarm for DC supply fail *
* Suitable provision shall be made in the control box, for monitoring of the system from
remote substation using the substation automation system.
1.6.3 Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve
Transformer conservator isolation valve (TCIV) to be fitted in the conservator pipe line, between
conservator and buchholz relay which shall operate for isolating the conservator during abnormal
Page 39 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
flow of oil due to rupture / explosion of tank or bursting of bushing. The valve shall not isolate
conservator during normal flow of oil during filtration or filling or refilling, locking plates to be
provided with handle for pad locking. It shall have proximity switch for remote alarm, indication
with visual position indicator.
The TCIV should be of the best quality as malfunctioning of TCIV could lead to
serious consequence. The closing of TCIV means stoppage of breathing of transformer/reactor.
Locking plates shall be provided for pad locking.
1.6.4 Fire detectors
The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors (quartz bulb) fitted
on the top cover of the transformer / reactor oil tank.
1.6.5 Signal box
It shall be mounted away from transformer / reactor main tank, preferably near the
transformer marshalling box, for terminating cable connections from TCIV & fire detectors
and for further connection to the control box. The degree of protection shall be IP55.
1.6.6 Cables
Fire survival cables (capable to withstand 750° C.) of 4 core x 1.5 sq. mm size for
connection of fire detectors in parallel shall be used. The fire survival cable shall conform to
BS 7629-1,BS 8434-1, BS 7629-1 and BS 5839-1,BS EN 50267-2-1 or relevant Indian standards.
Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cable of 12 core x 1.5 sq. mm size shall be used for
connection of signal box / marshalling box near transformer/reactor and FEC mounted near
transformer/reactor with control box mounted in control room.
Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cable of 4 core x 1.5 sq. mm size shall be used for
connection between control box to DC and AC supply source, fire extinguishing cubicle to AC
supply source, signal box/ marshalling box to transformer conservator isolation valve
connection on transformer/reactor.
1.6.7 Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends and tees etc. shall be supplied along with the
system.
1.7 Other items
a. Oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer / reactor tank at
suitable locations.
b. Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and
conservator Tank for fixing TCIV.
c. Fire detector brackets on transformer / reactor tank top cover.Spare potential free
contacts for activating the system i.e. in differential relay, Buchholz
d. relay, Pressure Relief Device / RPRR, Circuit Breaker of transformer/reactorPipe
connections between transformer / reactor and FEC and between FEC and oil pit
required for collecting top oil.
e. Cabling for fire detectors mounted on transformer /reactor top cover
f. Inter cabling between signal box, control box and Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC).
g. All external cables from / to the system i.e. signal box to control box and control box to
FEC shall be provided by the purchaser. All internal cables within the system i.e.
Page 40 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
between detectors / signal box / marshalling box / FEC / TCIV shall be in the
scope of NIFPS supplier.
h. Butterfly valves /Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe which should
be able to withstand full vacuum.
i. Supports, signal box etc. which are to be painted with enameled paint.
1.8 Technical Particulars
Fire extinction period from commencement 30 secs Max

of nitrogen injection.
Fire extinction period from the moment 3 Minutes maximum
of system activation
Fire detectors’ heat sensing temperature Vendor to specify
Heat sensing area per detector Vendor to specify
Transformer Conservator Isolation valve Vendor to specify
setting -min
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder Vendor to specify
Power supply
For Control 220 V DC, variation -15 %, +10 %
For service / lighting 230 AV AC variation + - 10 %
The doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketted all round with neoprene gaskets.
1.9 Mandatory Spares
Cylinder filled with Nitrogen of required 1 No.

capacity per substation
Fire Detectors per transformer 3 No’s.
Regulator assembly per sub-station 1 No.
1.10 Tests
Reports of all type test conducted as per relevant IS/IEC standards in respect of various bought
out items including test reports for degree of protection for FEC / control box / signal box shall be
submitted by the supplier. The supplier shall demonstrate the functional test associated with the
following:
a. Fire Extinguishing Cubicle, Control Box.
b. Fire Detector.
c. Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve
The performance test of the complete system shall be carried out after erection of the system with
transformer at site.
1.11 Documentation
1.11.1 To be submitted along with offer

a. General outline of the system.
b. Detailed write-up on operation of the offered protection system including maintenance
and testing aspects / schedules.
c. Technical Data particulars (GTP)
d. Data regarding previous supplies, date of commissioning, performance feedback etc.
1.11.2 To be submitted after award of contract:

Page 41 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
Detailed dimensional layout drawing of the system with complete bill of materials, clearances
from ground and other live points, details of detectors, equipment layout drawings, detailed
drawings pertaining to signal box, control box, FEC equipment, wiring and schemes, 4 sets
of testing, commissioning, Operation and Maintenance manual along with soft copies (in
CDs) shall be submitted by the supplier.
ANNEXURE – F – SPECIFICATION FOR SILICAL GEL BREATHER

This specification is intended to cover the manufacturing, testing at manufacturer’s works,
supply and delivery of “Silica Gel Breather” to the purchaser.
1.0 Scope of Supply
Silica Gel Breather shall be as per REL specification suitable for use in Power Transformer
(Main
Tank conservator & OLTC conservator) & for Distribution Transformer (Tank Conservator)
2.0 General
Silica Gel Breather offered by seller shall be suitable for continuous operation of prevailing
climatic conditions as mentioned in Annexure –B
3.0 Specific Requirement

3.1 Breather
A Body Aluminium pressure die caste Short Blasted &

Powder Coated
B Container Polycarbonate : 143R grade
C Oil Cup Polycarbonate : 143R grade
D Gasket Nitrile Cork (RC70C) for main body & oil cup
gasket
E Silica Gel Round ball type of size 2-5 mm (deep Blue)
F Paint Powder Coated
G Mounting Threaded for existing Transformers.
Flanged type for New Transformers
H Hardware Stainless Steel
I Flange Type, Size & Flange should be of circular shape with diameter of
hardware & with hardware of M10 bolts.
3.2 The indicating grade of Silica Gel, which shall be filled in the breather, is hard Blue Round
Ball with considerable absorption power of moisture & hence signaling the saturation degree
by changing colour ( from Blue to Pink).
3.3 The breather shall have clear visibility of Gel colour & of oil level with dust particles in the
oil cup from distance.
3.4 Breather should breathe only from the inlet holes provided for breathing. Air should not
enter anywhere from the body of breather.
3.5 Silica Seal shall be applied on gasket for better air tightening.
3.6 Gel removing & refilling method is specially designed to avoid skilled labour requirement at
site & consequent air leakages.
3.7 Oil filling indicator on oil cup.
Page 42 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
3.8 Application
Transformer Size Rating Silica Gel Quantity in KG
Main Tank Conservator OLTC Conservator

Power 20 & 31.5 5.0 Kg 1.0 Kg
Transformer MVA
3.9 Silica Gel
Sl. no Properties Requirement

1 Particle Size Round ball type of size 2.5 mm (deep
Blue)
2 Bulk Density 570-700 g/l
3 Moisture Adsorption Capacity 25 % (min)
1. R.H. = 100%
2. R.H. = 50%
3. R.H. = 40%
4. R.H. = 20%
4 Appearance 99.5% (min)
5 Friability 99.5% (min)
6 Chlorides percent by mass (max) 0.04%
7 Sulphates percent by mass (max) 0.5%
8 Cobalt percent by mass (max) 0.5%
9 Ammonium Compounds by mass 0.001%
(max)
10 Loss on drying 4% (max)
11 pH of Aqueous extract 5-6.5%
12 Loss on Attrition < 2.5 %
4.0 Marking
A Sticker label Indicating manufacturer’s Name, Sr. No. Gel capacity etc. shall be provided at
suitable place. Container may also marked with the Standard mark.
5.0 Testing
Breather container shall be suitably blanked & pressure tested with air at 0.35 Kg/cm for 30
minutes. There shall not be any leakages from gasketted joints. Test certificates from
accredited laboratory shall be submitted.
6.0 Prototype
Before starting manufacture of the quantity ordered, the successful bidder shall submit a
prototype for approval. Unless the prototype is inspected and approved, manufacturing shall
not be started. The necessity of submitting prototype shall be ascertained before starting of
manufacturing.
Page 43 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
7.0 Packing & Keeping Quality

The material shall be packed in clean, dry & air tight container. The material stored in original
air tight containers shall continue to satisfy all the properties of Silica Gel for not less than 6
months from date of packing.
8.0 Compliance Status / Deviation

Bidder shall indicate compliance status for every requirement & feature, on the right hand side
margin of the specification.
9.0 Documents Comprising The Bid

The bidder shall complete the bid proposal sheets inclusive of copy of the specification duly
filled in with compliance status, quality & operational manuals, Test certificates etc.
Indicating the material to be supplied, a brief description of the goods, their quantity and prices.
In absence of these documents, the offer shall be considered incomplete & may be rejected.
Page 44 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
SCHEDULE – A
Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Seller)
Sr.No. Particular Specified / Required Offered
1.0 General
1.1 Make
1.2 Type As per Annexure C of specification
2.0 Nominal continuous rating, KVA
2.1 ONAN As per Cl 11.1 of Annexure C
2.2 ONAF As per Cl 11.2 of Annexure C
3.0 Rated voltage (KV)

3.1 HV winding As per Cl 9.1 of Annexure C
3.2 LV winding As per Cl 9.2 of Annexure C
4.0 Rated current (Amps)
4.1 HV winding, ONAN / ONAF
4.2 LV winding , ONAN / ONAF
5.0 Connections
5.1 HV winding As per Annexure C of specification
5.2 LV winding As per Annexure C of specification
5.3 Vector group reference DYn11
6.0 Impedance at principal tap rated
current and frequency%
6.1 Impedance (% ) 12% for 20 & 31.5 MVA
6.2 Reactance (% )
6.3 Resistance (% )
6.4 Impedance at lowest tap rated
current and frequency
6.5 Impedance at highest tap rated
7.0 Resistance of the winding at
750Cat principal tap (ohm)
7.1 a) HV
7.2 b)LV
8.0 Zero sequence impedance (
ohm )
8.1 a) HV
8.2 b) LV
9.0 Guaranteed maximum losses at
principal tap at full load and 750
C without any positive tolerance
kW
9.1 No load losses (max.) As per Cl 13.0 Annexure C
9.2 Load losses (max.) As per Cl 14.0 Annexure C
9.3 Cooler fan losses (max.)
9.4 Total I SQR losses of windings
@ 75 deg C
9.5 Total stray losses @ 75 deg C
Page 45 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
9.6 Total losses (max.)

9.7 No load loss at maximum
permissible voltage and
frequency (approx.) kW
10.0 Temperature rise over reference
design ambient of 40 0C
10.1 Top oil by thermometer 0C 400 C
10.2 Winding by resistance 0C 450 C
10.3 Winding gradient at rated current
0
C
10.3.1 HV
10.3.2 LV
11.0 Efficiency
11.1 Efficiency at 750 C and unity
power factor %
11.1.1 At 110% load
11.1.2 At 100% load
11.1.3 At 80% load Not less than 99.5 %
11.1.4 At 60% load
11.1.5 At 40% load
11.1.6 At 20% load
11.2 Efficiency at 750 C and 0.8
power factor lag %
11.2.1 At 110% load
11.2.2 At 100% load
11.2.3 At 80% load
11.2.4 At 60% load Not less than 99.5 %
11.2.5 At 40% load
11.2.6 At 20% load
11.3 Maximum efficiency %
11.4 Load and power factor at which
Max efficiency occurs
12.0 Regulation (%)
12.1 Regulation at full load at 750 C
12.1.1 At unity power factor
12.1.2 At 0.8 power factor lagging
12.2 Regulation at 110% load at 750
C
12.2.1 At unity power factor
12.2.2 At 0.8 power factor lagging
13.0 Tapping
13.1 Type
13.2 Capacity
13.3 Range-steps x % variation As per Annexure C of specification
13.4 Taps provided on HV winding Yes
(Yes/No)
14.0 OLTC gear
14.1 Make
14.2 Type
14.3 Reference std
14.4 No of compartment
Page 46 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
14.5 Mounting arrangement Side mounted type although External Intank

Type is also preferable
14.6 Rated current Amp
14.7 Rated step capacity, kVA
14.8 Short circuit withstand for 2
secs, kA
14.9 Time required for one step
change sec.
14.10 Rated voltage for motor, V AC
14.11 Rating of motor
14.12 Rated voltage for auxiliaries V
14.13 Consumption of auxiliaries
14.14 OLTC features as per
specification, Yes/No
14.15 Does the overload rating of
OLTC match with that of the
transformer under all conditions
Yes/No
16.0 Cooling system
16.1 Type of cooling As per Annexure C of specification
16.2 No. of cooling unit groups
16.3 Capacity of cooling units
16.4 Mounting of radiators
16.5 Number of radiators and Size
16.6 Type & size of radiator header
main valve
16.7 Type & size of individual radiator
valve
16.8 Total radiating surface, sq mm
16.9 Thickness of radiator tubes, mm Minimum 1.2 mm
16.10 Schematic flow diagram of the
cooling system furnished
(Yes/No)
16.11 Type and make of Fan motor
16.12 No. of fan motor per bank
(Working + Standby )
16.13 Rated Power Input ( kW)
16.14 Rated Voltage, Speed of Motor
16.15 Efficiency of motor at Full
load(%)
16.16 Locked Rotor current(Amps)
17.0 Details of tank
17.1 Material Robust mild steel plate without pitting and
low carbon content
17.2 Thickness of sides mm
17.3 Thickness of bottom mm
17.4 Thickness of cover mm
17.5 Confirmation of tank designed
and tested for vacuum pressure
(Ref: CBIP manual ) (Yes/No)
17.5.1 Vacuum mm of Hg. / (kN/m2) As per CBIP
Page 47 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
17.5.2 Pressure mm of Hg Twice the normal head of oil / normal

pressure + 35 kN/m2 whichever is lower , As
per CBIP
17.6 Is the tank lid slopped? Yes
17.7 Inspection cover provided As per clause No 3.2.1.5
(Yes/No)
17.8 Location of inspection cover As per clause No 3.2.1.5
(Yes/No)
17.9 Min. dimensions of inspection
cover (provide list of all
inspection cover with
dimension), mm x mm
18.0 Core
18.1 Type: Core
18.2 Core material grade Premium grade minimum M4 or better
18.3 Thickness of lamination mm Max. 0.27 mm with insulating coating on
both sides
18.4 Insulation between core
lamination
18.5 Design flux density of the core at
rated condition at principal
tap,Tesla
18.6 Maximum flux density allowed in
the core at extreme
overexcitation / overfluxing ,
Tesla
18.7 Equivalent cross section area of
core, mm2
18.8 Guaranteed No load current at
90% / 100% / 110% rated
voltage & frequency ( Amp )
18.8.1 HV
18.8.2 LV
19.0 Type of winding
19.1 HV
19.2 LV
19.3 Conductor material Electrolytic copper as per relevant standard
19.4 Maximum current density As per Annexure C
allowed, Amp per mm2
19.5 Gauge/area of cross section of
conductor, mm2
19.5.1 HV
19.5.2 LV
19.6 Maximum current density
achieved in winding
(LV/HV/HVT) – Amps/ mm2
19.7 Insulating material
19.7.1 HV turn
19.7.2 LV turn
19.7.3 LV- core
19.7.4 HV-LV
Page 48 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
19.8 Insulating material thickness,

mm
19.8.1 HV turn
19.8.2 LV turn -
19.8.3 LV to core
19.8.4 HV to LV
20.0 Minimum design clearance , mm
20.1 HV to earth in air
20.2 HV to earth in oil
20.3 LV to earth in air
20.4 LV to earth in oil -
20.5 Between HV & LV in Air
20.6 Between HV & LV in oil
20.7 Top winding and yoke -
20.8 Bottom winding and yoke
21.0 Insulating oil
21.1 Quantity of oil Ltrs -
21.1.1 In the transformer tank
21.1.2 In each radiator
21.1.3 In OLTC chamber
21.1.4 Total quantity
21.2 10% excess oil furnished? Yes
21.3 Type of oil New insulating oil as per IS: 335, and CI.
4.2.7 of the specification
21.4 Oil preservation system provided As per Annexure C of specification
(Yes/No)
22.0 Bushing
22.1 Make
22.2 Type
22.3 Reference standard
22.4 Voltage class, kV
22.4.1 HV side bushing
22.4.2 LV side line and neutral bushing
22.5 Creepage factor for all bushing As per Annexure C of specification
mm / kV
22.6 Rated current , Amp
22.6.1 HV bushing
22.6.2 LV line and neutral bushing
22.7 Rated thermal short
current
22.7.1 HV bushing As per Annexure C of specification
22.7.2 LV line and neutral bushing As per Annexure C of specification
22.8 Weight Kg
22.8.1 HV bushing
22.9 Free space required for bushing
removal, mm
22.9.1 HV bushing
23.0 Terminal connections
Page 49 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
23.1 HV As per Annexure C of specification

23.2 LV As per Annexure C of specification
23.3 LV Neutral As per Annexure C of specification
24.0 H.V. Cable box/Terminals
24.1 Suitable for cable/conductor type As per Annexure C of specification
size
24.2 Termination height , mm 1000 mm , minimum
24.3 Gland plate dimension mm x
mm
24.4 Gland plate material Aluminium
24.5 Gland plate thickness , mm 5 mm minimum
24.5 Phase to clearance inside box /
terminals , mm
24.6 Phase to earth inside box /
terminals , mm
25.0 L.V line side cable box
25.1 Suitable for cable type , size As per Annexure C of specification
25.2 Termination height , mm 1000 mm , minimum
mm
25.6 Phase to clearance inside box /
terminals , mm
25.7 Phase to earth inside box , mm
26.0 LV Neutral cable box
26.1 Suitable for cable type , size As per Annexure C of specification and for
accommodating NCT spec. – Annex D
26.2 Termination height , mm
mm
26.6 Phase to clearance inside box ,
mm
26.7 Phase to earth inside box , mm
27.0 Marshalling box cubical provided
as per clause no. of spec. (Yes /
no)
27.1 Mounting of marshalling box Project specific to be filled up (Separate /
tank mounted )
28.0 Neutral Current Transformer For Delhi DISCOM
(NCT)
28.1 Type
28.2 Make
28.4 Rated Voltage 12kV
28.5 CT Ratios 20/25 MVA, Dyn11 25/31.5 MVA,
Dyn11
Core 1 Core 2 Core 1 Core 2
1600/1 A 1600/5A 2000/1 2000/1 A
Page 50 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
A
28.6 Burden ,VA - 20 - 20
28.7 Class of Accuracy PS 5P20 PS 5P20
28.8 KPV , volts , minimum 40(Rct+8 - 40(Rct+ -
) 8)
28.9 Resistance, ohm @ 75 deg C, 1 - 1 -
maximum
28.10 Magnetizing current @ Vk/4 , 30 - 100 -
mA , maximum
28.11 Short time withstand current 26.3 kA for 3 sec.
29.0 Winding current transformer
(WCT)
29.1 Type
29.2 Make
29.4 CT ratio
29.5 Burden ,VA Manufacturer Std.

29.6 Class of accuracy Manufacturer Std.
30.0 Pressure release device
30.1 Minimum pressure the device is
set to rupture
30.1.1 For main tank
30.1.2 For OLTC
31.0 Alarm and trip contact ratings of
protective devices
31.1 Rated/making/ breaking currents
, Amp @ voltage for
31.1.1 PRV for main tank
31.1.2 PRV for OLTC
31.1.3 Buchholz relay
31.1.4 Oil surge relay for OLTC
31.1.5 Sudden pressure relay
31.1.6 OTI
31.1.7 WTI
31.1.8 Magnetic oil gauge
32.0 Fittings accessories each
transformer furnished as per
clause No. (Bidder shall attach
separate sheet giving details,
make and bill of materials)
33.0 Painting: as per clause for the
transformer , cable boxes,
radiator, marshalling box, etc
(Yes/No)
34.0 Over all transformer dimensions
34.1 Length , mm
34.2 Breadth , mm
34.3 Height , mm
35.0 Transformer tank dimensions
35.1 Length , mm
Page 51 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
35.2 Breadth , mm
35.3 Height , mm
36.0 Marshalling box dimensions
36.1 Length , mm
36.2 Breadth , mm
36.3 Height , mm
37.0 Weight data
37.1 Core, kG
37.2 Frame parts, kG
37.3 Core and frame, kG
37.4 Total winding, kG

37.5 Core and frame winding, kG
37.6 Tank, kG
37.7 Tank lid, kG
37.8 Empty conservator tank , kG
37.9 Each radiator empty , kG
37.10 Total weight of all radiator empty
, kG
37.11 Weight of oil in tank , kG
37.12 Weight of oil in each conservator
, kG
37.13 Weight of oil in each radiators ,
kG
37.14 Total weight of oil in radiator ,
kG
37.15 OLTC gear including oil , kG
37.16 Total transport weight of the
transformer , kG
37.17 Total transport weight of the
transformer with OLTC and all
accessories
38.0 Volume data
38.1 Volume of oil in main tank , liters
38.2 Volume of oil between highest
and lowest levels of main
conservator ,liters
and lowest levels of OLTC
conservator, liters
38.4 Volume of oil in each radiator ,
liters
38.5 Total volume of oil in radiators ,
liters
38.6 Volume of oil in OLTC , liters
38.7 Transformer total oil volume ,
liters
39.0 Shipping data
39.1 Weight of heaviest package, kG
39.2 Dimensions of the largest
package (L x B x H) mm
Page 52 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
40.0 Tests
40.1 All in process tests confirmed as
per Cl. (Yes /No)
40.2 All types tests confirmed as per
Cl. (Yes /No)
40.3 All in routine tests confirmed as
per Cl. (Yes /No)
40.4 All in special tests confirmed as
per Cl. (Yes /No)
SCHEDULE – B
Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Transformer Oil
Bidder to submit hard copy duly filled & signed along with techno commercial offer. Bidder to
submit separate GTP for each type of insulating oil
S.no Description Specification Offered

requirement
1 Manufacturer Name
1.1 Address
1.2 Contact Person
1.3 Contact telephone no
2.1 Appearance Clear, transparent
and free from
suspended matter or
sediments
2.2 Density at 29.5 C 0.89G/CM^3
2.3 Kinematics viscosity Max 16 cSt at 27 C
11cSt at 40 C
2.4 Interfacial tension at 270C, min 0.04N/m
2.5 Flash point Pensky-Marten 140 C
(Closed),1400C
Min.
2.6 Pour point Max -15 C

Neutalization value
1) Total acidity ,Max 0.03 mg KOH/ g
2.7 Corrosive sulfur Non corrosive

2.8 Electric strength breakdown voltage Average value of six
samples
1) New unfiltered oil Min 30 Kv rms min
2)After filtration Min 60 Kv rms
2.9 Dieelectric dissipation factor(tan delta) 0.002 at 90 CMax.
0.0005 at 27 C Max
1) At 90 C Min 150 x 10^ 12ohm-cm
2) At 27 C Min 3000 x 10^12 ohm-
Page 53 of 54
SP-TRPU-01-R4
cm
2.11 Oxidatioon stability
1)Neutralization value after 0.15mg KOH/g
oxidation,Max.
2)Total sludge ,after oxidation ,Max 0.03%by weight
3) Max Tan Delta at 70 deg C 0.1
2.12 Ageing characterstics after accelerated (open breaker
ageing method with copper
catalyst)
1) Specific resistance (resistivity)
a) at 27 DEG C Min 27x 10^12 ohm-cm
b) at 90 deg C Min 2 x 10^12 ohm-cm
2) Dielectric dissipation factor (tan 0.1
delta)at 90 deg C Max
3) total acidity,Max 0.05mg KOH /g
4) Total sludge ,Max 0.05% by weight
2.13 Presence of oxidation inhibitor No antioxidant
additives
2.14 Water content ,Max 40 ppm
2.15 Max PCA (Poly cyclic aromatics) 3%
2.16 PCB(Poly chlorinated biphenyl content Not detectable
2.17 Tests As per IS335
Page 54 of 54
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HT INDOOR SWITCHGEAR (33 & 11kV)
INDEX
1.0 RECORD OF REVISION........................................................................................ 3

2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ............................................................................................. 3
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 3
4.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 4
5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER .............................................................................................. 6
6.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 7
7.0 SURGE SUPPRESSOR......................................................................................... 9
8.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER ................................................................................. 9
9.0 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER .............................................................................. 9
10.0 FEEDER AND BUS EARTHING ......................................................................... 10
11.0 EQUIPMENT EARTHING .................................................................................... 10
12.0 METERS ............................................................................................................... 11
13.0 INDICATION, ALARMS & ANNUNCIATION ...................................................... 11
14.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS .................................................... 13
15.0 INTERNAL WIRING ............................................................................................. 13
16.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS ........................................................................................... 14
17.0 RELAYS ............................................................................................................... 15
18.0 SPACE HEATERS ............................................................................................... 24
19.0 SOCKETS, SWITCHES & ILLUMINATION LAMPS........................................... 24
20.0 NAMEPLATES AND MARKING ......................................................................... 25
21.0 SURFACE TREATMENT & PAINTING ............................................................... 26
22.0 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS .......................................................... 26
23.0 INSPECTION , TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................ 27
24.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX .................................................... 28
25.0 PACKING ............................................................................................................. 30
26.0 SHIPPING ............................................................................................................ 31
27.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE ............................................................................... 31
28.0 PROGRESS REPORTING................................................................................... 31
29.0 DEVIATION .......................................................................................................... 32
30.0 ACCESSORIES & TOOLS .................................................................................. 32
ANNEXURE – A - SCOPE OF SUPPLY ........................................................................ 33
ANNEXURE – B – TRANSFORMER MONITORING CUM AVR RELAY ..................... 33
ANNEXURE – C - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY PURCHASER) ............... 36
ANNEXURE – D - GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY BIDDER)40
ANNEXURE – E – SPARES REQUIREMENT ............................................................... 60
ANNEXURE- F -SLD(F-1 to F-12)…………………………………………………………61
Page 2 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
1.0 RECORD OF REVISION
S. Item/
Change/ Addition Reason of Change/Addition
No Clause No
APFC shall be supplied by Auto Switched
Capacitor Bank Supplier but cutout for the
1.1 4.17 Space for APFC Relay
same has to be provided by 11kV
Switchgear Panel Vendor
Ammeter has been removed and
1.2 12.2 Multifunction Meter Multifunction Meter has been included for
SCADA integration of all parameters
Spare Terminal Block in Capacitor
1.3 16.8 For APFC Control cables
Bank Panel
SCADA interface port requirement For integration with SCADA on IEC 61850
1.4 17.1.5
revised based on site requirement
As Auto Switched Capacitor banks are
Neutral Unbalance protection by
1.5 17.6.1 used, Only one RVT is enough in
RVT
comparison with three NCTs
Panel Rating plate requirement All CT, PT and breaker details included in
1.6 20.1.3
revised Panel Rating plate for ready reference.
To streamline drawing/document
1.7 24.0 Drawing and Data Submission
submission
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

a. This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply, erection &
commissioning of 33kV and 11kV, Air Insulated, metal-enclosed and factory
assembled switchgear.
b. This specification shall be used in conjunction with all specifications, switchgear
data sheets, single line diagrams, and other drawings attached to the
specification / purchase requisition.

Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of switchboards shall conform to the
latest edition of following
3.1 Indian Electricity Rules 1956 Latest edition

3.2 Indian Electricity act 1910 Latest edition
IEC : 60694, IEC: 60298, IEC : 62271-200, IEC
3.3 Switchgear and control gear : 60529, IS: 3427, IS: 12729, IS: 12063, IS:
13947, IS: 9046
3.4 Circuit breaker IEC 62271 - 100, IS 13118, IS 2516
3.5 Isolators & earthing switches IEC 62271 - 102
Page 3 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
3.6 Current transformers IS:2705, IEC:60185
3.7 Voltage transformer IS:3156, IEC:60186,
3.8 Indicating Instruments IS:1248
3.9 Energy meters IS 13010
3.10 Relays IS:8686, IS:3231, IS:3842
3.11 Control switches and push buttons IS 6875
3.12 HV fuses IS 9385

Arrangement of Switchgear bus bars,
3.13 IS:375
main connections and auxiliary wiring
Code of practice for phosphating iron &
3.14 IS 6005
steel
3.15 Colours for ready mixed paints IS 5

Code of practice for installation and
3.16 IS 3072
maintenance of switchgear

Free standing, Indoor, Fully compartmentalised,
4.1 Enclosure Type
Metal clad, Vermin proof
IP 4X for high voltage compartment
4.2 Enclosure degree of protection
IP 5X for low voltage compartment
4.3 Enclosure material Pre-Galvanized CRCA steel
4.3.1 Load bearing members 2.5 mm thick
4.3.2 Doors and covers 2.0 mm thick

3.0 mm MS for multicore and 5. 0 mm Aluminium for
4.3.3 Gland plate single core cables. All gland plates should be
detachable type with gasket
Maximum 2700mm, Operating height maximum
1600mm. In case of Extension of Existing make
4.4 Dimension of Panel
panels, vendor shall match the dimension of existing
panel.
4.5 Extensibility On either side
Page 4 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Bus bar, Circuit Breaker, HV incoming cable, HV

4.6 Separate Compartments for
outgoing cable, PT, LV instruments & relays
For cable compartment at height of cable
4.7 Transparent inspection window
termination.
4.8 Bus end cable box For direct cable feeder from bus
Separate, with lockable handle (Design with breaker
trolley as the front cover is not acceptable). Door of
4.9 Breaker compartment door
one panel should not cause hindrance for opening of
adjacent panel.
4.10 Inter compartmental connections
4.10.1 Breaker to bus bar compartment Through seal-off bushings
4.10.2 Breaker to cable compartment Through seal-off bushings
4.11 Pressure relief devices To be provided for each HV compartment

Non-hygroscopic, track-resistant, high strength,
Epoxy insulators (Calculation for validating dynamic
4.12 Bus support insulator
force withstand capability to be submitted during
detailed engineering)
Doors - Concealed hinged, door greater than 500mm
shall have minimum three sets of hinges
4.13 Fixing arrangement
Covers - SS bolts
Gasket - Neoprene
Required HV cable termination 650 mm for 11 KV.
4.14
height in the cable compartment 1000mm for 33 KV
4.15 Panel Base Frame Steel Base frame as per manufacturer’s standard.
Removable bolted covers with handle for cable
chamber and busbar chamber. Panel
4.16 Handle
no./identification to be provided on cable box cover
also.
Page 5 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Controlling of Capacitor Banks’ switching shall be

done by APFC. Although APFC shall not be in
4.17 APFC bidder’s scope, Space for cut out shall be provided in
the Capacitor panel. Space requirement-150X150
mm2
4.18 Technical particulars As per Annexure –C
5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER
5.1 Type Truck or cassette type
On withdrawable truck or carriage, with locking

5.2 Mounting
facility in service position.
a. Transformer (oil filled and dry type)
b. Motor (of small and large ratings – DOL starting
5.3 Switching duty with starting current 6 to 8 times the full load
current & with a maximum of 3 starts per hour)
c. Underground cable with length up to 10 km
5.4 Interrupting medium Vacuum
Three separate identical single pole units operated

5.5 Breaker operation
through the common shaft
Re-strike free, Trip free, with electrical anti-pumping
5.6 Operating Mechanism
feature
Motor wound, spring charged, stored energy type
5.6.1 Type
with manual charging facility
One O-C-O operation possible after failure of power
5.6.2 Operation on supply failure
supply to the spring charging motor
5.7 Breaker indications & push buttons

a. Manual / mechanical.
ON/ OFF / Emergency trip push b. Emergency Off push button should be provided
5.7.1
button with a protective flap.
c. Mechanical ON shall have padlocking facility.
Page 6 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
5.7.2 Mechanical ON – OFF indication On breaker trolley front
5.7.3 Operation counter On breaker trolley front
5.7.4 Test-service position indicator On breaker trolley front

Mechanism charge / discharge
5.7.5 On breaker trolley front
indicator
5.8 Breaker positions Service, Test and Isolated
5.9 Inter changeability Possible, only with breaker of same rating
5.10 Breaker Control On panel front only

Breaker shall be provided with handles for easy
5.11 Handle handling, rack in–out operation and manual spring

charging as applicable.
5.12 Technical particulars As per Annexure-C
6.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Interlocks
Breaker compartment door Opening of door and rack out to test/isolated position
6.1.1
opening should be possible with breaker in OFF position only.
Breaker compartment door Should be possible even when breaker is in isolated
6.1.2
closing position
Racking mechanism safety
6.1.3 Mechanical type
interlock
Racking in or out of breaker
6.1.4 When the breaker is closed
inhibited
Racking in the circuit breaker
6.1.5 Unless the control plug is fully engaged
inhibited
Disconnection of the control plug
6.1.6 As long as the breaker is in service position
inhibited
Opening of cable compartment
6.1.7 cover of Incomer Panels As long as cable end is alive

inhibited
6.2 Safety Devices
Page 7 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
In case the breaker panel door is required to be

opened during a contingency, the personnel should
6.2.1 Exposure to live parts not be exposed to any live part. Suitable
shrouds/barriers/insulating sleeves should be
provided.
In case the breaker is mounted on a carriage which
6.2.2 Breaker handing does not naturally roll out on the floor, a trolley for
handling the breaker is to be provided.
6.3 Operation of breaker In either service or test position

Only when local/remote selector switch is in local
6.3.1 Closing from local
position
Only when local/remote selector switch is in remote
6.3.2 Closing from remote
position
Only when local/remote selector switch is in local
6.3.3 Tripping from local
position
Only when local/remote selector switch is in remote
6.3.4 Tripping from remote
position
6.3.5 Tripping from protective relays Irrespective of position of local/remote switch

In test or isolated position keeping control plug
6.3.6 Testing of breaker
connected
6.4 Safety shutters.

To fully cover contacts when breaker is withdrawn to
Automatic safety shutter for test. Independent operating mechanism for bus bar
6.4.1
female primary disconnects & cable side shutters, separately pad-lockable in
closed position.
6.4.2 Label for identification For Bus side and cable side shutters
Warning label on shutters of Clearly visible label "Isolate elsewhere before
6.4.3
incoming and other connections earthing" be provided
6.5 Breaker electrical operation features
6.5.1 Trip circuit supervision To be given for breaker close & open condition
Trip circuit supervision relay
6.5.2 For indication, alarm & to inhibit closing of breaker
contact
Page 8 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Emergency trip push button Wired directly to trip coil (wired to Master trip relay if
6.5.3
contact second trip coil provided)
Emergency trip push button
6.5.4 Wired to inhibit closing of breaker
contact
Master trip relay contact (if
6.5.5 Wired to inhibit closing of breaker
given)
DC control supply bus in all Fed by two DC incoming sources in Bus coupler
6.6
panels panel with auto changeover facility
Fed normally by bus PT with automatic changeover
6.7 PT supply bus in all panels
facility to incomer line PT
7.0 SURGE SUPPRESSOR

To be provided in all panels except bus coupler and
7.1 Provision
BPT.
7.2 Type Gapless, metal oxide type
7.3 Technical particulars As per Annexure -C

Shall be cast resin type with insulation class of E or
8.1 Type
better.
As per Annexure – C (Technical particulars) and
Rating and technical
8.2
particulars Annexure – F (SLDs)
If specified, bidder shall clearly mention his proposal
8.3 CBCT
for mounting the same.
9.0 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER

Shall be cast resin type with insulation class of E or
9.1 Type
better.
As per Annexure – C (Technical particulars) and
Rating and technical
9.2
particulars Annexure – F (SLDs)
Page 9 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
It shall be mounted on a withdrawable carriage.

Mounting of PT on the breaker truck is not
acceptable. In case it is mounted on the panel rear
9.3 Mounting
top, access to the PT and the reinforcement in the
panel for allowing a person to stand should be
provided.
The HV neutral connection to earth shall be easily
9.4 Neutral
accessible for disconnection during HV test.
10.0 FEEDER AND BUS EARTHING
10.1 Earthing arrangement Through separate earthing truck for bus & feeder
Short time withstand capacity of Equal to rating of breaker. Refer technical
10.2
earthing truck parameters.
10.3 Operation from front Mechanically operated by separate switch.

To prevent inadvertent closing on live circuit, with
10.4 Interlocks padlocking arrangement to lock truck in close or

open position.
11.0 EQUIPMENT EARTHING
11.1 Material of earthing bus Aluminium

All bolted joints in the bus should be made by
11.2 Earth bus joints
connection of two bolts.
11.3 Rating Sized for rated short circuit current for 3 seconds
Enclosure & non -current
11.4 carrying part of the switchboard / Effectively bonded to the earth bus.
components
11.5 Hinged doors Earthed through flexible copper braid

Earthed before the main circuit breaker contacts/
11.6 Circuit breaker frame /carriage control circuit contacts are plugged in the associated
stationary contacts
Page 10 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Connected to the earth bus by independent copper

wires of size not less than 2.5 sq. mm with green
Metallic cases of relays,
colour insulation. For this purpose LT compartment
11.7 instruments and other LT panel
should have a clear designated earth bus to which
mounted equipment
earth connections from all components are to be
connected.
Earthed at one place at the terminal blocks through
11.8 CT and PT neutral
links.
12.0 METERS
12.1 Mounting Flush mounted
12.2 Multifunction Meter

12.2.1 Model Rish Delta Energy
12.2.2 Make Rishabh
RS485 rear port suitable for integration on Modbus
12.2.3 SCADA Interfacing
Protocol
12.2.4 Size 96x96 mm2
12.2.5 Panels where to be provided All panels
12.2.6 Accuracy Class 1
12.2.7 Auxiliary Supply 48 – 240VDC and AC i.e universal type.
12.3 Voltmeter Digital type with programmable ratio
12.3.1 Size 96x96 mm2
12.3.2 Panels where to be provided Incomer and bus PT panel
12.3.3 Voltmeter switch Inbuilt in meter
12.3.4 Accuracy Class 1.0

Energy meter is not in supplier’s scope. Only space
and CT/PT wiring is to be provided in all panels
12.4 Energy meter provision
except bus coupler and bus PT. Space for Energy
meter shall be 200(w) X 350(h) mm2
13.0 INDICATION, ALARMS & ANNUNCIATION

13.1 Indications Flush mounted, High intensity, clustered LED type
13.1.1 Breaker ON Red
13.1.2 Breaker Off Green
Page 11 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
13.1.3 Spring Charged Blue
13.1.4 DC control supply fail Amber
13.1.5 AC control supply fail Amber
13.1.6 Auto trip Amber
13.1.7 Test Position White
13.1.8 Service Position White

Yellow (Indication with integrated push button for
13.1.9 Heater circuit healthy
checking)
13.1.10 Trip circuit healthy White
13.1.11 PT supply as applicable R,Y B
13.2 Annunciator (For 33kV Panels only)

Static type alongwith alarm. Annunciations shall be
repetitive type and shall be capable of registering the
13.2.1 Type
fleeting signal. Fascia test facility should also be
provided.
LED type indications may not be provided for alarm
13.2.2 Note
signals provided on annunciator.
13.2.3 Mounting Flush mounted
13.2.4 Fascia 12 window

Window 1 – Main Protection Operated (Distance
/Differential)
Window 2 – Backup O/C & E/F Protection Operated
Window 3 – LBB operated
Window 4 – CB Autotrip
13.2.5 Signals to provided on Fascia
Window 5 – Trip Circuit Unhealthy
Window 6 – DC Fail
Window 7 – AC Fail
Window 8 – VT Fuse Fail
Window 9 – Protection Relay Faulty
13.2.6 Push Buttons For test, accept and reset
13.2.7 Potential Free Contacts To be provided for event logger
Page 12 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
a. For DC fail, TC fail and CB auto trip in 11kV

Alarm scheme with isolation panels
13.3
switch b. For all signals wired to annunciator in 33kV
panels
Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows-
Visual Audible
S No. Alarm Condition Fault Contact
Annunciation Annunciation
a. Normal Open Off Off
b. Abnormal Close Flashing On
c. Accept Close Steady on Off
d. Return to normal Open Steady On Off
e. Reset Open Off Off
Reset before return to
f. Close Flashing On
normal
14.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS

Flush mounted on LV compartment door, with
14.1 Selector switches
shrouded terminals
14.1.1 TNC switch with pistol grip Lockable, spring return to normal position
Local / SCADA selector 2 pole
14.1.2
switch
14.1.3 Rotary ON/OFF switches For heater / illumination circuit
14.1.4 Rating 16 A
Flush mounted on LV compartment door, with
14.2 Push Button
shrouded terminals
14.2.1 Emergency trip push button Red color with stay put
14.2.2 Accept push buttons Black color – Trip alarm / DC fail alarm
14.2.3 Reset push buttons Yellow color – Trip alarm / DC fail alarm
14.2.4 Rating 10 A
15.0 INTERNAL WIRING

1100 V grade, PVC insulated (FRLS) stranded
15.1 Internal wiring
flexible copper wire.
2.5 sq mm for CT circuit, 1.5 sq mm for PT & control
15.2 Size
circuits
Page 13 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
15.3 Colour code

R Ph – Red
Y Ph – Yellow
15.3.1 CT & PT
B Ph – Blue
Neutral – Black
15.3.2 Others DC– grey, AC-black, Earth – green
15.4 Ferrules At both ends of wire

Interlocked type (one additional red colour ferrule for
15.5 Ferrule type
all wires in trip circuit)
Tinned copper, pre-insulated, ring type, fork type and
15.6 Lugs pin type as applicable. CT circuits should use ring

type lugs only.
Spare contacts of relays and contactors etc. should
15.7 Spare contacts
be wired upto the terminal block.
Plastic channels, Inter panel wiring through PVC
15.8 Wiring enclosure
sleeves
Wires with ferrule to be terminated in the adjacent
15.9 Interpanel wiring shipping section should be supplied with one end
terminated and the other end bunched and coiled.
Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage
transformer circuits, annunciation circuits and other
15.10 Auxiliary supply
common services shall be provided on the same set
of terminals in all the panels with proper segregation.
16.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS

1100 V grade, moulded piece, stud type screw driver
16.1 Rating and Type operated terminals complete with insulated barriers,
washers, nuts and lock nuts.
16.2 Segregation TBs shall be segregated.

For termination of minimum 6sqmm flexible copper
16.3 Suitability
conductor.
Page 14 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
White fibre markings strip with clear plastic, slip-on /

16.4 Marking and covers
clip-on terminal covers to be provided.
16.5 Disconnecting Facility To be provided in CT and PT terminals
16.6 Shorting & Earthing Facility To be provided in CT Terminals
16.7 Spare Terminals 20% in each TB row

Separate Terminal Block with 50 number terminals
Spare Terminal Block in
16.8 required (20 Numbers Disconnecting and 30 Number
Capacitor Bank Panel
Non Disconnecting type)
16.9 TB shrouds & separators Moulded non- inflammable plastic material
16.10 Clearance between 2 sets of TB 100 mm min
16.11 Clearance with cable gland plate 250 mm min

Clearance between AC / DC set
16.12 100 mm min
of TB
16.13 Test terminal blocks Screw driver operated stud type for metering circuit
17.0 RELAYS
17.1 Protection Relays – General Features

Numerical , microprocessor based with provision for
17.1.1 Technology and Functionality multifunction protection, control, metering and

monitoring
17.1.2 Mounting Flush Mounting, IP5X

and disconnectable to adapt the protection and
17.1.3 Architecture
control unit to the required level of complexity as per
the application.
Relay shall utilize a user friendly setting and
operating multi-lingual software in windows
environment with menus and icons for fast access to
Programming and
17.1.4
configuration the data required. Programming software and
communication cord for offered relays should be
included in scope of supply.
Page 15 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
RS485 rear port for interfacing with SCADA on

IEC103 and dual fibre optic port for interfacing with
SCADA on IEC 61850 & PRP compatible. Through
these ports relays shall be connected to switches.
Protocol shall be selectable at site. If relays have any
17.1.5 SCADA Interface port
other rear port, hardware/software required to
achieve the above said compatibility will be in
supplier’s scope. Ethernet switches at switchgear
end shall be suitably mounted in an auxiliary
compartment in switchgear panel.
SCADA functions in monitoring direction shall be
executed on SPI (Single Point Input) and DPI
17.1.6 Processing Indications (Double Point Input). DPI shall only be used in case
of Isolator and Circuit breaker “close” and “open”
indication.
Functionality of command processing offered for
SCADA interface shall include the processing of
single and double commands i.e SCO (Single
17.1.7 Command Processing Command Output) and DCO (Double object

command Output). DCO shall only be used in case
of Isolator and Circuit Breaker close” and “open”
command.
Front port (preferably serial) for configuration/data
downloads using PC. Cost of licensed software and
17.1.8 PC Interface port communication cord, required for programming of

offered protection relays shall be included in the cost
of switchgear.
An alphanumeric key pad and graphical LCD display
with backlight indicating measurement values and
17.1.9 User Interface operating messages. It should be possible to access

and change all settings and parameters without the
use of PC.
Page 16 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Relay shall integrate all necessary protections for

different applications in accordance with IS and IEC.
17.1.10 Relay Characteristics Relay shall provide wide setting ranges and choice
of all IEC, IEEE and other tripping curves through a
minimum of two setting groups.
Relay shall have the facility of recording of various
parameters during event/fault with option to set the
duration of record through settable pre fault and post
17.1.11 Event and Fault records fault time. Relay shall store records for last 10 events
and 10 faults (minimum). It should be possible to
download records locally to PC and remotely to
SCADA.
Relay shall be able to detect internal failures. A
17.1.12 Self diagnosis watchdog relay with changeover contact shall

provide information about the failure.
All relays shall be capable of being synchronized
17.1.13 Time synchronization with the system clock using SCADA interface and
PC.
17.1.14 Operation Indicators LEDs with push button for resetting.
17.1.15 Test Facility Inbuilt with necessary test plugs.
17.2 Protection Relays for 11kV Incomer panel
protection with IDMT, Definite time and
instantaneous characteristics
17.2.1 Relay 1
Undervoltage and overvoltage protection
Sync Check function
PT supervision (fuse failure monitoring)
17.2.2 Relay 2 High Impedance Restricted Earth fault protection.

Relay-1 & 2 should have a total of 16 Dis and 10 Dos
User Configurable DIs and
17.2.3 (minimum). Each relay should have atleast 2 Dis and
Dos
4 Dos
17.2.4 Note
Page 17 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
17.2.5 SLD Refer annexure – F1
17.3 Protection Relays for 11kV Bus Section panel

IDMT, Definite time and instantaneous
17.3.1 Relay 1 characteristics

Sync Check function
User Configurable 12 Dis and 6 Dos (minimum)
17.4 Protection Relays for 11kV Outgoing panel

17.4.1 Relay 1
characteristics
User Configurable 12 Dis and 6 Dos (minimum)
17.5 Protection Relays for 11kV Station Transformer panel

17.5.1 Relay 1
characteristics
User Configurable 12 DIs and 6 DOs (minimum)
17.6 Protection Relays for 11kV Capacitor panel

characteristics
Undervoltage and Overvoltage protection(From Bus
PT)
17.6.1 Relay 1
Neutral Unbalance protection(From RVT associated
to Cap Bank)
Timer for on time delay (minimum 600 seconds)
17.6.2 SLD Refer annexure – F5.
Page 18 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
17.7 Protection Relays for 33kV Incomer

Distance Protection
Relay 1 ( If Distance protection
is considered as primary Sync check function
protection) PT supervision
Power swing blocking
Line differential protection
Relay 1 (If Line differential Software based CT ratio correction
protection is considered as Dedicated port for communication with remote end
primary protection) relay through optical fibre. This port should be in
17.7.1
addition to PC interface and SCADA interface ports.
Selection of Relay-1 (primary protection) will depend
on site requirements. Hence bid shall contain prices
of Incomer panel -
Selection of Relay 1 a. With Distance protection as primary
protection
b. With Line differential protection as primary
protection.
protection with IDMT, Definite time and
instantaneous characteristics.
17.7.2 Relay 2
Sync check function, if not provided in relay 1.
PT supervision, if not provided in relay 1
Relay-1 & 2 should have a total of 16 DIs and 12
17.7.3 DOs (minimum). Each relay should have atleast 2
DOs
DIs and 6 DOs
17.7.4 Note
17.8 Protection Relays for 33kV Transformer Feeder Panel

Biased differential protection
17.8.1 Relay 1
REF protection
Page 19 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Software based ratio and vector correction feature

(without ICT)
H2 and H5 harmonic restraint
17.8.2 Relay 2
characteristics
DOs
DIs and 6 DOs.
17.8.4 Note
17.9 Protection Relays for 33kV Buscoupler Panel

characteristics.
17.9.1 Relay 1 Sync check function

PT supervision (fuse failure monitoring) for Bus PT-
17.9.2 Relay 2
2. May be provided as integral feature of relay-1.

Protection Relays for 33kV Outgoing Panel (For Installation at KCC Consumer
17.10
Premises)
17.10.1 Relay 1 characteristics

Page 20 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
17.11 Protection Relays for 33kV Incomer from 66/33kV Autotransformer

characteristics

Undervoltage and overvoltage protection
17.11.2 Relay 2 High Impedance Restricted Earth fault protection

DOs
DIs and 6 DOs
17.11.4 Note
relay is not acceptable
17.12 Protection Relays for 33kV Outgoing from 66/33kV Autotransformer

Relay 1 (Distance protection is Distance Protection
considered as primary PT supervision
protection) Power swing blocking
Line differential protection
Relay 1 (Line differential Software based CT ratio correction
protection is considered as Dedicated port for communication with remote end
primary protection) relay through optical fibre. This port should be in
17.12.1 addition to PC interface and SCADA interface ports.

Selection of primary protection will depend on site
requirements. Hence bid shall contain prices of
Incomer panel –
Selection of Relay-1 a. With Distance protection as primary
protection
b. With Line differential protection as primary
protection.
17.12.2 Relay 2 3-phase Overcurrent and Earthfault protection with
Page 21 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3

characteristics.
DOs
DIs and 6 DOs
17.12.4 Note
17.13 Protection Relays for 33kV Buscoupler for Switchboard of 66/33kV Autotransformer
characteristics.

PT supervision (fuse failure monitoring) for Bus PT-
17.13.2 Relay 2
2. May be provided as integral feature of relay-1.
17.14 Protection Relays – SCADA Interfacing

DI-1 – TC Unhealthy
DI-2 – CB Autotrip (contact from lockout relay)
DI-3 – CB Open
DI-4 – CB Close
Configuration and wiring of DIs
DI-5 – CB in service
in Protection Relays (All
17.14.1 DI-6 – CB in test
panels) for routing status
DI-7 – Spring Charged
signals to SCADA
DI-8 – L/R switch in local
DI-9 – AC fail
DI-10 – Adjacent Panel DC Fail/DC MCB Trip
DI-11 – Adjacent Panel Protection Relay fail
Page 22 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
DI-12 – PT MCB trip (metering and protection, for

incomer and capacitor panel only)
Sequence of DIs should be strictly as mentioned
above. Change in sequence of DIs will not be
acceptable.
Configuration and wiring of DO-1 – CB Open
DOs in Protection relays (all DO-2 – CB close
panels) for execution of DO-3-Electrical Reset
17.14.2
SCADA commands through Sequence of DOs should be strictly as mentioned
SCADA interface port (refer above. Change in sequence of DOs will not be
clause 16.1.5). acceptable.
All relays in the switchboard have to be looped to
17.14.3 Looping of numerical relays
form a common bus for interfacing with SCADA.
17.14.4 Spare DIs and DOs Should be wired upto terminal block for future use.
17.15 Transformer Monitoring cum AVR Relay
17.15.1 Features As per annexure –B
17.15.2 Requirement To be provided in 33KV Transformer panel only
17.16 Auxiliary Relays – General Features

Relays for auxiliary,
17.16.1 supervision, trip and timer Static or electromechanical type.

relays
Reset mechanism for auxiliary
17.16.2 Self reset contacts except for lock-out relays.
relays
Reset mechanism for lockout Electrical reset type for 11kV outgoing panels only.
17.16.3
relays Hand reset type for all other panels.
With hand-reset operation indicators (flags) or LEDs

17.16.4 Operation indicators
with pushbuttons for resetting.
17.17 Auxiliary relays – Requirement

Anti pumping (94), lockout (86)
17.17.1 and trip circuit supervision (74) For each breaker
relays
To be provided for selection between Bus PT and
17.17.2 PT selection relays
Line PT of respective sections.
Page 23 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Lockout relay (86) contact of each incoming breakers

Switchgear with two incomer &
17.17.3 to be wired in series in closing circuit of other
bus coupler
incoming breakers & bus coupler.
Auxiliary Relays, contact To effect interlocks and to exchange signals of status
17.17.4
multiplication relays etc. & control
Auxiliary relays with indicating flags (contactors will
not be accepted) should be provided for the following
trip and alarm commands –
a. Buchholz trip
b. OSR trip
Transformer trouble relays c. PRV trip
17.17.5 (For 33kV Transformer feeder d. SPR trip

panel only) e. WTI Trip
f. OTI Trip
g. Buchholz Alarm
h. Low oil level alarm
i. OTI Alarm
j. WTI Alarm.
Auxiliary supply will be 50/220VDC based on
General Requirements for all
17.18 requirement. All relays/contactors shall be suitable
relays/contactors
for continuous operation at 15% overvoltage.
18.0 SPACE HEATERS
18.1 Type Thermostat controlled with switch for isolation

In Breaker & HV cable compartment, mounted on an
insulator. Heater position in cable compartment
18.2 Location should be easily accessible after cable termination.

Heater position in breaker chamber shall be
accessible with breaker racked-in.
19.0 SOCKETS, SWITCHES & ILLUMINATION LAMPS
19.1 Illumination lamp with switch For LV & cable chamber
Page 24 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Universal type (5/15 A) Socket

19.2 In LV chamber
with Switch
20.0 NAMEPLATES AND MARKING
20.1 Nameplates To be provided as per the following description

a. All equipment mounted on front side as well as equipment
mounted inside the panels shall be provided with individual name
plates with equipment designation engraved.
Equipment
20.1.1 b. All front mounted equipment shall be also provided at the rear
Nameplates
with individual name plates engraved with tag numbers
corresponding to the one shown in the panel internal wiring to
facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
a. Large and bold name plate carrying the feeder identification/
numbers shall be provided on the top of each panel on front as well
as rear side. On rear side, nameplate should be provided on frame.
20.1.2 Feeder Nameplates
b. Rear bottom of each panel shall have a nameplate clearly
indicating the following: Customer Name – BSES Delhi; PO No. &
date; Drawing Reference No. etc.
Following details are to be provided on Panel rating plate:
a. Customer Name – BSES Yamuna Power Limited
b. PO No. & Date –
c. Complete CT Rating plate details
20.1.3 Rating Plate d. Complete PT Rating plate details

e. Complete CB Rating Plate details
f. Date of Manufacturing-
g. Warranty Period-
h. Customer care No-
Non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Nameplates shall be black with
20.1.4 Material
white engraving lettering. Stickers are not allowed.
All nameplates/rating plates shall be riveted to the panels at all four
20.1.5 Fixing
corners. Bolting/screwing is not acceptable.
20.2 Markings Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its function.
Page 25 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Similar inscription shall also be provided on each device whose

function is not otherwise identified. If any switch or device does not
bear this inscription separate nameplate giving its function shall be
provided for it. Switch shall also have clear inscription for each
position indicating e.g. Trip-Neutral close, ON-OFF etc.
21.0 SURFACE TREATMENT & PAINTING
21.1 Surface Treatment Sand blasting or by seven tank process.
21.2 Paint type Powder coated. Pure polyester base grade-A structure finish.
21.3 Paint shade RAL 7032 for external & internal surface
21.4 Paint thickness Minimum 50 microns

R series of ABB, Siprotec series of Siemens, Micom series of
Schneider/Alstom. Numerical relays used in complete switchboard
22.1 Numerical Relays
should be of same make. Use of two different makes of relays in a
switchboard is not acceptable.
Transformer
22.2 monitoring cum A-eberle/Easun-MR

AVR relay
Electromechanical
22.3 Alstom/Schneider/Siemens/ABB/ER
Relays
22.4 Miniature Relays ABB/Jyoti/Omran
22.5 Contactors ABB/Siemens/Telemechanique

Instrument
22.6 ECS/ Pragati/ Gemini/Schneider/CGL/Kappa/Narayan power tech
transformers

Test terminal
22.9 IMP/Schneider/Alstom
blocks
Page 26 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
22.11 Indicating lamps Siemens/ Teknic/ Binay
22.13 Meters Rishabh/Conzerv
23.0 INSPECTION , TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE

The product must be of type tested quality as per applicable
23.1 Type Tests
Indian standards / IEC
Last five years from date of bid submission. Bidder with type test
Type test report
23.1.1 report more than 5 years old needs to re-conduct the tests without
validity period
any commercial implication to BSES
Pressure relief Test certificate for panel to be submitted
23.1.2
device operation
As per the specification and relevant standards. Charges for
Acceptance & these tests shall be deemed to be included in the equipment
23.2
Routine tests price. In addition to these tests, following tests have to be carried
out as acceptance tests -
Primary injection
23.2.1 To be carried out on panels selected for testing
test
One panel per Purchase order (PO with minimum 10 panels)

Temperature rise without any commercial implication to BSES. In-house testing is
23.2.2
test
acceptable.
Paint Thickness/ To be carried out on panels selected for testing

23.2.3
Peel off
The purchaser/owner reserves the right to witness all the
23.3 Inspection
acceptance/routine tests during inspection.
Notice to purchaser
23.4 for conducting type At least three weeks in advance
tests
Test reports before
23.5 dispatch for Six (6) copies of acceptance and routine test reports
approval
23.6 Quality Assurance
23.6.1 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval
Page 27 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
23.6.2 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
24.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX

provided on A3/A4 sheet (based on legibility) in box file with separators for each section. PDF shall
also be provided of all documents via USB. Language of the documents shall be English only.
Deficient/ improper document/ drawing submission shall be liable for rejection.
Pre Pre
S. No Head Bid Drawing Approval
Dispatch Closure
Contact Person
Name, Email ID
24.1 Required
and Mobile
Number
Consolidated
Deviation Sheet
Relevant Type Test
24.4 Required
as per IS/IEC
Power Cable and
control cable
24.5 Required
Philosophy and
Schedule
Manufacturer's
quality assurance
24.6 plan and Required
certification for
quality standards
Sizing Calculation
24.7 of Associated Required
Equipment
Recommended
Spares Apart from
24.8 spares stated in Required
Spec(for five years
of operation)
11 kV / 33 kV
24.9 Switchgear
drawing
General
24.9.1 Required Required
Arrangement
24.9.2 Sectional Layout Required
LV Box Internal
24.9.4 Required
Layout
Page 28 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3

Schematic Circuit
diagram and
24.9.6 Required
Scheme of Each
type of Panel
Communication
24.9.7 Required
Architecture
Bus Bar
24.9.8 Required
Arrangement
24.9.9 QAP Required
24.9.10 Panel wise BOQ Required
Logic Operation
24.9.11 Required
Diagram
Synch Logic
24.9.13 Required
Diagram
Foundation
24.9.14 Required
Diagram
Make of all
24.9.18 Component as per Required
specification
Drawing of
24.10 Required
Substation Room
Ventilation detail
24.11 requirement of GIS Required
Room
Installation,
erection and
24.12 commissioning Required
manual for
switchgear
As manufacturing
24.14 Required
Drawings
Operation and
24.15 Maintenance Required Required
Manual
Trouble shooting
manual
Weekly progress
24.19 Required
report
Page 29 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
25.0 PACKING
Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains,
25.1 Packing Protection transit and storage, panels may be subjected

to outdoor conditions. Hence, packing of each
panel shall be weatherproof.
Robust wooden non returnable packing case
25.2 Packing for accessories and spares with all the above protection & identification
Label
Packing Identification Label to be provided on each packing case with the following
25.3
details
25.3.5 Destination
Page 30 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
26.0 SHIPPING
The bidder shall ascertain at an early date and
any transport limitations such as weights,
dimensions, road culverts, Overhead lines, free
access etc. from the Manufacturing plant to the
project site. Bidder shall furnish the confirmation that
26.1 Shipping the proposed Packages can be safely transported,

as normal or oversize packages, up to the site. Any
modifications required in the infrastructure and cost
thereof in this connection shall be brought to the
notice of the Purchaser.
The seller shall be responsible for all transit damage

Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail
27.1 Handling and Storage handling & storage instruction sheet / manual needs

To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of
28.1 Outline Document production, inspection, testing, inspection, packing,

dispatch, documentation programme
Page 31 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
To be submitted to Purchaser once a month

containing:
a. Progress on material procurement
b. Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
c. Progress on assembly (As applicable)
28.2 Detailed Progress report d. Progress on internal stage inspection

e. Reason for any delay in total programme
f. Details of test failures if any in manufacturing
stages
g. Progress on final box up
h. Constraints / Forward path
29.0 DEVIATION
Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in
writing with the tender by reference to the
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description
29.1 Deviation
of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed that the bidder
complies fully with this specification.
30.0 ACCESSORIES & TOOLS
30.1 Type and Quantity Bidder to indicate

Special tools & tackles required
for erection, testing, The cost of these items shall be indicated separately
30.2
commissioning and in the bid as optional.
maintenance of the switchboard
Suitable handling truck / trolley
To be supplied. (Two trolleys for each type/rating of
30.3 for lifting and moving the circuit
breaker)
breaker
Page 32 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
ANNEXURE – A - SCOPE OF SUPPLY

Scope of supply should include the following –
1.1 Design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer’s works, properly packed for
transport, supply and FOR delivery at site of following 11kV / 33kV Switchgears as per
enclosed specification and single line diagram.
1.2 Base channel frame of the switchgears with hardware.
1.3 Two trolleys for breaker of each size are to be provided per switchboard.
1.4 Programming software and communication cord for numerical relays.
1.5 Unit price of 33kV Incomer with Distance relay as primary protection and 33kV
Incomer with Line differential relay as primary protection should be mentioned
separately in the bid. Primary protection to be used in Incomer panel will be finalized
based on site requirement.
1.6 Unit price of Bus PT should be indicated separately in the bid to enable
addition/deletion based on site requirement.
1.7 Bidder should indicate price of one set of special tools and tackles (if any) required for
maintenance of switchgear and its components.
1.8 Bidder should indicate price of each spare as per Annexure E.
1.9 All relevant drawings, data and instruction manuals
ANNEXURE – B – TRANSFORMER MONITORING CUM AVR RELAY
1 General features
Technology and Microprocessor based with provision for multifunction
1.1
Functionality control and monitoring.
1.2 Mounting Flush Mounting
1.3 Architecture and disconnectable to adapt the control unit to the
required level of complexity as per the application.
AVR shall utilize a user friendly setting and operating
Programming and
1.4 multilingual software in windows environment with
configuration
menus and icons for fast access to the data required.
1.5 User Machine Interface UMI with an alphanumeric key pad and graphical LCD
Page 33 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
display with backlight indicating measurement values

and operating messages. Capability to access and
change all settings and parameters.
Front port (preferably serial) for configuration using
PC. Cost of licensed software and communication
1.6 PC Interface port cord, required for programming of offered protection
relays using PC, shall be mentioned separately in the
bid.
RS485 rear port for interfacing with SCADA on
IEC103 and dual fibre optic port for interfacing with
SCADA on IEC 61850 & PRP compatible. Through
these ports relays shall be connected to switches.
Protocol shall be selectable at site. If relays have any
1.7 SCADA Interface port
other rear port, hardware/software required to achieve
the above said compatibility will be in supplier’s
scope. Ethernet switches at switchgear end shall be
suitably mounted in an auxiliary compartment in
switchgear panel.
Shall be able to detect internal failures. A watchdog
1.8 Self diagnosis relay with changeover contact shall provide
information about the failure.
1.9 Auxiliary supply 220VDC or 48VDC
2 Inputs and Outputs
2.1 CT Input 1/5A selectable through programming
2.2 PT Input 110VAC
Sixteen programmable binary inputs should be
2.3 Binary Inputs
provided
2.4 Analog Inputs (4-20mA) One input to be provided
2.5 PT-100 direct input Two inputs to be provided
2.6 Direct Resistance Input For tap position indication (18 steps)
2.7 Binary Outputs Ten programmable binary outputs should be provided
3 Control
Page 34 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Ability to implement control functions through

3.1 Control Tasks
programmable logics
3.2 Voltage setting Programmable Voltage set point
Raise/Lower tap position to maintain the preset value
3.3 Voltage Regulation
of voltage.
3.4 Voltage Regulation modes Automatic and Manual
3.5 Operation Modes Local and Remote
3.6 Fan and Pump control To be provided
Capability to parallel transformers whose AVRs are
3.7 Transformer Paralleling
interconnected via a communication network.
4 SCADA Interfacing
DI-1 – Buchholz trip
DI-2 – OSR Trip
DI-3 – PRV trip
DI-4 – SPR trip
DI-5 – OTI trip
DI-6 – WTI trip
Configuration of DIs for DI-7 – Buchholz alarm
4.1 routing alarm/trip signals to DI-8 – Oil Level low alarm (MOG alarm)
SCADA. DI-9 – WTI alarm
DI-10 – OTI alarm
DI-11 – Tap changer trouble/stuck/out of step
DI-12 – Tap changer motor supply fail
DI-13 – Tap changer in local control
All signals from DI-1 to DI-10 are to be wired up from
transformer trouble auxiliary relays.
Configuration of DOs for DO-1 – Tap raise
executing commands from DO-2 – Tap lower
4.2
SCADA through interface DO-3 – Fan group 1 control
port/CRP DO-4 – Fan group 2 control
4.3 Spare DIs and DOs To be wired upto the terminal block.
5 Measurement, Event Recording and Monitoring
Page 35 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Measured Quantities Voltage, Current, Active Power, Reactive Power,

5.1
(optional) Apparent Power, Power factor, frequency
Facility for recording parameters during various
5.2 Event Recording events such as tap change, change in binary input
status etc.
Capability to monitor important transformer
parameters such as Oil temperature, Winding
5.3 Monitoring Temperature etc and give indication/alarm when the
value of a particular parameter exceeds the preset
value.
ANNEXURE – C - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY PURCHASER)

1.0 SWITCHGEAR
1.1 Type Metal clad, air insulated with VCB type circuit
breaker
1.2 Service Indoor
1.3 Mounting Free standing, floor mounted
1.4 System Voltage 11 KV 33kV

1.5 Voltage variation +/- 10%
1.6 Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%
1.7 Phase 3
1.8 Rated voltage 12 KV 36 kV
1.9 Rated current As per SLDs given in Annexure-F
1.10 Short time rating for 3 sec. 25kA 25kA

1.11 Internal arc classification
and rating
1.11.1 Classification IAC – A - FLR IAC – A - FLR
1.11.2 Rating 25kA for 1 second 25kA for 1 second.
1.12 Insulation level 28 kV / 75 kV 70 kV/ 170 kV
(PF rms / Impulse peak)
Page 36 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
1.13 System ground Effectively earthed Effectively earthed

1.14 Enclosure degree of IP – 4X for high voltage compartment and
protection IP – 5X for metering and protection compartment
1.15 Bus bar - Main Rating as per SLDs given in annexure - F, Short
time rating as per clause 1.10.
1.15.1 Material Tinned Electrolytic copper
1.15.2 Bus bar sleeve Sleeved with shrouds on joints. Tape on joints is not
acceptable.
1.15.3 Bus identification Colour coded
1.15.4 Temperature rise 40 deg. C for conventional joints.

55 deg. C for silver plated joints
1.16 Auxiliary bus bar Electrolytic grade tinned copper
1.17 Auxiliary DC Supply 220 V DC / 48 V DC

1.18 Auxiliary AC supply 240 V AC 50 Hz
1.19 Hardware Stainless steel.
1.20 Earth bus Aluminium
1.21 Bus duct entry From top (where ever applicable)
1.22 Power cable entry From bottom and rear
1.23 Control cable entry From bottom and front (i.e breaker compartment)
2.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER

level, short time rating
2.2 Rated current As per SLDs given in annexure - F. Use of two
breakers in parallel to meet the required current
rating shall not be acceptable.
2.3 Duty cycle O – 0.3 sec – CO - 3min - CO
2.4 Short circuit rating
2.4.1 A.C sym. breaking current 25kA 25kA

2.4.2 Short circuit making current 62.5kA 62.5kA
2.5 Operation time
Page 37 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
2.5.1 Break time Not more than 4 cycles
2.5.2 Make time Not more than 5 cycles
2.6 Range of Auxiliary Voltage
2.6.1 Closing 85% - 110%
2.6.2 Tripping 70% - 110%
2.6.3 Spring Charging 85% - 110%
2.7 No. of spare aux. Contacts Minimum 6 NO + 6 NC

of Breaker, for Owner’s
use.
2.8 No. of spare contacts of 2 NO
Service and Test position
limit switch
3.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

level and short time rating
3.2 Type Cast resin, window / bar primary type
3.4 Ratio As per SLDs given in annexure - F
3.5 Number of secondaries As per SLDs given in annexure - F
3.6 Accuracy class
3.6.1 Protection core 5P20
3.6.2 Protection (Diff. / REF) PS
3.6.3 Metering 0.2s
3.6.4 Core balance CT PS
3.7 Burden (VA) Adequate for the protection & instruments offered
3.8 Excitation current of PS 30 mA at Vk/4
Class CTs
3.8 Knee Point Voltage of PS >= 40 (Rct + 4)
Class CTs (Vk)
Page 38 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
3.9 Primary operating current 5A

sensitivity of CBCTs
4.1 Type Cast resin, draw out type, single phase units
4.2 Rated Voltage
4.2.1 Primary 11000/sq.rt.3 33000/sq.rt.3
4.2.2 Secondary 110V/sq.rt.3
4.3 No. of phases 3
4.4 No. of secondary windings 2
4.5 Method of connection Star/Star
4.6 Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds
4.8 Accuracy class
4.8.1 Protection 3P
4.8.2 Metering 0.2
4.9 Primary and secondary HRC current limiting type, Primary fuse
fuses replacement shall be possible with VT in withdrawn
position
5.0 HV FUSES
5.1 Voltage class 12kV 36kV
5.2 Rupturing capacity 50kA
5.3 Rated current As per application
6.0 SURGE ARRESTORS For 11kV switchgear For 33kV switchgear
6.1 Rated Voltage 9kV 30kV
6.2 Maximum continuous 7.65kV 25kV

operating voltage (MCOV)
6.3 Discharge current 10kA 10kA
6.4 Discharge class 3 3
Note - The auxiliary DC voltage shall be checked on a case to case basis by Purchaser
Page 39 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
ANNEXURE – D - GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (DATA BY BIDDER)
Sr. No. Description Feeder Panel Type
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
1.0 SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLY
1.1 Make
1.2 Type
1.3 Reference Standard
1.4 Voltage (Normal/Max.) kV
1.6 Frequency (Hz)
1.7 Short Circuit Rating
1.7.1 Short time current and duration.
1.8 Internal Arc Classification and rating
( Refer Annexure –C )
1.8.1 Classification
1.8.2 Rating with gas ducts/deflectors
1.8.3 Rating without gas ducts/deflectors
1.9 Insulation Level
1.9.1 Impulse Withstand ( kV peak )
1.9.2 1 minute 50 Hz. Voltage Withstand (
kV rms )
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Metal Clad Construction Yes/No
2.2 Degree of protection :
2.3 Minimum thickness of sheet metal
used ( mm )
2.4 Draw out feature provide for
2.4.1 Breaker with Service, Test &
Isolated position -Yes/No
Page 40 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
2.4.1 Voltage Transformer :
Yes/ No
2.4.3 Protective relays : Yes/ No
2.5 Breaker Cubicle
2.5.1 Cubicle door can be closed with
breaker in Test and isolated
position : Yes/ No
2.5.1 Working zone units from floor level
(mm )
2.6 All meters, switches & relays flush
mounted type: Yes/No
2.7 Minimum clear space required
2.7.1 Front for breaker withdrawal (mm)
2.7.2 Rear ( mm )
2.8 Typical Vertical Section
2.8.1 Overall Dimensions
a. Length ( mm )
b. Breadth ( mm )
c. Height ( mm )
2.8.2 Weight ( kg )
3.0 BUS BAR
3.1 Make
3.2 Material & Grade
3.4 Cross Sectional area (mm2)
3.5 Bus connection (Joints)
3.5.1 Silver Plated Yes/No
Page 41 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
3.5.2 Conventional made with anti oxide
grease Yes/No
3.6 Rated Continuous Current Amps
3.7 Maximum temperature rise at rated
continuous current °C
3.8 Short time current and duration (KA
and secs)
3.9 D.C. Resistance at 85°C (Ω/m/∅ )
3.10 Minimum clearance of bus bar and
connection
3.10.1 Phase to phase ( mm )
3.10.2 Phase to earth ( mm )
3.11 Bus Bar provided with
3.11.1 Insulation Sleeve
3.11.2 Phase barriers
3.11.3 Cast Resin shrouds for joints
3.12 Bus bar support spacing (mm)
3.13 Bus support insulators
3.13.1 Make
3.13.2 Type
3.13.3 Reference Standard
3.13.4 Voltage Class ( kV )
3.13.5 Min. creepage distance (mm)
3.13.6 Cantilever strength Kg/mm2
3.13.7 Net Weight ( kg )
4.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER
4.1 Make
Page 42 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
4.2 Type
4.4 Rated Voltage
4.5 Rated Frequency
4.6 Rated Current
4.6.1 Rated Current and its reference
ambient temperature.
4.6.2 Continuous current to limit the
maximum temperature rise to 55
Deg C for silver plated connections
and 40 Deg C for conventional
connections.
4.7 Rated operating Duty
4.8 Symmetrical Breaking capacity at
rated voltage & operating duty KA
rms
4.9 Rated making Current (KAp)
4.10 Short time current and duration ( KA
and secs)
4.11 Insulation Level
4.11.1 Impulse voltage withstand on
1/50 full wave
4.11.2 1 minute 50 Hz. Voltage withstand
4.12 Maximum over voltage factor when
switching off
4.12.1 Un loaded transformer
4.12.2 Loaded transformer
Page 43 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
4.12.3 Un loaded cables
4.12.4 Capacitors
4.12.5 Motors
4.13 Opening time maximum No load
condition ( ms )
4.14 Number of permissible breaker
operations under vacuum loss
4.15 At 100% Breaking capacity
4.15.1 Opening time-Max. ( ms)
4.15.2 Arcing time-Max ( ms)
4.15.3 Total break time ( ms)
a. Make time (Max) ( ms)
b. Total closing time ( ms)
4.17 Total length of contact travel ( mm)
4.18 No. of breaker operations
permissible without requiring
inspection, replacement of contacts
and other main parts.
4.18.1 At 100% rated current
4.18.2 At 100% rated breaking current
4.19 Type of contacts
4.20 Material of contact
4.21 Minimum clearance in air (mm) from
live part
4.21.1 Between phases
4.21.2 Between live parts and ground
4.22 Type of arc control device provided
Page 44 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
4.23 Operating mechanism-closing
4.23.1 Type
4.23.2 No. of breaker operations stored
4.23.3 Trip free or fixed trip
4.23.4 Anti pumping features provided
4.24 Operating mechanism-tripping
4.24.1 Type
4.24.2 No. of breaker operations stored
4.24.3 Trip free or fixed trip ( V )
4.24.4 Anti pumping features provided ( %
)
4.25 Spring Charging motor
4.25.1 Rating ( kW )
4.25.2 Make
4.25.3 Voltage and permissible variation (
%)
4.26 Closing coil
4.26.1 Voltage ( V )
4.26.2 Permissible voltage variation ( % )
4.26.3 Closing current at rated voltage ( A
)
4.26.4 Power at rated voltage ( W )
4.27 Tripping Coil
4.27.1 Voltage
4.27.2 Permissible voltage variation ( % )
4.27.3 Tripping Current at rated Voltage (
A)
Page 45 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
4.27.4 Power at rated voltage ( W )
4.28 Breaker/Accessories Accessories
such as control switch indication
lamps etc. furnished as specified:
(Please attach separate sheet
giving details of all accessories,
inter locks and safety shutters)
4.28.1 Mechanical Safety Interlock
4.28.2 Automatic Safety Interlock
4.28.3 Operational Interlock
4.28.4 Emergency manual trip
4.28.5 Operation counter
4.28.6 Change/discharge indicator
4.28.7 Manual spring charging facility
4.28.8 Auxiliary switch with 6NO+ 6 NC for
Owner’s use.
4.28.9 Contacts wear indicator
4.29 Auxiliary Switch
4.29.1 Switch contacts type
4.29.2 Contacts rating at
a. Make & Continuous ( Amps )
b. Break (Inductive) ( Amps )
4.30 Net weight of the breaker (Kg)
4.31 Impact load foundation design (to
include dead load plus impact value
on opening at maximum interrupting
rating) ( kG )
Page 46 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
4.32 On Vacuum loss ( Amps )
4.32.1 Possible load current breaking (
Amps )
4.32.2 Possible fault current breaking (
Amps )
4.33 Overall Dimensions
4.33.1 Length ( mm )
4.33.2 Breadth ( mm )
4.33.3 Height ( mm )
4.34 Type test report on identical breaker
furnished
5.0 CONTROL & INDICATIONS
5.1 Push Buttons
Make
5.1.1 Type & Catalog No.
5.1.2 Contact rating at 110V / 220V D,C,
5.1.3 Make & continuous (Amps )

5.2 LED lamps:
Make :
5.2.2 Watts/Voltage
5.2.3 Lamps & Lens replaceable
from front with glass cover
5.3 Selector switch:
Make
Page 47 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
5.3.2 Contact rating.
5.3.3 Make & continuous (Amps)
5.3.4 Break (inductive) (Amps)
6.1 Make
6.2 Type & voltage level
6.4 C.T. ratio as specified
6.5 Short circuit withstand
Short time current for 1 Sec. - kA
rms
Dynamic current - kA peak
6.6 Class of insulation
6.7 Temperature rise
6.8 Basic insulation level
6.9 For metering & protection
6.9.1 CT Ratio
6.9.2 Class of accuracy
6.9.3 Rated burden VA
6.9.4 Knee point voltage V
6.9.5 Excitation current at Vk/4
6.9.6 Rated saturating current Amp

6.10 For differential protection
6.10.1 CT Ratio
Page 48 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
6.10.5 Excitation current at Vk/4 Amps
6.10.7 Secondary resistance ( Ω )
6.11 For restricted earth fault protection
6.11.1 CT Ratio
6.11.5 Excitation current at Vk/4
6.11.6 Amps
6.11.8 Secondary resistance ( Ω )

6.12 For stand by earth fault protection
6.12.1 CT Ratio
6.12.7 Over current rating

Continuous % over load (%)
Page 49 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
6.13 For sensitive earth fault protection
(CBCT) CT Ratio
6.13.6 Over current rating

Continuous % over load (%)
7.0 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
7.1 Make
7.2 Type and voltage level
7.4 Voltage Ratio
7.5 Accuracy
7.5.1 Winding-1
7.5.2 Winding-2
7.6 Rated Burden ( VA )
7.6.1 Winding-1
7.6.2 Winding-2
7.7 Over voltage factor
7.7.1 Continuous
7.7.2 30 seconds
7.8 Class of Insulation
Page 50 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
7.9 Temperature rise over ambient ( °C
)
7.10 Basic Impulse level ( kV peak )
7.11 Winding connection

7.11.1 Primary
7.11.2 Secondary
7.12 Fuses
7.12.1 Continuous rating HV/LV (Amp)
7.12.2 Symmetrical fault rating HV/LV kA

rms
7.12.3 Make
7.13 Maximum ratio error at
7.13.1 90% to 100% of rated voltage and
25% to 100% of rated secondary
burden at Unity Power factor.

burden at 0.2 p.f.
7.14 Maximum phase difference at

25% to 100% of
rated secondary burden at unity p.f.
Page 51 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
7.14.2 90% to 106 of rated voltage and
burden at 0.2 p.f.
7.15 Weight ( kg )
8.0 RELAYS
8.1 Manufacturer
8.2 Model Type
8.3 Draw out type with built in test
facilities. Yes/No
8.4 Built in test facility . Yes/No
8.5 Type of mounting
8.7 All relays furnished as per drawing
and specification
8.8 All relevant relay leaflets and
catalogue furnished
8.9 Communication port type
8.10 Auxiliary supply
8.11 Measurement and data acquisition
feature.
8.12 Control and supervision
a IEC protocol
b Open protocol feature
c Programming facility
d Separate output for individual
element
Page 52 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
e Event recording facility
Number of events
f Required softwares offered
8.13 C.T. secondary current

8.14 Self diagnostic feature
8.15 Modular design
8.16 Relay details:-
8.16.1 Overcurrent
a Make
b Type
c Characteristics available
d Range of settings
a) Current
b) Time
e Range of settings
a) Current
b) Time
f Rated burden
8.16.2 Synchronizing check relay (if
applicable) :
a Make
b Type
c Setting range
8.16.3 Earth fault
a Make
b Type
Page 53 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
d Range of settings
a) Current
b)Time
e Rated burden
8.16.4 Over current (Directional) if
applicable
a Make
b Type
d Range of settings
a) Current
b) Time
e Rated burden
8.16.5 Earth fault (Directional) If applicable
a Make
b Type
d Range of settings
a) Current
b)Time
e Rated burden
8.16.6 Neutral unbalance relay
a Make
b Type
Page 54 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
d Range of settings
Current
Time
e Rated burden
8.16.7 Under Voltage Relay
a Make
b Type
c Range of setting
d Rated burden
8.16.8 Over Voltage Relay
A Make
b Type
c Range of setting
d Rated burden
8.16.9 Busbar Differential Relay
a Make
b Type
c High impedance /Low impedance
d Facility for CT ratio adjustment
possible through software.
Yes/No
e CT supervision facility available.
Yes/No
8.16.10 Transformer Differential Relay
a Make
b Type
c High impedance /Low impedance
Page 55 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
d Facility for CT ratio adjustment
possible through software.
Yes/No
e Facility of transformer vector group
adjustment through software.
Yes/No
f Setting range.
g Rated burden.
8.16.11 Restricted earth fault relay
a Make
b Type
c Combined with differential relay.
Yes/No
d Setting range
e Rated burden.
8.16.12 Standby earth fault relay
a Make
b Type
c Characteristics
d Setting range
e Rated burden
8.17 Terminal block for relay testing
provided ( Yes / No )
9.0 METERS
9.1 Multifunction Meter
a Model
b Make
Page 56 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
c SCADA Interfacing
d Size
e Panels where to be provided
f Accuracy Class
g Auxiliary Supply
9.2 Voltmeter
a Make
b Type
c Reference standard
d Size
e Accuracy class
10.0 SECONDARY WIRING
10.1 Type and insulation
10.2 Voltage grade
10.3 Conductor material
10.4 Conductor size (minimum) and
insulation wiring
10.4.1 Potential circuit
10.4.2 Control & current circuit
11.0 TERMINAL BLOCK
11.1 Make
11.2 Type
11.3 Catalog No.
11.4 20% Spare terminals furnished
12.0 CABLE TERMINATIONS
12.1 Clearance for power cable
Page 57 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
termination
12.2 Removable gland plate
12.2.1 Material for multi core cable
12.2.2 Material for single core cable
12.2.3 Thickness of the plate
13.0 NAME PLATE
13.1 Material
13.2 Thickness
13.3 Size for
13.3.1 Breaker cubicle
13.3.2 Instruments/devices
14.0 Space Heater/Plug Socket
14.1 Cubicle Heater
14.1.1 Thermostat controlled
14.1.2 Wattage
14.1.3 Voltage
14.1.4 Resistance ( ohms )
14.1.5 Thermostat range
14.2 Plug Socket
14.2.1 Type
14.2.2 Rating
14.3. Cubicle heater & plug socket circuit
provided with MCBs
15.0 A.C/D.C Supply
15.1 Isolating Switches for incoming
supply
15.1.1 A. C. Type & rating
Page 58 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
15.1.2 D.C. Type & rating
15.2 Isolating Switch at each cubicle
15.2.1 A. C. Supply-type & rating
15.2.2 D.C. Supply-type & rating
16.0 Tropical Protection
16.1 Any special treatment for tropical
protection
17.0 Painting
17.1 Finish of Switchgear
17.1.1 Inside
17.1.2 Outside
18.0 No. of Accessories Furnished
18.1 Breaker lifting & handling trolley
18.2 Any other
19.0 TESTS
19.2 Routine tests to be performed on
Switchgear
19.3 Type Tests certificates submitted
20.0 Drawing/Data
20.1 General arrangement for Panel
Board
20.2 Foundation plan
20.3 Bill of material
20.4 Cross Sectional drawing for every
type of switchgear (Add sheets if
Page 59 of 72
SP-HTSWG-01-R3
Station Trafo
Capacitor
Outgoing
Incomer
Coupler
Bus
necessary)
Place : Signature :
Printed Name : Designation :
Business Address : (Including Telex, Telephone & Telefax No.)
Name & Address of the Principal Officer :
ANNEXURE – E – SPARES REQUIREMENT
Unit rate of all below mentioned spares have to be provided in the bid.

1 Line voltage transformer 3 (1 set)
2 Bus voltage transformer 3 (1 set)
3 Current transformer of each ratio 3 (1 set)
4 Trip Coil 4
5 Closing Coil 4
6 CB Spring charging motor 2
7 Auxiliary switch 2 sets (2 Nos. each type)
8 Bursting disc / pressure relief plate complete 2
9 Numerical relay of each type 1 nos. (each type)
10 Vacuum Interrupter Bottle 1 set (3 nos.) of each rating
11 Breaker contacts for busbar 1 set (3 nos.) of each rating
Breaker testing cable with plug suitable for
12 breaker on one side and plug suitable for the 3 meter(each type)
panel on the other side
13 SCADA Spare 20% of Supplied Items
Page 60 of 72
SP-ASCB-82-R2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV AUTO SWITCHED CAPACITOR BANK
INDEX
1.0 RECORD OF REVISION .....................................................................................3

2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ...........................................................................................4
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS .....................................................................................4
4.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS......................................................................................5
5.0 GENERAL............................................................................................................5
6.0 SINGLE PHASE CAPACITOR UNIT ..................................................................7
7.0 VACUUM CONTACTOR FOR AUTO SWITCHING ...........................................7
8.0 SERIES REACTOR .............................................................................................8
9.0 RVT ......................................................................................................................8
10.0 APFC ...................................................................................................................9
11.0 ISOLATOR.........................................................................................................10
12.0 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR ..................................................................................10
13.0 PERFORMANCE ...............................................................................................10
14.0 LABELS & FINISH ............................................................................................11
15.0 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS ........................................................12
16.0 INSPECTION & TESTING .................................................................................12
17.0 TYPICAL SCHEME OF HT CAPACITOR BANK .............................................13
18.0 MANDATORY SPARES ....................................................................................13
19.0 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX...............................................13
20.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.................................................15
Page 2 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
1.0 RECORD OF REVISION

Item/
S. No Change/ Addition Reason of Change/Addition
Clause No
Peek Hole in Enclosure To see the status of Capacitor bank
1 5.13
doors fuse
Exhaust Fan with Air filter For heat suppression in capacitor bank
2 5.14
And Canopy compartment
Cutout space for Power
3 5.21 For ease of Power Cable Entry
Cable Entry
Inclusion of External
4 6.10 For Ease of O&M
Fuse
Vacuum contactor of Shreem complies
Addition of Shreem make
5 7.1 the specification of BSES Yamuna
vacuum contactor
Power Limited
For more clarity on Series Reactor
6 8.10 Class of Insulation
Data
7 9.0 Updation of RVT data For More clarity on RVT Data
Communication Protocol
8 10.4 For Communication with SCADA
as Modbus
Supply of APFC has

No vendor provides APFC with
9 10.7 been changed to 48-220
Auxilliary voltage 48-220 VDC
VDC to 220 VAC
Inclusion of Warranty
period, and Customer
10 14.6 For ease of O&M
care Number in Name
Plate rating
11 15.0 Approved Make Table For Quality Products
Upgradation of SLD due to stepped
12 17.0 Typical SLD
Capacitor Bank
Inclusion of Drawing and To streamline drawing/document
13 20.0
Data Submission Matrix submission
Page 3 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

a. This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, erection &
commissioning of 7.2 MVAR (One fixed step of 1.8 MVAR and three steps of 1.8
MVAR), 12.65 KV three phase outdoor Auto Switched Capacitor Bank with bus
bar arrangement at site in an enclosure including but not limited to 0.2% series
reactors, capacitor switch/contactor, Isolator cum earth switch, HT fuses, RVT,
APFC Panel and all necessary equipment for auto switching. No Equipment
should lie outside the enclosure apart from APFC panel which shall be the part of
VCB panel. Necessary space will be provided for APFC panel in switchboard.
Fitting and wiring of this panel shall be in vendor’s scope. (Although in case of
unavailability of space in switchboard, separate wall mounted panel shall be
provided by the vendor). Isolator, Earth Switch etc should be incorporated in
enclosure only.NDR will not be the part of vendor’s scope but wiring for NDR
shall be in vendor’s scope.
b. This specification shall be used in conjunction with all specifications, data sheets,
single line diagrams, and other drawings attached to the tender.

Indian Electricity Rules
CBIP manual
IS 13925 part 1,2 & 3 Shunt capacitors above rated voltage 1000v
IS 11298 part 3 Plastic films for capacitors
IS 9921-1985 Isolator
IS 5553 Series reactor
IS 2099 Bushings for voltages above 1000v
IS 12672 Internal fuses & disconnector for shunt capacitors
IS 2705 Current transformers
IS 13067 Imp regnant for power capacitors
IS5 Color of mixed paints
IS 3156 RVT
IS 15086 Surge arrestor
IS 3070 (Pt 3) Surge arrestor
IS 2629 Recommended practice for Hot dip galvanizing of steel
Hot dip Zinc coating on Steel structures and other allied
IS 4759
products
IEC 60871 Shunt capacitors for AC power Systems
IEC 61000 Automatic Power Factor Controller
IS 9920-2002 Vacuum Contactors/Capacitor Switch
Page 4 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of authority
of documents shall be as follows -
i. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
ii. Specification including applicable codes, standards
iii. Approved Vendor Drawings
iv. Other documents

4.1 Max Ambient Temperature 50 deg C
Max Daily average ambient
4.2 40 deg C
temp
4.3 Min Ambient Temp 0 deg C
4.4 Maximum Humidity 95%
4.5 Minimum Humidity 10%
4.6 Maximum annual rainfall 750 mm
Average no of rainy days
4.7 60
per annum
4.8 Rainy months June to Oct
4.9 Altitude above MSL 300 M
4.10 Seismic Zone IV
5.0 GENERAL
Capacitor Scheme 3 Phase, 7.2 MVAR @ 12.65KV,Single Star with

5.1
RVT protection.
Auto switched in three steps of 1.8 MVAR with one
5.2 Switching fixed step of 1.8 MVAR. Auto switching will be
controlled by APFC.
5.3 Service location Suitable for outdoor use
5.4 Connection Single star for individual steps

a. Individual single phase capacitor units
mounted on steel stand / rack & connected
HT capacitor bank
externally by sleeved flexible copper
5.5
assembly connectors
b. Sleeves to be Red, Yellow, Blue, & Black in
colour.
Interchangeability Between various single phase capacitor units
5.6
without disturbing other units
For enclosing complete capacitor bank including
capacitor units, Reactors, flexible copper
5.7 Capacitor bank enclosure connectors, RVT & terminal bus bar. Enclosure’s
door shall be provided with limit switch having
interlock with Isolator and Circuit breaker.
5.8 Enclosure size Max 6m X 1.5m
5.9 Enclosure mounting Panel mounted
Degree of Ingress
5.10 Protection for Bank IP55

Enclosure
Page 5 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
CRCA metal may be used for enclosure with

5.11 Enclosure side walls thickness of loaded parts-2mm and unloaded
parts-1.5mm
Enclosure doors of width Hinged, center opening, double leaf type, two
5.12 doors provided on adjacent side walls with bolting
1500mm
as well as padlocking and interlocking facility.
Peek hole Peek hole shall be provided in each door to see
5.13
the status of fuse of Capacitor Bank
Exhaust fan shall be provided in each step for heat
Exhaust Fan with Air filter
suppression in compartment. Exhaust fan must
5.14
And Canopy operate of that step when capacitor bank is in ON
condition.
5.15 Enclosure top cover CRCA sheet metal 2mm thick with stiffeners
Doors shall be provided with solenoid type lock to
5.16 Door Interlock avoid door opening (after tripping of breaker) for a
minimum of 10 minutes.
All wire CRCA Sheet metal side walls/, doors &
top cover shall be connected to each other by
5.17 Earth Connection metallic jumper links, two earth studs with hole
size for M10 bolt to be provided on enclosure
frame bottom
Bus bar for HV cable
One for each phase mounted on porcelain or
5.18
termination epoxy insulators
Bus bar material Tinned copper, sized for 150% of rated current
5.19
and rated fault duty
Bus bar arrangement Suitable for outdoor termination of HT cable size
5.20
up to 2 x 3C x 300sqmm for each phase
Suitable for outdoor termination of HT cable size
Cutout space for Power up to 2 x 3C x 300sqmm for each phase.
5.21
Cable Entry
(Preferebly-400x400 mm2)
External hardware for HT
5.22 capacitor bank enclosure Stainless steel
(nuts/bolts/handles)
Manufacturer shall submit the G.A. Drawings for
5.23 GA drawing Capacitor Bank with mounting of series reactor
inside the bank.
Power Frequency
5.24 28kVrms
Withstand Voltage
5.25 Impulse Withstand Voltage 75kVp
Page 6 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
6.0 SINGLE PHASE CAPACITOR UNIT

Totally enclosed, leak proof, dust proof suitable for
outdoor application, comprising individual
Single phase capacitor unit capacitor elements connected in series & parallel
6.1
groups. Continuous operating current shall be
minimum 1.43 times to max. 1.65 times as per
clause 6.2 of IS 13925.
Preferred size is 200kVAR, however higher unit
6.2 Capacitor unit size sizes may be considered if the space availability at
site is scarce
Capacitor element Developed from alternate layers of conducting
6.3
metal foil & dielectric film
6.4 Conducting layer material Aluminum foil
Dielectric material Hazy Poly Propylene (APP), Double layer
6.5
minimum
6.6 Cooling Natural air
Non PCB(Poly chlorinated Biphenyl), less toxic,
6.7 Impregnating liquid with low bio-accumulation and bio-degradable
liquid filled under vacuum
Fabricated from sheet metal CRCA steel of
6.8 Capacitor unit enclosure thickness 2mm minimum, hermetically sealed &
hydraulically tested
6.9 Discharge device For each single phase capacitor unit
6.10 Fuse External HRC Fuse
6.11 Surge arrestor Gap less metal oxide type
6.12 Rated voltage 9kV
Maximum continuous
6.13 7.65kV
operating voltage
6.14 Discharge current 10 kA

6.15 Spare capacitor unit One capacitor unit for each bank
7.0 VACUUM CONTACTOR FOR AUTO SWITCHING

7.1 Rated Voltages 12 KV
Rated Continuous Current 200% of full load current (minimum) of unit being
7.2 switched
Rated Capacitor Switching 150% of full load current (minimum) of unit being
7.3 Current switched
7.4 Frequency 50 Hz
7.5 Control supply 230 V Single phase AC supply
7.6 Type Vacuum
7.7 Installation Inside Enclosure
7.8 Mechanical Endurance 10000 operations (minimum)
Electrical Endurance 10000 electrical operations at rated capacitive
7.9
switching current (minimum)
7.10 Indicator To show number of operations
Page 7 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
7.11 Trip lever For emergency tripping operation

7.12 Closing lever For capacitor bank discharging
7.13 Make ABB/EPCOS/SHREEM
8.0 SERIES REACTOR

Shall be provided fulfilling following requirement,
a. Parallel switching of one bank with another two
bank in service
b. Suitable design calculation shall be submitted at
the time of drawing approval
c. Reactors shall be suitably designed to limit
8.1 Series Reactor inrush current with proper calculation to be
submitted to BYPL.
d. The series reactor shall be designed to suit the
final capacity of Capacitor Bank
e. The manufacturer shall submit the G.A.
Drawings for Capacitor Bank with mounting of
series reactor inside the bank
Series reactor continuous 0.2% of capacitor bank rating
8.2
rating
8.3 Series reactor rated voltage Same as capacitor bank rated voltage
Series reactor rated 50Hz
8.4
frequency
Series reactor single phase Connected between single phase capacitor units
8.5
unit connections and neutral star point
8.6 Series reactor type Dry type with air natural cooling
Series reactor power 28 KV
8.7
frequency withstand voltage
Series reactor lightening 75 KV
8.8
impulse withstand voltage
Series reactor short time
16 times capacitor rated current at 130% rated
8.9 withstand current rating for 3
voltage
seconds
8.10 Class of Insulation F
9.0 RVT
9.1 Type Resin cast suitable for Panel Mounting

9.2 Application Indoor inside the outdoor panel
Star/Star-Open delta winding(11KV/Sqrt 3:110
9.3 Connection
V/Sqrt 3: 190 V )
Three winding Star/Star –Open Delta. Secondary
9.4 Winding
winding in Star shall be for Metering and
Page 8 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
secondary winding for open delta shall be for

Residual/ Unbalance voltage Protection.
One RVT for All banks’ protection. NDR (Neutral
9.5 Protection Displacement Relay) will not be in vendor’s scope.
Although its wiring shall be in vendor’s scope.
9.6 Accuracy Class 0.5/ 3 PR
9.7 Nominal System Voltage 11 KV
9.8 Highest System Voltage 12 KV

Power frequency withstand 28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1 Table 3A)
9.9
voltage
Lightning impulse withstand 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1 Table 3A)
9.10
voltage
10.0 APFC
10.1 Installation Indoor Type. To be fitted in VCB panel.

10.2 Power Factor Setting Range 0.7 Inductive to 0.7 Capacitive
DIs and DOs shall be as per control
scheme suitable for auto switching of 3
phase, 7.2MVAR capacitor bank in three
stages i.e steps of 1.8MVAR (0.6MVAR
per phase). Automatic control has to be
10.3 DIs and DOs
achieved by switching of vacuum
contactors/switches provided in the
capacitor bank to achieve the set power
factor.Atleast 4 Dis and 4 Dos shall be
spare for future use
Scada Compatible with RS-485
communication port and Modbus protocol.
In case of any other port, suitable
10.4 Interface
convertor shall be provided by the vendor)
. Integration of APFC with RTU and
Capacitor bank shall be in bidder’s scope.
Both Automatic and Manual Mode. Shall
switch ON and OFF the bank through
vaccum contactor/switch as per the
desired power factor value.Over riding
provision shall also be made for electrical
10.5 Operation switching ON and OFF of the capacitor
contactor/switch by operator from APFC
panel.The switching ON operation should
take place after period of 10 minutes. The
switching OFF operation of relevant step
shall be instantaneous.
10.6 Ingress Protection(Except for Terminals) IP 42
10.7 Auxiliary Supply 220 VAC
10.8 Current Measuring 0 - 5A, suitable for CT x/1A and x/5A
Page 9 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
Power, Energy, Voltage, Current, Average

PF, Missing Reactive Power, Supplied
Reactive Power,Total no of switching of
10.9 Display each vaccum contactor/isolator , ON and
OFF indication of Vaccum
contactor/switch, THD measurement with
odd harmonics coefficient
10.10 Size Maximum 150x150 mm2
Recording of Electrical Data upto last 2
10.11 Logging months in the form of Hourly Records,
Fault Records and Daily Records
Over/Under Load, Over/Under Frequency,
10.12 Protection Load Unbalance, Over Current, Over
Temperature
10.13 NDR Relay Not Required
LED Required on APFC For ON and

10.14 8
OFF Status of Each step
11.0 ISOLATOR
11.1 Installation Outdoor

11.2 Rated Voltage 11 KV
Single throw double break off, off load type , triple
Type pole horizontal gang operated with earth switch.
11.3
Mechanical interlock should be provided between
isolator and Earth Switch.
11.4 Operation Type Manual
12.0 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
12.1 Voltage Rating 9 kV
12.2 Type Gapless ZnO type
12.3 Discharge Class III
12.4 Nominal Discharge Current 10 kA
13.0 PERFORMANCE
13.1 Over voltage operation as per IS 13925 part1
13.2 Over current operation as per IS 13925 part1
Operating temperature
13.3 +5/C as per IS 13925 part1
category
13.4 Discharge characteristic as a. Each capacitor single phase unit residual
per IS 13925 part1 voltage after disconnection from mains supply
Page 10 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
shall be 50V (maximum) within 10 minutes

b. Capacitor bank residual voltage after
disconnection from mains supply shall be 50V
(maximum) within 10 minutes
Power loss and tangent of To be specified by manufacturer as per IS 13925
13.5
Loss angle (tan δ) part1
14.0 LABELS & FINISH

Rating plate for HT Capacitor
14.1
bank
14.2 Material Anodized aluminum 16SWG
14.3 Background Satin silver
14.4 Letters, diagram & border Black
14.5 Process etching
Mfg name, Mfg Sr. No., Month & year of Mfg,
equipment type, total output rating, Bank
Capacitance in µF, Bank watt losses, Owner
14.6 Bank Name plate details
name & order number, Temp. category,
connection diagram, Warranty period, Customer
care Number
Anodized aluminum with white character on black
Rating plate for each single
14.7 background and details as per clause no 10.1 of
phase capacitor unit
IS 13925
Mfg name, Mfg Sr. No., Month & year of Mfg,
equipment type, total output rating, unit
Capacitance in µF, unit watt losses, Temp.
14.8 Unit Name plate details
category, Discharge device rating, connection
diagram, Owner name & order number,
Guarantee period, unit wt. in kG,
Danger plate on front & rear Anodized aluminum with white letters on red
14.9
side of wired mesh enclosure background
Painting - Capacitor single
14.10
phase unit
14.11 Surface preparation Shot blasting or chemical 7 tank process
Powder coated pure-polyester base Mat finish,
14.12 External finish shade– Siemens Gray RAL 7032, uniform
thickness 50 microns minimum
a. Chemical 7 tank process for surface
b. Hot dipped Galvanized with uniform thickness
14.13 Painting–frame enclosure
65 microns minimum as per IS 2629 and
4759.
SLD of Approved drawing must be engraved
14.14 SLD
in inside the enclosure door
Page 11 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
15.1 APFC Beluk/ABB/EPCOS/Shreem
15.2 Vacuum Contactor ABB/ EPCOS/Shreem
15.3 RVT Pragati/Kappa

Electromechanical
15.4 Alstom/Schneider/Siemens/ABB/ER
Relays
15.5 Miniature Relays ABB/Jyoti/Omran
15.6 Contactors ABB/Siemens/Telemechanique

ECS/ Pragati/ Gemini/Schneider/CGL/Kappa/Narayan
15.7 Instrument transformers
power tech
15.10 Test terminal blocks IMP/Schneider/Alstom
15.12 Indicating lamps Siemens/ Teknic/ Binay
15.14 Meters Rishabh/Conzerv
Type test Equipment of type tested quality only, type test

16.1
certificate to be submitted along with offer.
16.2 Routine test As per relevant Indian standard
To be performed in presence of Owner at
16.3 Acceptance test as per IS manufacturer works, as per relevant Indian
standard along with BOM.
Page 12 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
17.0 TYPICAL SCHEME OF HT CAPACITOR BANK
18.0 MANDATORY SPARES

Following spares have to be provided for each capacitor bank set of 7.2 MVAR
a. Capacitor Units – 2 nos

b. Series Reactors – 2 nos
c. Vacuum Switch/ Contactor – 2 nos
19.0 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX
provided on A3/A4 sheet in box file with separators for each section. PDF shall also be
provided of all documents via USB. Language of the documents shall be English only.
Deficient/ improper document/ drawing submission may liable for rejection.
Drawing Pre
S. No Head Bid Pre Closure
Approval Dispatch
Contact Person Name,
19.1 Email ID and Mobile Required
Number
Consolidated Deviation
Sheet
Page 13 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
Relevant Type Test as

19.4 Required
per IS/IEC
Power Cable and
control cable
19.5 Required
Philosophy and
Schedule
Manufacturer's quality
assurance plan and
19.6 Required
certification for quality
standards
Sizing Calculation of
19.7 Required
Associated Equipment
Recommended Spares
Apart from spares
19.8 Required
stated in Spec(for five
years of operation)
11 kV Auto Switched
19.9
Capacitor Bank

Schematic Circuit
19.9.5 Required
diagram and Scheme
19.9.6 Bus Bar Arrangement Required
19.9.7 QAP Required
19.9.8 BOQ Required

Logic Operation
19.9.9 Required
Diagram
19.9.11 Interlock Diagram Required

Make of all Component
19.9.16 Required
as per specification
Page 14 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
Drawing of Outdoor
19.9.17 yard providing Position Required
of Capacitor Bank
Installation, erection
19.10 and commissioning Required
manual for Bank
As manufacturing
19.12 Required
Drawings
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Trouble shooting
manual
19.17 Weekly progress report Required
20.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

S. No Description Specification Requirement Bidder's Data
20.1 General
20.1.1 Reference Standard IS-13925,Part 1,2012
3 Phase, 7.2 MVAR @
20.1.2 Capacitor Scheme 12.65KV,Single Star with RVT
protection.
Auto switched in three steps of 1.8
20.1.3 Switching MVAR with one fixed step of 1.8
MVAR
20.1.4 Service location Outdoor
20.1.5 Connection Single star for individual steps
a. Individual single phase capacitor
units mounted on steel stand / rack &
HT capacitor bank connected externally by sleeved
20.1.6
assembly flexible copper connectors
b. Sleeves to be Red, Yellow, Blue,
& Black in colour.
No component shall be outside the
20.1.7 Capacitor bank enclosure
enclosure
20.1.8 Enclosure size Max 6m X 1.5m
20.1.9 Enclosure mounting Panel mounted
Degree of Ingress
20.1.10 Protection for Bank IP55
Enclosure
CRCA metal with thickness of
20.1.11 Enclosure side walls
loaded parts-2mm and unloaded
Page 15 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
parts-1.5mm
Hinged, center opening, double leaf

type, two doors provided on adjacent
20.1.12 Enclosure doors
side walls with bolting as well as
padlocking and interlocking facility.
Peek hole shall be provided in each
20.1.13 Peek hole door to see the status of fuse of
Capacitor Bank
Exhaust Fan with Air filter Exhaust fan must ON when that
20.1.14
And Canopy particular bank is in ON condition
CRCA sheet metal 2mm thick with
20.1.15 Enclosure top cover
stiffeners
Solenoid type lock to avoid door
20.1.16 Door Interlock opening (after tripping of breaker) for
a minimum of 10 minutes.
All wire CRCA Sheet metal side
walls/, doors & top cover shall be
connected to each other by metallic
20.1.17 Earth Connection
jumper links, two earth studs with
hole size for M10 bolt to be provided
on enclosure frame bottom
Bus bar for HV cable One for each phase mounted on
20.1.18
termination porcelain or epoxy insulators
Tinned copper, sized for 425 A rated
20.1.19 Bus bar material current and Fault Current 26.3 kA for
3 Sec
Suitable for outdoor termination of HT
20.1.20 Bus bar arrangement cable size up to 2 x 3C x 300sqmm
for each phase
Cutout space for Power
20.1.21 400x400 mm2
Cable Entry
External hardware for HT
20.1.22 capacitor bank enclosure Stainless steel
(nuts/bolts/handles)
Power Frequency
20.1.23 28kVrms
Withstand Voltage
Impulse Withstand
20.1.24 75kVp
Voltage
20.2 Capacitor Unit
20.2.1 Make
Continuous operating current shall be
Continuous operating
20.2.2 minimum 1.43 times to max. 1.65
current
times as per clause 6.2 of IS 13925.
Preferred size is 200kVAR, however
20.2.3 Capacitor unit size higher unit sizes may be considered if
the space availability at site is scarce
Developed from alternate layers of
20.2.4 Capacitor element
conducting metal foil & dielectric film
20.2.5 Conducting layer material Aluminum foil
Page 16 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
Hazy Poly Propylene (APP), Double

20.2.6 Dielectric material
layer minimum
20.2.7 Cooling Natural air
Non PCB(Poly chlorinated Biphenyl),
less toxic, with low bio-accumulation
20.2.8 Impregnating liquid
and bio-degradable liquid filled under
vacuum
CRCA steel of thickness 2mm
20.2.9 Capacitor unit enclosure minimum, hermetically sealed &
hydraulically tested
20.2.10 Discharge device For each single phase capacitor unit
20.2.11 Fuse External HRC Fuse
20.2.12 Surge arrestor Gap less metal oxide type
20.2.13 Rated voltage 9kV
Maximum continuous
20.2.14 7.65kV
operating voltage
20.2.15 Discharge current 10 kA
20.2.16 Losses ≤0.2 Watts/kVAR
Power Frequency 28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.2.17
Withstand Voltage Table 3A)
Impulse Withstand 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.2.18
Voltage Table 3A)
20.2.19 Discharging Values Less than 50 V in 10 Minutes
20.3 VACUUM CONTACTOR
20.3.1 Make ABB/EPCOS/SHREEM
20.3.2 Reference Standard IEC 62271-103/IS 9920 (Part IV)
20.3.3 Rated Voltages 12 KV
20.3.4 Rated Continuous Current ≥164 A
Rated Capacitor
20.3.5 ≥124 A
Switching Current
Short Time withstand
20.3.6
current for 1 sec
Power Frequency 28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.3.7
Withstand Voltage Table 3A)
Impulse Withstand 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.3.8
Voltage Table 3A)
Opening Time(lower and
20.3.9 35/60 ms
Upper limit)
Closing Time(lower and
20.3.10 60/90 ms
Upper limit)
20.3.11 Frequency 50 Hz
20.3.12 Control supply 230 V Single phase AC supply
20.3.13 Type Vacuum
20.3.14 Installation Inside Enclosure
20.3.15 Mechanical Endurance 10000 operations (minimum)
10000 electrical operations at rated
20.3.16 Electrical Endurance capacitive switching current
(minimum)
Page 17 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
20.3.17 Indicator To show number of operations

20.3.18 Trip lever For emergency tripping operation
20.3.19 Closing lever For capacitor bank discharging
20.4 Series Reactor
20.4.1 Make
20.4.2 Reference Standard IS:5553 (Part 3)
Submission of Suitable design
20.4.3 Series Reactor
Calculation
Series reactor continuous
20.4.4 1.2 kVAR
rating
Series reactor rated
20.4.5 Same as capacitor bank rated voltage
voltage
Series reactor rated
20.4.6 50Hz
frequency
Series reactor single Connected between single phase
20.4.7
phase unit connections capacitor units and neutral star point
20.4.8 Series reactor type Dry type with air natural cooling
Series reactor power
28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.4.9 frequency withstand
Table 3A)
voltage
Series reactor lightening 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.4.10
impulse withstand voltage Table 3A)
20.4.11 Rated Current 82.15A
Series reactor short time
16 times capacitor rated current at
20.4.12 withstand current rating
130% rated voltage
for 3 seconds
20.4.13 Class of Insulation F
20.5 RVT
20.5.1 Make
20.5.2 Reference Standard IS 3156
20.5.3 Application Indoor inside the outdoor panel
Resin cast suitable for Panel
20.5.4 Type
Mounting
Star/Star-Open delta
20.5.5 Connection winding(11KV/Sqrt 3:110 V/Sqrt 3:
190 V )
20.5.6 Accuracy Class 0.5/ 3 PR
20.5.7 Nominal System Voltage 11 kV
20.5.8 Highest System Voltage 12 kV
Power frequency 28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.5.9
withstand voltage Table 3A)
Lightning impulse 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.5.10
Three winding Star/Star –Open Delta.
Secondary
20.5.11 Winding winding in Star shall be for Metering
and
secondary winding for open delta
Page 18 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
shall be for
Residual/ Unbalance voltage
Protection.
20.5.12 Protection One RVT for All banks’ protection

20.6 APFC
20.6.1 Make Beluk/ABB/EPCOS/Shreem
Indoor Type and To be fitted on VCB
20.6.3 Installation
Panel
Power Factor Setting
20.6.4 0.7 Inductive to 0.7 Capacitive
Range
4 Dis and 4 Dos shall be
20.6.5 DIs and Dos
spare for future use
Scada Compatible with RS-485
communication port and Modbus
protocol. In case of any other port,
20.6.6 Interface suitable convertor shall be provided
by the vendor) . Integration of APFC
with RTU and Capacitor bank shall be
in bidder’s scope.
20.6.7 Operation Both Automatic and Manual Mode
20.6.8 Ingress Protection IP 54
20.6.9 Auxilliary Supply 48-250 VDC
20.6.10 Current Measuring 0 - 5A, suitable for CT x/1A and x/5A
Power, Energy, Voltage, Current,
Average PF, Missing Reactive Power,
Supplied Reactive Power,Total no of
switching of each vaccum
20.6.11 Display
contactor/isolator , ON and OFF
indication of Vaccum
contactor/switch, THD measurement
with odd harmonics coefficient
20.6.12 Size Maximum 150x150 mm2
Recording of Electrical Data upto last
2
20.6.13 Logging months in the form of Hourly
Records,
Fault Records anmd Daily Records
Over/Under Load, Over/Under
20.6.14 Protection Frequency, Load Unbalance, Over
Current, Over Temperature
Space Required in
20.6.15 Switchgear Panel for
APFC
20.6.16 NDR Relay offered No
Number of LED required
20.6.17 on APFC for Cap bank 8
ON and OFF status of
Page 19 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
each stage
20.7 ISOLATOR
20.7.1 Make
20.7.3 Installation Outdoor
20.7.4 Rated Voltage 11 KV
Single throw double break off, off load
type ,triple pole horizontal gang
operated with earth switch.
20.7.5 Type
Mechanical Interlock should be
provided between isolator and Earth
Switch
20.7.6 Operation Type Manual
20.8 Lightning Arrestor
20.8.1 Reference Standard IS 3070-1993(Part-3)
20.8.2 Voltage Rating 9 kV
20.8.3 Type Gapless ZnO type
20.8.4 Discharge Class III
Nominal Discharge
20.8.5 10 kA
Current
Power frequency 28 kVrms(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.8.6
Lightning impulse 75 kV Peak(As per IS 13925 Part 1
20.8.7
20.9 Labels and Finish
Rating plate for HT
20.9.1
Capacitor bank
20.9.3 Background Satin silver
20.9.4 Letters, diagram & border Black
20.9.5 Process etching
Mfg name, Mfg Sr. No., Month & year
of Mfg, equipment type, total output
rating, Bank Capacitance in µF, Bank
20.9.6 Bank Name plate details watt losses, Owner name & order
number, Temp. category, connection
diagram, Warranty period, Customer
care Number
Anodized aluminum with white
Rating plate for each
character on black background and
20.9.7 single phase capacitor
details as per clause no 10.1 of IS
unit
13925
Mfg name, Mfg Sr. No., Month & year
of Mfg, equipment type, total output
20.9.8 Unit Name plate details rating, unit Capacitance in µF, unit
watt losses, Temp. category,
Discharge device rating, connection
Page 20 of 21
SP-ASCB-82-R2
diagram, Owner name & order

number, Guarantee period, unit wt. in
kG,
Danger plate on front &

Anodized aluminum with white letters
20.9.9 rear side of wired mesh
on red background
enclosure
Painting - Capacitor single
20.9.10
phase unit
Shot blasting or chemical 7 tank
20.9.11 Surface preparation
process
Powder coated pure-polyester base
Mat finish, shade– Siemens Gray
20.9.12 External finish
RAL 7032, uniform thickness 50
microns minimum
a. Chemical 7 tank process for
surface
20.9.13 Painting–frame enclosure b. Hot dipped Galvanized with
uniform thickness 65 microns
minimum as per IS 2629 and 4759.
SLD of Approved drawing must be
20.9.14 SLD
engraved in inside the enclosure door
Page 21 of 21
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Technical Specification For Heat Shrinkable And Cold Shrinkable Straight Through
Jointing Kit (11 KV, 33 KV, 66 KV XLPE Insulated Cables)
Index
Record of Revision .................................................................................................................. 3
1.0.0 Scope of work ............................................................................................................... 4
2.0.0 Codes & standards ....................................................................................................... 4
3.0.0 Cable Construction ....................................................................................................... 5
4.0.0 Straight-Through Joints (STJ) ...................................................................................... 6
5.0.0 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) ................................................................................... 11
6.0.0 Deviations ................................................................................................................... 11
7.0.0 Delivery ....................................................................................................................... 12
Annexure - A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)....................................................... 13
Annexure - B: Kit Content Table (KCT) ................................................................................. 15
Annexure - C: Routine and Acceptance Test ......................................................................... 16
Annexure - D: Deviation Sheet.............................................................................................. 17
Annexure - E: Service Conditions........................................................................................... 17
Annexure - E: Aluminium crimping-type Ferrule for compacted circular conductor
only for Heat Shrink joints ...................................................................................................... 18
Annexure – F: Strip type GI canister (V.B. Can) for joint protection only for Heat Shrink
Joint….................................................................................................................................... 19
Page 2 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Record of Revision
Item/Clause No. Change in Specification Approved By Rev
Page 3 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
1.0.0 Scope of work

A. Heat Shrinkable / Cold shrinkable Straight through Joint Kits (hereinafter briefly referred to
as “STJ Kits”), suitable for 11 kV, 33 & 66kV XLPE cables, shall be designed, manufactured,
tested, packed and delivered by the Vendor, as per Purchaser’s requirements.
B. During post-installation period, if a joint fails at site, the vendor shall depute a technical team to
site for a root-cause analysis of the failure of the joint, in the presence of BSES officials. An
Analysis Report shall then be submitted for BSES’s review and approval. If this report
concludes the cause of failure as due to a design/manufacturing defect in a component,
then vendor shall replace all such components in the entire stock available with BSES.
2.0.0 Codes & standards
2.1.0 National Standards:
S No. Standard Number Title

Joints & Terminations of Polymeric Cables for working
2.1.1 IS- 13573: 2011 voltages from 6.6 kV up to and including 33 kV Performance
Requirements and Type Tests
Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Insulated PVC sheathed
IS- 7098: Part
2.1.2 cables: Part 2 - For working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and
2:1985
including 33 kV
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed
IS- 7098: Part
Cables specification: Part 3 - For working voltages from 66 kV
3:1993
up to and including 220 KV
2.1.3 IS- 10810: 1984 Methods of test for cables
2.1.1 International Standards:

Electricity Association - Technical Specification – 09 - 13
2.2.1 EA TS - 09-13 Material component for use in Electric Power Cable
Termination & Joints for System voltage above 1kV up to 36 kV
2.2.2 IEC - 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
2.2.3 IEC - 885 Part 1 to 3 Electric test methods for electric cables
Power Cable Accessories for XLPE Cables above 3kV & up to
2.2.4 IEC - 60502 - 4
30 kV Test methods
Power cable with extruded insulation and their accessories for
2.2.5 IEC - 60840 rated voltage above 30 kV (Um=36 KV) up to 150 KV (Um=170
KV) - test methods and requirements.
Page 4 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
3.0.0 Cable Construction

Normal sizes of XLPE cables used in BSES system and the construction features of these
cables are indicated below:
11kV, 3-core x 150 sq mm AL
33kV, 3-core x 300 / 400 sq mm AL
66KV, 1 core x 1000 sq mm AL
a) Electrolytic Grade Stranded Aluminium Conductor

b) Grade: H2 / H4 as per IS: 8130 / 1984 (For Al)
c) Stranded, compacted and circular in shape
3.1.0 Conductor
d) Class 2
e) Longitudinal “Water-Blocking Arrangement” (or water-tight
construction or water barrier protection)
3.1.1 Conductor Screen Extruded Semi Conducting material
3.1.2 Insulation Extruded XLPE Insulation.
Freely strippable Semi Conducting (without application of heat)
3.1.3 Insulation Screen
for 66KV firmly bonded.
Semi-conducting Water Swell able Tape under the copper
3.1.4 Water Swell able Tape
tape on each core.
Copper Tape applied helically over the layer formed by
3.1.5 Copper Tape application of insulation screen, water swell able tape and
identification strip
3.1.6 Filler All interstices, including center interstices filled by PP filler.
3.1.7 Over all three cores Binder tape
3.1.8 Inner Sheath Extruded Inner Sheath of Black PVC type ST-2.
a) For 3-core Cables : Galvanized Steel flat strip armour
b) For 1-core Cables : Non-Magnetic, Hard drawn Aluminium
3.1.9 Armour
wire (flat/round)
c) Corrugated aluminium or lead sheathed for 66KV Cable
3.1.10 Binder Tape Rubberized cotton tape
Extruded outer sheath of PVC (ST-2) for 11 KV and 33 KV and
3.1.11 Outer Sheath HDPE ST 7 for 66KV with termite- repellant and anti-rodent
properties.
Page 5 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
4.0.0 Straight-Through Joints (STJ)

General Technical Requirements for Straight-Through Joints (STJ) for XLPE cables are as follows:
Scope: Design, manufacture, testing and supply of Straight-Through Joint Kits for 11 KV, 33
KV & 66KV Power Cables.
Functional requirements for Heat Shrinkable / Cold Shrinkable STJ joints are given
below:
4.1.0 Heat Shrinkable / Cold Shrinkable STJ joints
Cable preparation shall be as per installation instruction sheet.
4.1.1 Cable preparation Manufacturer shall be provide Installation instruction sheet in
every kit
Connector
For 11kV
a) Conductors to be jointed by crimping connectors
b) Annular CSA (cross-sectional area) of the ferrule shall not be
less than CSA of the conductor of the cable. Length of the ferrule
shall be sufficient to allow adequate number of crimps, to limit
temperature rise at the joint. (Vendor to furnish dimensional
drawing for ferrule, indicating crimp marks.)
c) For aluminium cable, the crimped ferrule shall be of aluminium
d) Refer annexure F for GA drawing of crimping ferrule
4.1.2 Conductor Screen
For 33kV and 66KV
a) Shear bolt type mechanical connector
b) Approved make:
• Tyco Electronics ( BSM-185/400-U)
• Pfisterer ( 332617010)
• Or equivalent make (Manufacturer shall take prior approval
from CES)
d) Maintain smooth surface over connector after cut the shear
head bolt
e) Vendor to furnish drawing for the mechanical connector
Void filling and stress
relief over
crimped
4.1.3 connector and cut By means of High permittivity mastic tapes / Lubricant.
point
of the insulation
screen.
By means of Tinned copper wire mesh, wrap individual core from
cu screen with 50 % overlap and continue on other side cu
Metal screen
4.1.4 screen.
continuity
Bind the copper wire mesh on copper screen with copper binding
wire
Armour / Earthing Continuity
Page 6 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
a) By means of a combination of steel (G.I.) support ring (for

3 - core Cable) or Aluminium support ring (for 1 - core Cable)
4.1.5 Armour bond
and two nos. of stainless steel hose clips.
b) GI Support Ring shall be ‘zinc-sprayed Split Type
By means of two nos. Of tinned copper braided conductor of

25 sq. mm. for 11 kV
4.1.6 Armour continuity
35 sq. mm. for 33kV and
50 sq mm for 66KV.
Accessories
Suppression of
4.1.7 electrical discharges Cleaning solvent /equivalent, for manual application.
over XLPE insulation
Shall be provided in English and Hindi and shall be inside every
4.1.8 Installation Instruction
kit.
Paper tape, required for measurements
4.1.9 Sheet paper Tap
during jointing, shall be provided inside every kit.
a) An aluminum pouch with paper tag & sealing arrangement at
one end shall be provided.
b) This tag is required to be tied over the cable at one side of the
joint.
c) The paper tag shall give following information
1) Vendor kit designation
2) Division
3) Breakdown ID/Shutdown ID/Scheme No.
4) Cable section
5) Type of joint
Identification Tag (for
4.1.10 6) Size of Joint
traceability)
7) Make of joint
8) Voltage class
9) Serial no. of kit
10) Vendor lot & batch no
11) Month & year of manufacturing
12) Date of installation
13) Name of jointer
14) Name of vendor supervisor
15) Name of BSES supervisor
16) Remarks
Printing on each
Month and year of manufacturing, batch no. /lot no., size, make,
4.1.11 Heat/cold shrinkable or
type etc.
Moulded component
Page 7 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
4.2.0 Only for Heat Shrinkable STJ joints

a) The earthed insulation screen of an XLPE cable is
terminated at a suitable distance (minimum 75 mm) from the
connector (Ferrule).
b) The stress control tube is in electrical contact with insulation
screen.
4.2.1 Stress Control System
c) Impedance of the tube shall be constant up to an
operating temperature and shall be within the range 1
x 108 ohm-cm to 8x108 ohm-cm.
d) The physical and electrical properties shall conform to EA TS
09-13.
a) Maximum three layers of insulation tubes shall be used. Total
thickness of the insulation being provided in the joint shall not be
less than 1.2 times the insulation of the cable being jointed.
4.2.1 Insulation build-up b) Outer-most tube shall be screened insulating tube (dual wall
tube). This tube shall be manufactured by extrusion process.
c) Physical and Electrical properties shall conform to EA TS 09-
13.
By means of Core end sealing sleeve with red mastic coating.\
4.2.2 Sealing end of tube Bidder must ensure to provide a solution to prevent
water/moisture ingress in the joint.
a) For 3-core cable: By means of a rollable steel mat (with
required protective coating against corrosion) (Refer Annex F)
b) For 1-core cable:
4.2.3 Mechanical Protection i) Copper wire mesh
ii) Adhesive coated medium wall tube
iii) One more layer of copper wire mesh
iv) Medium wall tube
By means of semi-rigid tubes, internally coated with water

4.2.4 Corrosion Protection
blocking sealant. Thick wall Insulating tube
4.3.0 Only for Cold Shrinkable ST joints
Scope:
The term cold shrink applies to materials, which are capable of shrinking without raising the
material above the ambient temperature of its immediate surroundings. The material of the rubber
insulator used in the Cold Shrink assembly shall be silicone which is factory expanded and placed
on a removable core. The removing of the core causes the cold shrink assembly to shrink. The
cold shrink assembly shall maintain a compressive force on the cable continuously throughout the
life of the product. This pressure will ensure a complete moisture seal.
By means of one piece body (splice assembly) providing stress
4.3.1 Stress Control System
control, insulation and screen continuity.
Page 8 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
By application of mastic coated vinyl tape and armor cast

structural material.
4.3.2 Mechanical Protection
The taped armor cast layer may also be sprayed with water to
hasten the curing.
Vendor shall submit Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) as

4.4.0 Technical Particulars
per Annexure A.
4.5.0 Testing & Inspection
a) Straight-Through Joint shall be of type-tested quality.
b) In addition to this, vendor will be required to conduct type-
testing on heat/cold -shrinkable and moulded components, stress
4.5.1 Type Tests grading mastic, etc., in line with EA TS 09-13 standard, at third
party test laboratory once in 6 months on randomly selected
sample of each voltage rating without any commercial
implication.
I) All the routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out as per
EA TS 09-13 guidelines, refer Annexure C.
Routine & II) H.V. Test shall be carried out on a randomly selected and
4.5.2
acceptance Tests installed Straight-Through Joint, in the presence of Purchaser’s
representative, at manufacturer’s works.
III) The joint shall withstand a test of 4Uo voltage for 4 hours.
I) Purchaser reserves the right to inspect /witness all tests on the

STJ Kits at Seller’s works at any time, prior to dispatch, to verify
4.5.6 Inspection compliance with the specification.
II) In-process and / or final inspection call intimation shall be
given in advance to purchaser.
i) Three sets of complete Test Certificates

(Routine & Acceptance tests) shall be submitted along with the
delivery of STJ Kits.
ii) Bought-out Items: Vendor shall submit Test Certificates,
4.5.7 Test Certificates
lot/batch number-wise, from their sub- suppliers / principal. TC’s
should clearly indicate the measured technical parameters, in
accordance with sub-supplier’s specification. (Also refer
Annexure - C)
“Documents” refer to Documents, Data, Manuals, etc. (Scanned

4.6.0 Documents copy of signed documents also shall be part of entire soft file (e-
file).
Page 9 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Vendor shall submit signed 3 sets (plus 1 set of soft copy) of

following documents
a) GTP (duly filled-in) (as per Annexure — A)
4.7.0 Along with the Bid b) Cross-sectional drawings for components Assembly.
c) Type Test Certificates
d) Complete Catalogue and Installation Instructions.
e) Any other document.

4.8.0 After Award Contract above-mentioned documents within 15 days, for Purchaser’s
approval.
Final signed “As-built” documents for the equipment in 3 sets

4.8.0 “As-Built” documents (hard copy), 1 no. soft copy and 1 no. CD. These documents
shall include signed Routine & Acceptance Test Certificates also.
a). Every component / kit / box shall be properly sealed/ packed

for protection against damage. Stress grading mastic shall be
packed in air-tight / air-sealed packing.
b). Every kit box shall be wrapped in polythene covers.
c. Separate packing (sub-kits) shall be provided, for components
(given below) used in crotch area and connector area. These
sub-kits, labeled as “CROTCH KIT” and “CONNECTOR KIT’,
Packing, Marking,
shall be placed inside every kit box.
Shipping, Handling
4.9.0 i) Crotch Kit Components
and
--Conductive cable break-out
Storage
-- Yellow moulded wedge
-- Break-out end sealing tube
-- Break-out finger sealing tube
-- Stress grading mastic
ii) Connector Kit : Components
-- Ferrule (connector)
-- Void Filling mastic (yellow)
Page 10 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Markings / Labels shall be on both sides of every packed box.

1) Identification number/type designation (as per
manufacturer’s standard)
2) Voltage grade, size, description of the Kit (including the
voltage grade, size, type of the cables, for which it is to be used)
3) Batch no., lot no., etc.
4) Quantity
4.9.1 Identification Label 5) a) Purchase Order no. & date
b) Purchaser’s name BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
c) BSES’s SAP code number
6) Weights (kg) of each Cable Termination Kit and of each box
containing kits.
7) Manufacturer’s name
8) Month & Year of Manufacturing
9) Date of packing, shelf life (if applicable)
The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to
4.9.2 Transit damage
improper packing.
5.0.0 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP)

Vendor’s Quality
5.1.0 Assurance Plan To be submitted for Purchaser’s approval.
(QAP)
Sampling Method for quality checks shall be as per
5.2.0 Sampling Method manufacturer’s standard practice / ESI guidelines and
Purchaser’s prior approval shall be taken for the same.
Inspection Hold-
5.3.0 To be mutually identified, agreed and approved in Quality Plan.
Points
6.0.0 Deviations
a) Deviations from this specification can be acceptable, only
where the Seller has listed in his quotation the requirements he
cannot, or does not, wish to comply with and which deviations
6.1.0 Deviations the Buyer has agreed to in writing, before any order is placed.
b) In the absence of any list of deviations from the Seller, it will
be assumed by the Buyer that the Seller complies with the
Specification fully.
Page 11 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
7.0.0 Delivery
Dispatch of Material:
Vendor shall dispatch the material, only after the Routine Tests
7.1.0 Delivery /Final Acceptance Tests (FAT) of the material witnessed/waived
by the Purchaser, and after receiving written Material Dispatch
Clearance Certificate (MDCC) from the Purchaser.
Page 12 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure - A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
The Vendor is deemed to have examined all parts of the Specification documents and to have been
fully informed, as to the nature of work and the conditions related to its performance.
S No. Description Purchase requirement Vendor’s data
1 Manufacturer’s name
2 Purchase Order no. & date
60 Months (from date of
commissioning) / 66 Months
3 Guarantee Period (minimum) (from date of receipt at
Purchaser’s store),whichever
is earlier
Applicable IS / IEC Standard
4 followed by Vendor (incl. type
test standard)
5 Voltage Grade (kV)
Lightning Impulse Voltage
5.1
Withstand Test
4Uo AC voltage withstand test
5.2 Test report submitted
for 4 hours
6 90 deg. C
temperature
7 Functional Requirements
Method of Stress Control and
7.1
Discharge Suppression
Method of Insulation build-up
7.2
and screening
Method of earth bond
a) Size and no. of braids
7.3
b) Size of armour support
c) No. of hose clips
Method of mechanical protection
7.4 a) for 3-core Cable
b) for 1-core Cable
Method of protection against
corrosion (type & coating
7.5
thickness of protective layer on
steel mat)
Method of conductor continuity
7.6 a) For crimping connector
b) For mechanical connector
Page 13 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Description of items in the

8 Kit, which are imported /sourced
From Principal /Sub-suppliers
Names of items in the Kit and
9 their respective shelf life (months
I years)
Kit Content Table (KCT)
10 Yes / No
enclosed? (Refer Annexure — B)
Yes / No
Drawing for connector (ferrule)
11 (If yes, mention the document
enclosed
reference)
Is Annexure - D (Technical
12
Deviation Sheet) duly filled-in?
Packing (Qty) 1 no
13 i) Packing of every Kit -- No. of Kits per Box
h) Group Packing -- No. of Boxes
Yes / No
14 Installation Procedure enclosed? (If yes, mention the
document reference)
Quality Assurance Programme

(QAP for raw materials, in-
15 Yes / No
process inspection, factory
testing) is enclosed?
Whether all heat-shrinkable and
Yes / No
moulded components of the kit
(If yes, details of test
meet the requirements of and
16 report no. /Date /name
have been tested in accordance
of test laboratory to be
with EA TS -09-1 3.(for heat-
mentioned.)
shrinkable joints)
Type Test Reports (TTR)
(Relevant test report no. & date,
With type, size, other details of
each type of Kit.)
a) Prepared Joint:
Yes/No
17 CPRI TTR as per BIS / IEC
Yes/No
enclosed?
b) Loose Components:
CPRI TTR as per EA TS 09-13
enclosed?
Printing details on each of (Mention the text, presently

18 the Heat- shrinkable and printed on each of the
Moulded components component)
Page 14 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure - B: Kit Content Table (KCT)
Vendor shall submit KCT as a consolidated table, consisting of all data, such as:
A. Heading
1. Voltage grade, size, description of the Kit
(Including the voltage grade, size, type of the cables, for which it is to be used)
2. Type designation (as per manufacturer’s standard)
B. Details / Parameters (For each component/item of the KCT)

1. Lot no. /Batch no., etc.
2. Item number (manufacturer’s standard)
3. Description
a) Material, type, make and grade
b) Dimensions cross sectional area
c) Colour,
d) Other description, if any
4. Function of the item
5. Quantity
6. Make/Name/Location of manufacturer/sub-vendor
a) Minimum supplied (or in expanded form) diameter
b) Maximum freely recovered diameter
7. a) Minimum supplied (or in expanded form) thickness
b) Maximum freely recovered thickness
C. Notes on the KCT
Markings, printings and other details for individual/group of components is to be mentioned on KCT. For
example:
a) Printing of item code, size, batch no., etc.
b) Printing on components
c) Other embossing or engraving, it any.
(Note: Vendor may attach an Annexure, for any additional information, if required.)
Page 15 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure - C: Routine and Acceptance Test
A. Visual Examination
Condition of selected items / components, as per sampling method, shall be recorded. Some of the
normal check-points can be as follows:
1. Every component shall be verified in quantity and description as per KCT.
2. All items shall be free from any defects, pin holes, cracks, etc.
3. Metallic components to be free from sharp edges.
B. Measurements of Dimensions
(Required / observed dimension — length, diameter, etc.)
1. Supplied dimensions
2. Recovered dimensions
C. Destructive Testing
On various heat-shrinkable / moulded components of ready Kits (items 3 and 4 are applicable only for
heat-shrinkable components)
1. Tensile Strength
2. Wall Thickness Ratio
3. Heat Shock
4. Longitudinal Change, after full recovery
5. Ultimate Elongation
6. Low Temperature Flexibility
7. Dielectric Strength
8. Volume Resistivity
Routine Test Reports (RTR) (Typical)

Each RTR shall clearly indicate P.O. no. & date and also BSES’s SAP code no. RTR shall record the
serial numbers of the kits selected, as per vendor’s sampling method. Following details, besides
vendor’s/manufacturers standard check-points, shall appear in every RTR.
Page 16 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure - D: Deviation Sheet
Sr No. Clause No. Deviation
Annexure - E: Service Conditions
(Atmospheric conditions in Delhi)
a) Average grade Soil Condition

b) Maximum altitude above sea level 1000 M
c) Ambient Air temperature Highest 50 Deg C, Average 40 Deg C
d) Minimum ambient air temperature 0 Deg C
e) Relative Humidity 100 % Max
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg C cm/W
g) Seismic Zone 4
h) Rainfall 750 mm concentrated in four months
Page 17 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure - E: Aluminium crimping-type Ferrule for compacted circular conductor only for
Heat Shrink joints
Page 18 of 19
SP-HCSTJ-03-R1
Annexure – F: Strip type GI canister (V.B. Can) for joint protection only for Heat Shrink
Joint
Page 19 of 19
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
Technical Specification For Heat Shrinkable And GIS Cable Termination Kit (11 KV, 33 KV,
66 KV Cables)
Index
Record of Revision .................................................................................................................. 3
1.0.0 Scope of work ............................................................................................................... 4
2.0.0 Codes & standards ....................................................................................................... 4
3.0.0 Cable Construction ....................................................................................................... 4
4.0.0 Cable Termination Kits ................................................................................................. 6
5.0.0 Quality Assurance (QA).............................................................................................. 10
6.0.0 Deviations ................................................................................................................... 10
7.0.0 Delivery ....................................................................................................................... 11
Annexure – A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) ...................................................... 11
Annexure – B: Kit Content Table (KCT) ................................................................................. 13
Annexure – C: Routine and Acceptance Test ........................................................................ 14
Annexure – D: Technical Deviation Sheet ............................................................................ 15
Annexure – E: Service Conditions ......................................................................................... 15
Annexure – F: Bimetallic Aluminium I Copper Lug ............................................................... 16
Annexure – G: Aluminum Lug For XLPE Cable .................................................................... 17
Page 2 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Record of Revision
Item/Clause No. Change in Specification Approved By Rev
Page 3 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
1.0.0 Scope of work

Heat Shrinkable & GIS Termination Kits, suitable for 11 kV & 33 kV, 66KV XLPE I PILC cables, shall
be designed, manufactured, tested, packed and delivered by the Vendor, as per Purchaser's
requirements.
2.0.0 Codes & standards
2.1.0 National Standards:
SL Standard Number Title

Joints & Terminations of Polymeric Cables for working
2.1.1 IS - 13573: 2011 voltages from 6.6 kV up to and including 33 kV Performance
Requirements and Type Tests
Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Insulated PVC sheathed
IS – 7098 Part 2 :
2.1.2 cables : Part 2 : For working voltages from 3.3 kV upto and
1985
including 33 kV
Paper insulated lead-sheathed cables (PILC) for rated
2.1.3 IS - 692: 1994
voltages up to and including 33 kV specification
2.1.3 IS - 10810: 1984 Methods of test for cables
2.1.1 International Standards:

Electricity Association - Technical Specification -09-13
Material component for use in Electric Power Cable
2.2.1 EA TS - 09 - 13
Termination & Joints for System voltage above 1000 V up to 36
kV
Standards Test Procedures and requirements for high
2.2.2 IEEE - 48
voltage alternating current cable termination
2.2.3 IEC - 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
2.2.4 IEC - 885 Part 1-3 Electric test methods for electric cables
Power cable with extruded insulation and their accessories for

2.2.5 IEC - 60840 rated voltage above 30 kV (Um=36 KV) up to 150 KV (Um=170
KV) - test methods and requirements.
3.0.0 Cable Construction

Normal sizes of XLPE cables used in BSES system and the construction features of these
cables are indicated below:
XLPE type Cables: 3-core x 150, 300 & 400 sq. mm. AI
1-core x 630 or 1000 sq. mm. AI
PILC type Cables: 3-core 240 or 300 sq. mm. AI
Page 4 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
For XLPE :
a) Electrolytic Grade stranded Aluminium
b) Grade: H2/ H4 as per IS: 8130/84 (For AI)
c) Shape: Compacted Circular
3.1.0 Conductor
d) Class 2
For PILC :
a) 11 kV : sector-shaped
b) 33kV: oval-shaped
For XLPE :
Extruded Semi Conducting material
3.2.0 Conductor Screen
For PILC :
11 kV : no conductor screen 33 kV : carbon paper
For XLPE: Extruded XLPE Insulation
3.3.0 Insulation
For PILC: Layers of impregnated papers
For XLPE :
a) Freely strippable Semi Conducting ( without application of heat)
for 66KV firmly bonded
3.4.0 Insulation Screen b) Copper Tape
For PILC :
a) 11 kV : absent (Belted)
b) 33kV: metallised paper tape
For XLPE: Semi-conducting Water Swellable Tape shall be
Water Swellable
3.5.0 provided under the copper tape on each core.
Tape
For PILC : not applicable
For XLPE: All interstices, including centre interstices filled by PP
filler.
3.6.0 Filler For PILC :
a) 11 kV : Crushed paper filler
b) 33kV: Jute twine
XLPE : Binder tape
PILCA :
3.7.0 Over all three cores
11 kV : belt paper
33kV: Copper Woven Fabric tape
For XLPE: Extruded Inner Sheath of Black PVC type ST-2.
3.8.0 Inner Sheath
For PILC : Lead alloy sheath
For XLPE: not applicable
3.9.0 Bedding Tape For PILC: two layers of paper, followed by compounded
(bituminized) cotton tape.
For XLPE : not applicable
Copper Woven
For PILC :
3.10.0 Fabric Tape (CWF
a) 11 kV : absent (Belted cable)
tape)
b) 33 kV : applicable for screened cable
Page 5 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
For XLPE :
a) Galvanised steel flat strip armour (For 3 core cables)
b) Hard drawn Aluminium Wire (For 1 core cables)
3.11.0 Armour
c) Aluminium or lead sheathed for 66KV cable
For PILC :
a) 11 kV double steel tape armour
3.12.0 Binder Tape For XLPE: Rubberised cotton tape

For XLPE:
Extruded outer sheath of PVC (ST-2) for 11 KV/ 33 KV and HDPE
3.13.0 Outer Sheath for 66KV Cable with termite- repellent.
For PILC :
compounded (bituminised) Jute/PVC
4.0.0 Cable Termination Kits
General Technical Requirements for Cable Termination Kits are as follows:

Design, manufacture, testing and supply of Cable Termination Kits
4.1.0 Scope
for H. T. Power Cables.
Functional
4.2.0
Requirements
Voltage Cable Application Material Connection
Grade Size of Lug Method
3Cx 150 Mechanical
Indoor Bi-Metal
& 3Cx connector
300 sq Mechanical
Outdoor Aluminium
11 KV mm connector
1Cx1000 Indoor Aluminium Crimping
sq mm Outdoor Aluminium Crimping
Mechanical
Indoor Bi-Metal
3Cx400 connector
33 KV
Conductor sq mm Mechanical
4.2.1. Outdoor Aluminium
Connection connector
1Cx630 & Indoor Aluminium Crimping
66 KV 1Cx1000
Outdoor Aluminium Crimping
sq mm
a) For 240 sq. mm. PILC cable and 300 sq. mm. XLPE cable, the
lug suitable for 300 sq. mm. XLPE cable shall be used.
b) For GIS cable termination kits: Conductor connection assembly
shall be done by standard method of split, silver-plated copper
cone and pressure-fit contact assembly or as per manufacturer's
standard.
Page 6 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
a) The earthed insulation screen of an XLPE cable is terminated at

a suitable distance from the conductor.
b) The tube is in electrical contact with insulation screen.
c) Impedance of the tube shall be constant upto an operating
temperature and shall be within the range 1x1008 ohm-cm to 8x10
08
ohm-cm.
Stress Control d) Minimum length of stress control tube for 11 kV and 33 kV shall
4.2.2
System be 130 mm and 260 mm respectively.
e) The physical and electrical properties shall conform to ESI 09:
13.
f) For GIS cable termination kits Stress control shall be done by
means of a polymeric stress cone. External profile of the cone
shall match inner profile of GIS epoxy bushing. Vendor shall
specify the material (EPDM / Silicone) of the cone.
a) XLPE insulation shall be protected by means of an outer tube,

resistant to tracking and weathering.
Insulation
4.2.3 b) One end of the tube shall be coated internally with red sealant
Protection
mastic for a length of 50 mm.
c) Physical and Electrical properties shall conform to ESI 09: 13.
Outer length of the tube shall be controlled by providing creepage

Outer Anti-tracking
4.2.3.1 Extension Shed having the same material composition as the tube.
Tube
These lengths are given in the table below:
Creepage Extension Shed (No.)

Cable System Minimum Length of tube (mm)
(min)
Voltage Cores Indoor Outdoor Indoor Outdoor
3 - core 650 650 Nil 2

11 kV
1 - core 340 340 Nil 2
3 - core 800 1200 2 5
33 kV
1 - core 600 600 2 5
a) Transparent tube is used for restoring the insulation provided by

belt paper, which is terminated at the crotch.
Oil Barrier Tube
b) 33 kV PILC Termination: The oil barrier tube provides an oil-
4.2.3.3 (applicable for PILC
resistant layer to contain impregnating compound within, thus
cable termination)
preventing anti-tracking tube coming in contact with the
impregnating compound.
Page 7 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
a) Red Sealant Mastic Tape: This tape, used for sealing at ends,
shall be synthetic rubber-based and resistant to tracking and
weathering. Sufficient quantity of this tape shall be provided.
b) Lug-sealing Sleeve: It shall have the same material composition
as outer anti-tracking tube. The sleeve shall be fully coated
internally with red sealant mastic tape. Length of the sleeve shall
be so as to cover half length of the lug barrel and an equal length
Environmental
4.2.4 of track-resistant tube.
Sealing System
c) Conductive Break-out: It shall be provided over the crotch for 3-
core cables. The break-out base shall overlap PVC outer sheath
by a 50 mm. minimum.
d) For GIS termination kits : Environmental sealing of cores below
the switchgear shall be by means of a trifurcation kit, consisting of
heat shrinkable conductive break-out and heat-shrinkable
conductive tube of total length of 6 metres supplied in one roll.
a) Earth Bond Assembly shall comprise of copper braided
conductors as earthing conductors, GI armour support ring (split
type) and two stainless steel hose clips.
b) For GIS termination kit The earthing arrangement for 3-core
cables shall be the same as stated under 'a' above.
c) Two nos. copper braided conductors shall be of size: 25 sq. mm.
4.2.5 Earth Bond System
for 11 kV cables, 35 sq. mm. for 33 kV cables and 50 sq mm for
66KV.
d) Length of the copper braided conductor shall be 750 mm.
e) Each copper braided conductor shall be supplied with copper
lug, crimped at one end. Size of lug : 70 sq. mm. for 11 kV and 120
sq. mm. for 33 kV.
Following materials are required for use during cable termination :
a) Silicone-based compound Required for filling-in minute services/
Suppression of surface cracks over XLPE insulation.
4.2.6 electrical b) Polymeric mastic Required for application over semiconducting
discharges screen, for, eliminating any air-entrapment at any cut point on the
surface. It should have sufficient elongation and electrical
properties compatible with stress control tube.
Installation. It shall be in English and Hindi language and shall be provided
4.2.7
Instruction Sheet inside every kit.
a) An aluminum pouch with paper tag & sealing arrangement at
one end shall be provided.
b) This tag is required to be tied over the cable at one side of the
joint.
c) The paper tag shall give following information
Identification Tag 1) Vendor kit designation
4.2.8
(for traceability) 2) Division
3) Breakdown ID/Shutdown ID/Scheme No.
4) Cable section
5) Type of joint
6) Size of Joint
7) Make of joint
Page 8 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
8) Voltage class
9) Serial no. of kit
10) Vendor lot & batch no
11) Month & year of manufacturing
12) Date of installation
13) Name of jointer
14) Name of vendor supervisor
15) Name of BSES supervisor
16) Remarks
Paper Measuring
4.2.9 Required for use during cable preparation / terminations.
Tap
Technical Vendor shall submit Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) as
4.3.0
Particulars per Annexure A.
4.4.0 Type Tests Termination Kit shall be of type-tested quality.
4.5.0 Testing & Inspection
All the routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out as per ESI
a) Tests
guidelines. (Also refer Annexure -C)
1) Buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified on
individual H. S. components, Moulded components or completed
Cable Termination Kit.
2)Buyer reserves the right to inspect Cable Termination Kit at the
b) Inspection
Seller's works at any time, prior to dispatch, to verify compliance
with the specification.
3) In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be given in
advance to purchaser.
Three sets of complete Test Certificates (Routine & Acceptance
c) Test Certificates tests) shall be submitted along with the delivery of Cable
Termination Kits.
a) End termination kit shall be of type-tested quality.
b) In addition to this, vendor will be required to conduct type-testing
on heat shrinkable and moulded components, stress grading
d) Type Test
mastic, etc., in line with EA TS 09-13 standard, at third party test
laboratory once in every six months on randomly selected sample
of each voltage rating without any commercial implication.
"Documents" refer to Documents, Data, Manuals, etc. (Scanned
4.6.0 Documents copy of signed documents also shall be part of entire soft file (e-
file) or CD.)
following documents:
a) GTP (duly filled-in) (as per Annexure - A).
4.6.1 Along with the Bid b) Cross-sectional drawings for components Assembly
c) Type Test Certificates
d) Complete Catalogue and Instructions.
e) Any other document.
After Award of Vendor shall submit signed 2 sets (plus 1 set of soft copy) of above
4.6.2
Contract mentioned documents within 15 days, for Purchaser's approval.
Page 9 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Final signed "As-built" documents for the equipment in 3 sets (hard

"As-Built"
4.6.3 copy), 1 no. soft copy. These documents shall include signed
documents
Routine & Acceptance Test Certificates also.
Packing, Marking,
Every component/kit/box shall be properly sealed/ packed for
4.7.0 Shipping, Handling
protection against damage.
and Storage
Markings / Labels shall be on both sides of every packed box.

1) Identification number/type designation (as per manufacturer’s
standard)
2) Voltage grade, size, description of the Kit (including the voltage
grade, size, type of the cables, for which it is to be used)
3) Batch no., lot no., etc.
4) Quantity
a) Identification Label 5) a) Purchase Order no. & date
b) Purchaser’s name BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
c) BSES’s SAP code number
6) Weights (kg) of each Cable Termination Kit and of each box
containing kits.
7) Manufacturer’s name
8) Month & Year of Manufacturing
9) Date of packing, shelf life (if applicable)
The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to

b) Transit damage
improper packing.
5.0.0 Quality Assurance (QA)

Vendor's Quality
5.1.0 To be submitted for Purchaser's approval.
Plan (QP)
Sampling Method for quality checks shall be as per
5.2.0 Sampling Method manufacturer's standard practice / ESI guidelines and Purchaser's
prior approval shall be taken for the same.
Inspection Hold-
5.3.0 To be mutually identified, agreed and approved in Quality Plan.
Points
6.0.0 Deviations
A) Deviations from this specification can· be acceptable, only
where the Seller has listed in his quotation the requirements he
cannot, or does not, wish to comply with and which deviations the
6.1.0. Deviations Buyer has agreed to in writing, before any order is placed.
B) In the absence of any list of deviations from the Seller, it will be
assumed by the Buyer that the Seller complies with the
Specification fully.
Page 10 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
7.0.0 Delivery
Despatch of Material: Vendor shall despatch the material, only

after the Routine Tests/Final Acceptance Tests (FAT) of the
7.1.0. Delivery
material witnessed/waived by the Purchaser, and after receiving
written Material Despatch Clearance (MDC) from the Purchaser.
Annexure – A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
The Seller is deemed to have examined all parts of the Specification documents and to have been
fully informed, as to the nature of work and the conditions related to its performance.
S No. Description Purchase requirement Vendor’s data
1 Manufacturer’s name
2 Purchase Order no. & date
commissioning) / 66 Months (from
3 Guarantee Period (minimum)
date of receipt at Purchaser’s
store), whichever is earlier
Applicable IS / IEC Standard
4 followed by Vendor (incl. type
test standard)
Lightning Impulse Voltage
5.1
Withstand Test
4Uo AC voltage withstand test
5.2 Test report submitted
for 4 hours
6 90 deg. C
temperature
7 Functional Requirements
Method of Stress Control and
7.1
Discharge Suppression
Method of Insulation build-up
7.2
and screening
Method of earth bond
a) Size and no. of braids
7.3
b) Size of armour support
c) No. of hose clips
Method of mechanical protection
7.4 a) for 3-core Cable
b) for 1-core Cable
Method of protection against
7.5 corrosion (type & coating
thickness of protective layer on
Page 11 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
steel mat)
Method of conductor continuity

7.6 a) For crimping connector
b) For mechanical connector
Description of items in the
8 Kit, which are imported /sourced
From Principal /Sub-suppliers
Names of items in the Kit and
9 their respective shelf life (months
I years)
Kit Content Table (KCT)
10 Yes / No
enclosed? (Refer Annexure — B)
Yes / No
Drawing for connector (ferrule)
11 (If yes, mention the document
enclosed
reference)
Is Annexure - D (Technical
12
Deviation Sheet) duly filled-in?
Packing (Qty) 1 no
13 i) Packing of every Kit -- No. of Kits per Box
h) Group Packing -- No. of Boxes
Yes / No
14 Installation Procedure enclosed? (If yes, mention the document
reference)
Quality Assurance Plan
(QAP for raw materials, in-
15 Yes / No
process inspection, factory
testing) is enclosed?
Whether all heat-shrinkable and
moulded components of the kit Yes / No
meet the requirements of and (If yes, details of test report no.
16
have been tested in accordance /Date /name of test laboratory to be
with EA TS -09-1 3.(for heat- mentioned.)
shrinkable joints)
Page 12 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Type Test Reports (TTR)

(Relevant test report no. & date,
With type, size, other details of
each type of Kit.)
a) Prepared Joint: Yes/No
17 CPRI TTR as per BIS / IEC

enclosed?
b) Loose Components: Yes/No
CPRI TTR as per EA TS 09-13

enclosed?
Printing details on each of

(Mention the text, presently
18 the Heat- shrinkable and
printed on each of the component)
Moulded components
Annexure – B: Kit Content Table (KCT)
Vendor shall submit KCT as a consolidated table, consisting of all data, such as:
A. Heading
1. Voltage grade, size, description of the Kit
(Including the voltage grade, size, type of the cables, for which it is to be used)
2. Type designation (as per manufacturer’s standard)
B. Details / Parameters
(For each component/item of the KCT)
1. Lot no. /Batch no., etc.
2. Item number (manufacturer’s standard)
3. Description
a) Material, type, make and grade
b) Dimensions cross sectional area
c) Colour,
d) Other description, if any
4. Function of the item
5. Quantity
6. Make/Name/Location of manufacturer/sub-vendor
7. a) Minimum supplied (or in expanded form ) diameter
b) Maximum freely recovered diameter
8. a) Minimum supplied (or in expanded form ) thickness
b) Maximum freely recovered thickness
C. Notes on the KCT
Page 13 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Markings, printings, other details for individual/group of components are to be mentioned on KCT. For
example:
a) Printing of item code, size, batch no., etc.
b) Printing on components
c) Other embossing or engraving, it any.
(Note: Vendor may attach an Annexure, for any additional information, if required.)
Annexure – C: Routine and Acceptance Test
A. Visual Examination
Condition of selected items / components, as per sampling method, shall be recorded. Some of the
normal check-points can be as follows:
1. Every component shall be verified in quantity and description as per KCT.
2. All items shall be free from any defects, pin holes, cracks, etc.
3. Metallic components to be free from sharp edges.
B. Measurements of Dimensions
(Required / observed dimension — length, diameter, etc.)
1. Supplied dimensions
2. Recovered dimensions
C. Destructive Testing
On various heat-shrinkable / moulded components of ready Kits
(Items 3 and 4 are applicable only for heat-shrinkable components)
1. Tensile Strength
2. Wall Thickness Ratio
3. Heat Shock
4. Longitudinal Change, after full recovery
5. Ultimate Elongation
6. Low Temperature Flexibility
7. Dielectric Strength
8. Volume Resistivity
D. Routine Test Reports (RTR)

(Typical)
Page 14 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Each RTR shall clearly indicate P.O. no. & date and also BSES’s SAP code no. RTR shall record the
serial numbers of the kits selected, as per vendor’s sampling method. Following details, besides
vendor’s/manufacturers standard check-points, shall appear in every RTR.
Annexure – D: Technical Deviation Sheet
Sr No. Clause No. Deviation
Annexure – E: Service Conditions

(Atmospheric conditions at Site)
1 Delhi
Average grade Atmospheric
a) Heavily Polluted, Dry
Condition:
b) Maximum altitude above sea level 1000 M
c) Ambient Air temperature Highest 50 deg C, Average 40 deg C
Minimum ambient air
d) 0 deg C
temperature
e) Relative Humidity 90 % Max
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg. C cmm
g) Seismic Zone 4
h) Rainfall 750 mm concentrated in four months
Page 15 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Annexure – F: Bimetallic Aluminium I Copper Lug
Page 16 of 17
SP-HSGTK-04-R1
66 KV Cables)
Annexure – G: Aluminum Lug For XLPE Cable
Page 17 of 17
SP-TRDU-01-R6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 400/630/1000/1600/2000KVA,11/0.433 KV

OIL FILLED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
INDEX
Record of Revision………………………………………………………………………………3
1.0 Scope of supply........................................................................................................ 5
2.0 Codes & standards................................................................................................... 5
3.0 Major Design Criteria & Parameters of the Transformer .......................................... 7
4.0 Construction & Design ............................................................................................ 10
5.0 Fittings and Accessories on Transformer............................................................... 22
6.0 Approved make of components ............................................................................. 26
7.0 Quality assurance .................................................................................................. 26
8.0 Progress Reporting ................................................................................................ 28
9.0 Submittals .............................................................................................................. 28
10.0 Inspection & testing ............................................................................................... 31
11.0 Packing , Shipping, Handling and Storage............................................................ 36
12.0 Deviations ............................................................................................................. 37
Annexure A Scope of supply ........................................................................................ 38
Annexure B Service Conditions ................................................................................... 40
Annexure C Technical Specification for transformer oil ................................................. 41
Annexure D Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Seller) .................................... 43
Annexure E Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Transformer Oil ............................... 52
Annexure F Recommended Spares (Data by Supplier) ................................................. 53
Page 2 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Record of Revision
SI No. Revision Item/Clause No. Nature of change Approved by

No
1 R1 2.0 Codes & standards updated. DG/KR
2 R1 4.2.7.1 Transformer oil indicated as per annexure DG/KR
C and sample test included
3 R1 5.21 MOG and terminal box included DG/KR
4 R1 5.22 Metering box included DG/KR
5 R1 10.2 Additional description indicated for IR and DG/KR
PI measurement. Temperature rise test
included for any lot
6 R1 Annexure C1 included for transformer oil DG/KR
specification
7 R1 Annexure C2 included for additional DG/KR
requirement for hermetically sealed
transformer
8 R1 Annexure D updated DG/KR
9 R1 Annexure D1 data for transformer oil DG/KR
included
10 R2 5.23 Steel support structure for cables added MDB/KKA

11 R2 Cl 25.3 of Length reduced to 2100 MDB/KKA
Annexure C
12 R2 Cl 33.0 of Capitalization figure revised MDB/KKA
Annexure C
13 R2 1.1.5 of Steel support for cables added MDB/KKA
Annexure A
14 R2 10.5 Customer Hold Points added MDB/KKA
15 R3 6.0 List of make Approved make updated MDB/KKA
16 R3 6.2 Current density at all taps included MDB/KKA
17 R4 2.0 BIS certification required SR/KKA
18 R4 3.25 &3.26 Losses revised SR/KKA
19 R4 10.4 Special tests revised SR/KKA
Page 3 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

20 R4 4.2.5.2&4.2.5.3 Core grade & thickness revised SR/KKA

21 R4 3.37 Noise level specified SR/KKA
22 R4 4.2.2.4 Silica gel type changed. SR/KKA
23 R4 4.2.10.5 CT burden revised SR/KKA
24 R4 10.1.1 Vacuum & pressure test shall be as per IS SR/KKA
25 R4 10.2 Routine test revised SR/KKA
26 R5 3.23 990kVA Transformer rating revised to DS
1000kV
27 R5 3.24.1 400 & 630kVA percentage impedance DS
changed to 4.5%
28 R5 3.41 & 4.2.11.1 Tapping range revised DS
29 R5 4.2.5.5 Flux density at over fluxing changed DS
30 R6 3.23, 3.24, 1600 & 2000 kVA ratings included AA
3.27, 3.30,
3.31& 3.41
31 R6 3.32 Transformer dimensions AA
32 R6 3.25 & 3.26 Losses revised AA
Page 4 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

1.0 Scope of supply

For scope of supply, refer annexure – A.
2.0 Codes & standards

a) Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of Transformer shall conform
to the latest edition of below mentioned standards.
b) Vendor shall possess valid BIS Certification.
IEC Standards
IEC 60034 Rotating Electrical Machines. (e.g. For Cooler Fan Motors.)
IEC 60071 Co-ordination of Insulation.
IEC 60076 Power transformers.
IEC 60156 Method for Determination of the Electric Strength for Insulating Oils.
IEC 60044 Current Transformers.
IEC 60214 On Load Tap Changers
IEC 60296 Specification for Unused Mineral Insulating Oils for Transformers and
Switchgear.
IEC 60354 Loading Guide for Oil-Immersed Power Transformers.
IEC 60445 Basic& Safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification,
Identification of Equipment Terminals and conductor terminals
IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code).

IEC 60551 Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels.
IEC 60606 Application Guide for Power Transformers.
IEC 60616 Terminal and Tapping Markings for Power Transformers.
IEC 60947 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear.
IEC 60947 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000V
British Standard
BS 148 Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels.
BS 223 Application Guide for Power Transformers.
BS 2562 Terminal and Tapping Markings for Power Transformers.
Page 5 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Indian Standards
IS:335 Insulating oil
IS:1271 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IS:2099 Bushing for Alternating voltage above 1000V
IS:2705 Current Transformers
IS:3347 Dimensions for Porcelain Transformer bushing
IS:3637 Gas operated relays
IS:3639 Fitting & Accessories for power transformers
IS:4201 Application guide for CT’s
IS:6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
IS:8478 Application guide for On-load tap changer
IS:8468 On-load tap changer
IS:10028 Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of transformers
IS:13947 LV switchgear and Controlgear-Part1
IS 2026 Power Transformers
IS 1180 Outdoor type oil immersed distribution transformer upto and including
2.5MVA,33kV
IS 5561 Electrical Power Connectors
IS 5 Colors for ready mix paints
IS 6272 Industrial cooling fans
IS 325 Three phase induction motors
Indian Electricity Rules
Indian Electricity Act
CBIP manual
In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of authority
of documents shall be as follows -
i. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
ii. This Specification
iii Indian Standards / IEC standards
iv Approved Vendor Drawings
iv. Other documents
Page 6 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

3.0 Major Design Criteria & Parameters of the Transformer

Sr No Description Data by purchaser
3.1 Voltage variation on supply side + / - 10 %
3.2 Frequency variation on supply side +/ - 5 %
3.3 Transient condition - 20 % or + 10 % combined variation of
voltage and frequency
3.4 Service Condition Refer Annexure B
3.5 Insulation level Class A
3.6 Location of equipment Generally Outdoor but may be located
indoor also with poor ventilation
3.7 Reference design ambient 50 deg C
temperature
3.8 Type Oil immersed, core type, step down
3.9 Type of cooling ONAN
3.10 Reference standard IS 2026/IS 1180
3.11 No. of phases 3
3.12 No. of windings per phase 2
3.13 Rated frequency ( Hz ) 50 Hz
3.14 Highest system voltage HV side 12 kv
3.15 Highest system voltage LV side 460 volt
3.16 Lightning Impulse withstand voltage ,
kV peak
3.16.1 For nominal system voltage of 11 kV 75
3.17 Power Frequency Withstand Voltage
kV rms
3.17.2 For nominal system voltage of 415 V 3
3.18 Clearances Phase to Phase , mm
3.19 Clearances Phase to Earth , mm
3.20 System Fault Level , HV side 350 MVA
Page 7 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

3.21 System Fault Level , LV side 35 MVA

3.22 System earthing
3.22.1 HV Solidly earthed
3.22.2 LV Solidly earthed
3.23 Ratings 400/630/1000/1600/2000 kVA
3.24
Percentage Impedance at 75 deg C
3.24.1 400/630 kVA 4.5 % with IS tolerance
3.24.2 1000 kVA 5.0 % with IS tolerance
3.24.3 1600/2000 kVA 6.25% with IS tolerance
3.25 Max Total losses(No Load+ Load
Losses at 75⁰C) at 50% of the rated
load , kW
3.25.2 400 kVA 1.225
3.25.3 630 kVA 1.86
3.25.4 1000 kVA 2.79
3.25.5 1600 kVA 4.2
3.25.6 2000 kVA 5.05
3.26 Max Total losses(No Load+ Load
Losses at 75⁰C) at 100% of the rated
load , kW
3.26.1 400 kVA 3.45
3.26.2 630 kVA 5.3
3.26.3 1000 kVA 7.7
3.26.4 1600 kVA 11.8
3.26.5 2000 kVA 15
3.27 Phase CT Ratio , Amp
3.27.1 400 kVA 600/5
3.27.2 630 kVA 1000/5
3.27.3 1000 kVA 1500/5
3.27.4 1600 kVA 2500/5
3.27.5 2000 kVA 3000/5
Page 8 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

3.28 HV cable size for all sizes / Conductor 11 kV (E) grade , A2XCEWY 3C x 150
size sqmm
3.29 Tinned Copper Busbar size on HV 50x6
side for cable termination, mm x mm
3.30 LV cable size, 650 /1100 V grade , Cable
A2XY cable single core 630 sqmm
unarmoured (approx cable dia 40 mm)
3.30.1 400 kVA 2 runs per phase + 2 runs in Neutral
3.30.4 1600 KVA 6 runs per phase + 3 runs in Neutral
3.31 Tinned Copper Busbar size on LV side
for cable termination, mm x mm
3.31.1 400/630/1000kVA
3.31.1.1 Phase 100 x 12
3.31.1.2 Neutral 100 x 12
3.31.2 1600kVA
3.31.2.1 Phase 160 x 12
3.31.2.2 Neutral 160 x 12
3.31.3 2000kVA
3.31.3.1 Phase 2 runs 100 x 12
3.31.3.2 Neutral 2 runs 100 x 12
3.32 Maximum Overall Dimension
Acceptable ( length x width x height),
mm x mm x mm
3.32.1 400 kVA 1500X1500X2000
3.32.2 630 kVA 1700X1700X2200
3.32.3 1000 kVA 1900X1900X2500
3.32.4 1600 kVA 2300X2000X2600
3.32.5 2000 kVA 2500X2000X2600

Short Circuit withstand Capacity of the
3.33
transformer
Page 9 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

3.34 Three phase dead short circuit at For 3 secs.

secondary terminal with rated voltage
maintained on the other side
3.35 Single phase short circuit at secondary For 3 secs.
terminal with rated voltage maintained
on other side
3.36 Overload Capability As per IS 6600/IEC 60905
3.37 Noise Level 400/630/1000/1600/2000 KVA-
56/57/58/60/61 Db respectively
3.38 Radio Influence Voltage Maximum 250 microvolt

3.39 Harmonic suppression Transformer to be designed for
suppression of 3rd, 5th, 7th harmonic
voltages and high frequency
disturbances.
3.40 Partial Discharge Transformer to be free from partial
discharge upto 120 % of rated voltage
as the voltage is reduced from 150 % of
rated voltage i.e. there shall be no
significant rise above background level
3.41 Tappings Off Circuit taps on HV winding , +5% to
- 10% in steps of 2.5 % , change of
taps by externally operated switch
3.41.1 Rotary tap switch operating voltage 11 kV
3.41.2 Rotary tap switch current rating, Amp.
3.41.2.1 400 kVA 60 Amp
3.41.2.2 630 / 1000 kVA 100 Amp
3.41.2.3 1600/2000 kVA 150 Amp
4.0 Construction & Design
4.1 Type Double Copper wound, three phase, oil

immersed, with ONAN cooling, with off
circuit tap changer
Page 10 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.2 Major Parts

4.2.1 Tank
4.2.1.1 Type Non sealed type with conservator as
per manufacturer’s standard.
4.2.1.2 Material of Construction Robust mild steel plate without pitting
and low carbon content
4.2.1.3 Plate Thickness Adequate for meeting the requirements
of pressure and vacuum type tests as
per IS
4.2.1.4 Welding features i) All seams and joints shall be double
welded
ii) All welding shall be stress relieved
for sheet thickness greater than 35
mm
iii) All pipes, radiators, stiffeners,
welded to the tank shall be welded
externally
4.2.1.5 Tank features i) Adequate space at bottom for
collection of sediments
ii) Stiffeners provided for rigidity and
designed to prevent accumulation
of water
iii) No internal pockets in which
gas/air can accumulate
iv) No external pocket in which water
can lodge
v) Tank bottom with welded skid base
vi) Tank cover sloped to prevent
retention of rain water
vii) Minimum disconnection of pipe
work and accessories for cover
lifting
viii) Tanks shall be of a strength to
prevent permanent deformation
Page 11 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

during lifting , jacking,

transportation with oil filled.
ix) Tank to be designed for oil filling
under vacuum
x) Tank cover fitted with lifting lug
xi) Tank cover bent at all the ends
xii) Minimum disconnection of pipe
work and accessories for cover
lifting
4.2.1.5 Flanged type adequately sized i) HV line bushing
inspection cover rectangular in shape ii) LV line bushing
required for iii) LV neutral bushing
iv) Core / Winding
4.2.1.6 Fittings and accessories on main tank See under fittings and accessories.
4.2.2 Conservator for the main tank
4.2.2.1 Capacity Adequate between highest and lowest
visible levels to meet the requirement
of expansion of oil volume in the
transformer and cooling equipment
from minimum ambient temperature to
maximum operating temperatures.
4.2.2.2 Conservator oil preservation system Conventional
4.2.2.3 Conservator features i) Conservator shall be bolted into
position so that it can be removed
for cleaning / other maintenance
purposes
ii) Main pipe from tank shall project
about 20 mm above conservator
bottom for creating a sump for
collection of impurities
iii) Conservator minimum oil level
corresponding to minimum
temperature shall be well above
the sump level.
Page 12 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

iv) Conservator to main tank piping

shall be supported at minimum two
points.
4.2.2.4 Fittings and accessories on main tank i) Prismatic oil gauge with MINIMUM ,
conservator NORMAL and MAXIMUM marking
ii) End Cover
iii) Oil Filling Hole with cap
iv) Silica Gel Dehydrating Breather
with oil seal and dust filter with clear
acrylic single piece clearly
transparent cover resistant to UV
rays(1kg). Breather shall be of
Flanged type in circular shape with
4 no.holes of ½ inches with
hardware of M10 bolts.
vi) Drain Plug
vii) Air release plug as required
viii) Pressure/ Vacuum gauge
ix) Magnetic Oil Gauge with LOW
LEVEL ALARM
x) Silica gel shall be of round ball type
of 2.5mm dia.
4.2.3 Radiators Detachable type
4.2.3.1 Thickness Minimum 1.2 mm
4.2.4.2 Features With lifting lugs, air release plug, drain
plug
4.2.5 Core
4.2.5.1 Material High grade , non ageing, low loss, high
permeability, grain oriented, cold rolled
silicon steel lamination
4.2.5.2 Grade Premium Grade minimum M3 or better
4.2.5.3 Lamination thickness 0.23 mm Max.
4.2.5.4 Design Flux Density at rated As per Manufacturer design.
conditions at principal tap
Page 13 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.2.5.5 Maximum Flux Density at 12.5 % over 1.9 T

excitation / over fluxing
4.2.5.6 Core Design Features i) Magnetic circuit designed to avoid
short circuit paths within core or to
the earthed clamping structures
ii) Magnetic circuit shall not produce
flux components at right angles to
the plane of lamination to avoid
local heating
iii) Least possible air gap and rigid
clamping for minimum core loss
and noise generation
iv) Adequately braced to withstand
bolted faults on secondary
terminals without mechanical
damage and damage/
displacement during transportation
and positioning.
v) Percentage harmonic potential
with the maximum flux density
under any condition limited to
avoid capacitor overloading in the
system
vi) All steel sections used for
supporting the core shall be
thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting , drilling, welding
vii) Provision of lifting lugs for core coil
assembly
viii) Supporting framework designed
not to obstruct complete drainage
of oil from transformer
4.2.6 Winding
4.2.6.1 Material Electrolytic Copper
Page 14 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.2.6.2 Maximum Current Density allowed 3 Amp per sq mm at all taps.

4.2.6.3 Winding Insulating material Class A , non catalytic, inert to
transformer oil, free from compounds
liable to ooze out, shrink or collapse.
4.2.6.4 Winding Insulation Uniform
4.2.6.5 Design features i) Stacks of winding to receive
adequate shrinkage treatment
ii) Connections braced to withstand
shock during transport, switching,
short circuit, or other transients.
iii) Minimum out of balance force in the
transformer winding at all voltage
ratios.
iv) Conductor width on edge
exceeding six times its thickness
v) Transposed at sufficient intervals.
vi) Coil assembly shall be suitably
supported between adjacent
sections by insulating spacers +
barriers
vii) Winding leads rigidly supported ,
using guide tubes if practicable
viii) Winding structure and major
insulation not to obstruct free flow
of oil through ducts
ix) Provision of taps as per clause
3.41
4.2.7 Transformer Oil
4.2.7.1 Type Should be in accordance with
specification as per Annex C of this
document
One sample of oil drawn from every lot
of transformer offered for inspection
should be tested at NABL accredited lab
Page 15 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

for tests as listed under Table-1 of

IS:1866 (2000). The cost of this testing
should be included within the cost of
transformer. The results shall be
confirming to BSES specification Annex
C
4.2.8 Bushings and Terminations
4.2.8.1 Type of HV side bushing HV bushing should be top mounted.
Oudoor, Epoxy Resin cast, rated
voltage and creepage as per 31mm/kV
with voltage class of 12kV respectively
4.2.8.2 Type of LV side bushing LV bushing should be top mounted.
Outdoor, Epoxy resin cast, rated
voltage and creepage as per 31mm/kV
with voltage class of 1.1 kV
respectively
Additional neutral bushing shall be
provided of porcelain.
4.2.8.2.1 Essential provision for LV side line It shall be complete with copper palm
bushing complete with tinned copper busbar of
size shall be as per clause 3.31.
4.2.8.2.2 Essential provision for LV side neutral In case of neutral bushing the stem
bushing and busbar shall be integral without
bolted, threaded, brazed joints. Busbar
size shall be as per clause 3.31
4.2.8.3 Arcing Horns Not required
4.2.8.4 Support insulators inside HV cable box Epoxy resin cast, rated voltage 12 kV
if provided
4.2.8.5 Termination on HV side bushing By bimetallic terminal connectors
suitable for ACSR/AAAC conductor /
Cable connection through cable box
with disconnecting link suitable for
11kV(E) grade,A2XFY 3Cx 150sqmm
4.2.8.6 Termination of LV side bushing By bimetallic terminal connectors
Page 16 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

suitable for LV Cable size of

650/1100VGrade, A2XY Cable single
core 630sqmm(Approx dia 40mm)
4.2.8.7 Minimum creepage distance of all 31mm/KV
bushings and support insulators.
4.2.8.8 Protected creepage distance At least 50 % of total creepage
distance
4.2.8.9 Continuous Current rating Minimum 20 % higher than the current
corresponding to the minimum tap of
the transformer
4.2.8.10 Rated thermal short time current 25 times the rated current for 2 sec
4.2.8.11 Atmospheric protection for clamp and Hot dip galvanizing as per IS 2633
fitting of iron and steel
4.2.8.12 Bushing terminal lugs in oil and air Tinned copper
4.2.8.13 Sealing washers /Gasket ring Nitrile cork rubber(RC70C)/ Expanded
TEFLON(PTFE) as applicable.
4.2.9 HV & LV cable box Required
4.2.9.1 Material of Construction Sheet Steel min. 2.5 mm thick
4.2.9.2 Cable entry At bottom through detachable gland
plate with cable clamps of non
magnetic material
4.2.9.3 Cable size for HV 11 kV (E) grade , A2XFY 3C x 150
sqmm
4.2.9.4 Cable size for LV LV cable size, 650 /1100 V grade,
A2XY cable single core 630 sqmm
4.2.9.5 Cable size for LV Neutral LV cable size, 650 /1100 V grade
,A2XY cable single core 630 sqmm
4.2.9.6 Detachable Gland Plate material for MS for HV cable box
HV, LV, LV Neutral box Al for LV cable box.
4.2.9.7 Gland plate thickness for HV, LV, LV 3 mm for HV side cable box
Neutral box 5 mm for LV cable box.
4.2.9.8 Cable gland for HV cables Nickel plated brass double
compression weatherproof cable gland
Page 17 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.2.9.9 Cable lug for HV, LV, LV Neutral Double hole Aluminium lugs
cables
4.2.9.10 Essential parts i) Flange type removable front cover
with handles min two nos.
ii) Tinned Copper Busbar of adequate
size for Purchaser’s cable
termination with busbar supports
iii) Earthing boss for the cable box
iv) Earthing link for the gasketted joints
at two point for each joint
v) Earthing provision for cable Armour/
Screen
vi) Flanged type inspection cover on
top for bushing inspection and
maintenance with handle
vii) Drain plug
viii) Rainhood on gasketted vertical
joint
ix) Danger / caution plate
4.2.9.11 Terminal Clearances 700mm, Minimum
4.2.9.12 Termination height required for cable 1000mm, Minimum

termination
4.2.10 Current Transformers
4.2.10.1 Provision On all three phases on LV side
4.2.10.2 Mounting On LV side bushings on all three
phases with the help of fibre glass
mounting plate affixed to main tank by
nut bolt arrangement
4.2.10.3 Maintenance requirements Replacement should be possible by
removing fixing nut of mounting plate
after removal of LT cable without
disturbing LT bushing
4.2.10.4 Accuracy Class 0.5
Page 18 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.2.10.5 Burden 10VA

4.2.10.6 Type Resin Cast Ring type suitable for
outdoor use.
4.2.10.7 CT ratio
400kVA 600/5
630kVA 1000/5
1000kVA 1500/5
1600kVA 2500/5
2000kVA 3000/5
4.2.10.8 CT terminal Box
4.2.10.8.1 Size 650 mm height x 450 mm width x 275
mm depth.
4.2.10.8.2 Fixing of instrument / meters within On slotted channel 40 x 12 mm size,
box channel fixed on vertical slotted angle
40 x 40 mm size at two ends
4.2.10.8.3 No of horizontal channels to be Four
provided
4.2.10.8.4 Fixing of terminals within the box On horizontal slotted channel with the
help of C channel available with the
terminals
4.2.10.8.5 Location On tank wall
4.2.10.8.6 Box door design Openable from outside with antitheft
hinge, padlock facility, door fixed by
stainless steel allen screw M6 size ,
door shall have canopy for rain
protection
4.2.10.8.7 Terminal strip Nylon 66 material, minimum 4 sq mm,
screw type for control wiring and
potential circuit.
4.2.10.8.8 Cables and wires PVC insulated, extruded PVC inner
sheathed, armoured, extruded PVC
outer sheathed 1100 V grade control
cable as per latest edition of IS 1554
part 1 minimum 2.5 sq mm for signals
Page 19 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

and 4 sq mm for CT with multi strand

copper conductor
4.2.10.8.9 Cable Glands Nickel plated brass double
compression weatherproof cable
gland
4.2.10.8.10 Lugs on wires Tinned copper pre insulated Pin, Ring,
Fork type as applicable
4.2.10.8.11 Potential signal in CT box i)Tapped from main LV busbar
ii)Neutral Link and Fuse to be provided
by bidder for PT
4.2.10.8.12 Essential provision Wiring diagram to be fixed on the back
of door along with CT spec. on
Aluminum engraved plate fixed by rivet.
4.2.11 Off Circuit tap Switch
4.2.11.1 Range /Step Off circuit taps on HV winding, +5% to -
10% in steps of 2.5%, change of taps
by externally operated switch.
4.2.11.2 Type Rotary type, 3 pole gang operated,
draw out type
4.2.11.3 Operating Voltage 11kV
4.2.11.4 Rated Current for tap Switch 400 kVA - 60 Amps
630/1000 kVA - 100 Amps
1600/2000kVA-150 Amps
4.2.11.5 Operating Handle External at suitable height to be
operated from ground level.
4.2.11.6 Essential provision Tap position indicator, direction
changing facility, locking arrangement,
and caution plate metallic fixed by
rivet.
4.2.12 Pressure Relief Device
4.2.12.1 Type Explosion vent
4.2.12.2 Provision on explosion vent Double diaphragm & sight glass
4.3 Hardware
4.3.1 External Stainless Steel
Page 20 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

4.3.2 Internal Cadmium plated except special

hardware for frame parts and core
assembly as per manufacturer’s design
4.4 Gasket
4.4.1 For Transformer , surfaces interfacing Nitrile cork rubber RC70C grade
with oil like inspection cover etc.
4.4.2 For Cable boxes, Marshalling box, etc. Neoprene rubber based/ cork nitrile
4.5 Valves
4.5.1 Material of construction Brass / gun metal
4.5.2 Type Both end flanged gate valve / butterfly
valve depending on application
4.5.3 Size As per manufacturer’s standard
4.5.4 Essential provision Position indicator, locking rod,
padlocking facility, valve guard, cover
plate.
4.6 Cable routing on Transformer Control cables for accessories on
transformer tank shall be routed
through perforated GI trays
4.6.1 Control cable specification PVC insulated, extruded PVC inner
sheathed, armoured, extruded PVC
outer sheathed 1100 V grade control
cable as per latest edition of IS 1554
part 1 minimum 2.5 sq mm for signals
and 4 sq mm for CT with multi strand
copper conductor
4.6.2 Specification of wires to be used PVC insulated multi-strand flexible
inside marshalling box , OLTC drive copper wires of minimum 2.5 sq mm
mechanism size, 1100 V grade as per latest edition
of relevant IS
4.7 Terminal Blocks to be used by the Nylon 66 material, minimum 4 sq mm,
vendor screw type for control wiring and
potential circuit.
4.7.1 Essential provision for CT terminals Sliding link type disconnecting terminal
block screwdriver operated stud type
Page 21 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

with facility for CT terminal shorting

material of housing melamine/ Nylon66
4.8 Cable glands to be used by the Nickel plated brass double
vendor compression weatherproof cable
gland
4.9 Cable lugs to be used by the vendor
4.9.1 For power cables Long barrel medium duty Aluminium lug
with knurling on inside surface.
4.9.2 For Control Cable Tinned copper pre insulated Pin, Ring,
Fork type as applicable
4.10 Painting of transformer, Radiator,
marshalling box for CT, cable boxes
etc.
4.10.1 Surface preparation By 7 tank pretreatment process or shot
blasting method
4.10.2 Finish on internal surfaces of the Bright Yellow heat resistant and oil
transformer resistant paint two coats. Paint shall
neither react nor dissolve in hot
transformer insulating oil.
4.10.3 Finish on inner surface of the CT White Polyurethane paint anti
terminal box, HV/LV/LVN cable box condensation type two coats ,
minimum dry film thickness 80 microns
4.10.4 Finish on outer surface of the Battle ship Grey shade 632
transformer, radiator, CT terminal box, Polyurethane paint two coats ,
HV/LV/LVN cable box minimum dry film thickness 80 microns
4.10.5 Frame parts Battle ship grey shade 632 IS 5, 80
micron minimum insulating oil resistant
paint. Paint shall neither react nor
dissolve in hot transformer insulating
oil.
5.0 Fittings and Accessories on Transformer
5.1 Rating and Diagram Plate Required

Page 22 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6


5.1.3 Letters, diagram & border Black
5.1.5 Rating and Diagram Plate details Following details shall be provided on
rating and diagram plate as a minimum
i) type/kind of transformer with
winding material
ii) standard to which it is manufactured
iii) manufacturer's name;
iv) transformer serial number;
v) month and year of manufacture
vi) rated frequency in Hz
vii) rated voltages in kV
viii) number of phases
ix) rated power in kVA
x) type of cooling (ONAN)
xi) rated currents in A
xii) vector group connection symbol
xiii) 1.2/50µs wave impulse voltage
withstand level in kV
xiv) power frequency withstand voltage
in kV
xv) impedance voltage at rated current
and frequency in percentage at
principal, minimum and maximum
tap
xvi) Max. Total losses at 50 % rated
load
xvii) Max. Total losses at 100 % rated
load
xviii) Load loss at 50% & 100% rated
load
xix) No-load loss at rated voltage and
frequency
Page 23 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

xx) Energy efficiency level.

xxi) continuous ambient temperature
at which ratings apply in deg C
xxii) top oil and winding temperature
rise at rated load in deg C;
xxiii) winding connection diagram with
taps and table of tapping voltage,
current and power
xxiv) transport weight of transformer
xxv) weight of core and windings
xxvi) total weight
xxvii) volume of oil
xxviii) weight of oil
xxix) name of the purchaser
xxx) PO no and date
xxxi) Guarantee period
5.2 Terminal marking Plate for Bushing, Required
anodized aluminium black lettering
on satin silver background both
inside cable boxes near termination
and on cable box cover (all fixed by
rivet)
5.3 Company Monogram Plate fixed by Required
rivet
5.4 Lifting Lug to lift complete Required
transformer with oil
5.5 Lifting lug for top cover Required
5.6 Lashing Lug Required
5.7 Jacking Pad with Haulage hole to Required
raise or lower complete transformer
with oil
5.8 Detachable Bidirectional flat roller Required
Assembly
5.8.1 Roller center to center distance Minimum 900 mm on the side of HV
Page 24 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

and LV cable box

Maximum 800 mm on the other side
(perpendicular to HV, LV cable box).
5.8.2 Essential provision Roller dia 150 mm min., roller to be
fixed in such a way so that the
lowermost part of the skid is above
ground by at least 100 mm when the
transformer is installed on roller.
5.9 Pockets for ordinary thermometer Required
on tank cover with metallic
identification plate fixed by rivet.
5.10 Drain valve (gate valve) for the Required
main tank with cork above ground
by 150mm minimum with
padlocking and valve guard with
metallic identification plate fixed by
rivet.
5.11 Filter valve (gate valve) at top with Required
padlocking and valve guard with
rivet.
5.12 Air Release Plug on tank cover with Required
rivet.
5.13 Equalizer pipe connection between Required
conservator and explosion vent
5.14 Earthing pad on tank for Required
transformer earthing complete with
non ferrous nut ., bolt, washers,
spring washers etc. with metallic
identification plate fixed by rivet
5.15 Rainhood for vertical gasketted Required Not required as per Annexure
joints , in cable boxes, Conservator A Scope of supply
5.16 Earthing bridge by copper strip Required
Page 25 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

jumpers on all gasketted joints at at

least two points for electrical
continuity
5.17 Skid base welded type with haulage Required
hole
5.18 Core , Frame to tank Earthing Required
5.19 Danger plate made of Anodized Required
aluminum with white letters on red
background on Transformer, cable
boxes (all fixed by rivet)
5.20 Caution plate for Off Circuit tap Required
changer fixed by rivet.
5.21 MOG with auxillary contact wired Required
upto Terminal Box
5.22 Buchholz relay for transformer Required
above 1000kVA
6.0 Approved make of components
6.1 CT Pragati / ECS / Kappa

6.2 Bushings Baroda Bushing/CJI/Jaipur
6.3 Tap Changer Alwaye /Paragon
6.4 MOG Sukrut/Atvus
6.5 Valves Newman
6.6 CRGO Nippon/JFE/Posco
6.7 Copper Birla copper/Sterlite
6.8 Pre compressed Pressboard Raman Board, Mysore/ Senapathy
Whiteley
6.9 Laminated Wood Permalli Wallance / Rochling Engineers
6.10 Oil Apar/Savita/Raj
6.11 Steel TATA/Jindal/SAIL
6.12 Lugs/Glands Jainson/Dowells/Comet
6.13 Radiators CTR/Hi-Tech Radiators /Tarang
Engineers
Page 26 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Note – Any other make of component to be approved by purchaser
7.0 Quality assurance
7.1 Quality Assurance program To be submitted before contract award.

Program shall contain following
i) The structure of the organisation
ii) The duties and responsibilities
assigned to staff ensuring quality of
work.
iii) The bidder should have qualified
technical & dedicated QA
personnel at various stages of
manufacture & testing.
iv) Factory inspection of bidder may
be carried out to ascertain the
quality system and process in
place at manufacturing facility.
The same is applicable to bidders
not approved with BSES.
v) The system for purchasing, taking
delivery and verification of materials
vi) The system for ensuring quality of
workmanship
vii) The system for control of
documentation
viii) The system for the retention of
records
ix) The arrangements for the
Supplier’s internal auditing
x) A list of the administration and work
procedures required to achieve and
verify Contract’s quality
requirements. These procedures
shall be made readily available to
the Purchaser for inspection on
request
7.2 Quality Plan To be submitted by the successful
bidder for approval. Plan shall contain
following as a minimum
i) An outline of the proposed work
and programme sequence
ii) The structure of the Supplier’s
organisation for the contract
Page 27 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

iii) The duties and responsibilities

assigned to staff ensuring quality of
work for the contract
iv) Inspection Hold and notification
points mutually agreed.
v) Submission of engineering
documents required by the
specification
vi) The inspection of materials and
components on receipt
vii) Reference to the Supplier’s work
procedures appropriate to each
activity
viii) Inspection during
fabrication/construction
ix) Final inspection and test
x) Successful bidder shall include
submittal of Mills invoice, Bill of
lading, Mill’s test certificate for
grade, physical tests, dimension,
specific watt loss per kG for the
core material to the purchaser for
verification in the quality plan
suitably
8.0 Progress Reporting
8.1 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval

for outline of production, inspection,
testing, packing, dispatch,
documentation programme
8.2 Detailed Progress report To be submitted to Purchaser once a
month containing
i) Progress on material procurement
ii) Progress on fabrication
iii) Progress on assembly
iv) Progress on internal stage
inspection
v) Reason for any delay in total
programme
vi) Details of test failures if any in
manufacturing stages
vii) Progress on final box up
viii) Constraints
ix) Forward path
Page 28 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

9.0 Submittals
9.1 Submittals required with bid i) Completed technical data

schedule
ii) Descriptive literature giving full
technical details of equipment
offered;
iii) Outline dimension drawing for each
major component, general
arrangement drawing showing
component layout and general
schematic diagrams;
iv) Type test certificates, where
available, and sample routine test
reports;
v) Detailed reference list of customers
already using equipment offered
during the last 5 years with
particular emphasis on units of
similar design and rating;
vi) Details of manufacturer's quality
assurance programme and ISO
9000 series or equivalent national
certification;
vii) Deviations from this specification.
Only deviations approved in writing
before award of contract shall be
accepted;
viii) Recommended spare parts and
consumable items for five years of
operation with prices and spare
parts catalogue with price list for
future requirements
ix) Transport / Shipping dimension and
weights, space required for
handling parts for maintenance
x) Write up on oil preservation system
xi) Write up on OLTC
xii) Quality Assurance Program
9.2 Submittals required after award for i) Programme for production and
Approval (A), Reference (R), and testing (A)
ii) Guaranteed Technical Particulars
subsequent distribution
Page 29 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

(A)
iii) General description of the
equipment and all components,
including brochures (R)
iv) Calculations to substantiate choice
of electrical, structural, mechanical
component size/ratings (A)
v) Detailed loading drawing to enable
the Purchaser to design and
construct foundations for the
transformer (R)
vi) Transport / shipping dimensions
with weights, wheel base details,
untanking height etc (R)
vii) Terminal arrangements and cable
box details (A)
viii) Flow diagram of cooling system
showing no of cooling banks (A)
ix) Drawings of major components like
Bushing , CT etc (A)
x) PT fixing arrangement
xi) List of makes of all fittings and
accessories (A)
xii) Statement drawing attention to all
exposed points in the equipment at
which contact with or in close
proximity to other metals and
stating clearly what protection is
employed to prevent corrosion at
each point (A)
xiii) Detailed installation and
commissioning instructions
xiv) Quality Plan.
9.3 Submittals required at the final hold i) Inspection and test reports carried
point prior to despatch out in manufacturer’s works (A)
ii) Test certificates of all bought out
items
iii) Operation and maintenance
Insrtrction as well as trouble
shooting charts/ manual
9.4 Drawing and document sizes Standard size paper A1, A2, A3, A4
Page 30 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

9.5 No of drgs /Documents required at As per Annexure A Scope of Supply

different stages
10.0 Inspection & testing
10.1 Inspection and Testing during Only type tested equipment shall be
manufacture acceptable
10.1.1 Tank and Conservator i) Check correct dimensions between
wheels demonstrate turning of wheels
through 90 deg and further
dimensional check.
ii) Check for physical properties of
materials for lifting lugs, jacking pads
etc. All load bearing welds, including
lifting lug welds shall be subjected to
required load tests.
iii) Leakage test of the conservator.
iv) Certification of all test results.
v) Oil leakage test .
vi) Vacuum and Pressure test on tank as
type test as per IS
10.1.2 Core i) Sample testing of core material for
checking specific loss, bend
properties, magnetization
characteristics and thickness.
ii) Check on the quality of varnish if used
on the stampings.
a) Measurement of thickness and
hardness of varnish on stampings.
b) Solvent resistance test to check
that varnish does not react in hot
oil.
c) Check over all quality of varnish by
sampling to ensure uniform hipping
colour, no bare spots. No ever
burnt varnish layer and no bubbles
on varnished surface.
iii) Check on the amount of burns.
iv) Bow check on stampings.
v) Check for the overlapping of
stampings. Corners of the sheet
are to be apart.
vi) Visual and dimensional check during
assembly stage.
Page 31 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

vii) Check on complete core for

measurements of iron-loss and check
for any hot spot by exciting the core
so as to induce the designed value of
flux density in the core.
viii) Check for inter laminar insulation
between core sectors before and after
pressing.
ix) Visual and dimensional checks for
straightness and roundness of core,
thickness of limbs and suitability of
clamps.
x) High voltage test (2 KV for one
minute) between core and clamps.
xi) Certification of all test results.
10.1.3 Insulating Materials i) Sample check for physical properties
of materials.
ii) Check for dielectric strength.
iii) Visual and dimensional checks.
iv) Check for the reaction of hot oil on
insulating materials.
v) Certification of all test results.
10.1.4 Windings i) Sample check on winding conductor
for mechanical properties and
electrical conductivity.
ii) Visual and dimensional check on
conductor for scratches, dept. mark
etc.
iii) Sample check on insulating paper for
PE value, Bursting strength, Electric
strength.
iv) Check for the reaction of hot oil on
insulating paper.
v) Check for the bending of the
insulating paper on conductor.
vi) Check and ensure that physical
condition of all materials taken for
winding is satisfactory and free of
dust.
vii) Check for absence of short circuit
between parallel strands.
viii) Check for Brazed joints wherever
applicable.
ix) Measurement of voltage ratio to be
carried out when core/ yoke is
Page 32 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

completely restocked and all

connections are ready.
x) Certification of all test results.
10.1.4.1 Checks before drying process i) Check conditions of insulation on the
conductor and between the windings.
ii) Check insulation distance between
high voltage connection distance
between high voltage connection
cables and earthed and other live
parts.
iii) Check insulation distance between
low voltage connection and earthed
and other parts.
iv) Insulation test of core earthing.
v) Check for proper cleanliness
vi) Check tightness of coils i.e. no free
movement.
vii) Certification of all test results.
10.1.4.2 Checks during drying process i) Measurement and recording of
temperature and drying time during
vacuum treatment.
ii) Check for completeness of drying.
iii) Certification of all test results.
10.1.5 Oil As per IS 335
10.1.6 Test on fittings and accessories As per manufacturer’s standard
10.2 Routine tests The sequence of routine testing shall be
as follows
i) Visual and dimension check for
completely assembled transformer
ii) Measurements of voltage ratio
iii) Measurements of winding resistance
at principal tap and two extreme taps.
iv) Vector Group and polarity test
v) Measurements of insulation
resistance*
vi) Separate sources voltage withstand
test.
vii) Measurement of iron losses and
exciting current at rated frequency
and 90%, 100% and 110% rated
voltage.
viii) Induced voltage withstand test.
ix) Load losses measurement at 50 % &
100 % of load.
Page 33 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

x) Impedance measurement of principal

tap (HV and LV) of the transformer.
x) Routine test of tanks
xi) Induced voltage withstand test (to be
repeated if type tests are conducted).
xii) Measurement of Iron loss (to be
repeated if type test are conducted).
xiii) Measurement of capacitance and
Tan Delta for transformer winding
and Tan Delta for transformer oil (for
all transformers).
xiv) Ratio of CT
xv) Oil leakage test on completely
assembled transformer
xvi) Magnetic balance test
xvii) Power frequency voltage withstand
test on all auxiliary circuits
xviii) Certification of all test results.
xix) Temperature Rise Test #
a) *Insulation resistance measurement

shall be carried out at 5kV for HV and 1kV
for LV. Value of IR should not be less than
1000 Mohms. Polarization Index (PI =
IR10min/IR1min) should not be less than 1.5
(If one minute IR value is above 5000
Mohms and it is not be possible to
obtain an accurate 10 minutes reading,
in such cases polarization index can be
disregarded as a measure of winding
condition.)
b) #Temperature rise test may be necessary

to be carried one unit/lot. Purchaser’s
engineer, will at its discretion, select
transformer for temp. rise test from any lot
offered for inspection at manufacturer's
works and witness the same for
comparison with ERDA/CPRI type test
results
10.3 Type Tests On one transformer of each rating and

type at CPRI/ERDA.
i) Impulse withstand test on all three
HV limbs of the transformers for
chopped wave as per standard
ii) Temperature rise test as per IS
iii) Dissolved gas analysis before and
Page 34 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

after Temperature Rise Test

iv) Air pressure test for sealed
transformers
v) Pressure and Vacuum test on tank
Note – Purchaser may choose to carry out

short circuit, impulse & temperature rise
test on one unit from a lot offered from
inspection at CPRI/ERDA
10.3.2 Notification to bidders The product offered must be of type tested
quality.
In case the product offered is never type
tested the same as per above list to be
conducted by bidder at his own cost at
CPRI/ERDA. The test report shall not be
more 5 years old
10.4 Special Tests On one transformer of each rating and
type
i) Dynamic & Thermal (3 sec) Short
Circuit Test as per IS 2026
ii) Measure of zero seq. impedance (Cl.
16.10 IS 2026 Part I).
iii) Measurement of acoustic noise level
(Cl. 16.12 of IS 2026 Part I).
iv) Measurement of harmonic level on no
load current.
v) Paint adhesion test.
vi) High voltage withstand test shall be
performed on the auxiliary equipment and
wiring after complete assembly. Cost of
such tests, if extra, shall be quoted
separately by the Bidder.
10.4.1 Note for special test In case the product offered is never tested
for short circuit (Dynamic & Thermal) ,
same to be conducted by bidder at his
own cost at CPRI/ERDA.
The test report shall not be more 5 years
old.
10.5 Customer Hold Point i) GTP & Drawings approval
ii) Core Inspection(See Cl No 10.1.2)
Sample to be tested at CPRI/ERDA
for each lot.
iii) Tank Pressure & vacuum Test
iv) Core & Coil Stage inspection of each
Page 35 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

lot to be offered for final testing.
11.0 Packing , Shipping, Handling and Storage
11.1 Packing
11.1.1 Packing protection Against corrosion, dampness, heavy
rains, breakage and vibration
11.1.2 Packing for accessories and spares Robust wooden non returnable packing
case with all the above protection
11.1.3 Packing details On each packing case details required
as follows
i) Individual serial number;
ii) Purchaser's name;
iii) PO number;
iv) Destination;
v) Supplier's name;
vi) Name and address of supplier's
agent
vii) Description and quantity
viii) Manufacturer’s name
ix) Country of origin
x) Case measurements
xi) Gross and net weights in
kilograms
xii) All necessary slinging and
stacking instructions.
11.2 Shipping The bidder shall ascertain at an early
date and definitely before the
commencement
of manufacture, any transport limitations
such as weights, dimensions, road
culverts,
overhead lines, free access etc. from the
manufacturing plant to the project site;
and
furnish to the Purchaser confirmation
that the proposed packages can be
safely
transported, as normal or oversize
packages, upto the plant site. Any
modifications required in the
infrastructure and cost thereof in this
connection shall be brought to the notice
Page 36 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

of the Purchaser
11.3 Handling and Storage As per manufacturer’s instruction
12.0 Deviations
Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with the tender by reference to the
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of
such a statement, requirements of the Specification shall be met without exception.
Page 37 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Annexure A Scope of supply

1.0 The scope of supply shall include following
1.1 Design, manufacture, assembly, testing at stages of manufacture as per Cl. 10 of this
specification, final testing at manufacturer works on completely assembled
transformer before dispatch, packing, transportation, delivery and submission of all
documentation for the Power transformer with all accessories as below
Sr. No Description Scope of

Supply
1.1.1 Fully assembled transformer with all major parts like conservator, YES
Radiators, CT box, Fittings and accessories as per Clause 5.0 of
this specification
1.1.2 Off circuit tap changer as per this specification YES
1.1.3 HV, LV, cable boxes YES
1.1.4 Support steel material for support of cable boxes from ground YES
1.1.5 Foundation Bolts for complete transformer YES
1.1.6 Support structure to support of cable from the transformer tank YES
1.1.7 Nickel Plated brass double compression glands for HV and LV, YES
LVN cables (in case of termination by cable)
1.1.8 Long barrel medium duty Aluminium lugs for power cables (in YES
case of termination by cable)
1.1.9 Nickel Plated brass double compression glands and tinned copper YES
lugs for control cable termination in CT box for vendor’s cables
1.1.10 Cables and wires for transformer accessories and internal wiring of YES
CT box
1.1.11 Touch up paint, minimum 2 litres YES
1.1.12 Extra Transformer oil 10 % in non returnable drums YES
1.1.13 One spare complete set of gaskets YES
1.1.14 Routine testing as per Cl. 10.2 of this specification YES
1.1.15 Type testing as per Cl. 10.3 of this specification YES
1.1.16 Special testing as per Cl. 10.4 of this specification YES
Page 38 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

1.1.17 Submission of Documentation as detailed below YES
2.0 Submission of documents

Submission of of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as
follows
Along with offer For Approval Final after Remarks
after award of approval
contract
Drawings 3 copies 4 copies 12 copies + 1 See Clause 9 for
(Typical drgs) soft copy in CD various
drawings
required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft See Clause 9 for
(Typical) copy in CD details
Catalogues 1 copy 12 copies + 1
soft copy in CD
Instruction 1 copy 12 copies + 1
manual for the soft copy in CD
transformer
Test Report 2 copies (Type 12 copies + 1 Type test and
test ans sample soft copy in CD sample routine
Routine Test ) test reports
3.0 Delivery schedule

3.1 Delivery period start date -
3.2 Delivery period end date -
3.3 Material dispatch clearance - after inspection by purchaser & written
dispatch clearances from purchaser
Page 39 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Annexure B Service Conditions
1.0.0 Delhi Atmospheric conditions

a) Average grade atmosphere : Heavily polluted, dry
Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
level
b) Ambient Air temperature Highest 50 deg C, Average 40 deg C
Design ambient temperature 50 deg C
c) Relative Humidity 90 % Max
d) Seismic Zone 4
e) Rainfall 750 mm concentrated in four months
Page 40 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Annexure – C Technical Particulars of transformer Oil

Transformer oil shall be new and conform to the following requirements:
1.0 Codes & standards
Latest revision of following codes & standards with all amendments –
Standard no Title
1.1 IS 335 New insulating oils
1.2 IS 1783 Drums for oils
2.0 Properties
The insulating material shall have following features
Sr No Item description Specification requirement

2.1 Appearance of oil Clear, transparent and free from
suspended matter or sediments
2.2 Density at 29.50C Max. 0.89 g/cm3
2.3 Kinematics viscosity Max. 16 cSt at 270C
11 cSt at 400C
2.4 Interfacial tension at 270C 0.04 N/m min
2.5 Flash point Pensky-Marten (Closed), 1400C
Min.
2.6 Pour Point, Max - 150C
2.7 Neutralization value
i) Total acidity, Max. 0.03 mg KOH/g
2.8 Corrosive sulfur Non-corrosive
2.9 Electric strength breakdown voltage Average value of six samples
i) New unfiltered oil. Min. 30 kV (rms) min.
ii) After filtration Min. 60 kV (rms)
2.10 Dielectric dissipation factor (tan δ). 0.002 at 900C, Max
0.0005 at 270C, Max
i) At 900C, Min 150 X 1012 ohm-cm
ii) At 270C, Min 3000 X 1012 ohm-cm
2.12 Oxidation stability
i) Neutralization value after oxidation, 0.15 mg KOH/g
Max.
ii) Total sludge, after oxidation, Max. 0.03 % by weight
iii) Max Tan delta 0.1 at 700C
2.13 Ageing characteristics after (open breaker method with copper
accelerated ageing catalyst)
i) Specific resistance (resistivity)
a) At 270C Min. 27 X 1012 ohm-cm
b) At 900C Min 2 X 1012 ohm-cm
ii) Dielectric dissipation factor (tan δ) 0.10 at 900C Max
Page 41 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Sr No Item description Specification requirement

iii) Total acidity, Max 0.05 mg KOH/g
iv) Total sludge, Max 0.05 % by weight
2.14 Presence of oxidation inhibitor no antioxidant additives
2.15 Water content, Max 40 ppm
2.16 List of clients To be enclosed
2.17 PCA content 3% max
2.18 PCB content Not detectable
Page 42 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Annexure D Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Seller)
Sr. Particulars Specified / Required Offered

1.0 General
1.1 Make
1.2 Type Oil immersed, core type, step
down located generally outdoor
but may be located indoor also
with poor ventilation. Bidder shall
confirm full rating available in
indoor location also
2.0 Nominal Continuous Rating, KVA
2.1 HV winding 400/630/1000/1600/2000kVA
2.2 LV winding 400/630/1000/1600/2000kVA
3.0 Rated voltage ( kV )
3.1 HV Winding 11 kv
3.2 LV Winding 433 volt
4.0 Rated current ( Amps ) 400/630/1000/1600/2000kVA
4.1 HV Winding
4.2 LV Winding
5.0 Connections
5.1 HV Winding Delta
5.2 LV Winding Star with neutral
5.3 Vector Group reference Dyn11
6.0 Impedance at principal tap rated

current and frequency, ohm @75
deg C
6.1 Impedance 4.5% / 4.5%/ 5.0/6.25/6.25 % with

IS tolerance
6.2 Reactance
6.3 Resistance
6.4 Impedance at lowest tap at rated
Page 43 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

6.5 Impedance at highest tap at rated

7.0 Resistance of the winding at 750 C
in ohm
7.1 a) HV
7.2 b) LV
8.0 Zero sequence impedance in ohm
8.1 a) HV
8.2 b) LV
9.0 Guaranteed maximum Total
losses at principal tap at 75°C, kW
9.1 50 % of Load as per Spec Cl 3.25
9.2 100% of Load as per Spec Cl 3.26
9.3 No Load Loss (Max)
9.4 Total I2R losses of windings @ 75
deg C, KW
9.5 Total stray loses @ 75 deg C, KW
9.6 Total Load losses (Max.), KW
9.7 No load loss at maximum
permissible voltage and frequency
(approx.),kW
10.0 Temperature rise over reference
ambient of 40 0C
10.1 Top oil by thermometer 0 C 40 0C
10.2 Winding by resistance 0 C 45 0C
11.0 Efficiency
11.1 Efficiency at 750C and unity power
factor %
11.1.1 at 110% load
11.1.2 at 100% load
11.1.3 at 80% load Not Less than 99.5%
11.1.4 at 60% load
11.1.5 at 40% load
11.1.6 at 20% load
Page 44 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

11.2 Efficiency at 750C and 0.8 power

factor lag %
11.2.1 at 110% load
11.2.2 at 100% load
11.2.3 at 80% load
11.2.4 at 60% load
11.2.5 at 40% load
11.2.6 at 20% load
11.3 Maximum efficiency at 750C %
11.4 Load and power factor at which it
occurs
12.0 Regulation , (%)
12.1 Regulation at full load at 750 C
12.1.1 at unity power factor
12.1.2 at 0.8 power factor lagging
12.2 Regulation at 110% load at 750 C
12.2.1 at unity power factor
12.2.2 at 0.8 power factor lagging
13.0 Tappings
13.1 Type
13.2 Capacity
13.3 Range-steps x % variation
13.4 Taps provided on HV winding
(Yes / No)
13.5 Rated current of rotary switch
14.0 Cooling system
14.1 Type of cooling ONAN
14.2 No. of cooling unit Groups
14.3 Capacity of cooling units
14.4 Mounting of radiators
14.5 Number of Radiators
14.8 Total radiating surface , sqmm
14.9 Thickness of radiator tubes, mm Minimum 1.2 mm
15.0 Details of Tank
Page 45 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

15.1 Material Robust mild steel plate without

pitting and low carbon content
15.2 Thickness of sides mm
15.3 Thickness of bottom mm
15.4 Thickness of cover mm
15.5 Confirmation of Tank designed
and tested for Vacuum, Pressure (
Ref: CBIP Manual ) , (Yes/ No)
15.5.1 Vacuum mm of Hg. / As per IS
2
(kN/m )
15.5.2 Pressure mm of Hg.
15.6 Is the tank lid sloped? Yes
15.7 Inspection cover provided (Yes / as per spec
No)
15.8 Location of inspection cover (Yes
/ No)
15.9 Min. dimensions of inspection
cover ( provide list of all
inspection cover with dimension),
mm x mm
16.0 Core
16.1 Type: Core
16.2 Core material grade Premium grade minimum M3 or
better
16.3 Core lamination thickness in mm
16.4 Insulation of lamination With insulation coating on both
sides
16.5 Design flux density at rated
condition at principal tap, Tesla
16.6 Maximum flux density at 12.5 % 1.9 Tesla Max allowed
overexcitation /overfluxing, Tesla
16.7 Equivalent cross section area
mm²
16.8 Guaranteed No Load current at
Page 46 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

100% rated voltage , Amps

16.8.1 HV
16.8.2 LV
16.9 Guaranteed No Load current At
110% rated voltage, Amps
16.9.1 HV
16.9.2 LV
17.0 Type of Winding
17.1 HV
17.2 LV
17.3 Conductor material Electrolytic Copper
17.4 Current density (HV/LV) Maximum allowed 3.0 A per sq
mm.at all taps
17.5 Gauge/area of cross section of
conductor
17.5.1 a) HV
17.5.1 b) LV
17.6 Insulating material
17.6.1 HV Turn
17.6.2 LV Turn
17.6.3 LV Core
17.6.4 HV - LV
17.7 Insulating material thickness, mm
17.7.1 HV Turn
17.7.2 LV Turn -
17.7.3 LV to Core
17.7.4 HV to LV
18.0 Minimum design clearance, mm
18.1 HV to earth in Air
18.2 HV to earth in oil
18.3 LV to earth in Air
18.4 LV to earth in oil
18.5 Between HV & LV in Air
18.6 Between HV & LV in oil
Page 47 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

18.7 Top winding and yoke

18.8 Bottom winding and yoke
19.0 Insulating oil
19.1 Quantity of oil Ltrs
19.1.1 In the Transformer tank
19.1.2 In each radiator
19.1.4 Total quantity
19.2 10% excess oil furnished? Yes
19.3 Type of Oil As per cl 4.2.7
20.0 Bushing / Support Insulator
20.1 Make -
20.2 Type
20.2.1 HV side As per Cl. 4.2.8.1 of the spec
20.2.2 LV side As per Cl. 4.2.8.2 of the spec
20.4 Voltage class, kV
20.4.1 HV side Bushing/ Support 12 kV
Insulator
20.4.2 LV side line and neutral bushing/ 1.1 kV
Support Insulator
20.5 Creepage factor for all bushing / 31 mm / kV
Support Insulator mm/KV
20.6 Rated thermal short time current
20.6.1 HV bushing 25 times rated current for 2 secs.
20.6.2 LV line and neutral bushing 25 times rated current for 2 secs.
20.7 Weight, Kg
20.7.1 HV bushing
20.8 Free space required for bushing
removal, mm
20.8.1 HV bushing
21.0 Terminal connections
21.1 HV Cable size as per Cl no 3.28
Page 48 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

21.2 LV Cable size as per Cl no 3.30

21.3 LV Neutral Cable size as per Cl no 3.30
22.0 HV cable box Required

22.1 Suitable for cable type,size Cable size as per Cl no 3.28
22.2 Termination height 750 mm min.
22.3 Gland plate dimension, mm x mm
22.4 Gland plate Material MS
22.5 Gland plate thickness 3 mm min.
22.6 Phase to phase clearance inside 180 mm
box,mm
22.7 Phase to earth inside box,mm 120 mm
23.0 LV Cable box Required
23.1 Suitable for cable type , size Cable size as per Cl no 3.30
23.2 Termination height 1000 mm, min.
23.3 Gland plate dimension, mmxmm
23.5 Gland plate thickness 5 mm min.
23.6 Phase to phase 25 mm
23.7 Phase to earth 25 mm
24.0 L.V neutral Cable termination Separate cable box not required
arrangement (LV-N to be provided in LV cable
box.)
25.0 Current Transformer on LV
phases
25.1 Type
25.2 Make
25.4 CT Ratio
25.5 Burden, VA
25.6 Class of Accuracy
25.7 CT terminal box size
26.0 Pressure release device
26.1 Minimum pressure the device is
Page 49 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

set to rupture
26.1.1 For Main Tank
27.0 Fittings Accessories Each
Transformer furnished as per
Clause No 5. (Bidder shall attach
separate sheet giving details,
make and bill of materials)
28.0 Painting: as per clause for the
transformer, cable boxes, radiator,
Marshalling box (Yes/No)
29.0 Max over all transformer As per Clause 3.32
dimensions
29.1 Length, mm
29.2 Breadth, mm
29.3 Height, mm
30.0 Transformer Tank Dimensions
30.1 Length, mm
30.2 Breadth, mm
30.3 Height, mm
31.0 Weight data
31.1 Core, kG
31.2 Frame parts, kG
31.3 Core and frame, kG
31.4 Total Winding, kG
31.5 Core , Frame, Winding, kG
31.6 Tank, kG
31.7 Tank lid, kG
31.8 Empty conservator tank, kG
31.9 Each radiator empty, kG
31.10 Total weight of all radiators empty,
kG
31.11 Weight of oil in Tank, kG
31.12 Weight of oil in Conservator, kG
41.13 Weight of oil in each Radiators,
Page 50 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

kG
31.14 Total weight of oil in Radiators, kG
31.16 Total Transport weight of the
transformer, kG
32.0 Volume Data
32.1 Volume of oil in main tank, litres
and lowest levels of main
conservator, litres
32.4 Volume of oil in each radiator,
litres
32.5 Total volume of oil in radiators,
litres
32.7 Transformer total oil volume, litres
33.0 Shipping Data
33.1 Weight of heaviest package, kG
33.2 Dimensions of the largest
package (L x B x H) mm
34.3 Tests
34.1 All in process tests confirmed as
per Cl. (Yes/ No)
34.2 All Type Tests confirmed as per
Cl. (Yes / No)
34.3 All Routine Tests confirmed as
per Cl. (Yes/ No)
34.4 All Special Tests confirmed as per
Cl. (Yes/ No)
Page 51 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Annexure E Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Transformer Oil
Bidder to submit hard copy duly filled & signed along with techno commercial offer.
Bidder to submit separate GTP for each type of insulating oil –
Sr No Item description Specification requirement Data by Vendor

1 Manufacturer Name
1.1 Address
1.2 Contact person
1.3 Contact telephone no
2 Appearance of oil Clear, transparent and free Yes / No
from suspended matter or
sediments
3 Density at 29.50C Max. 0.89 g/cm3
4 Kinematics viscosity Max. 16 cSt at 270C
11 cSt at 400C
5 Interfacial tension at 270C 0.04 N/m min
6 Flash point Pensky-Marten 1400C
(Closed), Min.
7 Pour Point, Max - 150C
8 Neutralization value
i) Total acidity, Max. 0.03 mg KOH/g
9 Corrosive sulfur Non-corrosive
10 Electric strength breakdown Average value of six samples
voltage
i) New unfiltered oil. Min. 30 kV (rms) min.
ii) After filtration Min. 60 kV (rms)
11 Dielectric dissipation factor 0.002 at 900C, Max
(tan δ). 0.0005 at 270C, Max
12 Specific resistance (resistivity)
i) At 900C, Min 150 X 1012 ohm-cm
ii) At 270C, Min 3000 X 1012 ohm-cm
13 Oxidation stability
i) Neutralization value after 0.15 mg KOH/g
oxidation, Max.
ii) Total sludge, after 0.03 % by weight
oxidation, Max.
iii) Max Tan delta 0.1 at 700C
14 Ageing characteristics after (open breaker method with
accelerated ageing copper catalyst)
i) Specific resistance
(resistivity)
a) At 270C Min. 27 X 1012 ohm-cm
b) At 900C Min 2 X 1012 ohm-cm
ii) Dielectric dissipation factor 0.10 at 900C Max
(tan δ)
iii) Total acidity, Max 0.05 mg KOH/g
Page 52 of 53
SP-TRDU-01-R6

Sr No Item description Specification requirement Data by Vendor

iv) Total sludge, Max 0.05 % by weight
15 Presence of oxidation no antioxidant additives
inhibitor
16 Water content, Max 40 ppm
17 List of clients To be enclosed
18 PCA content 3% max
19 PCB content Not detectable
Annexure – F Recommended Spares (Data by Supplier)
List of recommended spares as following –
Sr No Description of spare part Unit Quantity
1 No
2 No
3 No
4 No
5 No
6 No
Page 53 of 53
SP-ACDB-113-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 415V AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
INDEX
1.0 SCOPE…..…………………………………………………………………….…………….................3
2.0 CODES & STANDARD………………………………………………………………….……………..3
3.0 SERVICE CONDITION………………………………………………………………………………...3
4.0 CONFIGURATION…………………………..…..……………………………………………………..3
5.0 CONSTRUCTION………………………………..………………………………………...................5
6.0 BUSBAR………………………………….……………………………………………………………..5
7.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER…………………………………………………………………...….…6
8.0 TERMINALS AND WIRING………….………………………………………………....……………..6
9.0 METERS, INDICATIONS AND PUSH BUTTONS…………………………………….………...….6
10.0 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS…………………………………………………………………..……7
11.0 FINISHING…………………………………………………………………………………………..…..7
12.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS………………………………………………………….....8
13.0 INSPECTION & TESTING………………………………………………………………………….....8
14.0 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING, & SITE SUPPORT…………………………………….....….8
15.0 DEVIATIONS………………………………………………………………………………..…………..9
16.0 DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION…………………………………………………………………………9
17.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS………………………………………………...…..10
Page 2 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly and testing at
manufacturer's works and supply of 415V AC Distribution board (ACDB) along with all
hardware and accessories required for installation and operation.
2.0 STANDARDS & CODES
2.1 IS:8623 Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear & control
gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC/1200 V DC.
2.2 IS 60947-1 Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 2 :
Circuit Breakers
2.3 IS:10118 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance
switchgear and controlgear
2.4 IS:2705 Current transformers
2.5 IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
2.6 IS:1248 Electrical Indicating instruments
2.7 IS:4794 Switches and push buttons
2.8 IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
2.9 IS:5082 Wrought Aluminium and aluminium alloys for electrical purposes
2.10 IS 3043 Code of practice for Earthing
3.1 System 3 Phase 4 Wire with neutral solidly grounded

Configuration
3.2 415 volt +/- 10%
Supply Voltage
3.3 Supply frequency 50Hz
3.4 Location Indoor
3.5 Average grade Heavily polluted, Dry
atmosphere
3.6 Maximum altitude 1000M
above sea level
3.7 Ambient air Highest 50Deg C
temperature Average 40Deg C
3.8 Minimum ambient 0 Deg C
air temperature
4.0 CONFIGURATION
Two incomers, each having motorized 630A MCCB. MCCBs

4.1 shall have microprocessor based over current and earth fault
Incomers
release. Auto changeover shall be provided between the two
incomers alongwith necessary electrical interlocks in event of
Page 3 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
failure of either of the two
The number of outgoing feeders from AC boards shall be such

4.2 Outgoing feeders that each substation equipment is fed by separate feeder (refer
below).
Type of
Application No of Poles Rating (A) Quantity
Switchgear
Transformer Oil
MCCB 4 100 2
filtration
Welding(Outdoor) MCB 2 63 4
Power Socket( Indoor) MCB 4 32 5
Outdoor Lighting MCB 4 32 2
Indoor Lighting MCB 4 32 2
Battery Charger MCB 4 32 2
BMK MCB 4 32 8
Marshalling Box(PTR) MCB 4 32 3
AC Supply MCB 4 32 2
UPS MCB 2 16 1
11kV Switchgear MCB 2 16 3
CRP MCB 2 16 2
RTU/SCADA MCB 2 16 2
Fire Fighting MCB 2 16 2
EPAX MCB 2 16 1
Power Socket MCB 2 16 4
Page 4 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
5.0 CONSTRUCTION
5.1 General construction Board shall be of modular construction with provision for complete
compartmentalization of all feeders. It shall be free-standing type
comprising dust-tight and vermin-proof sheet steel cabinets
suitable for indoor installation with IP-54 degree of protection.
Necessary busbar support insulators, cable glands, cable supports
and terminal blocks etc. The board shall preferably be of single
front type.
5.2 Material The Board shall be made out of at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled
steel sheet, suitably reinforced to provide flat level surfaces. No
welds, rivets, hinges or bolts shall be visible from outside.
5.3 Equipment Mounting All switches provided on the distribution board shall be on front
side of the cabinets, operable from outside. All instruments and
control devices shall be mounted on the front of cabinets and fully
wired to the terminal blocks.
5.4 Busbar housing The busbars shall be housed in totally enclosed busbar chambers.
Incoming connections from the busbar to various feeders shall be
designed so as not to disturb cable connections. Busbar
arrangement should ensure safety of the operation/maintenance
personnel and facilitate working on any outgoing module without
the need for switching off in-feed to the adjacent modules, as far
as possible
5.5 Cable alleys A cable alley preferably 230 mm wide shall be provided in each
vertical section for taking cables into the compartments. Cable
alleys shall be provided on sides of busbar chamber
5.6 Cable glands Compression type cable glands shall be provided to hold the
cables to avoid any pressure or tension on the terminal block
connections.
5.7 Gland Plate Gland plate shall be 3.0mm thick.
5.8 Doors The doors of cabinets shall be lockable and shall be fitted with
double lipped gaskets.
6.0 BUSBAR
6.1 Material Busbar shall be of tinned electrolytic copper or aluminium.

6.2 Size Busbar shall be of tinned electrolytic copper or aluminium.
6.3 Supports The busbar shall be supported by means of durable
non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and non-tracking polyester
fibreglass material or porcelain. Supports shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum short circuit stresses
6.4 Sleeves and shrouds Busbars shall be encased in heat-shrinkable sleeves of
insulating material which shall be suitable for the operating
temperature of busbars during normal service. The busbar joints
shall be provided with removable thermosetting plastic shrouds.
Page 5 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
7.1 Type Cast-resin type, Class-E insulation, rated for 120% current
continuous
7.2 Provision Shall be provided in incomer for metering.
Separate Neutral CT hall be connected in the neutral for
detecting earth fault for both the incomer.
7.3 Secondary current 5A
7.4 Metering CT Class 1.0
7.5 Burden Based on requirement
8.0 TERMINALS AND WIRING

8.1 Secondary Wiring
8.1.1 Grade and type 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, FRLS type stranded flexible
copper wire.
8.1.2 Ferruling Each wire shall bear an identifying ferrule or tag at each end or
connecting point.
8.1.3 Size 2.5sqmm copper (miminum)
8.2 Terminals Terminals of appropriate size shall be provided inside each
cabinet for incoming and outgoing cables.
8.2.1 Grade 1100 V grade, moulded piece terminals complete with insulated
barriers, washers, nuts and lock nuts.
8.2.2 Power Terminals type Stud type, nut driver operated
8.2.3 Control terminals type Stud type, screw driver operated suitable for minimum 6sqmm
wire.
8.2.4 Spare terminals 20% spare terminals should be provided in each terminal block.
8.2.5 Accessibility Placement of terminals shall enable proper cable termination.
Terminals shall be readily accessible for inspection and
maintenance.
8.2.6 Marking The terminals shall be serially numbered to facilitate installation
and maintenance.
9.0 METERS, INDICATIONS AND PUSH BUTTONS

9.1 Meters
9.1.1 Multifunction Meter For incomer feeders. Meter should have facility to store peak
load current in memory.
9.1.2 Type Digital with inbuilt phase selector
9.1.3 Accuracy Class 1.0
9.1.4 Auxiliary supply 240VAC with 10 % tolerance
Page 6 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
9.2 Indicating lamps Indicating lamps shall be of low wattage cluster LED type.
9.2.1 Incomer/ Outgoing On Red
9.2.2 Incomer/ Outgoing Off Green
9.2.3 Incomer/ Outgoing Amber
Trip
9.3 Push buttons For manual operation of incomer
10.0 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS

10.1 Panel nameplate Panel shall have a nameplate clearly indicating the following:
a. Panel Serial No.-
b. Customer Name - BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
c. PO No. & date -
d. Type of Panel -
e. Current rating -
f. Guarantee period -
10.2 Feeder nameplate Large and bold name plate carrying the feeder identification shall
be provided on the top of each module.
Blank insert type name plates shall be provided on each outgoing
feeder.
10.3 Equipment a. All equipment mounted on front side as well as equipment
nameplate mounted inside the panels shall be provided with individual
name plates with equipment designation engraved.
b. All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear
with individual name plates engraved with tag numbers
corresponding to the one shown in the panel internal wiring to
facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
10.4 Danger plate Panel shall have a danger plate of anodized Aluminium clearly
indicating the danger logo and voltage details.
10.5 Non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Nameplates shall be black
Material
with white engraving lettering. Stickers are not allowed.
10.6 All nameplates/rating plates shall be riveted to the panels at all
Fixing
four corners. Bolting/screwing is not acceptable.
Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its function.
Similar inscription shall also be provided on each device whose
10.7 function is not otherwise identified. If any switch or device does
Markings
not bear this inscription separate nameplate giving its function
shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear inscription
for each position indicating e.g. Trip-Neutral close, ON-OFF etc.
11.0 FINISHING
11.1 Primer Two coats
11.2 Finish Powder Coating
11.3 Colour shade RAL 7032 (Siemens Grey)
Page 7 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
11.4 Paint thickness 70 microns (minimum)
12.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS

12.1 Switch Siemens / L&T (Salzer)
12.2 HRC Fuse Links GE/ Siemens/ L&T
12.3 Meters Rishabh/Schneider/AE
12.4 AC Contractors L&T/Siemens/Telemechanique/GE/ABB
12.5 Terminals Connectwell/Elmex/Wago/Phoenix
12.6 Push buttons / L&T/Siemens/Vaishno/Schneider
Actuator
12.7 MCCB L&T/Siemens/ ABB/GE/Schneider
12.8 MCB Datar/Legrand/Hager/Schneider/ABB
12.9 Indicating lamps Vaishno/Binay/Teknic/Siemens/Mimic/C&S
13.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING

13.1 Type test Equipment should be of type tested quality only, type test
certificate to be submitted along with offer. If the manufacturer’s
lab is accredited by govt. / authorized body then it shall be
acceptable for type testing.
13.2 Acceptance & As per relevant Indian standard
Routine tests
14.0 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING & SITE SUPPORT
The packing shall be fit to withstand rough handling during transit

14.1 Packing Protection and storage at destination. The test set should be properly
protected against corrosion, dampness & damage.
Packing for Robust non-returnable packing case with all the above protection
14.2 accessories and & identification Label. The bidder should get the packing list
spares approved before dispatching the material.
14.3 Packing
On each packing case, following details are required:
Identification Label
Page 8 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
14.3.5 Destination
14.3.8 Description
14.3.12 Gross and net weight
14.4 The seller shall be responsible for all transit damage due to
Shipping
improper packing.
14.5 Handling and Manufacturer instruction shall be followed.

Storage
14.6 Detail handling & storage instruction sheet / manual to be furnished before
commencement of supply.
15.0 DEVIATIONS
15.1 Deviation Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with
the tender by reference to the Specification clause/GTP/Drawing
and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with
this specification. No deviation will be acceptable post order.
16.0 DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION

The bidder has to submit the following documents along with bid:-
16.1 List of major customers using the offered product from last 5 years specifying details like
customer name, PO no. and PO date, year of supply and supply quantity
16.2 Completely filled compliance GTP sheet as per clause 16.0 of this specification
16.3 Complete product catalogue, Manual and calibration certificate of the equipment
16.4 Type test reports
16.5 Deviation Sheet (if any)
Page 9 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
17.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
S. No. Description Specification requirement Bidder’s Data

1 GENERAL FEATURES
1.1 Make
1.2 Type
1.4 Rated Operational voltage 415V AC ± 10%
1.5 Rated Nominal Current 630A
1.6 Rated frequency 50 Hz (+3%, -5%)
1.7 Rated Insulation voltage 1100V
Rated Impulse withstand 8kV
1.8
voltage
Service supply for heating, 240VAC±10%,
1.9 lighting and power sockets
1.10 Mounting Floor (Free standing)
1.11 Connections Cable entry – Bottom
1.12 Configuration Single front
1.13 Enclosure thickness
1.13.1 Load Bearing Member >=2.5mm
1.13.2 Doors and Covers >=2 mm
1.14 Enclosure Material CRCA Sheet
1.15 Enclosure degree of protection IP 54
Mechanical safety interlocks As specified in technical
1.16 specification
1.17 Power Cable Termination Shall be as per the specification
1.18 Paint shade RAL 7032 (Siemens Grey)
Typical vertical section (Overall Required
1.19 dimension (mm) and weight (
Kg))
1.19.1 Incomer
1.19.2 Outgoings
1.20 Dimensions of the ACDB Panel L (mm) X D (mm) X H (mm)
1.21 Weights of the ACDB Panel (in kg.)
1.22 Marking on the panel As per the specification
2 INCOMER MCCB
2.1 Make & Model of MCCB Required
2.2 Catalogue of MCCB Required
Page 10 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
2.3 Continuous Current at 40 deg

C/ 50 deg C 630A
Rated ultimate breaking
2.4
capacity at rated voltage 50kA
Rated service breaking capacity Ics = 100% Icu at rated voltage
2.5
Ics
2.6 Rated making current Icm = 220% Icu
2.7 Utilization Category A
2.8 50 -100% (Inverse time
Overload setting characteristics)
2.9 200-1000% (Instantaneous
Overcurrent setting characteristics)
2.10
Earthfault setting 20-100% (Instantaneous)
2.11 Dimension(HxWxD) Required
2.12 Weight Required
4 BUS AND BUS TAPS
4.1 Make
Material and grade of buses High conductivity electrolytic
4.2 and joints grade aluminium
Continuous Current (at site 630A
4.4 condition, 50°C ambient) within
cubicle
4.5 Cross sectional Area
4.6 DC resistance ohm/m/ph
4.7 Skin-effect ratio
4.8 Reactance ohm/m/ph
4.9 Losses-middle phase w/m/ph
Minimum clearance of bus bar Required
4.10
and joints
4.10.1 Phase to phase (mm)
4.10.2 Phase to earth (mm)
Bus bar insulation i. Heat shrinkable sleeves rated
for maximum operating
4.11
voltage
ii. Cast resin shrouds for joint
4.12 Bus joints Silver
4.13 Bus bar support insulator Required
4.13.1 Spacing (mm)
4.13.2 Make
4.13.3 Type
4.13.4 Reference standard
Page 11 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
4.13.5 Voltage class (kV)

Minimum creepage distance
4.13.6
(mm)
4.13.7 Cantilever strength (Kg/sq.cm.)
5 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
5.1 Make
5.2 Type Resin Cast
5.4 CT ratios
5.5 Class of Insulation Class-E
5.6 Protection class 5P20
5.7 Metering class 5
VA burden for Relaying CT- Based on requirement.
5.8 Incomer
AMMETERS/MULTIFUNCTION
6.0
METERS AND VOLTMETERS
6.1 Make & Model no.
6.2 Type Digital
6.3 Accuracy class 1
7.0 CONTROL & INDICATIONS
7.1 Push button
7.1.1 Make and model no.

Type Flush mounted type with touch
7.1.2
proof terminals
7.2 LEDs
7.2.1 Make & Model no.
Type Flush mounted type with touch
7.2.2
proof terminals
8.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS
8.1 Make & Model no.
Spare terminals Equal to 20% of active
8.2
terminals in each TB
8.3 Power terminals Stud type, nut driver operated
Control terminals Stud type, screw driver operated
8.4 suitable for minimum 6sqmm
wire.
9.0 TESTS
Confirmation of routine tests to Yes/No
9.1
be performed as per IS 60947
IP 55 test shall be carried out Yes/No
9.2
during inspection
Confirmation of Type tests to be Type test report no./date
9.3
performed (or report submitted)
Page 12 of 13
SP-ACDB-113-R0
as per IS 60947
Confirmation of Acceptance Yes/No
9.4 tests to be performed during
inspection as per IS 60947
Temperature rise test to be Yes/No
9.5 carried out at NABL accredited
lab.
Deviation sheet against each To be submitted
10.0
clause of the specification
Page 13 of 13
SP-DCDB-129-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DCDB
INDEX
1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................. 3
2 STANDARDS AND CODES.............................................................................. 3
3 SERVICE CONDITION ...................................................................................... 3
4 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................. 4
5 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ 5
6 BUSBARS ......................................................................................................... 6
7 TERMINALS AND WIRING............................................................................... 6
8 METERS, INDICATIONS, PUSH BUTTONS & HEATERS ............................... 7
9 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS ......................................................................... 7
10 FINISH ............................................................................................................... 8
11 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS ........................................................ 8
12 INSPECTION AND TESTING ........................................................................... 9
13 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING AND SITE SUPPORT .............................. 9
14 DEVIATIONS................................................................................................... 10
15 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION ............................................................................ 10
16 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS ............................................... 11
Page 2 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
1 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly and testing at
Manufacturer’s works and supply of 220 VDC/50 VDC Distribution board (DCDB) along with
all hardware and accessories required for installation and operation.
2 STANDARDS AND CODES
Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear & control gear

2.1 IS:8623
for voltages up to and including 1000V AC/1200 V DC.
Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 2
2.2 IS 60947-1
:Circuit Breakers
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance
2.3 IS:10118
switchgear and control gear
2.4 IS:2705 Current transformers
2.5 IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
2.6 IS:1248 Electrical Indicating instruments
2.7 IS:4794 Switches and push buttons
2.8 IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
2.9 IS:5082 Wrought Aluminium and aluminium alloys for electrical purposes
2.10 IS 3043 Code of practice for Earthing
3 SERVICE CONDITION
3.1 Location Indoor
3.2 Average grade atmosphere Heavily polluted, Dry
3.4 Ambient air temperature Highest 50Deg C Average 40Deg C
3.5 Minimum ambient air temperature 0 Deg C
3.8 Seismic Zone IV
Page 3 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
4 CONSTRUCTION
It shall be free-standing type comprising dust-tight and

vermin-proof sheet steel cabinets suitable for indoor
General construction installation with IP-54 degree of protection. Necessary
4.1 busbar support insulators, cable glands, cable supports
and terminal blocks etc. The board shall preferably be of
single front type.
The Board shall be made cold rolled steel sheet having
Thickness of 2.5 mm of load bearing member and 2 mm
Material for Doors and covers , suitably reinforced to provide flat
4.2
level surfaces. No welds, rivets, hinges or bolts shall be
visible from outside.
All switches provided on the distribution board shall be
Equipment Mounting on front side of the cabinets, operable from outside. All
4.3 instruments and control devices shall be mounted on the
front of cabinets and fully wired to the terminal blocks.
The busbars shall be housed in totally enclosed busbar
chambers. Incoming connections from the busbar to
various feeders shall be designed so as not to disturb
Busbar housing cable connections. Busbar arrangement should ensure
4.4 safety of the operation/maintenance personnel and
facilitate working on any outgoing module without the
need for switching off in-feed to the adjacent modules,
as far as possible
A cable alley preferably 230 mm wide shall be provided
Cable alleys in each vertical section for taking cables into the
4.5 compartments. Cable alleys shall be provided on sides
of busbar chamber.
Cable entry Cable entry should be from bottom
4.6
Compression type cable glands shall be provided to hold
Cable glands the cables to avoid any pressure or tension on the
4.7
terminal block connections.
Gland Plate Gland plate shall be 3.0mm thick.
4.8
Doors The doors of cabinets shall be lockable and shall be
4.9 fitted with double lipped gaskets.
All doors, removable covers and panels shall be
Gasket gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets. Gaskets
4.10
shall be embedded through machine only.
Ventilating louvers shall have screens and filters. The
Ventilating louvers screens shall be made of either brass or GI wires
4.11
mesh.
The panels shall be fixed on the embedded foundation
Foundation channels with intervening layers anti vibration strips
4.12
made of shock absorbing materials.
Base Frame Base frames shall be supplied along with panels.
4.13 100mm channel painted black.
Page 4 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
Mounting Equipment on front of panel shall be flush mounted.

4.14 No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
The center lines of switches, push buttons and
Working level indicating lamps shall not be less than 750mm and
4.15
higher than 1600mm from panel base.
Dimension 500(L)X500(D)X1800(H) mm3
4.16
5 CONFIGURATION
Incomers One incomers having Double Pole DC MCB with Aux

5.1 Switch.
Outgoing feeders All outgoing feeders shall have MCB. Number of outgoing
5.2 feeders shall be as per table attached
No of
Application Rating of DP MCB(In Amp) Quantity
Poles
Incomer 2 100 1
Emergency Lighting DB 2 32 1
Fire Alarm System 2 32 1
SCADA 2 32 2
CRP 2 32 4
11 kV Switchgear 2 32 4
Testing Purpose 2 32 1
NIFPS 2 32 4
Spare 1 2 100 1
Spare 2 2 32 8
Page 5 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
6 BUSBARS
Material Busbar shall be of tinned electrolytic copper or

6.1 Aluminium
Suitable for carrying the rated continuous current of 100
Size A and short circuit current of 15 kA. Busbars shall be
6.2 continuous throughout the panel. Temperature rise
should be limited to 40 degrees over ambient.
The busbar shall be supported by means of durable
non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and non-tracking
Supports polyester fiberglass material or porcelain. Supports shall
6.3
be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit
stresses.
Busbars shall be encased in heat-shrinkable sleeves of
insulating material which shall be suitable for the
Sleeves and shrouds operating temperature of busbars during normal service.
6.4
The busbar joints shall be provided with removable
thermosetting plastic shrouds.
7 TERMINALS AND WIRING
Wiring
7.1
Grade and type 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, FRLS type stranded
7.1.1 flexible copper wire.
Ferruling Each wire shall bear an identifying ferrule or tag at each
7.1.2 end or connecting point.
Spare 20% Spare Wiring
7.1.3
Terminals Terminals of appropriate size shall be provided inside
7.2 each cabinet for incoming and outgoing cables.
Grade 1100 V grade, moulded piece terminals complete with
7.2.1 insulated barriers, washers, nuts and lock nuts.
Power Terminals type Stud type, nut driver operated
7.2.2
Control terminals type Stud type, screw driver operated
7.2.3
20% spare terminals should be provided in each
7.2.4 Spare terminals
terminal block.
Placement of terminals shall enable proper cable
7.2.5 Accessibility termination. Terminals shall be readily accessible for
inspection and maintenance.
The terminals shall be serially numbered to facilitate
7.2.6 Marking
installation and maintenance.
Page 6 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
8 METERS, INDICATIONS, PUSH BUTTONS & HEATERS
8.1 Meters
DC Moving coil ammeter of size 96 sq.mm. with
Ammeter external shunt. Rating of Ammeter shall be 0-100A
8.1.1
DC.
DC Moving coil voltmeter of size 96.sq.mm to read the
Voltmeter DC Bus voltage. Rating of Voltmeter shall be 0-
8.1.2
300VDC
Type Digital type, connected through instruments transformers
8.1.3 of suitable rating.
Indicating lamps shall be of low wattage cluster LED
8.2 Indicating lamps
type.
8.2.1 Incomer/ Outgoing On Red
8.2.2 Incomer/ Outgoing Off Green
8.2.3 Incomer/ Outgoing Trip Amber
8.3 Push buttons For manual operation of incomer MCB

Cubicle space heater having rating of 100W. Thermostat
8.4 Heaters for space heater shall be provided with temperature
range 0-900
Cubicle lamp shall be provided in DCDB having rating of
8.5 CFL
11 W.
9 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS
Panel shall have a nameplate clearly indicating the

following:
a. Panel Serial No.-
b. Customer Name - BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
9.1 Panel nameplate
c. PO No. & date -
d. Type of Panel -
e. Current rating -
f. Guarantee period -
Large and bold name plate carrying the feeder
9.2 Feeder nameplate
identification shall be provided on the top.
a. All equipment mounted on front side as well as
equipment mounted inside the panels shall be
provided with individual name plates with equipment
9.3 Equipment nameplate designation engraved.
b. All front mounted equipment shall be also
provided at the rear with individual name plates
engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the
Page 7 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
one shown in the panel internal wiring to facilitate

easy tracing of the wiring.
Non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Nameplates
9.4 Material shall be black with white engraving lettering. Stickers
are not allowed.
All nameplates/rating plates shall be riveted to the
9.5 Fixing panels at all four corners. Bolting/screwing is not
acceptable.
Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its
function. Similar inscription shall also be provided on
each device whose function is not other wise
identified. If any switch or device does not bear this
9.6 Markings
inscription separate nameplate giving its function
shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear
inscription for each position indicating e.g. Trip-
Neutral close, ON-OFF etc.
10 FINISH
Primer Two coats

10.1
Paint Two finishing coats of epoxy based paint of Shade RAL
10.2 7032 with glossy finish.
Paint thickness 50 microns (minimum)
10.3
11 APPROVED MAKES OF COMPONENTS
11.3 Meters Rishabh/Schneider/AE
11.5 Push buttons / Actuator L&T/Siemens/Vaishno/Schneider
11.6 MCB Datar/Legrand/Hager/Schneider/ABB
11.7 Indicating lamps Vaishno/Binay/Teknic/Siemens/Mimic/C&S
Page 8 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
12 INSPECTION AND TESTING
Equipment should be of type tested quality only,

type test certificate to be submitted along with offer.
12.1 Type test If the manufacturer’s lab is accredited by govt. /
authorized body then it shall be acceptable for type
testing.
12.2 Acceptance & Routine tests As per relevant Indian standard
13 PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING AND SITE SUPPORT
The packing shall be fit to withstand rough

handling during transit and storage at destination.
13.1 Packing Protection
The test set should be properly protected against
corrosion, dampness & damage.
Robust non-returnable packing case with all the
Packing for accessories above protection & identification Label. The bidder
13.2 and spares should get the packing list approved before
dispatching the material.
Packing Identification On each packing case, following details are
13.3 Label required:
13.3.5 Destination
13.3.8 Description
13.3.12 Gross and net weight
Page 9 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0

The seller shall be responsible for all transit
13.4 Shipping
damage due to improper packing.
13.5 Handling and Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed.

Detail handling & storage instruction sheet / manual to be furnished before
13.6 commencement of supply.
14 DEVIATIONS
Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in

writing with the tender by reference to the
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description
14.1 Deviation of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies
fully with this specification. No deviation will be
acceptable post order.
15 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
provided on A3/A4 sheet in box file with separators for each section. Also provide USB
containing pdf with bid for soft copy. Language of the documents shall be English only.
Deficient/ improper document/ drawing submission may liable for rejection
S. Drawing Pre Pre

Head Bid
No Approval Dispatch Closure
15.1 Required
Email ID and Mobile Number
15.2 Deviation Sheet Required Required

15.3 Type Test Required
Any Technological
15.4 Required
Advancement in DCDB
assurance plan and
15.5
standards
15.6 General Arrangement Required
15.7 Door Layout Required
15.8 Internal Layout Required
Page 10 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
15.9 SLD Required

15.10 Schematic Circuit diagram Required
15.11 Bus Bar Arrangement Required
15.12 Cable Alley Arrangement Required
15.14 QAP Required
15.15 BOQ Required
15.16 Foundation diagram Required
15.17 TB Detail Required
15.18 Name Plate Detail Required
Make of all Component as

15.19 Required
per specification
15.20 Inspection Report Required

Manual
15.23 Trouble shooting manual Required Required
16 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Bidder’s
S. No. Description Specification requirement
Data
16.1 GENERAL FEATURES
16.1.1 Make
16.1.2 Type
16.1.4 Rated Operational voltage 220 VDC/50 VDC
16.1.5 Rated Nominal Current 100
Page 11 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
16.1.6 Rated Insulation voltage 1100V

Rated Impulse withstand
16.1.7 8kV
voltage
Service supply for heating,
16.1.8 240VAC±10%
lighting and power sockets
16.1.9 Mounting Floor (Free standing)
16.1.10 Connections Cable entry – Bottom
16.1.11 Configuration Single front
16.1.12 Enclosure thickness

a Load Bearing Member >=2.5mm
b Doors and Covers >=2 mm
c Gland Plate 3 mm
16.1.13 Enclosure Material CRCA Sheet
16.1.14 Enclosure degree of protection IP 54
16.1.15 Power Cable Termination Suitable for 4CX50 Sq.mm Al
16.1.16 Paint shade RAL 7032 (Siemens Grey)

Typical vertical section (Overall
16.1.17 dimension (mm) and weight (
Kg))
Incomer Required
16.1.18
16.1.19 Outgoings
16.1.20 Dimensions of the DCDB Panel 500(L)X500(D)X1800(H) mm3
16.1.21 Weights of the DCDB Panel (in kg.)
16.1.22 Marking on the panel As per the specification
16.1.23 Cable Alley Width 230 mm
16.1.24 Cable Gland Compression Type
16.1.25 Gasket Material Neoprene
16.1.26 Ventilating louvers Required
16.1.27 Base Frame 100mm channel

Page 12 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
16.2 MCB
16.2.1 Make Datar/Legrand/Hager/Schneider/ABB
16.2.2 Incomer 100A
16.2.3 Emergency Lighting DB 32A
16.2.4 Fire Alarm System 32A
16.2.5 SCADA 32A
16.2.6 CRP 32A
16.2.7 11 kV Switchgear 32A
16.2.8 Testing Purpose 32A
16.2.9 NIFPS 32A
16.2.10 Spare 1 32A
16.2.11 Spare 2 32A
16.3 BUS AND BUS TAPS
16.3.1 Make
16.3.2 Material Tinned electrolytic copper or Aluminium

Continuous Current (at site
16.3.4 condition, 50°C ambient) within
cubicle
Short Circuit withstand Current
16.3.5 15 KA
for 1 sec
16.3.6 Cross sectional Area
16.3.7 DC resistance ohm/m/ph
16.3.8 Reactance ohm/m/ph
16.3.9 Losses-middle phase w/m/ph

Minimum clearance of bus bar
16.3.10 Required
and joints
Page 13 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
16.3.11 Phase to phase (mm)
16.3.12 Phase to earth (mm)

i. Heat shrinkable sleeves rated for
16.3.13 Bus bar insulation maximum operating voltage
ii. Cast resin shrouds for joint
16.3.14 Bus joints Silver
16.3.15 Bus bar support insulator
16.3.16 Spacing (mm)
16.3.17 Make
16.3.18 Type
Required
16.3.20 Voltage class (kV)

Minimum creepage distance
16.3.21 (mm)
16.3.22 Cantilever strength (Kg/sq.cm.)
16.4 Wiring and Terminals
16.4.1 Wiring
1100 V grade, PVC insulated, FRLS type
a Grade and type
stranded flexible copper wire.
Each wire shall bear an identifying ferrule or
b Ferruling
tag at each end or connecting point.
c Spare 20% Spare Wiring
16.4.2 Terminals
1100 V grade, moulded piece terminals
a Grade complete with insulated barriers, washers,
nuts and lock nuts.
b Power Terminals type Stud type, nut driver operated
c Control terminals type Stud type, screw driver operated
d Spare terminals 20% spare
Placement of terminals shall enable proper
e Accessibility cable termination. Terminals shall be readily
accessible for inspection and maintenance.
The terminals shall be serially numbered to
f Marking
facilitate installation and maintenance.
METERS, INDICATIONS,
16.5 PUSH BUTTONS & HEATERS
Page 14 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
DC Moving coil ammeter of size 96 sq.mm.

16.5.1 Ammeter with external shunt. Rating of Ammeter
shall be 0-100A DC.
a Model No Ammeter
b Make of Ammeter
DC Moving coil voltmeter of size 96.sq.mm

16.5.2 Voltmeter to read the DC Bus voltage. Rating of
Voltmeter shall be 0-300VDC
a Model No Voltmeter
b Make of Voltmeter Rishabh/Schneider/AE
c Type Digital type
16.5.3 Indicating lamps Cluster LED type.
a Make of Indicating lamps Vaishno/Binay/Teknic/Siemens/Mimic/C&S
b Incomer/ Outgoing On Red

c Incomer/ Outgoing Off Green
d Incomer/ Outgoing Trip Amber
e Push buttons Make L&T/Siemens/Vaishno/Schneider
Cubicle space heater having rating of

16.5.4 Heaters 100W. Thermostat for space heater shall be
provided with temperature range 0-900
Cubicle lamp shall be provided in DCDB

16.5.5 CFL
having rating of 11 W.
16.6 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS
a Panel Serial No.-
Customer Name - BSES Yamuna Power

b
Ltd
c Panel nameplate PO No. & date -

d Type of Panel -
e Current rating -
f Guarantee period -
Page 15 of 16
SP-DCDB-129-R0
16.6.1 Feeder nameplate As per Spec
a Equipment nameplate As per Spec

b Material As per Spec
c Fixing As per Spec
d Markings As per Spec
16.7 FINISH
a Primer Two coats
Two finishing coats of epoxy based paint of

b Paint
Shade RAL 7032 with glossy finish.
c Paint thickness 50 microns (minimum)
Page 16 of 16
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SMPS BASED BATTERY CHARGER
INDEX
1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY......................................................................................... 3
2 CODES & STANDARDS ................................................................................... 3
3 SERVICE CONDITIONS ................................................................................... 3
4 CHARGER DESIGN FEATURES ..................................................................... 4
5 METERING, ANNUNCIATION & INDICATION................................................. 5
6 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS .......................................................... 7
7 MIMIC DIAGRAM, LABEL & FINISH................................................................ 7
8 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION & TESTING ....................................... 8
9 DEVIATIONS..................................................................................................... 8
10 GTP ................................................................................................................... 8
11 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX ............................................... 9
12 PACKING ........................................................................................................ 10
13 SHIPPING ....................................................................................................... 11
14 HANDLING AND STORAGE .......................................................................... 11
Page 2 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, erection & commissioning of
220 VDC/ 50 VDC SMPS based 2X100% Float Cum Boost Charger at site for indoor installation
with all necessary accessories associated with it.
.
2 CODES & STANDARDS

Material, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of battery charger shall confirm
to the latest edition of following
Indian Electricity
Rules
CBIP manual
IS 3895 Specification for rectifier equipment in general
IS 5921 Printed circuit boards
IS 6619 Safety code for semiconductor devices
IS 4540 Semiconductor rectifier assemblies and equipment
IS 694 PVC Insulated Cables for Working Voltage up to and including 1100V
IS 1248 Direct Acting Electrical indicating instruments
IS 2705 Current transformer
IS 3156 Voltage transformer
IS 3231 Electric relay for power system protection
IS 5578 Guide for making of insulated conductors
IS 8623 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IS 13703 Low voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000AC
IS 12063 Degree of enclosure protection
IS5 Color of mixed paints
IS 6297 Transformer & inductors for electronic equipment
IS 6553 Environment requirements for semiconductor device
IS 4007 Terminals for electronic equipment
3 SERVICE CONDITIONS

Max Daily average ambient
3.2 40 deg C
temp
Average no of rainy days per
3.7 60
annum
Page 3 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0

4 CHARGER DESIGN FEATURES

4.1 Type SMPS Based
a. 70 A for 50 V
4.2 Rating
b. 35 A for 220 V
4.3 Configuration 2X100% Float cum Boost Charger.
Provision of Two Incoming Supply with Auto
4.4 Incoming Supply
Changeover Facility
4.5 Panel type Metal enclosed frame construction
4.6 Overall Dimension L - 1500 mm x D - 700 mm x H - 1900 mm
4.7 Cable Entry Bottom
4.8 Location Indoor, non air conditioned environment
4.9 Doors for front access With anti theft hinge &handle
4.10 Cover for rear access With Allen screw M6 size & handle
4.11 Construction Sheet metal 2.0mm thick CRCA
4.12 Base frame 75mm ISMC
4.13 Lifting lugs Four number
4.14 Gland plate 3mm metallic, un drilled & removable type
4.15 Enclosure protection IP42 Minimum
4.16 Power terminal Bus bar type, minimum 300mm above gland plate
4.17 Control terminal Nylon66 with brass clamp
4.18 Bus bar Tinned copper with insulation sleeve
4.19 Earth bus bar Aluminum sized for rated fault duty for 1sec
Earth bus internal connection
4.20 to all non current carrying By copper flexible wire 2.5 sqmm
metal parts
Earth bus external connection Al bus on both sides of panel with two holes for M10
4.21
to owner earth bolt
4.22 Cooling Natural ventilation without fan
4.23 Panel heater Thermostatically controlled through MCB
Multi strand flexible color coded PVC insulated copper
4.24 Panel internal wiring wire 1.5 sqmm 1100volt grade with 1.5 sqmm ferruling
(other than circuit wiring related to PCB cards )
4.25 Input isolation transformer Dry type
4.26 Isolation & protection device Mounted at height minimum 1000mm from bottom
4.26.1 MCCB For charger input, output & battery input
Lockable change over switch with one position for
4.26.2 Battery & test resistor load charger, second for ‘OFF’ & third position for external
test resistor.
Hardware (Nut, bolts &
4.27 Stainless steel
handle)
4.28 Essential provision Surge suppression, harmonic suppression, blocking
Page 4 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
diodes, filters for ripple control

On all live parts, power semi conductors & electronic
4.29 Insulating shrouds
components
4.30 Ripple content in DC output 0.5 % maximum
Maximum ±1% of rating with AC input supply variation
4.31 DC output voltage regulation of ±10% from 415 volts, frequency variation of ±5%
from 50 HZ and simultaneous load variation of 0-100%
4.32 Reverse polarity connection Protected against reversed battery polarity
4.33 Charger efficiency 90% minimum at Rated Load
4.34 Noise output 65DB maximum
For auto/manual and float/boost selection, lockable type
4.35 Charger selector switch
inside panel
4.36 Charging current settings 25% to 100% of rating
2% of set current with input voltage variation of ±10%
4.37 Charging current accuracy
and frequency variation of ±5%
Auto and Manual DC output
By potentiometers inside panel, range suitable for
adjustment range for float &
4.38 battery bank. Charger suitable for other type of batteries
boost charge (voltage &
if offered, shall be subject to buyer’s approval.
current)
4.39 Louvers With stainless steel wire mesh
4.40 Gasket Neoprene rubber
Panel illumination lamp with
4.41 MCB controlled, with 5/15amp switch socket
door switch
4.42 Panel door keys 4 no. per panel, identical key for all panels
4.43 PCBs for electronic circuitry With protective layer finish at back
4.44 PCB soldering Preferably by wave soldering process
4.45 PCB/ electronic card mounting With press fit type locking arrangement
Semiconductor component
4.46 Shall not be on bakelite sheet
mounting
5 METERING, ANNUNCIATION & INDICATION
Digital type, for AC input, DC output & battery

5.1 Ammeter (96x96mm) current. Auxiliary supply for meters should be 48V to
230V AC/DC (Universal type)
Digital type, with selector switch for AC input, DC
5.2 Voltmeter (96x96mm) output & battery voltage. Auxiliary supply for meters
should be 48V to 230V AC/DC (Universal type)
5.3 LED indication on panel front
5.3.1 Status
Input AC supply available on
5.3.1.1 Red/yellow/blue color LED
R,Y & B phase
Float cum Boost charger AC
5.3.1.2 Red color LED for each charger module
MCCB ‘ON’
5.3.1.3 Charger output DC ‘ON’ Red color LED for each charger module
5.3.1.4 Outgoing DCDB feeder ON Red color LED for each other
5.3.2 Fault
Page 5 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
5.3.2.1 DC earth fault Amber color LED

5.3.2.2 Battery MCCB OFF Amber color LED
Charger output DC under/
5.3.2.3 Amber color LED
over voltage
5.3.2.4 AC mains undervoltage Amber color LED
5.4 Annunciation Hooter with isolating switch for fault annunciation.
a. AC under voltage
b. AC over voltage
c. CH-A AC MCCB trip/OFF
d. CH-B AC MCCB trip/OFF
e. CH-A Rect/Cond. fuse fail
f. CH-B Rect/Cond. fuse fail
g. CH-A DC MCCB trip/OFF
h. CH-B DC MCCB trip/OFF
Potential free contacts for
i. Battery MCCB trip/OFF
5.5 remote indication to be wired
j. CH-A DC under voltage
upto terminal block
k. CH-B DC under voltage
l. CH-A DC over voltage
m. CH-B DC over voltage
n. Battery DC under voltage
o. Battery DC over voltage
p. DC Bus over voltage
q. DC Earth fault
r. Battery Charger in boost mode
Microprocessor based Charger should have a microprocessor based
5.6
monitoring unit cum controller controller
a. AC Input Voltage and current
Analog signals to be b. DC output voltage and current for Charger -1
5.6.1
monitored by controller and Charger -2
c. Battery voltage and current
a. AC under voltage
b. AC over voltage
c. CH-A AC MCCB trip/OFF
d. CH-B AC MCCB trip/OFF
e. CH-A Rect/Cond. fuse fail
f. CH-B Rect/Cond. fuse fail
g. CH-A DC MCCB trip/OFF
h. CH-B DC MCCB trip/OFF
Alarms/Faults signals to be i. Battery MCCB trip/OFF
5.6.2
monitored by controller j. CH-A DC under voltage
k. CH-B DC under voltage
l. CH-A DC over voltage
m. CH-B DC over voltage
n. Battery DC under voltage
o. Battery DC over voltage
p. DC Bus over voltage
q. DC Earth fault
r. Battery Charger in boost mode
Page 6 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
Microprocessor controller should have RS485 port

capable of transmitting all analog and alarm/fault
5.6.3 SCADA Interfacing signal to RTU on open MODBUS protocol. Any
hardware/software required to achieve the said
compatibility shall be in bidder’s scope.
Backlit display capable of displaying all the analog
5.6.4 Display
and fault/alarm signals mentioned above.
6 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS

6.3 Diodes & SCR Hirect/USHA/IOR
6.4 Meters AE/Rishabh
6.5 AC Contractors &O/L Relay L&T/Siemens/Telemechanique/GE/ABB
6.7 Push buttons / Actuator L&T/Siemens/Vaishno
6.8 MCCB L&T/Siemens/ ABB/GE
6.9 MCB Datar/Legrand/Hager/Schneider
6.10 Indicating lamps LED type Vaishno/Binay/Teknic/Siemens/Mimic
7 MIMIC DIAGRAM, LABEL & FINISH

7.1 Mimic diagram To be provided
7.2 Name plate on panel front
7.2.3 Letter, diagram & boder Black
7.2.5 Name plate details a. Manufacturer name
b. Month & year of manufacture
c. Equipment type
d. Input & Output rating
e. Owner name & order number
f. Guarantee period
g. Weight of panel
h. Degree of protection
i. Sr. No.
7.3 Labels for meters, indication Anodized aluminum with white character on black
& all cards / sub assemblies background
in panel
7.4 Danger plate on front & rear Anodized aluminum with white letters on red
side background
7.5 Painting surface preparation Shot blasting or chemical 7 tank process
7.6 Painting external finish Powder coated polyester base grade A, shade –RAL
7032, uniform
7.7 Painting internal finish Powder coated polyester base grade A, shade –
white, uniform thickness 50 micron minimum
Page 7 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
7.8 Labels for all components in Anodized aluminum with white character on black
panel background, fixed by rivets only
7.9 SLD SLD of charges shall be provided at backside of the
main door of Charger on Aluminium plate
8 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION & TESTING

8.3 Type test Equipment should be of type tested quality only, type
test certificate to be submitted along with offer. If the
manufacturer’s lab is accredited by govt. / authorized
body then it shall be acceptable for type testing.
8.4 Routine test As per relevant Indian standard
8.5 Acceptance test To be performed in presence of Owner at
manufacturer works
a. Physical inspection & BOM, wiring check
b. Insulation resistance test
c. HV test for one minute
d. Voltage regulation test
e. Heat run test for 12 hours
f. Measurement of efficiency, power factor &
ripple content
9 DEVIATIONS
Deviation from this specification shall be stated in writing with the tender by reference to the
specification clause/ GTP/ Drawing and description of alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it shall be assumed by the buyer that the seller complies fully with this specification.
10 GTP
Vendor must submit clause wise compliance against specification at the time of drawing approval
clearly highlighting the deviations from specification against each clause.
Page 8 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
11 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX
Drawing Pre Pre

S. No Head Bid

11.1 Email ID and Mobile Required Required
Number
Deviation Sheet (as per

11.2 Required
“Deviations” Clause)
11.3 GTP Required
Relevant Type Test as per
IS/IEC/UL
assurance plan and
11.5 Required
standards
11.6 Required
Recommended Spares for
11.7 Required
five years of operation)
11.8 Battery Charger Drawing
11.8.3 Cabinet Layout Required
Schematic Circuit diagram
11.8.5 and Scheme of Each type Required
of Panel
Communication
11.8.6 Required
Architecture
11.8.7 QAP Required
11.8.8 BOQ Required
Make of all Component as
11.8.11 Required
per specification
Drawing of Substation
11.8.12 Required
Room
11.9 Required
commissioning manual
Page 9 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
Drawing Pre Pre

S. No Head Bid
Operation and
11.12 Required
Maintenance Manual
12 PACKING
Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains, breakage and

vibration. During transportation/ transit and storage, module may
be subjected to outdoor conditions. Hence, packing of each
Packing for
Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the above
12.2 accessories and
protection & identification Label
spares
12.3
details
12.3.5 Destination
12.3.14
All necessary slinging and stacking instructions
Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains, breakage and

vibration. During transportation/ transit and storage, module may
be subjected to outdoor conditions. Hence, packing of each
Packing for
Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the above
12.5 accessories and
protection & identification Label
spares
12.6
details
Page 10 of 11
SP-SMPSBC-153-R0
12.6.5 Destination
13 SHIPPING


14 HANDLING AND STORAGE

Page 11 of 11
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR Li ION BATTERY BANK
TABLE OF CONTENT
1.0 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 3

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 3
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 3
4.0 DC DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA ..................................................................... 3
5.0 GENERAL FEATURES ............................................................................................. 4
6.0 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................................................... 5
7.0 CABINET ................................................................................................................... 6
8.0 EQUIPMENT LIST .................................................................................................... 6
9.0 INSPECTION & TESTING ....................................................................................... 7
10.0 GTP ............................................................................................................................. 7
11.0 DEVIATIONS ............................................................................................................ 7
12.0 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX ................................................. 7
13.0 PACKING ................................................................................................................... 9
14.0 SHIPPING................................................................................................................. 10
15.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE ................................................................................ 10
16.0 QUALITY AND ASSURANCE .............................................................................. 10
Page 2 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply, erection &
commissioning of 50 V & 220 V Li Ion Battery Bank.
Material, equipment and methods used in the manufacturing of Li Ion battery shall confirm
to the latest edition of following standard
Standard Name / No Standard’s Description
Indian Electricity Act Latest Edition
CBIP manual Latest Edition
IEC 62281 Safety of primary and secondary lithium cells and
batteries during transport
UL 1642 Individual cell compliance
UL 1973 Battery module complies

3.2 Max Daily average ambient temp 40 deg C
3.7 Average no of rainy days per annum 60
4.0 DC DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
4.1 DC Supply 2 wire, with positive & negative polarity

4.2 Earth reference Unearthed system
4.3 Voltage 50 VDC / 220 VDC
4.4 Application - Industrial Standby DC back up for switchgear control
supply & SCADA RTU
Page 3 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
5.0 GENERAL FEATURES
5.1 Number of Modules 6 (Maximum)

5.2 Connection of Modules Parallel
5.3 DC battery bank Ah rating 300 Ah for 50 V / 150 Ah for 220 V
5.4 Voltage Output 50V / 220 V
5.5 Battery Efficiency >90%
5.6 Gas Evolution from Battery None
5.7 DC load curve With High discharge characteristics.
5.8 Location of Module Indoor
5.9 Ingress Protection IP 4X
5.10 Installation On cabinet, painted with anti corrosive paint.
5.11 Battery type Li Ion Battery
5.12 Cell Chemistry Nickel Cobalt Manganese
Battery lifting/withdrawing
5.13 Suitable arrangement on Module
arrangement
PO Number and Date, Customer Name- BSES
Yamuna Power Limited, Manufacturer name,
5.14 Battery Module marking month & year of manufacturer, Warranty Period,
Nominal voltage, rated Ah capacity & cell
number , Customer Care Number
5.15 Terminal polarity marking Positive & negative marked on Module
Nickel plated copper with protective insulating
5.16 Battery cell shorting metal links
sleeve
5.17 Insulating shrouds For all battery terminals & shorting links
At the bottom of rack supports, made from high
5.18 Insulating pads for battery rack
impact material
Battery suitable for Ripple
5.19 5% minimum in DC charger output
content
Design capacity, full charge capacity, remaining
capacity, state of charge, state of health, cycle
5.20 Key parameters count, total voltage, current, max cell voltage,
min cell voltage, max cell temp, min cell temp,
max FET temp., Life Cycle, Charging Current
Page 4 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
6.0 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Module must comprise BMS(Battery Management System) which monitors battery

internal vital parameters, measures and displays various alarms/warnings; establish a
communication link with the external system i.e. Charger, SCADA..Commissioning and
communication of the module with SCADA shall also be in Vendor’s scope.
6.1 Communication
6.1.1 Protocol For SCADA Interface Modbus
6.1.2 Port RS-485
6.1.3 Design Capacity (DC)
6.1.4 Full Charge Capacity (FCC)
6.1.5 Remaining Capacity (RC)
6.1.6 State of Charge (SOC)
6.1.7 State of Health (SOH)
6.1.8 Cycle Count
6.1.9 Total Voltage
Key Battery Parameters to be
6.1.10 Current
Integrated With SCADA
6.1.11 Life Cycle
6.1.12 Charging Current
6.1.13 Max. Cell Voltage
6.1.14 Min. Cell Voltage
6.1.15 Max. Cell Temperature
6.1.16 Min. Cell Temperature
6.1.17 Max. FET Temperature
6.1.18 Status LED Dual color type
6.1.19 SOC LED Dual color type
6.1.20 In-built data logging Upto 6 months
6.1.21 Protection feedback to SCADA From S.No 6.2.7 to 6.2.13
6.2 Safety Feature
6.2.1 Module reverse polarity protection
6.2.2 Internal fuse
6.2.3 Controllable internal fuse
6.2.4 Protective terminal covering to avoid unintentional contact
6.2.5 Secondary level hardware protection for overvoltage
6.2.6 Heat propagation resistant cell holding structure
6.2.7 Overvoltage protection
6.2.8 Under voltage protection
Page 5 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
6.2.9 Over charging current protection

6.2.10 Over discharge current protection
6.2.11 Over temperature during discharge protection
6.2.12 Over temp during charge protection
6.2.13 Over internal FET temp protection
6.3 Arrangement for Bypassing the BMS
7.0 CABINET
Simplex panel with Dimension 0.6x0.6 x1.4 m3

7.1 Panel Type
Max.
7.2 Pocket Pocket for Drawing is required
Local Display on Cabinet shall be provided
7.3 Display
having key battery Parameter
7.4 Ingress Protection IP4X in accordance with IS 13947
7.5 Cooling Natural
Pre-galvanized, cold-rolled sheet steel of
7.6 Enclosure material thickness not less than 2.0 mm. Stiffeners shall
be provided wherever necessary.
Double leaf doors shall be provided at the rear.
7.7 Doors Doors shall have handles with built-in locking
facility
At least two separate gland plates of removable
type with gasket shall be provided for each
7.8 Gland Plate
panel. They shall be of sheet steel of thickness
not less than 3.0 mm.
All doors, removable covers and panels shall be
7.9 Gaskets
Gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets
The panels shall be fixed on the embedded
foundation channels with intervening layers anti
7.10 Foundation
vibration strips made of shock absorbing
materials
Base frames shall be supplied along with
7.11 Base Frame
panels.
8.0 EQUIPMENT LIST
8.1 Battery Cabinet

8.2 Battery Module
8.3 Communication cable
8.4 DC power cable
8.5 Cable terminal block/bus-bar
8.6 Earth cable
Page 6 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
8.7 Tools and Accessories for Maintenance

8.8 Mandatory and Recommended Spares if Any
9.1 Type test Equipment shall be type tested from

CPRI/ERDA/NABL accreted lab as per
IEC/IS/UL standard.
9.2 Routine test As per relevant standard
9.3 Acceptance test To be performed in presence of Owner at
manufacturer works shall be as per approved
QAP
9.4 Heating Compliance JIS C8712
9.5 ROHS Compliance Required
10.0 GTP
Vendor Must Submit clause wise compliance against specification at the time of drawing
approval.
11.0 DEVIATIONS
Deviation from this specification shall be stated in writing with the tender by reference to
the specification clause/ GTP/ Drawing and description of alternative offer. In absence of
such a statement, it shall be assumed by the buyer that the seller complies fully with this
specification.
12.0 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMISSION MATRIX
Drawing Pre Pre

S. No Head Bid

12.1 Email ID and Mobile Required Required
Number
Deviation Sheet (as per

12.2 Required
“Deviations” Clause)
12.3 GTP Required
Relevant Type Test as
per IS/IEC/UL
Page 7 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
assurance plan and
12.5 Required
standards
12.6 Required
Recommended Spares
12.7 for five years of Required
operation)
12.8 Li Ion drawing
12.8.3 Cabinet Layout Required
12.8.4 Battery Layout Required
Schematic Circuit
12.8.6 diagram and Scheme of Required
Each type of Panel
Communication
12.8.7 Required
Architecture
12.8.8 QAP Required
12.8.9 BOQ Required
Make of all Component
12.8.12 Required
as per specification
Drawing of Substation
12.8.13 Required
Room
12.9 Required
commissioning manual
As manufacturing
12.11 Required
Drawings
Operation and
12.12 Required
Maintenance Manual
Page 8 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
13.0 PACKING
Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains,

13.1 Packing Protection transit and storage, module may be subjected
to outdoor conditions. Hence, packing of each
Robust wooden non returnable packing case
13.2 Packing for accessories and spares with all the above protection & identification
Label
13.3
details
13.3.5 Destination
Page 9 of 10
SP-TSLBB-137-R0
14.0 SHIPPING



16.0 QUALITY AND ASSURANCE
Page 10 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
Index
1. General specification ……………………………………………………………….3-7
2. Annexure A : Scope & Project specific details …………………………………...8
3. Annexure B : General Technical Particulars…………………………………… 9-10
Page 2 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
General Specification
1.0.0 Codes & Standards : The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
Accordance with the following Indian & IEC standards.
National Standards
Indian Standards
IS- 1554 Part-1 PVC insulated Cables
IS- 5831 : 1984 PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables.
IS- 10810 : 1984 Methods of test for cables.
IS- 8130 : 1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS- 3975 : 1999 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of
cables.
International Standards
IEC 60228 Ed.3.0 b Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC 60332-3-21 Ed.1.0 b Tests on electric cables under fire conditions. Part 3-21. Tests
on bunched wires or cables.
IEC 60502-1 Ed. 2.1 b Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltage from 1kV upto 30kV –Part 1: cables for rated
voltages of 1kV and 3kV
IEC 60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of
electric cables.
IEC 60885 Ed.1.0 b Electric test methods for electric cables.
IEC 60227 PVC insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V.
IEC 60028 Ed. 2.0 b International Standard of Resistance for Copper
Page 3 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
2.0.0 Cable construction Features Size & dimensions of each item mentioned under
this clause shall be followed as detailed out in
GTP, refer Annexure B
2.1.1 Conductor
Stranded, plain copper, circular Shall be made from high conductivity copper rods
2.1.2 Insulation Extruded PVC Insulation Type A as per IS 5831
2.1.3 Core Identification As per Cl.10.1 ( f ) of IS-1554 Part-1
2.1.4 Inner Sheath Extruded Inner Sheath of Black PVC type ST-2
as per IS 5831
2.1.5 Armour a) As per Cl 13.2 of IS 1554 Part-1: Galvanized

steel round wire armour.
b) Minimum area of coverage of armouring shall
be 90 %.
2.1.6 Outer Sheath a) Extruded outer sheath of PVC type ST-2 as per
IS 5831
b) Colour : Black
d) The Outer Sheath shall be embossed with:
d-1 : The voltage designation

d-2 : Type of construction / cable code (for e.g.
AYWY)
d-3 : Manufacturers Name or Trade mark
d-4 : Number of Cores and nominal cross sectional

area of conductors
Page 4 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
Continue…Outer Sheath d-5 : The drum progressive length of cable at

every metre.
d-6 : Name of buyer i.e. BSES
d-7 : Month & Year of Manufacturing

d-8: P.O.No. and P.O.Date
2.1.7 Sealing of Cable end Both ends of the cable shall be sealed with PVC
Cap.
4.0.0 Testing & Inspection Tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC /
IS standards.
a) Routine Test: As per IS 1554 part -1
b) Type Test
b-1: Cables must be of type tested quality . Type
test reports shall be submitted for the type, size &
rating of cable offered along with bid.
b-2 : If the manufacturer’s lab is accredited by
govt. /authorised body then it shall be acceptable
for type testing.
b-3 : Type test on one cable drum of each rating
and type , from first lot, shall be conducted at Govt.
approved / Internationally accredited labs.
c) Acceptance test : Shall be conducted as per IS

1554 Part-1 for each lot of cable
c1) A minimum of two samples per Purchase order
shall be drawn after receipt of cable in BSES
stores for chemical composition and purity test of
aluminium. Bidder to bear cost of test.
d) Inspection
d-1 :The Buyer reserves the right to witness all
tests specified on completed cables
d-2 : The Buyer reserves the right to inspect

cables at the Sellers works at any time prior to
dispatch, to prove compliance with the
specifications.
d-3 : In-process and final inspection call intimation
shall be given in advance to purchaser.
e) Test certificates: Three sets of complete test
certificates (routine & acceptance tests) need to be
submitted along with the delivery of cables.
Page 5 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
5.0.0 Drawing, Data & Manuals
5.0.1 To be submitted along with bid The seller has to submit:

a) Cross section drawing of cable
b) Completely filled GTP
c) Type test certificates
d) Complete cable catalogue and Manual
along with the bid.
5.0.2 After award of contract Within 15 days, the seller has to submit four sets
of above-mentioned drawings for buyer’s approval.
5.0.3 Final As Built 6 sets hardcopy + One Soft copy of all documents
including type test certificates
6.0.0 Drum Length & tolerance 500+ - 5% Mtr.

6.0.1 Overall tolerance in cable
Length
-2%
6.0.2 a) Minimum acceptable short length shall be above
Short length of cables 100 Mtrs. Manufacturer shall be required to take
prior approval from Engineering for any short
length supply.
b) Manufacturer shall not be allowed to put two
cable pieces of different short lengths in same
cable drum.
7.0.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling

& Storage
a) Drum Identification Labels
a-1 Drum identification number
a-2 Cable voltage grade

a-3 Cable code (e.g. YWY)
a-4 Number of cores and cross sectional area
a-5 Cable quantity (Metres)
a-6 Purchase order number and SAP item code
a-7 : Total weight of cable and drum (kg)
a-8 : Manufacturer's & Buyer’s name

a-9 : Month & Year of Manufacturing
a-10 : Direction of rotation of drum
a-11 : Cable length initial reading & end reading

shall be marked on drum. Cable starting end shall
be taken out from winding to read this drum
reading with proper sealing to protect against
external damage.
b) Shipping information The seller shall give complete shipping information
Page 6 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
concerning the weight, size of each package.

c) Transit damage The seller shall be held responsible for all transit
damage due to improper packing.
d) Type of Drum Wooden drums with anti termite treatment.
(The drums shall be with M.S. spindle plate with
nut-bolts)
8.0.0 Quality Assurance
8.0.1 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval
8.0.2 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
9.0.0 Progress reporting

9.0.1 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline
of production, inspection, testing, inspection,
packing, dispatch, documentation programme
9.0.2 Detailed Progress report To be submitted to Purchaser once a month
containing
i) Progress on material procurement
ii) Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
iii) Progress on assembly (As applicable)
iv) Progress on internal stage inspection
v) Reason for any delay in total programme
vi) Details of test failures if any in
manufacturing stages
vii) Progress on final box up
Constraints / Forward path
10.0.0 Deviation a) Deviations from this specification are only

acceptable where the Seller has listed in his
quotation the requirements he cannot, or does not,
wish to comply with and the Buyer has accepted,
in writing, the deviations before the order is placed.
b) In the absence of a list of deviations, it will be
assumed by the Buyer that the Seller complies
fully with this specification.
Page 7 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
Annexure – A
Scope & Project Specific Details
1.0.0 Scope
1.0.0 Scope Design, manufacture, testing & supply of Control

cables
2.0.0 Delivery Schedule To be filled up as per purchase requisition.
2.0.0 Document Submission

Submission of of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be
as follows
Along with offer For Approval Final after Remarks

after award of approval
contract
Drawings 2 copies 2 copies See Clause
(Typical drgs) 5.0.0 for details
Calculations 2 copies 2 copies 2 copies + of required
(Typical) 1 soft copy in drawings
Catalogues 1 copy CD
Type Test 2 copies Type test and
Report sample routine
test reports
Page 8 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
Annexure- B
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
(Standard Cable sizes are 4c x2.5, 8c x 2.5, 12c x2.5, 16c x 2.5, 19 c x 2.5, 27c x 2.5
Sqmm & 4c x 4, 8c x 4, 10c x 4 Sqmm)
For each size separate GTP need to be furnished
Sr. Description Buyer’s

Seller’s data
requirement
Purchase Req. No. ….

Guarantee Period: 5 Years 60/66 Months
1.0 Make ….
2.0 Type ( AS PER IS 1554 part -1 ) YWY
3.0 Voltage Grade (KV) 1.1
4.0 Maximum Conductor temperature

A Continuos (° C) 70°C
B Short time (° C) 160°C
5.0 Conductor
A Size (mm2) 2.5 / 4 sq mm

B No. of wires in each conductor Nos. As per Manufacturer
standard
C Dia. of wires in each conductor before As per Manufacturer
compaction (mm) standard
D Shape of Conductor As per Cl.2.1.1 of
specification
E Diameter over conductor mm ….
F Maximum Conductor resistance at 20 As per Table 2 of IS
°C (Ohm/Km) 8130
6.0 Insulation As per Table 1 of

IS:5831 – 1984
A Nominal thickness (mm) As per Cl.2.1.2 of
B Minimum thickness (mm) specification & Table
2 of IS 1554( Part-1)
C Core Identification As per Cl.10.1 ( f )
of IS: 1554
(Part-1)
D Diameter over Insulation (mm) Approx. ….
7.0 Inner Sheath As per Table 2 of

IS:5831 – 1984
A Minimum thickness (mm) As per Table 4 of IS

1554( Part-1)
Page 9 of 10
SP-EWLP-01-R1
B Approx. dia. Over sheath (mm)- Apprx. ….
8.0 Galvanised Steel Armour As per Cl 2.1.5 of

specification
A Number of armour wire As per Manufacturer

Std.
B Nominal Dia of Round Wire As per Table 5 of IS
1554( Part-1)
C Dia. over Armour – Approx. ….
D Lay Ratio ….
E Confirm minimum 90% coverage
(submit calculation)
9.0 Outer Sheath As per Table 2 of

IS:5831 – 1984
A Thickness (Minimum) As per Table 7 of IS

1554( Part-1)
B Colour Black
10.0 Approx. overall dia. (mm) ….
11.0 Drum Length & tolerance As per Spec.Cl.

6.0.0
12.0 End Cap Required

13.0 Drums provide with MS Spindle plate & Required
Nut bolts arrangement
14.0 Net Weight of cable ( Kg/Km. ) – ….

Approx.
15.0 Continuous current rating for standard

I.S. condition laid Direct
a) In ground 30° C Amps ….
b) In duct 30° C Amps ….
c) In Air 40° C Amps ….
16.0 Short circuit current for 1 sec of ….

conductor. (KAmp)
17.0 Electrical Parameters at Maximum

Operating temperature:
A Resistance ( Ohm/Km ) (AC ….
Resistance)
B Reactance at 50 C/s ( Ohm/Km ) ….
C Impedance ( Ohm/Km ) ….
D Capacitance (Micro farad / KM) ….
18.0 Recommended minimum bending …. x O/D

radius
Page 10 of 10
SP-LTPC-63-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT POWER CABLE
INDEX
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY............................................................................................... 3
2. CODES & STANDARDS......................................................................................... 3
3. CABLE DESIGN...................................................................................................... 4
4. CABLE DRUM......................................................................................................... 6
5. PACKING, SHIPPING, HANDLING & STORAGE.................................................. 8
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE, TESTING & INSPECTION............................................. 8
7. DRAWING, DATA & MANUALS............................................................................. 9
8. PROGRESS REPORTING...................................................................................... 10
9. DEVIATION............................................................................................................. 10
10. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS............................................................................... 10
11. ANNEXURE - A: SCOPE & PROJECT SPECIFIC DETAILS.............................. 11
12. ANNEXURE - B: GTP (MULTI-CORE CABLE).................................................... 12
13. ANNEXURE - C: GTP (SINGLE CORE CABLE).................................................. 17
14. ANNEXURE - D: ARMOUR COVERAGE PERCENTAGE .................................. 21
15. ANNEXURE – E: QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN.................................................. 22
16. ANNEXURE - F: LIST of SUB-VENDORS............................................................ 35
Page 2 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
1.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

The specification covers design, manufacture, shop testing, packing and delivery of 1100 Volts
grade, Aluminium conductor, and XLPE insulated multi core power cables.

The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested in Accordance with the following Indian
& IEC standards.
2.1 IS- 7098 (Part-1) Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltages upto and including 1100V.
2.2 IS- 6474 Polyethylene insulation & sheath of electric cables.
2.3 IS- 5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electrical cables.
2.4 IS : 10810 Methods of tests for cables.
2.5 IS : 8130 Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.
2.6 IS : 3975 Low carbon galvanized steel wires, formed wires and tapes
for armouring of cables.
2.7 IS- 4026 Aluminum ingots, billets and wire bars (EC grade)
2.8 IS-5484 EC Grade aluminium rod produced by continuous casting and

rolling
2.9 IS : 10418 Specification for drums for electric cables.
2.10 IS : 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables.
2.11 IS:1255 Installation and Maintenance of power cables upto and including
33 kV rating.
2.12 IS:4826 Specification for hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel

wires
2.13 IS:1717 Metallic Materials – Wire – Simple torsion test
2.14 IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables. Guide to the dimensional limits of
circular conductors.
2.15 IEC 60331 Fire resisting characteristics of electric cables.
2.16 IEC 60332 - 3 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions. Part 3: Tests on
bunched wires or cables.
Page 3 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
2.17 IEC 60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages
from 1kV to 30 kV.
2.18 IEC 60754 - 1 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from
cables. Part 1: Determination of the amount of halogen acid gas
evolved during combustion of polymeric material taken from
cables.
2.19 IEC 60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of
electric cables.
2.20 IEC 60885 Electric test methods for electric cables.
2.21 IEC 60304 Standard colours for insulation for low frequency cables and
wires.
2.22 IEC 60227 PVC insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V.
2.23 IEC 1034 Measurement of smoke density of electric cables burning under
defined conditions.
3.0 CABLE DESIGN

Description of each item mentioned in the specification (the text, BOQ, GTP or any site specific requirement)
shall be followed along with IS:7098 – P1
3.1 Conductor a) Electrolytic Grade Stranded Aluminium Conductor
b) Grade: H2 as per IS:8130/1984
c) Class 2
d) Chemical composition as per IS 4026
e) Shape :
i) Compacted Circular for sizes up to 16
sqmm and for Single core cables.
ii) Sector shaped for sizes above 25Sqmm
3.2 Insulation Extruded XLPE Insulation as per IS:7098 Part-1
3.3 Core Identification As per Cl.10 of IS 7098 Part-1
Page 4 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
3.4 Inner Sheath Extruded Inner Sheath of Black PVC type ST-2 (IS:5831-
1984)
3.5 Armour a) For 2CX10Sqmm - Galvanized Steel Wire
b) For all sizes above 10Sqmm – Galvanized Steel

Strip.
c) Not applicable for Single core cables of sizes i.e.

500 & 630 sqmm
d) Minimum area of coverage of armouring shall be

90%
e) The breaking load of armour joint shall not be less

than 95% of that of armour wire/strip.
f) Zero negative tolerance for thickness of armour

strip shall be as per IS:3975.
g) Zinc rich paint shall be applied on strip/wire and its

joint surface.
3.6 Outer Sheath a) Extruded outer sheath of PVC (ST-2) shall be as

per IS:5831.
b) Colour : Yellow (For Multi core cables)

Black (For Single core 500 /630 Sqmm)
c) Outer sheath of all the LT cables shall be UV

resistant; as these cables are laid in air exposed to
sun.
Bidder to ensure the same for these requirements
supported by required test.
d) Shape of the cable over the outer sheath shall be

circular, when manufactured /completed.
Regular Ovality check shall be carried out at Factory, to

detect any abnormality. Manufacturing quality shall be such
that cable will retain its circular shape, even after it is laid at
site.
Page 5 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
e) The Outer Sheath shall be embossed with following

minimum text:
(i) The voltage designation
(ii) Type of construction / cable code

(for e.g. A2XFY)
(iii) Manufacturers Name / Trade mark
(iv) Number of Cores and nominal cross sectional area

of conductor.
(v) Progressive (Sequential) length of cable at every

meter, starting from zero for every drum.
Colour filled in for the progressive marking, shall
be with proper contrast in colouring.
(vi) Name of buyer i.e. BYPL (BSES Yamuna Power

Limited)
(vii) Month & Year of Manufacturing
(viii) IS reference, i.e. IS:7098
(ix) P.O No. and Date
(x) Font size shall be 5/5mm
(xi) ISI mark
The embossing shall be progressive, automatic, in line and

marking shall be legible and indelible.
3.7 Bending Radius Bending Radius of cable shall comply to IS:1255.
3.8 Sealing of Cable end Both ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-
hygroscopic heat shrinkable HDPE caps.
4.0 CABLE DRUM

4.1 Reference Standard Cable drums shall comply with IS: 10418.
4.2 Type of Drum Wooden drums with anti termite treatment.

(The drums shall be provided with M.S. spindle plate and
nut-bolts arrangement as per IS:10418).
Page 6 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
4.3 Drum Length & Tolerance 500 +/ - 5% Mtr
4.4 Overall Tolerance +/-2 % for the total cable length for the entire order.
4.5 Short Length of Cables a) Minimum acceptable short length shall be 1% of

the total ordered quantity and no length shall be
less than 250Mtrs. Manufacturer shall be required
to take prior approval from Engineering for any
short length supply. Short length will be accepted in
last lot.
b) Manufacturer shall not be allowed to put two cable

pieces of different short lengths in same cable
drum.
4.6 Preventive Measure for Cable a) The surface of the drum and the outer most cable
Drum layer shall be covered with water proof layer.
b) Ferrous part of wooden drum shall be treated with

suitable rust preventive paint/coating to minimize
rusting during storage.
4.7 Drum Identification Labels a) Drum identification number
b) Cable voltage grade
c) Cable code (eg. A2XFY/A2XWY)
d) Number of cores and cross sectional area
e) Cable quantity i.e. cable length (Meters)
f) Purchase order number, date and SAP item code
g) Total weight of cable and drum (kg)
h) Manufacturer’s and Buyer’s name
i) Month & year of manufacturing
j) Direction of rotation of drum; An arrow and suitable

accompanying wording shall be marked on one end
of the reel indicating the direction in which it should
be rolled.
k) Cable length final end-markings (i.e. reading at the

inner end and reading at the outer end, just before
packing shall be marked on the drum).
Page 7 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
5.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling & Storage
5.1 Shipping Information The seller shall give complete shipping information
concerning the weight, size of each package.
5.2 Transit Damage The seller shall be held responsible for all transit damage
5.3 Cable Drum Handling The drums shall be with M.S spindle plate (with nut-bolts) of
adequate size to suit the spindle rods, normally required for
handling the drums, according to expected weight of the
cable drums as per IS:10418
6.0 Quality Assurance, Testing & Inspection

All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC / IS standards.
6.1 Quality Assurance Plan As per Annexure – E. In event of order Manufacturer has to
submit the signed copy of QAP.
6.2 Inspection hold points AS per QAP
6.3 Routine Test a) Measurement of Electrical Resistance
b) HV test with power frequency AC voltage
6.4 Type Test a) Cables must be of type tested quality. Type test
reports shall be submitted for the type, size and
rating of cable offered along with bid. Type test
shall not be more than 5 years old. In event of type
test being older than 5 years, bidder has to conduct
the same at CPRI/ERDA, NABL approved Lab
without commercial implication to BSES.
b) Bidder supplying cable to BSES for the first time
shall have to conduct type test on sample randomly
selected from lot in event of order from
CPRI/ERDA.
c) UV resistance test to be carried out on one sample
from CPRI/ERDA as per ASTM standard (sample
shall meet minimum 80% retention after exposure
of 21 days as per ASTM standard).
Page 8 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
6.5 Acceptance Test a) For cable sizes upto 50sqmm – one sample for
chemical composition and purity test of aluminium
(Shall be conducted as per shall be conducted per 100km of ordered quantity
Cl.15.2 of IS 7098 Part-1 for and multiple thereof.
each lot of cable)
b) For cable sizes above 50sqmm – one sample for
chemical composition and purity test of aluminium
shall be conducted per 50km of ordered quantity
and multiple thereof.
c) Chemical composition and purity test of aluminium

shall be conducted from the lot offered to BSES on
each size involved in the purchase order. Test shall
be carried out at NABL accredited third party
laboratory without any price implication to BSES.
d) The sample will be selected either during

acceptance test or after receipt of cable in BSES
stores.
6.6 Inspection a) The buyer reserves the right to witness all tests
specified on completed cables.
b) The buyer reserves the right to inspect cables at

the seller’s works at any time prior to dispatch
either in finished form or during manufacturing, to
prove compliance with the specifications.
c) In-process and final inspection call intimation shall

be given in advance to purchaser/CES.
6.7 Test Certificates Complete test certificates (routine & acceptance tests) need
to be submitted along with the delivery of cables.
7.0 Drawing, Data & Manuals

7.1 To be submitted along with The vendor has to submit:
bid a) Cross section drawing of cable
b) Completely filled GTP
c) Type test certificates
d) Complete cable catalogue and manual along with
the bid
e) Copy of BIS licence
7.2 After award of contract Within 7 days, the seller has to submit four sets of above
mentioned drawings for buyer’s approval along with the
signed copy of QAP (Annexure – E).
Page 9 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
7.3 Final As Built 6 sets hardcopy + One Soft copy of all documents including
type test certificates
8.0 Progress Reporting

8.1 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of
production-inspection, testing-inspection, packing,
dispatch, documentation programme.
8.2 Detailed Progress Report To be submitted to purchaser once a month containing
(i) Progress on material procurement
(ii) Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
(iii) Progress on assembly (As applicable)
(iv) Progress on internal stage inspection
(v) Reason for any delay in total programme
(vi) Details of test failures if any in manufacturing

stages
(vii) Progress on final box up constraints/forward

path
9.0 Deviation
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this specification. No deviation will be
acceptable post order.
10.0 Technical Particulars

a. GTP - As per Annexure-B for Multi-core cables.
b. GTP - As per Annexure-C for Single-core cables (500sqmm and 630sqmm cables).
c. Armour Coverage Percentage – As per Annexure-D.
d. Quality Assurance Plan – As per Annexure-E.
e. List of sub-vendors for Raw Material – As per Annexure-F.
Page 10 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Annexure – A
Scope & Project Specific Details
1.0.0 Scope
1.0.0 Scope Design, manufacture, testing & supply of L.T Power

Cables
2.0.0 Delivery Schedule To be filled up as per purchase requisition.
2.0.0 Document Submission
Submission of of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as follows
Along with offer For Approval after Final after Remarks

award of contract approval
Drawings 2 copies (Typical 2 Copies See Clause 7.0
Drawings) for details of
Calculations 2 Copies 2 Copies required
(Typical) 2 Copies + 1 drawings
Catalogues 1 Copy soft copy in
CD
Type Test 2 Copies Type test and
Report sample routine
test reports
Page 11 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
ANNEXURE – B
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (Multi-core)
(Standard Cable sizes are 2cx10, 2c x25, 4cx25, 4cx95 4c x50, 4c x150, 4c x 300)
For each size /rating separate GTP need to be furnished
S.No. Description Buyer’s Requirement Seller’s data
Purchase Req. No. ….

commissioning) / 66
months (from date of
Guarantee Period: ( Min )
receipt at purchaser's
store) whichever is
earlier
Applicable IS / IEC Standard followed by IS 7098 Part -1 / IEC

vendor 60502
1 Make
….
2 Type (as required by purchaser)
A For 2CX10Sqmm A2XWY
B For Sizes above 10Sqmm A2XFY

1.1
4 Maximum Conductor temperature
A Continuous 90°C
B Short time 250°C
5 Conductor
A Material and Grade As per Cl.3.1
Page 12 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
B Make of Al Ref Annexure E
C Size (mm2) …… sq mm
As per Manufacturer
D Min no. of wires in each conductor (Nos.)
Standard
Min Dia. of wires in each conductor before As per Manufacturer

E
compaction (mm) Standard
F Shape of Conductor As per Cl.3.1 (e)
G Diameter over conductor (mm) ………
Maximum Conductor resistance at 20 ° C As per Table 2 of IS

H
(Ohm/Km) 8130
6 Insulation
A Insulation Material As per Cl. 3.2
As per Table 3 of IS
B Nominal thickness (mm)
7098 Part-1
C Diameter over Insulation (mm) Approx. ………
D Make of insulation compound Ref: Annexure E
7 Inner Sheath
A Material and Type As per Cl. 3.4
B Minimum thickness
7098 Part-1
C Approx. dia. Over sheath (mm) ………
As per manufacturer's
standard and as per
8 Galvanized Steel Armour
purchaser's site -
specific condition
A Material
a) For 2CX10Sqmm G.I.Wire
(i) Wire Dia (mm) 1.4+/-0.040
Page 13 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
As per Manufacturer
(ii) No. of wires
Standard
b) For sizes above 10Sqmm G.I.Strip
4x0.8 (Zero negative

(i) Strip size ( Width and Thickness)
tolerance for thickness)
As per Manufacturer
(ii) No. of Strips
Standard
Min 90% and

calculations shall be
B Area covered by Armour
strictly as per Annexure
D
C Dia. over Armour – Approx. ………
9 Outer Sheath
B Minimum Thickness
7098 Part-1
C Colour Yellow
D Embossing Details As per Cl.3.6 (f)
10 Approx. overall dia. (mm) ………
± 2 % for the total cable

11 Overall order tolerance length for the entire
order
12 Cable Drum
A Type of Drum Wooden
As per Spec.Cl. 4.3 &

B Drum Length & tolerance
4.4
C Marking on Drum As per Spec.Cl. 4.7
Drums provide with MS Spindle plate & nut-

D Required
bolts arrangement (as per IS:10418)
Page 14 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
13 End Cap Required
14 Weights ………
Net Weight of cable ( Kg/Km. ) –

a)
Approx
b) Weight of empty drum Kg
c) Weight of cable with drum Kg
Continuous current rating for standard

15
I.S condition laid direct
a) In ground 30° C Amps
b) In duct 30° C Amps
c) In Air 40° C Amps
Short circuit current for 1 sec of

16 ………
Conductor (kAmp)
Electrical Parameters at Maximum

17
operating temperature:
A AC Resistance Ohm/Km
B Reactance at 50 C/s Ohm/Km
C Impedance Ohm/Km
D Capacitance Micro farad / Km
18 Recommended minimum bending radius ...…. x O/D
Derating factor for following Ambient

19 Ground / Air
temperature in
a) At 30° C
b) At 35° C
c) At 40° C
Page 15 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
d) At 45° C
e) At 50° C
Group factor for following Nos. of cables

20 Touching / Trefoil
laid
a) 3 Nos.
b) 4 Nos.
c) 5 Nos.
d) 6 Nos.
21 Process of Cross linking of Polyethylene Dry cure
Is copy of latest valid

TTR for respective
22 Type test
sizes enclosed? Yes /
No
Page 16 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Annexure- C
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (Single Core)
(Separate GTP needs to be furnished for 500 & 630 sq mm cables)
S.No. Description Buyer’s Requirement Seller’s data
Purchase Req. No. -
60 Months (from date

of commissioning) / 66
months (from date of
Guarantee Period: ( Min )
receipt at purchaser's
store) whichever is
earlier
Applicable IS / IEC Standard followed by

vendor IS 7098 Part -1 / IEC
60502
1 Make ……….
2 Type A2XY (Unarmoured)
3 Voltage Grade (kV) 1.1 kV
4 Maximum Conductor temperature
A Continuous 90°C
B Short time
250°C
5 Conductor
A Material and Grade As per Cl.2.1.1
B Size (mm2) 500 / 630 sq mm
As per Manufacturer
C Min no. of wires in each conductor (Nos.)
Standard
Page 17 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Min Dia. of wires in each conductor before As per Manufacturer

D
compaction (mm) Standard
E Shape of conductor Compacted Circular
F Diameter over conductor ……….
Maximum Conductor resistance at 20 ° C As per Table 2 of IS

G
(Ohm/Km) 8130
H Make of Al Ref Annexure E
6 Insulation
7098 Part-1
A Insulation Material As per Cl. 3.2
B Nominal thickness
(i) For 1Cx500sqmm 2.2mm
(ii) For 1Cx630sqmm 2.4mm
C Diameter over Insulation (mm) Approx. ……….
D Make of insulation compound Refer Annexure E
7 Inner Sheath Not applicable
8 Armour Not applicable
9 Outer Sheath
B Minimum Thickness
7098 Part-1
C Colour Yellow
D Embossing Details As per Cl.3.6 (f)
Page 18 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
10 Approx. overall dia. (mm) ………
± 2 % for the total

11 Overall order tolerance cable length for the
entire order
12 Cable Drum
A Type of Drum Wooden
As per Spec.Cl. 4.3 &

B Drum Length & tolerance
4.4
C Marking on Drum As per Spec.Cl. 4.7
Drums provide with MS Spindle plate & nut-

D Required
bolts arrangement (as per IS:10418)
13 End Cap Required
14 Weights ….
Net Weight of cable ( Kg/Km. ) –

a)
Approx
b) Weight of empty drum Kg
c) Weight of cable with drum Kg
Continuous current rating for standard

15
I.S condition laid direct
a) In ground 30° C Amps
b) In duct 30° C Amps
c) In Air 40° C Amps
Short circuit current for 1 sec of

16 ………
Conductor (kAmp)
Electrical Parameters at Maximum

17
operating temperature:
A AC Resistance Ohm/Km
Page 19 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
B Reactance at 50 C/s Ohm/Km
C Impedance Ohm/Km
D Capacitance Micro farad / Km
18 Recommended minimum bending radius ...…. x O/D
Derating factor for following Ambient

19 Ground / Air
temperature in
a) At 30° C
b) At 35° C
c) At 40° C
d) At 45° C
e) At 50° C
Group factor for following Nos. of cables

20 Touching / Trefoil
laid
a) 3 Nos.
b) 4 Nos.
c) 5 Nos.
d) 6 Nos.
21 Process of Cross linking of Polyethylene Dry cure
Is copy of latest valid

TTR for respective
22 Type test
sizes enclosed? Yes /
No
Page 20 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Annexure – D
ARMOUR COVERAGE PERCENTAGE
ΠxD
C = Lay
Percent coverage = N x d x 100

W
Where
N = number of parallel wires / Strips

d = diameter of wire / width of formed wires
W = π x D x Cos a,
D = diameter under armour
a = angle between armouring wire / formed wires and axis of cable
tan a = π x D/C, and
C = lay length of armouring wires / formed wires.
Min 90% armour coverage shall be provided both in case of wires and strips.
The gap between armour wires / formed wires shall not exceed one armour wire /
formed wire space and there shall be no cross over / over-riding of armour wire /
formed wire. So, the minimum area of coverage of armouring shall be 90%.
Page 21 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Annexure – E
Quality Assurance Plan
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN FOR XLPE INSULATED 1.1KV LT POWER CABLE

COMPONENT QUANTUM FORMAT AGENCY
Sl. TYPE OF REF. ACCEPTANCE
& CHARACTERISTICS CLASS OF OF REMARKS
No. CHECK DOCUMENT STANDARDS M B
OPERATION CHECK RECORD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A) Raw Material
BSES Approved BSES Approved

a) Make / Type / Grade Maj. Vis. 100% Documents/ Documents/ Reg./Sheet P V
Specifications Specifications
1 Int. Test
b) Tensile strength Cri. Physical IS:5484 IS:5484 P V
Sample/lot Records
Aluminum c) Elongation Cri. Physical ----do--- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
1)
Rod d)Resistivity/Conductivity Cri. Elec. ----do--- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V On drawn Wire
e) Diameter Cri. Physical 100% -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
1 Manufacturer's
f) Purity Cri. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- V V
Sample/lot test certificate
g) Surface Finish Cri. Vis. 100% Smooth Surface Smooth Surface T.C P V
Page 22 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0

a ) Visual checks on
Maj. Vis. 100% Documents Documents/ Reg./Sheet P V
packing
/Specifications Specifications
XLPE b ) Hot set Maj. Physical 1sample/lot IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 -- do -- P V

2)
Compound
c ) Tensile strength Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
d ) Elongation Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
e ) Volume resistivity Maj. Electrical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
f ) Specific gravity Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
Armour Wires 1sample / IS:3975 & Data IS:3975 & Data
3) a) Dimension Maj. Physical Reg./Sheet P V
/ Strips (G.S) lot Sheet Sheet
b) T.S & Elongation Maj. Physical -- do -- IS:3975 IS:3975 -- do -- P V
c ) Mass & Uniformity of IS:3975 / IS:3975 /

Maj. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- P V
zinc coating IS:4826 IS:4826
d ) Torsion / winding test Maj. Physical -- do -- IS:3975 IS:3975 -- do -- P V
e ) Wrapping test Maj. Physical -- do -- IS:3975 IS:3975 -- do -- P V
Page 23 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0

PVC
4) a) Make / Type / Grade Maj. Physical 100% Documents/ Documents/ Reg./Sheet P V
Compound
Specifications Specifications
1sample /
b) T.S & Elongation Maj. Physical IS:5831/84 IS:5831/84 -- do -- P V
lot
IS 5831 & IS IS 5831 & IS

c ) Thermal Stability Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- P V
10810 (Part-60) 10810 (Part-60)
d ) Specific Gravity Maj. Chemical -- do -- IS:5831/84 IS:5831/84 -- do -- P V
1sample /
5) Wooden Drum a ) Dimension Maj. Physical IS:10418 IS:10418 Reg./Sheet P V
lot
Plant
b ) Anti-termite treatment Maj. Chemical Plant standard Plant standard -- do -- P V
standard
B) Process & Stage Inspection
1) Wire Drawing a ) Diameter Maj. Physical Sample IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 Reg./Sheet P V

b ) Surface Finish Maj. Vis. 100% Smooth Surface Smooth Surface T.C P V
1sample /
c ) Tensile Strength Maj. Physical IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 Reg./Sheet P V
lot
Page 24 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
d ) Elongation test Maj. Physical -- do -- IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 -- do -- P V

e ) Wrapping Test Maj. Physical -- do -- IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 -- do -- P V
At the time
2) Stranding a ) No. / dia of wires Maj. Count of m/c IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 Reg./Sheet P V
setting
At the time
of m/c
b ) Diameter of conductor Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
setting and
once in
each shift
During m/c
c ) Lay Length Maj. Physical setting -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
One
sample/Set
d ) Direction of Lay Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
ting of each
size
Each
e ) Weight Maj. Physical unloaded -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
reel
Page 25 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
No surface defects and free from

f ) Surface Finish Maj. Vis. 100% sharp edges, scratches, grease, oil T.C P V
etc.
1 sample
from
starting &
g ) Resistance Cri. Physical IS:8130/84 IS:8130/84 -- do -- P V
finishing
end of
each length
During m/c
3) Insulation a ) Material Maj. Physical IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Reg./Sheet P V
setting
During m/c
setting and
b ) Thickness Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
at standard
length
c ) Surface Finish Maj. Vis. 100% Surface shall be smooth and free T.C P V
from defects
d ) Spark Testing Cri. Electrical 100% IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Reg./Sheet P V
Page 26 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
e ) Colour of Cores Maj. Vis. 100% -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
One
sample/Set
f ) Thermal Stability Cri. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
ting of each
size
g ) Core Identification Maj. Vis. -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V

10%
h ) Hot set test Maj. Physical 1sample / -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V

lot
i ) Diameter Maj. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
j ) Resistance Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
k ) Curing Maj. Vis. 100% -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
During m/c
4) Laying up a ) Identification of cores Maj. Vis. IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Reg./Sheet P V
setting
b ) Direction of lay & core
Maj. Vis. -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P V
sequence
c ) Lay length Minor Vis. -- do -- Once in a shift. Once in a shift. -- do -- P V
d ) Shape of laid up Reasonable Reasonable
Minor Vis. -- do -- -- do -- P V
assembly circular circular
e ) Dia. Over laid up
Maj. Physical -- do -- Once in a shift. Once in a shift. -- do -- P V
assembly
Page 27 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
BSES BSES
During m/c
5) Innersheath a ) Material & type Maj. Vis. specifications/ specifications/ Reg./Sheet P V
setting
IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
During m/s BSES BSES

b ) Thickness Maj. Physical setting & at specifications/ specifications/ -- do -- P V
std. length IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
BSES BSES
During m/c
c ) Dia. Over sheath Maj. Physical specifications/ specifications/ -- do -- P V
setting
IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
Surface shall be smooth and free

d ) Surface finish Minor Vis. 100% T.C P V
from defects
BSES
At the time BSES
a ) Dimension of armour specifications/
6) Armouring Maj. Physical of m/c specifications/ Reg./Sheet P V
wires/strips IS:7098-1/88
setting IS:7098-1/88
At the time BSES BSES

b ) No. of wires/strips Maj. Count of m/c specifications/ specifications/ -- do -- P V
setting IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
Page 28 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
One
sample/Set
c ) Direction of lay Maj. Vis. IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 -- do -- P V
ting of each
size

d ) Surface finish Maj. Vis. 100% T.C P V
from defects
At the time
e) Lay Length Minor Vis. of m/c IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Reg./Sheet P V
setting
f ) Coverage & quality of IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88

Maj. Vis. 100% -- do -- P V
armouring and IS:3975 and IS:3975
BSES BSES
During m/c
7) Outer Sheath a ) Material & type Maj. Vis. specifications/ specifications/ Reg./Sheet P V
setting
IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
During m/s BSES BSES

b ) Thickness Maj. Physical setting & at specifications/ specifications/ -- do -- P V
std. length IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
During m/s
c ) Overall diameter Maj. Physical setting & at Measurement Measurement -- do -- P V
std. length
Page 29 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0

d ) Surface finish Maj. Vis. 100% T.C P V
from defects
BSES BSES
e ) Embossing/Marking
Maj. Vis. 100% specifications/ specifications/ Reg./Sheet P V
quality
IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
BSES BSES
During m/c
f ) Colour of sheath Maj. Vis. specifications/ specifications/ -- do -- P V
setting
IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88
BSES BSES
g ) Sequential marking Maj. Vis. Full Length specifications/ specifications -- do -- P V
IS:7098-1/88 /IS:7098-1/88
C) Final Inspection
1) Routine Tests a ) Conductor Resistance Maj. Elec. 100% IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Test Report P V
b ) High Voltage Test Maj. Elec. 100% IS:7098-1/88 IS:7098-1/88 Test Report P V
Page 30 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Acceptance
2)
Tests
Acceptance test shall be carried out for each type and size of the cables on the cable drums randomly selected as per sampling plan mentioned in IS:7098
Part-1.
a ) Tensile Test As per As per IS:7098- As per IS:7098- Test
i) For Conductor Cri. Elec. P W
(for Aluminium) IS:7098-1/88 1/88 1/88 Certificate
b ) Wrapping Test
Cri. Elec. -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
(for Aluminium)
c ) Resistance Test Cri. Elec. -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
One sample
For armour
of each As per IS:7098- As per IS:7098-
wire/formed a ) Measurement of Measurem Test
ii) Cri. offered lot of 1/88 and 1/88 and P W
wire (as Dimensions ent Certificate
all offered IS:3975 IS:3975
applicable)
sizes
b ) Tensile Test Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
c ) Elongation Test Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
d ) Torsion Test (for
Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
round wires only)
e ) Wrapping Test Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
f ) Resistance Test Cri. Electrical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
g ) Mass of zinc
Cri. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
coating
h ) Uniformity of zinc
Cri. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
coating
Page 31 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
I ) Adhesion Test Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W

j ) Freedom from
Cri. Visual -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
defects
One sample
For XLPE of each As per IS:7098- As per IS:7098-
Measurem
iii) Insulation and a ) Test for thickness Cri. offered lot of 1/88 and 1/88 and Test Report P W
ent
PVC sheath all offered IS:1554-1/88 IS:1554-1/88
sizes
b ) Hot set test (for
Cri. Electrical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
insulation)
c ) Tensile strength
and Elongation at Cri. Physical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
break
d ) Thermal Stability
Test Cri. Chemical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
(for PVC sheath)
For As per IS:7098- As per IS:7098-
iv) Completed a ) High Voltage Test Cri. Electrical -- do -- 1/88 and 1/88 and -- do -- P W
Cables IS:1554-1/88 IS:1554-1/88
b ) Insulation
Resistance Test
Cri. Electrical -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- -- do -- P W
(Volume Resistivitty
Method)
As per IEC-332 As per IEC-332
(Part-3) (Part-3)
c ) Flammability Test Cri. Electrical -- do -- (Category-B) (Category-B) -- do -- P W
and IS:7098- and IS:7098-
1/88 1/88
Page 32 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
One length of Surface shall be smooth and free

d ) Surface Finish Maj. Physical T.C P W
each size from defects
e ) Length BSES BSES
1 drum per
Measurement Maj. Physical specifications/ specifications/I -- do -- P W
lot
(Rewinding) IS:7098-1/88 S:7098-1/88
BSES BSES
f ) Armour Coverage Maj. Physical -- do -- specifications/ specifications/I -- do -- P W
IS:7098-1/88 S:7098-1/88
Review
and
verification
3) Type Tests As per IS:7098-1/88 of type test
clearance
from BSES
Engg.
BSES
Packing & BSES
D a ) End Sealing Maj. Visual 100% specifications/ __________ P ____
Marking specifications/
IS:7098-1/88
IS:7098-1/88
BSES
BSES
b ) Stenciling/Marking Minor Visual 100% specifications/ __________ P ____
specifications/
IS:7098-1/88
IS:7098-1/88
BSES
BSES
c ) Packing Maj. Visual 100% specifications/ __________ P ____
specifications/
IS:7098-1/88
IS:7098-1/88
Page 33 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Note:-
1. BSES may witness raw material and in process inspection in addition to routine / acceptance / type test at any time or stage of manufacturing.
2. Checks specified above for Raw material, In process and Final inspection shall be as relevant to the specific cable construction.
Abbreviations used in the above Quality Plan :-
M Manufacturer P Perform
B BSES V Verification
Vis. Visual W Witness
Maj. Major T.C Test Certificates
Cri. Critical Reg. Register
Elec. Electrical
Page 34 of 35
SP-LTPC-63-R0
Annexure - F
List of Sub‐Vendors
For critical items
S. No. Description of Material Sub-Vendors
1 E.C Grade Aluminium Rod Bharat Aluminium Co. Ltd. (BALCO)

Hindustan Aluminium Co. Ltd. (HINDALCO)
National Aluminium Co. Ltd. (NALCO)
2 XLPE Compound Kalpena Industries Ltd.

KLJ Polymers and Chemicals Ltd.
Dow Chemical, U.S.A
Borealis, Sweden
Hanwha, Seoul, South Korea
Page 35 of 35
SP- INSFLR-103-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF INSULATING FLOORS IN SWITCHGEAR ROOMS
INDEX TABLE

1. SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 3
2. STANDARDS & CODES .............................................................................................. 3
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................... 3
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF INSULATING PAINTS ON FLOORS .................... 3
5. TESTING AND INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 4
6. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 4
7. DEVIATIONS ................................................................................................................ 4
8. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION ....................................................................................... 4
ANNEXURE A- GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF INSULATING FLOORS ....... 5
Page 2 of 6
SP- INSFLR-103-R0
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the basic requirement, the testing and inspection, supply and
installation/fixing of insulating paints on floors in front of the switchgear panels at BYPL grid
locations.
2. STANDARDS & CODES
2.1. IS 15652:2006 Specification of Insulating mats for electrical purposes

CEA guidelines,
2.2. Measures relating to safety and Electric supply
2010
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS
The insulating floor against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions.
Average Grade
3.1. Heavily polluted, Dry
atmosphere
Maximum altitude
3.2. 1000 meters
above sea level
Highest 50 deg C
Ambient air
3.3. Average 40 deg C
temperature
Minimum 0 deg C
3.4. Relative Humidity 10 to 100 %
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF INSULATING PAINTS ON FLOORS
General a. The Insulating coating shall be self leveling, solvent free, and
4.1. Properties have high breakdown voltage,loaded with special insulating
additives.
b. The material of the insulating floor shall be epoxy resin.
c. It shall be resistant to chemicals and oils.
d. It shall be tough, wear & weather resistant.
e. It shall exhibit high build, high adhesion with smooth and glossy
finish and slip resistant.
f. It shall be easy to apply/install, clean and repair on floors.
Colour of the The insulating floors shall be light Grey in colour
4.2. finished item
Class of the For 11kV voltage : Class B
4.3. insulating floor to For 33kV voltage : Class C
be used
Thickness of the For 33kV voltage : 3 mm +/- 10%
4.4. paint on floor For 11kV : 2.5 mm +/- 10%
Page 3 of 6
SP- INSFLR-103-R0
AC proof voltage For 33kV : 36kV minimum

4.5. For 11kV: 22 kV minimum
Dielectric strength For 33kV: 65kV rms
4.6. For 11kV: 45kV rms
5. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Routine and All the routine and acceptance tests shall be performed as per IS
5.1. Acceptance tests 15652. The purchaser reserves the right to witness the tests at the
in the factory time of inspection.
Inspection at site The purchaser reserves the right to verify the material at the time of
5.2. applying the insulating floors at site. Following tests shall also be
verified at site:
1. Dielectric strength
2. Ac proof voltage
3. Thickness
Type Test Reports All the Type test reports of the material to be used as the insulating
5.3. floors as per IS 15652 from CPRI/ERDA shall be submitted.
6. INSTALLATION
Application of a. The insulating paint shall be applied in accordance with

6.1. insulating paints manufacturer’s installation procedure.
b. The purchaser may witness the painting process.
7. DEVIATIONS
Deviations Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with the
7.1. tender by reference to the Specification clause and a description of
the alternative offer. In absence of such a statement, it will be
assumed that the bidder complies fully with this specification. No
8. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION
8.1. Complete product catalogue, and Manual
8.2. Type test reports from CPRI/ERDA

P.O. copy and Performance Certificates and feedback for similar type of job done in any
8.3. other power industry (distribution, transmission and generation).
8.4. Deviation Sheet (if any)
8.5. Filled copy of GTP (Annexure A)
Page 4 of 6
SP- INSFLR-103-R0
ANNEXURE A- GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF INSULATING FLOORS
S.
Particulars BYPL Requirements Bidder’s Data
No.
1 Make To be Specified
2 Application 11kV Indoor 33kV Indoor
Ambient temperature
3 range 0 to 50 deg C
4 Standard reference IS 15652:2006
5 Material to be used Epoxy Resin
Free from harmful physical
6 Surface finish irregularities
7 Solids 100% solvent free
8 Colour & Appearance Light grey , viscous liquid
9 Class of Coating B C
10 Mix Ratio
11 Specific Gravity
12 Pot life (in hrs)
13 Touch dry (in hrs)
14 Tack free (in hrs)
15 Hard dry (in hrs)
16 Full cure (in days)
17 Dimensions
17.1 Length According to the site requirements
17.2 Width 1000mm ± 20mm
17.3 Thickness 2.5 mm ± 10% 3 mm ± 10%

18 Dielectric Properties
Dielectric constant (ASTM
18.1 D150 - 150kHz)
Insulation resistance with minimum 106 M Ohm with 500V
18.2 water megger
18.2 Leakage current Not more than 10µA
18.3 AC dielectric strength 45kV rms (min) 65kV rms (min)
18.4 AC proof voltage 22kV 36kV
19 Mechanical Properties
Abrasion resistance
19.1 (ASTM D 4060)
Hardness shore D (ASTM
19.2 D 2240)
Scratch hardness (BS
19.3 3900E-2)
Pull-Off Adhesion (ASTM
19.4 D 4541)
Tensile strength (ASTM D
19.5 638)
Page 5 of 6
SP- INSFLR-103-R0
20 Temperature resistance
21 Gloss(ASTM D523)
22 Ageing Properties
Tensile strength &
elongation at break after not less than 75% of the
22.1 subjection mat to ageing corresponding values
Durability of coating (in
22.2 years)
23 Thermal Properties
23.1 Flame Retardance Self extinguishing
Class,
Lot no.,
Roll no.,
Manufacturer's name,
BYPL as a customer name,
Marking : Each coating BYPL PO no. and date,
23.2 shall be marked with BIS marking
24 Tests
Type test reports to be Type test reports not older than 5
24.1 submitted years from CPRI/ERDA lab
QAP for Acceptance and
24.2 Routine tests To be submitted
24.3 Acceptance test To be carried out during inspection
Page 6 of 6
SP-GES-107-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING PRACTICE IN GRID SUBSTATION
INDEX TABLE

1. SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 3
2. STANDARDS & CODES .............................................................................................. 3
3. REQUIREMENT OF EARTHING .................................................................................. 4
4. SPECIFICATION OF EARTHING MATERIALS .......................................................... 5
5. SIZES OF THE EARTHING MATERIALS FOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING ................ 6
6. TESTING AND INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 8
7. DEVIATIONS ................................................................................................................ 8
8. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION ....................................................................................... 9
9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS ............................................................ 9
ANNEXURE A1 : REFERENCE FAULT LEVEL .................................................................. 10
ANNEXURE A2: REFERENCE DRAWINGS........................................................................ 11
2|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the guidelines of earthing at 66/11, 33/11, 66/33/11 kV Grid substation and the
technical requirements of material required for earthing.
2. STANDARDS & CODES
Technical standards for construction of electrical plants and electrical

2.1. CEA guidelines
lines
2.2. IE Rules of 1956
2.3. IEEE Std 80 IEEE guide for safety in AC substation grounding
CBIP :2006 –
2.4. Manual on substation layout
publication no. 229
2.5. IS 3043: 1987 Code of practice for earthing
2.6. IS 2629 (1985) Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of Iron & Steel
2.7. IS 2633 (1986) Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated article
2.8. IS 5358 (1969) Specification for hot dip galvanized coating on fasteners
Specification of Hot dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other

2.9. IS 4759 (1996)
allied products
2.10. IS 1239 (2004) Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings- specification
2.11. IEC 62561-2 Requirements for conductors and earth electrodes
2.12. IEC 62561-7 Requirements for earthing enhancing compounds
2.13. UL 467 Standard for safety - Grounding and bonding equipment
2.14. Handbook on Electrical Earthing (Ministry of Railways)
3|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
3. REQUIREMENT OF EARTHING
Primary guidelines Following are primary guidelines for a good earthing system in a Grid
3.1. substation:
a. The impedance to ground should be as low as possible. In
general it should not exceed 0.5 ohm.
b. The step and touch potentials shall be within safe limits.
c. The contractor shall do the calculation for number of earthing
rods being used in a substation for achieving the desired earth
resistance.
Earthing lead size a. The actual size of earthing lead will depend on the maximum
3.2. fault current which the earthing lead will be required to carry
safely.
b. Please refer Annexure A1 for HT fault level.
Earthing type a. Rod earthing shall be provided for the Grid substation.
3.3. b. The size of the rod depends upon the current to be carried and
the type of the soil. Soil resistivity testing will be carried out by
vendor.
c. The Earth Electrode should be embedded vertically. Wherever
hard rock is encountered, the rod can be inclined at an angle of
about 30deg to the horizontal as per clause 9.2.2 of IS 3043.
d. The vertically driven rods shall be interconnected with each
other using horizontal grid conductors.
Earth Pit a. As per clause 20.5.2 of IS 3043, the minimum distance between
3.4. the vertical earth electrodes shall not be less than the length of
rod.
b. Minimum of 1m distance of earth pit from electrical equipment
and structures shall be maintained.
c. The earth pits shall be backfilled with earth enhancing material
as per Drawing .
d. Treated Earth pits shall be used where earth resistance value is
getting over the prescribed value in specification i.e. 0.5 ohms.
Horizontal Conductor a. The entire earth rod driven in ground vertically shall be
3.5. interconnected with earth grid conductors horizontally under the
ground.
b. The Horizontal conductors shall be laid 600 mm below FGL.
c. Minimum earth coverage of 300 mm shall be provided between
the Horizontal conductor and the bottom of
trench/foundation/underground pipe at the crossing.
d. Horizontal conductors around a building /switchyard fence shall
be buried outside the boundary at a minimum distance of 2000
mm.
e. Risers shall be provided 300mm above the ground level for
equipment earthing. Two number earth pits shall be provided
with riser for connection of transformer neutral.
f. All the joints between rods flats shall be exothermic type for
creating better electrical contact between two. Welding between
rods to flat, flat to flat should be arc welding type.
g. Wherever bolted connection is done, it shall be done through
two bolts at each joint to ensure tightness and avoid loosening
with passage of time.
Equipment earthing a. GI strips shall be used for the equipment earthing.
3.6. b. Two separate and distinct earth connections shall be provided
for earthing of electrical frameworks.
4|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
c. The connection of GI strip with riser of earth mat shall be electric

arc welding arrangement; connection of equipment with earthing
end shall be double bolted arrangement.
d. The transformer neutral shall be earthed with two independent
grounding conductors connected to two separate earth pits.
e. Fence within the earth grid shall be bonded to the plant earth
system at regular interval not exceeding 10 meters. Fence gate
shall be separately earthed with flexible connection to permit
movement.
f. Bolted connection shall be made only for earthing of
equipment/devices and for some removable structures. The
contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connection
to ensure good electrical contact.
g. Cable armor shall be earthed at both ends for multi core cables.
For single core cables, the earthing shall be at switchgear end
only.
h. Metallic stairs and hand rails shall be earthed as for columns.
Additionally a 25x6 GI flat shall run the entire length of the stairs.
The GI flat shall be welded to the stairs and hand rails at
intervals of 1500 mm.
i. The main earth conductor shall be securely fixed to the columns
/walls/trays by welding /clamping at the intervals not exceeding
1500 mm. The earth conductors shall be interconnected
between them and to the main earth grid through risers.
4. SPECIFICATION OF EARTHING MATERIALS
a. Fully galvanized iron strips shall be used conforming to IS 2629.

4.1. b. The zinc deposition shall not be less than 610gm/sqm of the
galvanized surface area of the MS Earthing strips.
c. The zinc coating used for the galvanization shall be of 9.99 %
GI earthing strip purity grade as per IS 209.
d. All the galvanized material shall be checked for uniformity and
weight as per IS.
e. The standard length of galvanized iron earthing strip shall be
minimum 7Mtrs.
a. Copper clad steel rod driven in the earth vertically shall be a high
tensile-low carbon steel rod of adequate diameter(as per the
clause 6.0 of the specs) and 3 m length complying UL467,
IEC62561-2 and IS 3043, molecularly bonded by 99.99% pure
high conductivity copper on the outer surface with copper
coating thickness 254 microns or more with sufficient amount of
earth enhancement compound as per IEC 62561-7.
Vertical and Horizontal b. Copper bonding must be UL/CPRI/ERDA certified.
4.2. Earth Electrode c. Rod shall be tested and certified from CPRI/ERDA for a short
circuit current withstanding of desired value.
d. There shall be following marking on the rod-Dimension Detail,
product model no, Reference number of certification.
e. It shall have high corrosion resistance and shall eliminate
electrolytic action.
f. The rod shall have thread profile at both the ends to ensure no
copper is removed from the steel.
5|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
a. It shall be as per IEC 62561-7.

4.3. b. It shall be chemically inert to subsoil.
c. It shall not pollute the environment. The RoHS certificate shall
be provided from any NABL accredited lab for not having any
toxic chemical in earth enhance material.
d. It shall provide a stable environment in terms of physical and
chemical properties and exhibit low resistivity.
Earth enhancing e. The earthing enhancing compound shall not be corrosive to the
compound earth electrodes being used.
f. It shall be maintenance free.
g. The earth enhancement material shall be supplied in sealed,
moisture proof bags. These bags shall be marked with
manufacturer’s name or trade name, quantity, batch no. & date
of manufacturer, resistivity, Buyer’s name, PO no. & date.
h. As per IEEE 80-2013 clause 14.5 d, grounding material shall be
tested and certified for resistivity less than 0.12 Ω-m.
5. SIZES OF THE EARTHING MATERIALS FOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING
Sizes of the No of
S.No. Title Material Type UOM
earthing Lead
Main Earthing
Grid
Cu
5.1 Vertical Rods Bonded 25 Rod mm (dia)
Rods
Above Ground
5.2 GI 50x10 Flat sqmm 2
risers
Cu
5.3 Horizontal Rods Bonded 25 Rod mm (dia)
Rods
Cu
5.4 Treated Earth Pit Bonded 25 Rod mm (dia)
Rods
Power
Transformers
5.5 Frame GI 75X10 Flat sqmm 2
5.6 Marshalling Box GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
5.7 Radiator GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
5.8 Neutral GI 65x10 Flat sqmm 2
5.9 Fan GI As per sizes mentioned for fans
11 KV System
11 KV
5.10 GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
Swithcgear
6|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
5.11 11 KV Bus Duct GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
5.12 11 KV Cable Box GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
415 V System
5.13 ACDB GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
Station Trafo
Frame
DC System
5.15 Battery Charger GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
5.16 DCDB GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
Other Electrical
Items
Three phase
5.17 receptacles, GI 25x3 Flat sqmm 1
welding outlet
5.18 C&R Panel GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 2
5.19 Push Button GI 8 Wire swg 1

Cable Trays(one
5.20 run along the GI 50X6 Flat sqmm 1
tray section)
Other Non
Electrical Items
At
5.21 Railway Tracks GI 25x6 Flat sqmm suitable
Points
Metallic
noncurrent
5.22 carrying GI 25x6 Flat sqmm 1
structures like
stair case
Columns,
Structures
5.24 Steel pipe racks GI 25x6 Flat sqmm 1

At
suitable
5.25 Fence/Gate GI 50X6 Flat sqmm
Points(2
min)
5.26 Hand Rail GI 8 Wire swg 1
7|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
6. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Earthing materials a. The purchaser reserves the right to inspect the material at the time
6.1. of tests. All tests shall be performed in the presence of BYPL
representative. The bidder shall give intimation in advance to
witness the test.
b. Acceptance test for GI earthing strips – Tests for Visual
examination, dimensional verification and galvanization shall be
witnessed at the time of inspection.
c. Acceptance test of Earth enhancement compound – Tests for
leaching, sulphur determination, corrosion and resistivity shall be
done as per IEC 62561-7
d. Type test reports of the earthing materials from
CPRI/ERDA/Equivalent lab shall be submitted. The bidder shall
submit UL-467/CPRI/ERDA test reports for copper clad steel rod.
Measurement of a. After the completion of work ground resistance of each installation
6.2. Earth resistance shall be measured by BYPL/Contractor.
b. The measurement of resistance shall be witnessed and signed by
representative of BYPL as well as the contractor. The test
certificates shall be generated for each installation clearly indicating
the details of the transformer, name of the substation, location,
district, serial no. of testing equipment and name of testing engineer.
c. The desire ground resistance shall be measured after
interconnection of earth pits is completed. The value of earth
resistance shall not be more than 0.5 ohm.
d. In case where this value exceeds 0.5 ohms, the earthing design
shall be redesigned. The pit location, earth electrode, soil treatment,
earth conductor, GI strip used shall be checked whether properly
used at site. If not, these shall be changed as per the redesigned
plan.
7. DEVIATIONS
Deviation Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with the
7.1. tender by reference to the Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a
description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a statement, it
will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this specification.
No deviation will be acceptable post order.
8|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
8. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION
8.1. Complete earthing calculation
8.2. Complete product catalogue, Manual and calibration certificate of the equipment
8.3. Type test reports
8.4. Deviation Sheet (if any)
9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
S. No Parameter BYPL Requirement Vendor Data
9.1 Rod to rod welding Exothermic
9.2 Zinc deposition of GI earthing Strip 610gm/sqm
9.3 Length of GI Strip 7m (Minimum)
9.4 Diameter of Cu clad Rod 25 mm
9.5 UL/CPRI/ERDA Certification of Cu Bonding Test certificate to be provided
9.6 Cu bonding 250 Micron
9.7 Length of Copper bonded rod 3m
9.8 Purity of Copper 99.99%
9.9 Short circuit withstand test of Rod 31.5kA
Marking on the rod-Dimension Detail, product

9.10 Sample Required
model no, Reference number of certification
ROHS Certificate from NABL accredited lab

9.11 for not having toxic chemical in earth Test certificate to be provided
enhance material
9.12 Resistivity of earth enhancing material 0.12 ohm-m(Max)
9|Page
SP-GES-107-R0
9.13 Exothermic welding material IEEE 837 Complied
9.14 Make of Steel SAIL/ESSAR/TATA
ANNEXURE A1 : REFERENCE FAULT LEVEL
Voltage Level(kV) Design Fault Level
66/11 31.5 KA
33/11 25 KA
10 | P a g e
SP-GES-107-R0
ANNEXURE A2: REFERENCE DRAWINGS
11 | P a g e
SP-TSFPMK-134-R0

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
OF MOTIA KHAN GRID S/S
Page 1 of 3

SP-TSFPMK-134-R0

1. Automatic fire detection system
The Existing grid already has the fully addressable automatic fire detection
system and smoke aspiration system installed in the existing panel rooms. The new
panel room to be installed with the fully addressable smoke detectors compactable to
the existing panel and the smoke aspiration system.
Details of the panel and the detectors are as follows.
SN
ITEM SPECIFICATION MAKE
O
2-32 zone digitally addressable zones with each
Digital addressable fire
zone support 20 addressable devices, Network
1 alarm panel (PX- ASES
able, PC based graphic software for easy
16E/32E)
monitoring, support ASES addressable MCP.
Keypad with feather touch switch for zone
selection, gooseneck mike attached for
2 PA console announcement, main, Ac fail, fuse blown LED ASES
indication, inbuilt battery charger and battery upto
25AH.
Aspirating smoke
3 detector system (ASD Alarm sensitivity range of 0.02%/m to 10%/m. SECURITON
531)
Photoelectric smoke Tested and approved to EN54-7:2000, Bi-color SYSTEM
4
detector LED detector status indicator SENSOR
Rate of rise and fixed
SYSTEM
5 temperature thermal Tested and approved to EN54-5:2000 class A1R
SENSOR
detector
Digital addressable
Digital addressable communications, DIP switch
6 monitor module (PX-DA- ASES
for addressing of module,
MM)
Digital addressable
7 ASES
manual call point
8 Conventional Sounder ASES
Compatibility with any make conventional two
9 Talk Back unit way communication system, integrated alarm test ASES
key features.
10 Sinages Reputed
Page 2 of 3

SP-TSFPMK-134-R0

2. First Aid Fire Extinguishers
The first aid fire extinguishers are already place in the conspicuous places in the
existing installations. The vendor has to provide the following quantity of first aid fire
extinguishers of make CeaseFire or Minimax only.
Quantity of F.E for 33kV grid:
4.5 kg CO2 ---- 2 nos

22.5 kg CO2 ---- 2 nos
6 kg ABC (MAP 90) ---- 2 nos
75kg ABC (MAP 90) ---- 1 nos
3. Fire Bucket with Stand
Fire bucket stand having provision to hang 4 fire buckets with dry sand filled and a
suitable top cover to avoid the ingression of water during rain. The fire bucket must
comply with the IS 2546.
The vendor has to provide two stand, 8 buckets with dry sand filled.
Page 3 of 3

SP-TSILS-135-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ILLUMINATION & LIGHTING SYSTEM
INDEX
1. SCOPE .............................................................................................................................3

2. STANDARDS AND CODES .............................................................................................3
3. ILLUMINATION SYSTEM ................................................................................................4
4. DISTRIBUTION PILLARS FOR NORMAL ILLUMINATION SYSTEM .............................6
5. LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ..............................................................................7
6. MAIN EMERGENCY LIGHTING BOARD ........................................................................8
7. LUMINAIRES ...................................................................................................................8
8. JUNCTION BOXES/WALL BOXES ...............................................................................10
9. AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROLLER ......................................................................10
10. SOCKETS & SWITCHES ...............................................................................................10
11. NAMEPLATE & MARKING ............................................................................................11
12. APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS .......................................................................11
13. INSPECTION & TESTING .............................................................................................12
14. DEVIATION ....................................................................................................................12
Page 2 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
1. SCOPE
The specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly and testing
at manufacturer’s work, supply and installation of Illumination system for substation
including normal distribution pillars, normal lighting board, emergency distribution
pillar, emergency lighting board, Junction boxes, Illumination lamps with required lux
level.
2. STANDARDS AND CODES
Standard Code Standard Description

IS 16101 : 2012 General Lighting -LEDs and LED modules – Terms and
Definitions
IS16102(Part 1) 2012 Self-Ballasted LED Lamps for General Lighting Services, Part 1
Safety Requirements
IS16102(Part 2) 2012 Self-Ballasted LED Lamps for General Lighting Services, Part 2
Performance Requirements
IS16103(Part 1) 2012 Led Modules for General Lighting, Part 1Safety Requirements
IS16103(Part 2) 2012 Led Modules for General Lighting, Part 2 Performance
Requirements
Safety of Lamp Control Gear ,
Part 2 Particular Requirements ,
IS15885(Part2/Sec13)
Section 13 dc. or ac. Supplied Electronic Control gear for Led
Modules
IS16104 : 2012 d.c. or a.c. Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules -
Performance Requirements
IS16105 : 2012 Method of Measurement of Lumen Maintenance of Solid State
Light (LED) Sources
IS16106 : 2012 Method of Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-
State Lighting (LED) Products
IS 16107(Part 1)2012 Luminaires Performance ,Part 1 General Requirements
IS 16107(Part 2)2012 Luminaires Performance, Part 2 Particular Requirements
,Section 1 LED Luminaire
IS 16108 : 2012 Photo biological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems
IS 10322 : 2012 Luminaires: Part 5 Particular requirements, Section 3
Luminaires for road and street lighting
IS 5 Colours for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS 613 Copper Rods and Bars for electrical purposes
IS 694 PVC Insulated cables for working voltages up to and including
1100 V
IS 2551 Danger notice plates
IS 5082 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium alloy bars, rods, tubes and
sections for electrical purpose
IS 6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS 13703 LV Fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V ac or 1500V dc
IS 10118 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of
Switchgear and Controlgear
International Standard
Page 3 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
IEC 62612 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services for
voltage above 50 V — Performance requirements
IEC : 60598-2-3 Particular requirements - Luminaries for road and street lighting
IEC 62471 Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp systems
IEC 62778 Application of IEC 62471 for the assessment of blue light
hazard to light sources and luminaries
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-5: Testing and
measurement techniques - Surge immunity test
IEC 60439 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear assemblies - Type
tested and partially type tested assemblies
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60947-1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - General Rules
IEC 60947-2 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Circuit breakers
IEC 61643 Low-voltage surge protective devices
3. ILLUMINATION SYSTEM
3.1. Lux level 3.1.1. The design of the illumination system shall ensure
requirement availability of the average illumination levels as specified
below with the maximum possible uniformity in the entire
substation. The illumination system shall consist of the
normal lighting system and emergency lighting system.
The minimum illumination levels shall be as specified
below(Reference IS3646(Part II)).
3.1.1.1. Outdoor Substation : 20 lux
3.1.1.2. Roads within substation : 20 lux
3.1.1.3. Boundary wall of the substation : 10 lux
3.1.1.4. Control room : 300 lux
3.1.1.5. Switchgear Room : 200 lux
3.1.1.6. Battery room : 100 lux
3.1.1.7. Stair case : 100 lux
3.1.1.8. Transformers : 100 lux
3.1.2. The illumination level of specific spots such as operating
mechanisms of Capacitor bank isolator, oil level and
temperature gauges of transformer etc. shall be minimum
50 Lux. Contractor shall design the lighting system with
the help of desired software. Owner shall verify the same
post commissioning with lux meter to check the levels. In
case desired lux levels are not met contractor has to install
addition fitting in outdoor and indoor location as per
requirement.
3.1.3. Complete design calculation sheets for arriving at the
number of luminaires required for the normal and
emergency requirements shall be furnished by the bidder.
Design calculation sheets for the selection of cables,
MCB, HRC fuses, bus bars, etc. are also required to be
furnished for Owner's approval.
Page 4 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
3.2. Illumination 3.2.1. The illumination system load and welding load in the
circuit substation area shall be supplied from 415/230 volt
ACDBs to be provided in the substation control room.
Requisite numbers of 3-phase, 4-wire, cable circuits for
illumination system and welding socket outlets shall be
extended from the above board. The laying of cables from
the Board to the illumination system/welding socket outlets
and their installation are included in the Bidder’s scope.
3.2.2. Each outgoing cable circuit for illumination loads from the
415 volt switchboard shall terminate in the respective
outdoor pillar boxes located in the substation. Outgoing
feeders from the illumination shall be taken to the various
illumination points in the substation. Necessary fuses shall
be provided near light fixtures in the substation.
3.2.3. The emergency illumination load shall be supplied from
the main emergency illumination board located in the
control room. Necessary cable circuits with appropriate
fuses shall be provided by the Contractor for the supply
system for emergency illumination load of the substation.
3.2.4. Emergency DC lighting system shall be provided in the
substation wherever required. The emergency lighting
shall be adequate for safe movement by the operating
personnel in the substation in the event of failure of normal
lighting system. Number of lights shall be decided at the
time of detailed engineering. A total of minimum 12 no’s
individually controllable 60 watt lamps shall be provided in
the substation.
3.3. Wiring 3.3.1. All lighting fixtures and 5A convenience outlets shall be
wired with 1.1 KV grade PVC insulated extra flexible,
multistranded, copper conductor cables of size not less
than 2.5 sq.mm.
3.3.2. For 15A heavy-duty outlets copper conductor cables of
size not less than 6 sq. mm shall be used.
3.3.3. The wiring shall consist of phase, neutral and ground. For
grounding the lighting fixtures/convenience outlets etc., GI
wire of size not less than 14 SWG shall be used. The
phase and neutral conductor shall be suitably colour
coded.
3.3.4. Supply shall be looped between the lighting fixtures of the
same circuit by using junction boxes. For this purpose
one (1) 100 mm x 100 mm square junction box shall be
provided for each lighting fixture. For recessed lighting
fixtures, supply shall be extended from the junction boxes
to the fixtures by means of flexible conduits. While for
stem-mounted/wall-mounted lighting fixtures the junction
box shall be mounted below one of the mounting stems.
3.3.5. For lighting branch circuits the nos. of lighting switches
shall be decided keeping in mind the ease of control, as
well as to limit the current to 2.5A per circuit.
3.3.6. For convenience outlets, the bidder shall design the wiring
scheme so as to limit 6 nos. of 5A outlets per branch
Page 5 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
circuit and two nos. of 15A outlets per branch circuit.

3.3.7. All wiring materials such as terminals, crimping lugs,
ferrules etc. shall also be provided by the Contractor.
3.3.8. No section of the conduit shall be filled with more than
70% of its area. Any consumable material that is required
for pulling the wires through conduit shall also be provided
by the Contractor.
3.3.9. Lighting fixtures coming in one area shall be evenly
distributed between three phases so that tripping of one
phase or two phases does not cause total loss of
illumination in that area.
3.4. Required Complete manufacturer's literature/catalogues, performance

documents to curves, illumination distribution curves, G.A. drawings, specification
be submitted sheets, etc. as relevant in respect of all materials/equipment to be
supplied shall be submitted by the Contractor.
3.5. Illumination After completion of installation of the illumination system in the
system check substation, the actual illumination level at different locations shall be
after installation measured by the Contractor in the presence of Owner's authorised
representative. If the average value of the measured illumination
levels is found to fall short of the specified levels, the Contractor
shall have to provide additional lighting fixtures so as to achieve the
specified levels of illumination at no additional cost to the Owner.
While measuring the illumination levels due allowance shall be
made on account of maintenance factor. The specified lux levels
shall be suitably increased to cover maintenance factor of 0.6 for
outdoor areas.
4. DISTRIBUTION PILLARS FOR NORMAL ILLUMINATION SYSTEM
4.1. Construction 4.1.1. Distribution pillars of adequate dimensions shall be

constructed from sheet steel having a thickness not less
than 2 mm.
4.1.2. The pillars shall be totally enclosed weather-proof,
dustproof, vermin-proof, having hinged doors with locking
arrangement and shall be capable of being mounted in the
substation.
4.1.3. The pillars suitable for cable entry at the bottom shall be
designed for easy access of connections to terminals and
inspection of equipment mounted therein.
4.1.4. The degree of protection of the board shall be IP55.
4.1.5. The enclosure shall be painted externally with Shade No.,
692 of IS:5 and internally with brilliant white of semi-glossy
finish of IS:5.
4.2. Configuration 4.2.1. Each pillar shall accommodate the following:

4.2.2. One incoming, 4-pole (3 phase and neutral) isolating
switch with MCB of appropriate current rating.
4.2.3. 3-phase and neutral bus bars of appropriate current rating.
4.2.4. Single-pole earth leakage circuit breakers of suitable
current ratings on all outgoing circuits.
Page 6 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
4.2.5. Neutral links for all outgoing circuits.

4.2.6. Cable lugs, compression type cable glands, name plates,
circuit numbers, earthing lugs, etc. to make the pillar
complete in all respects.
4.2.7. 20% spare outlets shall be provided for outgoing feeders.
4.2.8. Three (3) indicating lamps with fuses to indicate that
supply is 'ON'.
5. LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
5.1. Construction 5.1.1. Metal-clad enclosure with minimum 2 mm CRCA sheets

for load-bearing members and 1.6 mm for non load-
bearing members suitably reinforced with structural.
5.1.2. 3-phase, 4-wire bus bar system with high conductivity
aluminium busbars mounting on FRP insulators having
anti-tractive property with minimum 25 mm phase-to-
phase and minimum 19 mm phase-to-earth clearances.
The busbars shall be uniform throughout the length of the
LDB and busbar joints shall be silver plated and covered
with shrouds.
5.1.3. All cables shall enter from the bottom.
5.1.4. The degree of protection for the LDB shall be IP-54.
692 of IS:5 and internally with brilliant white of semi-glossy
finish of IS:5.
5.2. Configuration Each LDB shall accommodate the following:
5.2.1. One incoming, 4-pole (3 phase and neutral) isolating

switch with MCB of appropriate current rating.
5.2.2. 3-phase and neutral bus bars of appropriate current rating.
5.2.3. 4 Pole outgoing MCBs of appropriate rating
5.2.4. Cable lugs, compression type cable glands, name plates,
circuit numbers, earthing lugs, etc. to make the pillar
5.2.5. 20% spare outlets shall be provided for outgoing feeders.
5.2.6. Three (3) Nos. indication lamps (Red, Yellow, Blue) shall
be provided to indicate that the incoming supply is
available. Similarly, 3 Nos. indication lamps shall be
provided to indicate that the busbar is energised.
5.3. Busbar 5.3.1. The busbars shall be suitable for short-time current rating
of 40KA for 1 Sec.
5.3.2. The busbar temperature rise shall not exceed 35 Deg C
over an ambient of 50 Deg C.
5.3.3. The LDBs shall be provided with a continuous busbar of
25 x 6 sq.mm (electrolytic copper) with suitable hardware
for connection to the main grounding grid
Page 7 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
6. MAIN EMERGENCY LIGHTING BOARD
6.1. Construction 6.1.1. Metal-clad enclosure with minimum 2 mm CRCA sheets

for load-bearing members and 1.6 mm for non load-
bearing members suitably reinforced with structural.
6.1.2. All cables shall enter from the bottom.
6.1.3. The degree of protection for the LDB shall be IP-54.
692 to IS:5 and internally with brilliant white of semi-glossy
finish to IS:5.
6.2. Configuration 6.2.1. Each Board shall accommodate the followings:

6.2.2. Automatic changeover contactor.
6.2.3. Voltage sensing relays.
6.2.4. Time delay relay.
6.2.5. Bus Bars.
6.2.6. Two pole MCBs of adequate ratings for incoming and
outgoing feeders.
6.2.7. Test switch, push button type.
6.2.8. Indicating lamps, ac - Green, dc - Red.
6.2.9. Terminals for remote indication
6.2.10. Cable lugs, compression type cable glands, name-plates,
circuit numbers, earthing lugs and remote indication wiring
upto substation 415V a.c. control board, to make the board
6.3. Changeover The main emergency lighting board shall have an automatic
facility changeover switch to energise the dc lighting system in the event of
AC power failure. It shall have voltage-sensing relays to perform the
changeover automatically when AC voltage of any one phase falls
below 60 percent of 240 volts and continues at that low level for
more than 10 seconds. These shall changeover from DC to AC
again when 70 percent of 240 volt is restored and this continues for
10 seconds.
6.4. Emergency Local Emergency Lighting Pillar shall be identical in details to
Lighting Pillar Lighting Distribution Pillar specified in clause 4 except that it shall
have two pole isolating switch fuse unit on the incoming side and
only two busbars and shall be without neutral links.
7. LUMINAIRES
7.1. Luminaires type Luminaires for use in normal and emergency illumination systems
in the substation shall be suitable for LED lamps. All the
luminaires shall be supplied complete with all accessories and
lamps. The LED lamps ratings shall be adequate to achieve the
required Lux level and calculation for number of luminaires shall
be in the bidder’s scope. Minimum rating shall be a follows -
7.1.1. Outdoor – 90W minimum

7.1.2. Indoor – 36W minimum
Page 8 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
7.2. Flood lights The flood light luminaires in the substation shall be fixed at suitable
height on the substation structures/ building, so as to provide the
specified average illumination in the substation area without
causing any glare to the operational/ maintenance staff working in
the substation. While fixing the luminaires it shall be ensured that
the stipulated electrical clearances are not violated. The Contractor
shall supply and install suitable type of non-mettalic street light
poles or octagonal galvanished poles required for installing the
fittings for illuminating the roads, fence boundary wall etc.
7.3. Reliability Substation lighting circuits shall be divided into two or three
sections and provided with time switches of suitable ratings.
7.4. Design features for Outdoor Luminaires
7.5. Fixture 7.5.1. The luminaries housing shall be either extruded or

pressure die casted aluminium of minimum 1.6 mm
thickness. Body must be Corrosion Resistant Powder
Coated and UV resistant.
7.5.2. The entire housing shall be dust and waterproof having
Ingress protection of housing as IP65 or above as per
IEC 60529.
7.5.3. Luminaire should be covered with suitable Glass or
diffuser with high Transitivity. All luminaires shall be
supplied with either clear toughened glass or clear
polycarbonate cover for better IP retention and higher
life.
7.6. LED 7.6.1. The luminous efficacy of LED luminaire shall b e

a t l e a s t 85 lumen/watt.
7.6.2. LED module efficacy shall not be less than 90 percent of
the rated LED module Efficacy.
7.6.3. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be at least 70
7.6.4. Color Temperature shall be 5500-6500K
7.6.5. Uniformity Emin/Eavg> 0.4, Emin/Emax>0.33
7.7. LED Driver LED driver shall have following features:
7.7.1. LED driver shall be applicable for Power supply 240V

AC±10%, at 50Hz+3% / -5%.
7.7.2. Output voltage of the driver shall be designed to meet
the Power Requirements of the system.
7.7.3. Power factor of complete fitting shall be more than 0.90
at full load.
7.7.4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall be < 10 %
7.8. General 7.8.1. The connecting wires used inside the Luminaire, shall be
Requirements low smoke halogen free, fire retardant e-beam cable and
fuse protection shall be provided in input side.
7.8.2. The lumen maintenance of a l l the LED fixtures shall
not be less than 70% after 50,000 hours.
7.8.3. Built in protection features for Short circuit, Surges (at
least upto 5kV), and overvoltage shall be provided.
Page 9 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
7.8.4. High /Low voltage cut-off shall be provided.

7.8.5. The whole luminaire shall be eco-friendly green
technology based i.e. mercury free.
7.8.6. No UV and IR radiations shall be produced.
7.8.7. Access of driver for maintenance shall be provided at the
top/side of the luminaire fixture.
7.8.8. All fasteners must be of stainless steel.
8. JUNCTION BOXES/WALL BOXES
8.1. Size 100 mm x 100 mm junction boxes and wall boxes of standard
size shall be provided.
8.2. Construction Wall boxes and junction boxes shall be made of FRP with a
thickness of 2.0mm. Necessary conduit termination fittings such
as bushings, locknuts etc. also be provided.
9. AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROLLER
9.1. Size Contractor shall provide microprocessor based automatic lighting

controller for controlling switching arrangement of indoor and
outdoor lighting. The controller shall have provision of setting 52
week ON / OFF time as per astronomical clock or as per user
requirement. All abnormal events shall be recorded in the
controller. Secure / Genus or equivalent are approved makes.
10. SOCKETS & SWITCHES
10.1. Indoor All sockets and switches shall be modular and universal type
suitable for 5/15A
10.2. Outdoor Two nos transformer oil filtration sockets shall be provided, one
at each transformer bay. These sockets shall be three phase
industrial type and rated for 100A.
Page 10 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
11. NAMEPLATE & MARKING
11.1. Name plate Followings shall be clearly engraved / embossed on the die cast
details of LED housing of LED:
housing Rated voltage or voltage range (marked ‘V’ or ‘Volt’);
11.1.1. Rated current (marked A’ or ‘Ampere’);

11.1.2. Rated wattage (marked ‘W’ or ‘Watts’);
11.1.3. Rated frequency (marked in ‘Hz’)
11.1.4. Rated lumen
11.1.5. Indian/International Standards to which it is
manufactured
11.1.6. Month and year manufacture
11.1.7. Customer Name - BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
11.1.8. Fitting serial number
11.1.9. PO no and date
11.1.10. Guarantee period
11.2.
Panel nameplate and marking details
11.2.1. Panel Panel shall have a nameplate clearly indicating the following:
nameplate
11.2.1.1. Panel Serial No.-
11.2.1.2. Customer Name - BSES Yamuna Power Ltd
11.2.1.3. PO No. & date -
11.2.1.4. Panel Name -
11.2.1.5. Current rating -
11.2.1.6. Guarantee period -
11.2.2. Feeder Large and bold name plate carrying the feeder identification shall
nameplate be provided on the top of each module.
11.2.3. Danger plate Panel shall have a danger plate of anodized Aluminium clearly
indicating the danger logo and voltage details.
11.2.4. Material Anodized Aluminium 16SWG. Nameplates shall be satin silver in
colour with black letters engraved on them. Stickers are not
allowed.
11.2.5. Fixing All nameplates shall be riveted to the panels at all four corners.
Bolting/screwing is not acceptable.
12. APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS
12.1. Relays ABB/Jyoti/Omran
12.2. HRC Fuse GE/ Siemens/ L&T

Links
12.3. AC L&T/Siemens/Telemechanique/GE/ABB
Contractors/
DC contactor
Page 11 of 12
SP-TSILS-135-R0
12.4. Terminals Connectwell/Elmex/Wago/Phoenix
12.5. Push buttons / L&T/Siemens/Vaishno/Schneider

Actuator
12.6. MCB Legrand/Hager/Schneider/ABB
12.7. LED NICHIA/ OSRAM/ CREE/ PHILIPS//EDISON
12.8. Luminaire GE/Philips/Crompton/Bajaj

fittings
12.9. Indicating Vaishno/Binay/Teknic/Siemens/Mimic/C&S
lamps
13. INSPECTION & TESTING
13.1. Type test All Equipment should be of type tested quality only, type test
certificate to be submitted along with offer. If the manufacturer’s
lab is accredited by govt. / authorized body then it shall be
acceptable for type testing.
13.2. Acceptance & As per relevant Indian standard
Routine tests
14. DEVIATION
14.1. Deviation Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with
the tender by reference to the Specification clause/GTP/Drawing
and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with
this specification. No deviation will be acceptable post order.
Page 12 of 12
SP-EVS-130-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EXHAUST AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
INDEX
1. INTENT OF SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................... 3

2. SCOPE OF SUPPLY ............................................................................................................ 3
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENT .............................................................................................. 3
4. DESIGN CRITERIA ............................................................................................................ 3
5. DEVIATION ........................................................................................................................ 4
Page 2 of 4
SP-EVS-130-R0
1. INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
This specification is intended to cover the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at

manufacturer’s works, supply & delivery, properly packed for transport at site of Air
Conditioning system and Ventilation system for substation control room building complete
with all materials and accessories for efficient and trouble free operation.
In the event of any discrepancy with the listed documents, the stipulation of this
specification shall govern.
2. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The following equipment shall be furnished with all accessories: -
2.1. Exhaust and supply air fans for ventilation

2.2. 5 star rated split air-conditioner for control room only
2.3. All necessary components for operation of the above equipment.
2.4. All wiring & accessories to complete the installation.
2.5. All relevant drawings, data & instruction manuals.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
3.1. All equipment and material shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance
with the latest applicable Indian Standards except where modified and/or
supplemented by this specification.
3.2. Equipment and materials conforming to any other standard, which ensures equal or
greater quality, may be accepted. In such case copies of the English version of the
standard adopted shall be submitted along with the bid.
4. DESIGN CRITERIA
4.1. Exhaust system
Industrial type Axial Exhaust fan of propeller type / axial type shall be provided for
rooms with suitable drive motor, DOL starter, rain protection cowl with screen,
grouting bolts etc. Fan for battery room shall be bifurcated type spark proof
construction. The quantity shall be based on calculation. Minimum requirement is
given in the subsequent sections.
4.2. Exhaust fan shall be supplied in:
a. Switchgear room – 3 no’s heavy duty with sweep of 600mm

b. Battery Room – 2 no’s with sweep of 600mm
c. Toilet – 1 no (200mm domestic exhaust fan)
Page 3 of 4
SP-EVS-130-R0
4.3. Industrial type wall mounted fan shall be provided as follows -

a. Battery room – 1 No, air circulator 600mm
b. Control room – 3 No’s, domestic 450mm sweep
c. Switchgear Room – 4 No’s, air circulator 600mm
4.4. Air Conditioning
5 star Split air conditioners shall be provided in control room building of to maintain
the temperature at 25 degrees Celsius. N-1 redundancy shall be provided for air-
conditioning system. Make of air conditioners shall be Daikin / Hitachi/ O-General
make.
4.5. All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have fungus protection, involving special
treatment of insulation and metal against fungus, insects and corrosion.
5. DEVIATION
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such
a statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this specification. No
Page 4 of 4
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORK AT MOTIA KHAN GRID S/S
INDEX
1 INTENT ............................................................................................................................... 3
2 CODES & STANDARDS .................................................................................................... 3
3 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................. 5
4 GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN .............................................................................................. 5
5 CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION WORK ............................................................................ 6
6 INTERFACING .................................................................................................................. 12
7 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENT ............................................................. 12
8 INSPECTION & TESTING ................................................................................................ 12
9 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION ................................................................................ 13
10 QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................ 13
11 STATUTORY RULES ....................................................................................................... 13
12 DEVIATIONS .................................................................................................................... 14
Page 2 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
1 INTENT
The specification covers the following:
a. Design, engineering, and construction of civil works at 33/11KV Motia Khan Grid-
Delhi. All civil works shall also satisfy the general technical requirements specified in
other Sections of this Specification and as detailed below.
b. They shall be designed to the required service condition / loads as specified

elsewhere in this Specification or implied as per National and International
Standards.
c. All civil works shall be carried out as per applicable Indian Laws, Standards and
Codes. All materials shall be of best quality conforming to this specification, relevant
Indian Standards and Codes.
d. The Contractor shall furnish all design, drawings, labour, tools, equipment, materials,
temporary works, constructional plant and machinery, fuel supply, transportation and
all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for complete
performance of the Works in accordance with approved drawings, specifications and
direction of Owner.
e. The work shall be carried out according to the design/drawings to be developed by

the bidder and approved by the Owner. The electrical layout for the substation is
provided along with the specification. Bidder shall develop design/repair work
keeping in view the functional requirement of the substation facilities and providing
enough space and access for operation, use and maintenance based on the input
provided by the Owner. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in this
specification for guidance purposes only.
f. The Owner shall hand over the substation land on as is basis; the bidder shall visit
the substation site to ascertain the quantum of work, present condition of the land
before submitting the offer. No request for commercial changes will be entertained
post award of work due to any claim related to site condition / plot condition. The
layout and levels of all structure etc shall be made by the bidder at his own cost from
the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by the bidder and approved by the
Owner in presence of engineer in charge.
g. The bidder shall give all help in instruments, materials and personnel to the Owner
for checking the detailed layout and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of
the layout and levels. The contractor shall make his own arrangements for water and
electricity.
2 CODES & STANDARDS
The following Indian Codes and Standards shall generally be used for design of civil and
structural works. In all cases, the latest revisions with amendments, if any, shall be followed.
a. SP: 6 ISI handbooks for structural engineers.
Page 3 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
b. IS: 2062 Specification for Structural Steel (Standard quality).
c. IS: 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
d. IS: 800 Code of practice for general construction in steel.
e. IS: 806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction
f. IS: 808 Rolled steel beam, channel & angle sections
g. IS: 813 Scheme of symbols for welding.
h. IS: 816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild
steel.
i. IS: 1080 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundations in soils
(other than raft, ring and shell).
j. IS: 875 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and
structures.
k. IS: 1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structure
l. IS: 1904 Code of practice for foundations in soil:-General requirements
m. IS: 1905 Code of practice for structural safety of buildings
n. IS: 2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide chrome, priming
o. IS: 2212 Code of practice for brick work
p. IS: 2911 Code of practice for design & construction of pile foundation
q. IS: 2950 Code of Practice for design and construction of raft foundations
r. IS: 2974 Code of Practice for design and construction of machine foundations
s. IS: 4326 Code of Practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of
Buildings
t. IS: 8009 Code of Practice for calculation of settlement of foundations: (parts 1& 2)
u. IS: 1829 Code practice for protection of iron and steel (Part I to III) structures for
atmosphere corrosion
v. IS: 13920 Code practice for ductile detailing of reinforced concrete structure
subjected to seismic force
Page 4 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
3 SCOPE OF WORK
All the above work is only a guideline, bidder shall include any other work which is
anticipated based on site condition or required for safe operation of the substation. Bidder
has to assess the existing civil structure and prepare civil design/drawings accordingly.
Bidder shall submit Design (as applicable for specific works) and drawings for all the works
prior to start of construction. Drawing and design needs to be approved by BYPL.
4 GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN
4.1 Design Loads for Equipment
Design criteria shall comprise the codes and standards used. Applicable climatic data
including wind loads, earthquake factors maximum and minimum temperatures applicable to
the building locations, assumptions of dead and live loads, including equipment loads,
impact factors, Safety factors and other relevant information.
a. Loads of equipment shall be considered as per manufacturer's certified drawings.
b. The foundation shall be designed considering the net allowable bearing pressure of
200KN/m2 at the depth of 2.0m from ground level.
c. Foundations shall be analyzed for all possible load combinations as per the relevant
IS codes.
d. Minimum reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS: 456.
4.2 Design Criteria
a. The minimum grade of concrete shall be M-25 & Grade of Steel FY-415
b. Limit state method of design shall be adopted unless specified otherwise in the
specification.
c. For detailing of reinforcement IS: 2502 and SP: 16 shall be followed. Cold twisted
deformed bars conforming to IS: 1786 shall be used as reinforcement. However, in
specific areas mild steel (Grade I) conforming to IS:432 can also be used. Two layers
of reinforcement (on inner and outer face) shall be provided for wall & slab sections
having thickness of 150 mm and above. Clear cover to reinforcement towards the
earth face shall be minimum 40 mm.
d. The procedure used for the design of the foundations shall be the most critical
loading combination of the steel structure and or equipment and/or superstructure
and other conditions, which produces the maximum stresses in the foundation or the
foundation component and as per the relevant IS Codes of foundation design.
Page 5 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
Detailed design calculations shall be submitted by the bidder showing complete

details of work proposed to be used.
e. Design shall consider any sub-soil water pressure that may be encountered following
relevant standard strictly.
f. Necessary protection to the foundation work. If required shall be provided to take

care of any special requirements for aggressive alkaline soil. Black cotton soil or any
other type of soil, which is detrimental / harmful to the concrete foundations.
g. Foundation system adopted by Bidder shall ensure that relative settlement and other
criteria shall be as per provision in IS: 1904 and other Indian Standards.
5 CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION WORK
The Contractor shall develop the site area to meet the requirement of the intended purpose.
The site preparation shall conform to the requirements of relevant sections of this
specification or as per stipulations of standard specifications. The Contractor shall give all
help in instruments, materials and personnel to the Owner for checking the detailed layout
and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the layout and levels.
5.1 Cement, Concrete & Steel Grades
5.1.1 Cement
a. Unless otherwise specified or called for by Engineer, the fresh ordinary Portland
cement conforming to IS-8112 of 1976 (latest revision) i.e. 43 grade shall be used for
the works.
b. Make of cement shall be Ambhuja/J.K Laxmi/Ultratech or approved by the owner.
c. The record of cement shall be maintained in M.A.S register by the contractor and
verified by engineer of the BYPL.
d. Cement shall be stored in a perfectly water-tight and well ventilated site store
capable of accommodating cement to ensure continuity of the work and having a
raised and perfect dry floor. Each parcel or consignment of cement shall be stacked
separately therein to permit easy access for inspection and a record shall be kept so
that each parcel or consignment may be identified. Cement which has become stale
or otherwise unsuitable and any bags or the like containing hardened lumps or cakes
of cement, consequent to storage at Contractor’s site stores will be rejected and shall
be removed from the site and disposed of as directed by the Engineer. The cost of
such rejected quantities shall be borne by the Contractor.
5.1.2 Concrete
a. Design Mix of M-25 grades of concrete as per provisions of IS: 456 and other
applicable codes shall generally be used for civil work.
Page 6 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
5.1.3 Steel
a. The reinforcing bars shall be Fe-415 generally conform to various requirements of IS:
1786 (for High Strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement).
b. Only TATA/SAIL/JINDAL make shall be used.
5.1.4 Aggregates
a. Aggregates shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone and gravel and shall be
chemically inert, strong, hard, clean, durable against weathering of limited porosity,
free from deleterious materials and shall conform to the applicable standards. If so
desired by the Engineer, they shall be washed and screened.
b. Sampling and testing shall be as per the applicable standards and shall be carried
out under the supervision of Engineer. The cost of all test, sampling, etc. shall be
borne by the Contractor.
c. All coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately and shall avoid
contamination with foreign materials. Segregates aggregates shall be rejected.
d. The necessary arrangements for field test shall be done at site. The material testing
register and weighing material register shall be maintained for field and lab
mandatory test by the contractor’s authorized site engineer, having degree in Civil
Engineering or minimum three year experience with diploma in civil engg. The copy
of all the certificates shall be submitted to BSES officials.
5.1.5 Water
a. Water used for both mixing and curing shall be as per applicable standards.
b. Potable waters are generally satisfactory. Where water can be shown to contain an
excess acid, alkali, sugar or salt, Engineer may refuse to permit its use.
5.1.6 Bricks
a. Ensure that the bricks are free from cracks, war page and of uniform colour.
b. Manufacturer’s test report & Material Test reports for all the materials shall be
submitted for approval prior to the utilization for work.
c. Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate quantity of
material.
5.2 Levelling, Excavation, Backfill & Compaction
a. The Capacitor bank area shall be properly levelled before construction. If fill material
is required, the fill material shall be suitable as per the requirement & level. The fill
shall be such a material and the site so designed as to prevent the erosion by wind
Page 7 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
and water of material from its final compacted position or the in-situ position of
undisturbed soil. Backfill material around foundations or other works shall be suitable
for the purpose for which it is used and compacted to the density described under
Compaction. If rocky strata available at site then bidder have to do all the necessary
arrangements for rock cutting & its disposal.
b. The thickness of fill material under the foundations shall be such that the maximum
pressure from the footing, transferred through the fill material and distributed onto the
original undisturbed soil will not exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of the
original undisturbed soil. For expansive soils the fill materials and other protections
etc. to be used under the foundation is to be got approved by the Owner. All the area
excavated in due course of construction must be filled by vendor. The area of future
bay must be filled by vendor up to the proper level of yard.
c. Whenever water table is met during the excavation, it shall be dewatered and water
table shall be maintained below the bottom of the excavation level during excavation,
concreting and backfilling.
d. Material unsuitable for founding of foundations shall be removed and replaced by

suitable fill material and to be approved by the Owner. Excavated material not
suitable or not required for backfill shall be disposed off in areas as directed by
Owner. Excavation and backfill for foundations shall be in accordance with the
relevant IS code.
e. The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per, relevant IS and
as per direction of Owner. All compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as
practicable. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard
Proctor's density at OMC. The sub grade for the roads and embankment filling shall
be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor's density at OMC. Cohesion
less material sub grade shall be compacted to 70% relative density (minimum).
5.3 General Requirement Site Surfacing/Stone Filling
The material required for site surfacing/stone filling shall be free from all types of organic
materials and shall be of standard quality, and as approved by the Owner. The material to be
used for stone filling/site surfacing shall be uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 20 mm
nominal size (ungraded single size) conforming to Table 2 of IS:383 - 1970. Hardness,
Flakiness shall be as required for wearing courses are given below:
a. Sieve Analysis limits (Gradation)

(IS: 383 - Table - 2)
Sieve % passing by weight

Size 100
40mm 85 – 100
20mm 0 – 20
10mm 0–5
'One Test' shall be conducted for every 500 Cu.m.
Page 8 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
b. Hardness
Abrasion value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 40%

Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 30% and frequency shall be one test
per 500 cum with a minimum of one test per source
c. Flakiness Index
One test shall be conducted per 500 cum of aggregate as per IS:2386 Part-I and
maximum value is 25%
5.4 Admixtures & Additives
a. Only approved admixtures shall be used in the concrete for the Works. When more
than one admixture is to be used, each admixture shall be batched in its own batch
and added to the mixing water separately before discharging into the mixer.
Admixtures shall be delivered in suitably labeled containers to enable identification.
b. Admixtures in concrete shall conform to IS: 9103. The waterproofing cement

additives shall conform to IS: 2645. Owner shall approve concrete Admixtures/
Additives.
c. The contractor may propose and the Owner may improve the use of a water-reducing
set-retarding admixture in some of the concrete. The use of such an admixture will
not be approved to overcome problems associated with inadequate concrete plant
capacity or improperly planned placing operations and shall only be approved as an
aid to overcoming unusual circumstances and placing conditions.
d. The water-reducing set-retarding admixture shall be an approved brand of Ligno-

sulphonate type admixture.
5.5 Construction of Capacitor Bank Foundations
a. All Reinforcement to Steel Bars shall confirm to IS 1786:1985 of Grade Fe-415.
b. M-25 Grade of Concrete shall be used.
c. 100mm Thick Lean Concrete shall be laid under all foundations.
d. Loose pockets shall be completely removed & filled with PCC(1:4:8)
5.6 Anti weed Treatment, Stone Spreading & PCC
a. The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for
complete performance of the work in accordance with the drawings specification and
direction of the Owner.
b. The contractor shall prepare the specified area before stone spreading . PCC must
be carried out in capacitor bank area in two layers. First layer of 75 mm thickness
Page 9 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
nominal of grade 1:4:8 concreting and second layer of 75 mm thickness of grade

1:2:4 cement concrete.
c. Along with PCC Stone spreading of 100cm thickness shall be done in the Capacitor
Bank area under present scope of work.
d. Before taking up stone filling, anti weed treatment shall be applied in the specified
area wherever gravel filling is to be done, and the area shall be thoroughly de-
weeded including removal of roots. The recommendation of local agriculture or
horticulture department shall be sought wherever feasible while choosing the type of
chemical to be used. Nevertheless the effectiveness of the chemical shall be
demonstrated by the contractor in a test area in capacitor bank and monitored over a
period of two to three weeks by the Engineer-in-Charge. The final approval shall be
given. by Engineer-in-Charge and final approval given based in the results.
e. The anti weed chemical shall be procured from reputed manufacturers. The dosage
and application of chemical shall be strictly followed as per manufacturer's
recommendation. The contractor shall be required to maintain the area free of weeds
for a period of 1 year from the date of application of 1st dose of anti weed chemicals.
5.7 Trench
a. All the material wherever required for trenches shall be supplied by bidder.
b. Power Cable trench and Control cable trench shall be separate
c. The precast removable RCC covers (with lifting arrangement) as per the layout
drawing shall be provided. The precast covers shall be constructed using RCC of
M35 grade. Trench cover must be of pre-cast concrete of grade not less than M-35 of
appropriate load bearing capacity.
d. Cable trench RCC covers shall be designed for self weight of top slab + UDL of 2000
Kg/m2 + concentrated load of 200 kg at centre of span on each panel.
e. Paved portion of cable trenches shall be repaired to withstand class AA Loading of

IRC/relevant IS Code
f. The top of trenches shall be kept at least 100 mm above the finished ground level.
The top of cable trench shall be such that the surface rain water do not enter the
trench.
g. All metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing system at regular
intervals.
h. Wherever required, all the construction joints of cable trenches i.e. between base
slab to base slab and the junction of vertical wall to base slab as well as from vertical
wall to wall and all the expansion, joints shall be provided with approved quality PVC
water stops of approx. 230 x 5 mm size for those sections where the ground water
Page 10 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
table is expected to rise above the junction of base slab and vertical wall of cable
trenches.
i. The repaired Cable trenches shall be blocked at the ends if required with brick
masonry in cement sand mortar 1:6 and plaster with 15mm thick 1:6 cement and
mortar.
j. Angles 50x50x6 mm (minimum) with lugs shall be provided for edge protection all
round edges of repaired RCC cable/pipe trenches supporting covers.
k. Sealing of repaired cable trench must be made in such a manner that no rain water
can accumulate in it.
l. If trench passes through road/load bearing path then Box Culvert of Appropriate load bearing
shall be used.
m. All the floor openings in building shall be covered with 6mm thick Checkered plates
n. Trench in existing control room may be used for control cable/LT Power Cable laying
but repairing and modification of the same shall be in vendor’s scope. If new trench is
required in control room then the same shall also be in vendor’s scope.
5.8 Substation Building
a. Ground floor of the building shall be made for cable cellar.
b. First floor of the building shall be made for 11kV and 33kV Switchgear.
c. Height of cable cellar room shall be 3 meter.
d. Height of and Switchgear room shall be 3.5 meter.
e. There shall be two entries and two exits of cable cellar and switchgear room.
f. Motorized shutter shall be provided for entry and exit of switchgears.
g. Doors and windows shall be provided in Building. Doors and windows shall be fire rated with
fire rating of 2 hour.
h. Two staircase shall be provided in substation building with granite finish and SS Railing of
304 grade.
i. Kota stone shall be provided in cable cellar and switchgear room for flooring purpose.
j. Finishing of walls shall be with three coats of Plastic Paint i.e. two coats during installation
and one coat at the time of handover.
k. Plaster work, putty and painting all around the building and common area with plastic paint
Page 11 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
l. Epoxy flooring after installation of kota stone shall be provided in Switchgear room.
m. Level of cable cellar room shall be above 900 mm from FGL.
n. Provision for Cable Entry and Exit in Switchgear room and Cable Cellar Room.
o. Provision of Lighting, Exhaust Fan, Ceiling Fan, Power Points For Cable Cellar and
Switchgear Room shall be provided.
p. Water proofing in three layers shall be done in roof slab and ground floor. Proofing
shall be done by using Dr Fixit chemical
6 INTERFACING
The proper coordination & execution of all interfacing civil works activities shall plan in
advance and execute in such a manner that interfacing activities do not become bottlenecks
and dismantling, breakage etc. is reduced to minimum.
7 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENT
a. Bricks having minimum 75kg/cm2 compressive strength can only be used for
masonry work. Contractor shall ascertain himself at site regarding the availability of
bricks of minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressive strength before submitting his offer.
b. Anti termite chemical treatment shall be given to foundations of Enclosure, filling
below the Enclosure floor etc. as per IS: 6313 and other relevant Indian Standards.
c. The details given in tender drawings shall be considered along with details available
in this section of the specification while deciding various components of the Site.
d. Items/components of site not explicitly covered in the specification but required for
completion of the project shall be deemed to be included in the scope.
e. Suitable pigment shall be added to render the surface aesthetically pleasing as per
directions of Engineer-in-charge
f. The curing period shall commence immediately after the concrete is finally screened
and continued a period of 21 days all civil works. The top and side surfaces of
concrete shall be kept moist and be protected from the direct rays of the sun during
the period. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer’s proposals for ensuring
continuous protection of the concrete during the curing period.
8 INSPECTION & TESTING
Necessary arrangements for field tests shall be done at site. Bidder has to do the following
tests from NABL accredited labs:
a. Raw material test : For Cement, sand , aggregates, water, brick, Steel
Page 12 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
b. Cube Test for compressive strength of concrete
9 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION
The following information shall be submitted for review and approval to the Owner
a. Structural design calculations and drawing (including construction/fabrication) for all

reinforced concrete and structural steel structures.
b. Fully, dimensioned concept plan including cross sections, longitudinal sections,

elevations and perspective view of Structure or Foundation. These drawings shall be
drawn at a scale not smaller than 1: 50 and shall identify the major components.
c. Fully dimensioned drawings showing details and sections drawn to scales of

sufficient size to clearly show sizes and configuration of the Foundation & Super
Structural components and the relationship between them.
d. Product information of Foundation materials
e. Bidders have to submit all the test reports mentioned in this specification.
f. Complete set of documents shall be provided in hard and soft forms.
Approval of the above information shall be obtained before ordering materials or starting
fabrication or construction as applicable.
10 QUALITY CONTROL
a. Construction Quality shall be properly controlled by the bidder. Bidder shall work as
per the Field Quality Plan provided by the owner. All the Tests specified in the Field
Quality Plan shall be done by bidder.
b. Weekly construction status will be updated by the bidder to Owner to assure the work
progress & the construction quality.
c. A Civil Engineer shall be deployed by the bidder for construction quality control. Civil
Engineer has to review ongoing construction work, check materials and
workmanship.
11 STATUTORY RULES
a. Contractor shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factories
act (as applicable far the State). Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee.
Water Act for pollution control and coordinate with forest department for necessary
approval prior to tree cutting.
b. Plastering on structural members (in fire prone areas) etc. shall be made according
to the recommendations of Tariff Advisory Committee.
c. Statutory clearance and norms of State Pollution Control Board shall be followed as
per Water Act for effluent quality from plant.
Page 13 of 14
SP-TSCWMK-132-R1
12 DEVIATIONS
Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with the tender by reference to
the Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence
of such a statement, it will be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this specification.
No deviation will be acceptable post order.
Page 14 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SCADA NETWORK & INTEGRATION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
SCADA NETWORK & INTEGRATION
REV 01
PREPARED BY APPROVED BY nd
DATE 02 August 2018
SS AV PAGE 1 OF 13
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
INDEX
1.0 SCOPE............................................................................................................ 3
2.0 SCADA NETWORK ........................................................................................ 3
3.0 SCADA INTEGRATION .................................................................................. 5
4.0 SPARES ......................................................................................................... 6
5.0 DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................ 7
6.0 DRAWING APPROVAL .................................................................................. 7
7.0 COMPLETENESS OF SUPPLY ..................................................................... 7
8.0 TRAINING ....................................................................................................... 8
9.0 DEVIATIONS .................................................................................................. 8
Page 2 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
1.0 SCOPE
A. This specification is intended to cover the supply, erection, testing and
commissioning of SCADA Network and Integration associated hardware/software
(like protocol converters), cables, accessories and other material required for
interfacing of all electrical equipments with existing ABB RTU 560A for efficient
and trouble free operation.
A.1. ABB RTU panel is multi processor CMU05/CMR02 based having required
nos. of co processor and main processor and having redundant power
supply. Main processor is having ethernet ports and serial ports. Ethernet
port of main processor is connected to LAN Switch (to be provided by BSES)
for communication with Master Control Centre on IEC 104.
A.2. The co processors are having ethernet ports which are responsible to
communicate to all numerical relays and Digital RTCC on IEC 61850
protocol.
A.3. The co processors are having serial ports which are responsible to
communicate to all multifunction meters (MFMs) and battery charger on
Modbus protocol through RS485 network.
A.4. The main processors and co processors are having the licenses of
IEC61850, MODBUS RTU MASTER & PLC, Archive, HMI, IEC 103 and IEC
104
B. The devices ie Numerical relays, digital RTCC,MFMs, battery charger etc. on
serial and LAN should have redundant media and redundant co processor
connectivity.
C. This specification shall be used in conjunction with all specifications, data sheets,
single line diagrams, and other drawings attached to the specification / purchase
requisition.
2.0 SCADA NETWORK

2.1 INFRASTRUCTURE i. All numerical relays & Digital RTCC shall be
connected to RTU in parallel redundancy
protocol (PRP).
ii. The communication shall be made in 1+1
mode, including the links between numerical
relays & Digital RTCC to switch and up to RTU,
such that failure of one set of communication
shall not affect the normal operation of system.
However it shall be alarmed in RTU.
iii. Data exchange is to be realized on dual star
Bus topology using IEC 61850 protocol with a
redundant managed switched Ethernet
communication infrastructure.
iv. MFMs shall be connected to RTU through
RS485 network so loop shall be prepared in
daisy chain fashion
v. Battery charger and APFC shall be connected
Page 3 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
to RTU in separate loops.

vi. Devices connected to single loop shall not be
more than 10.
2.2 SCOPE OF WORK i. Laying and termination of LC/ ST multimode

duplex fibre optic patch cords in PVC conduit
connecting the numerical relay to switch
ii. Laying and termination of LAN cables from
SWITCHGEAR end switch to RTU end switch
shall be done in PVC conduit of minimum 2
inches.
iii. Laying and termination of RS 485 cables from
MFMs, APFC and battery charger to RTU shall
be in PVC conduit of minimum 2 inches.
2.3 SCOPE OF SUPPLY i. All the hardware required to extend the relay
signals to the RTU shall be supplied along with
the switchboards.
ii. Aux supply of these hardware devices shall be
same as grid control voltage having wide range
(-20% to +20%).
iii. All communication hardware or protocol
converters required for compatibility with
SCADA shall be in bidder’s scope.
2.3.1 Ethernet switches at i. Shall be layer 3 ,managed type & PRP compatible
SWITCHGEAR end ii. Shall have KEMA certification for IEC 61850
compliance
iii. The switches shall be industrial grade with dual
power supply arrangement
iv. Shall be suitably mounted in an auxiliary
compartment in switchgear panel.
v. Ethernet Switch shall have required nos. of ports
(having RJ45 Ports / FO Ports).20% spare ports
shall be provided.
vi. Com speed of all ports shall be at least 10
Mbps/100 Mbps
vii. LED indicators on each RJ45 ports shall be
blinking with data transfer.
viii. It should support remote user setting
configuration.
ix. Warranty for the switch must be 5 years
x. It should own separate maintenance/console port.
xi. Latency shall be not more than 10ms.
2.3.2 Interface between i. LC/ ST multimode duplex fibre optic patch

Numerical Relay and cords connecting the numerical relay to switch
Page 4 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
Ethernet switch at shall be supplied by the bidder. Spare patch

SWITCHGEAR end cords shall also be provided by the bidder.
2.3.3 Interface between Ethernet Bidder shall provide LAN Cable of CAT 6 STP Grey
switch at RTU end and Color
Ethernet switch at
SWITCHGEAR end
2.3.4 Interface between RS485 Belden class shielded cable shall be provided
1. MFM and RTU by bidder.
2. APFC and RTU One spare loop for each loop of RS485 cable from
3. Battery charger and MFM to RTU, APFC to RTU and Battery Charger to
RTU RTU shall be provided by bidder.
2.3.5 Communication hardware All hardware like LAN Switch, FO glass/plastic, cables,
protocol converters required for interfacing IEDs like
protection relays, multifunction meters, Digital RTCC,
APFC,battery charger controllers etc. To RTU should
be included in scope of supply.
3.0 SCADA INTEGRATION
3.1 INFRASTRUCTURE Numerical relays should be only IEC 61850 & PRP
compatible having dual fibre optic ports. Through these
ports relays shall be connected to switches.
3.2 SCOPE OF WORK i. Configuration of Protection relays, Digital

RTCC and multifunction meters for SCADA
signals as per Annexure : Signals Related with
Digital RTCC, Annexure : Signals Related with
SWITCHGEAR and Annexure : Signals
Related with MFM and communication for the
same in existing RTU 560A Co Processor
CMU05/CMR02.
ii. For communication configuration and
troubleshooting of Relays, Digital RTCC and
MFM, required software, ICD file (IED
configuration description file), SCD file
(substation configuration description file),
configuration tool for relay integration on IEC
61850 and other IEC61850 files compatible
with existing RTU560A,communication cables
and documents to be handed over to team
SCADA BYPL.
iii. Providing SCADA signal mapping table for
signals listed in Annexure : Signals Related
with Digital RTCC, Annexure : Signals Related
with SWITCHGEAR and Annexure : Signals
Page 5 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
Related with MFM and communication

configuration details for RTU configuration.
iv. Simulation of all configured SCADA signals
(Listed in Annexure : Signals Related with
Digital RTCC, Annexure : Signals Related with
SWITCHGEAR and Annexure : Signals
Related with MFM) over LAN on IEC 61850
and over RS 485 on modbus on separate
terminal with same configuration settings.
v. Testing & commissioning of Numerical relays,
Multifunction meters and testing of Digital
RTCC and commissioning of all related signals
in RTU.
vi. Testing of Indications, Command, Interlocks as
per scheme, Relay soft interlock testing from
Relay HMI as well as simulation of SCADA
command through configured output of Relay.
vii. Downloading of Disturbance records facility
and uploading/downloading of configuration file
facility shall be provided from remote also
through ethernet switches at pre decided IPs.
viii. Demonstration of operational compatibility with
SCADA.
3.3 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.3.1 Configuration Software All software and configuration tools required for
and Tools configuration of SCADA Network should be included in
scope of supply.
ICD file (IED configuration description file), SCD file
(substation configuration description file), configuration
tool for relay integration on IEC 61850 and any other
IEC61850 file and configuration tool required for relay
integration compatible with existing RTU560A,
communication cables and documents shall be
supplied by bidder
4.0 SPARES
4.1 i. Bidder shall submit list of recommended spares
for BSES BYPL SCADA approval.
ii. Recommended minimum 20% spares of
supplied SCADA accessories for SCADA
interface to be supplied by bidder. Price for
spares shall be included in switchgear
package. All spares shall be tested in our
premises
Page 6 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
5.1 Documents for approval i. The bidder shall ensure that all necessary
drawings, write-up, information, etc required to
fully describe the equipment and network
architecture are to be submitted for approval.
ii. The manual shall clearly indicate in English the
installation and connection method. Check up,
maintenance and calibration method shall also
be provided in the manuals.
6.0 DRAWING APPROVAL

6.1 Before starting manufacture of any equipment and network, the bidder shall have to
take approval of the relevant drawings, data sheet from SCADA BYPL team in
writing
6.2 Any manufacture done prior to the approval of drawings / data shall be rectified in
accordance with the approved drawings / data by the Bidder at his own cost and the
equipment shall be supplied within the stipulated period
6.3 The make and type of communication devices shall be subject to approval by the
SCADA BYPL team. Bought-out items are also subject to approval
7.0 COMPLETENESS OF SUPPLY
7.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the equipment and
network. Nevertheless, the equipment and network shall be complete and operative
in all aspects and shall conform to highest standard of engineering, design and
workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up
to the guarantees in a manner acceptable to the SCADA BYPL team, who will
interpret the meaning of drawings and specifications and shall be entitled to reject
any work or material which in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith
7.2 Any material or accessory which may not have been specifically mentioned but
which is necessary or usual for satisfactory and trouble-free operation and
maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished without any extra charge.
7.3 The bidder shall supply all brand new equipment and accessories as specified herein
with such modification and alteration as agreed upon in writing after mutual
discussion
Page 7 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
8.0 TRAINING
8.1 Training at site Training to SCADA BYPL team’s engineers at site (two
day training included on basic price).
9.0 DEVIATIONS
clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the
alternative offer. In absence of such a statement, it will
be assumed that the bidder complies fully with this
specification. No deviation will be acceptable post
order.
Page 8 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
Annexure: Signals Related with Digital RTCC

Sr. No. Signal Detail Type of Signal on
IEC61850
Digital Input Signals-
1 Bucholz Alarm Single Point Information
2 Bucholz Trip Single Point Information
3 MOG Alarm Single Point Information
4 OSR Trip Single Point Information
5 OTI Alarm Single Point Information
6 OTI Trip Single Point Information
7 WTI Alarm Single Point Information
8 WTI Trip Single Point Information
9 PRV Trip Single Point Information
10 SPRV Trip Single Point Information
11 Digital RTCC Auto/Manual Single Point Information
12 Digital RTCC Communication Fail Single Point Information
13 Digital RTCC L/R Switch Single Point Information
14 Digital RTCC Watchdog Single Point Information
Operated
15 Oil surge Trip Single Point Information
16 FAN failed Single Point Information
17 Winding Temp. High alarm Single Point Information
18 OLTC PRV Trip Single Point Information
19 OLTC Low Oil Level Single Point Information
20 Tap Changer Stuck Up Single Point Information
21 OLTC motor Supply Fail Single Point Information
22 OLTC supply fail Single Point Information
23 Tap Max Reach Single Point Information
24 Tap Min Reach Single Point Information
25 Under Voltage Single Point Information
26 Over Voltage Single Point Information
Digital Output Signals-
1 Digital RTCC Relay Auto/Manual Single Command Output
2 Tap Changer Raise Single Command Output
3 Tap Changer Lower Single Command Output
Measurement Signals-
1 Oil Temperature Measured Float
2 Tap Position Measured Float
3 Tap Count Measured Float
4 Winding Temperature Measured Float
5 Voltage BR (of 11kV) Measured Float
6 Voltage RY (of 11kV) Measured Float
7 Voltage YB(of 11kV) Measured Float
(This is the indicative IO list, however the signal list may vary during the engineering
time)
Page 9 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
Annexure: Signals Related with SWITCHGEAR

IEC61850
1 Signals of Differential Relay
Digital Input Signals
1 Differential Trip Bph Single Point Information
2 Differential Trip Rph Single Point Information
3 Differential Trip Yph Single Point Information
4 Differential Highset Trip Single Point Information
5 Differential Trip Single Point Information
6 Inrush detected Single Point Information
7 REF Trip Single Point Information
8 Trafo. Differential lockout Single Point Information
operated
9 Trafo. Differential watchdog Single Point Information
operated
10 Trafo. Differential communication Single Point Information
fail
11 Trafo Trouble Trip Single Point Information
Measurement Signals
1 Current Bph Measured Float
2 Current Rph Measured Float
3 Current Yph Measured Float
4 Fault Current Bph Measured Float
5 Fault Current Rph Measured Float
6 Fault Current Yph Measured Float
7 Fault Current Nph Measured Float
8 Fault locator in some relays Measured Float
9 Sigma kA square Measured Float
2 Signals of Distance Relay
1 Distance Relay Lockout Operated Single Point Information
2 Distance Trip Single Point Information
3 Distance Zone-1 operated Single Point Information
6 Line Distance Relay Single Point Information
Communication Fail
7 Line Distance Relay watchdog Single Point Information
operated
3 Signals of Line Differential
Relay
Page 10 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
1 Conductor Broken Single Point Information

2 Differential Trip Single Point Information
3 Rph Differential Trip Single Point Information
4 Yph Differential Trip Single Point Information
5 Bph Differential Trip Single Point Information
6 Distance Trip Single Point Information
10 Earth Fault high set trip Single Point Information
11 Earth Fault IDMT trip Single Point Information
12 General Trip Single Point Information
13 Inter-trip Single Point Information
14 Line differential block Single Point Information
15 Line differential Channel-1 fail Single Point Information
16 Line differential Channel-2 fail Single Point Information
17 Line differential operated Single Point Information
18 Line differential relay watchdog Single Point Information
operated
19 Phase fault high set trip Single Point Information
20 Phase fault IDMT trip Single Point Information
21 PT Fuse Fail Single Point Information
Measurement Signals
1 Active Power Measured Float
9 Fault Locator in some relays Measured Float
10 Frequency Measured Float
11 Power Factor Measured Float
12 Reactive Power Measured Float
14 Voltage BR Measured Float
15 Voltage RY Measured Float
16 Voltage YB Measured Float
4 Signals of Overcurrent
Earthfault Relay
1 50BF/LBB Operated Single Point Information
2 86 Supervision Single Point Information
3 Relay Communication fail Single Point Information
Page 11 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
4 Relay watchdog operated Single Point Information

5 Isolator A status Double Point Information
6 Isolator B status Double Point Information
7 Cable door open Single Point Information
8 CB in Remote Single Point Information
9 CB Status Double Point Information
10 Earth Fault General Trip Single Point Information
11 Earth Fault High set Trip Single Point Information
12 Earth Fault IDMT Trip Single Point Information
13 Earth Switch AE status Double Point Information
14 Earth Switch BE status Double Point Information
15 Earth Switch LE status Double Point Information
16 Line Isolator status Double Point Information
17 Breaker L/R switch in Remote Single Point Information
18 Negative Phase Sequence Single Point Information
19 Phase Fault General Trip Single Point Information
20 Phase Fault Highset Trip Single Point Information
21 Phase Fault IDMT Trip Single Point Information
22 Phase Fault Overload Trip Single Point Information
23 PT Fuse Failure Single Point Information
24 Relay Reset Single Point Information
25 SF6 Gas Pressure Low Single Point Information
26 SF6 Lockout Operated Single Point Information
27 Spring Charged Single Point Information
28 TCS Alarm-1 Single Point Information
29 TCS Alarm-2 Single Point Information
Digital Output Signals
1 CB Command Double Command Output
2 Relay Reset Single Command Output
Spare Output
Measurement Signals
9 Fault Locator in some relays Measured Float
Page 12 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0

time)
Page 13 of 14
SP-TSSNI-136-R0
Annexure: Signals Related with MFM

Modbus
Measurement Signals
11 Neutral Current Measured Float
12 THD Measured Float
time)
Page 14 of 14

Tender Notification 008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Notification 008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Notification 008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Notification for

DESIGN, ENGINEERING, CIVIL WORKS,

Due Date for Submission: 23.05.2019, 14:30 HRS

BSES YAMUNA POWER LIMITED (BYPL)

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 1 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 2 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

1.03 Bid will be summarily rejected if:

2.00 Qualification Criteria

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 3 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

3.00 Bidding and Award Process

PART A :: TECHNICAL BID comprising of following

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 4 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

3.02 TIME SCHEDULE

S.No. Steps Due date

2 Last Date of Queries, if any 13.05.2019, 15:00 HRS

3 Pre-Bid Meeting 13.05.2019, 15:00 HRS

4 Last Date of Receipt of Bid Documents 23.05.2019, 14:30 HRS

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 5 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

5.00 Market Integrity

6.00 Supplier Confidentiality

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 6 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

2.00 SCOPE OF WORK

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 7 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

6.0 AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

6.04 Purchaser shall reserve the rights to following:

6.05 Bidders are requested to visit website regularly for any

7.0 LANGUAGE OF BID

8.0 DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 8 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

8.0 BID FORM

The EMD may be forfeited in case of:

(b) the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder does not

(i) accept the Purchase Order, or

(ii) furnish the required contract performance BG.

10.0 BID PRICES

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 9 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

11.0 BID CURRENCIES

11.01 Prices shall be quoted in Indian Rupees Only.

12.0 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS

13.0 ALTERNATIVE BIDS

14.0 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID

15.0 SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 10 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

16.0 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS

17.0 ONE BID PER BIDDER

18.0 LATE BIDS

19.0 MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

20.0 PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL

Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Bids

21.0 CLARIFICATION OF BIDS

22.0 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF BIDS / RESPONSIVENESS

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 11 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

23.0 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS

Subsequently, the Financial Proposals along with Supplementary Financial Proposals, if

(b) Conformance to Qualifying Criteria

(c ) Deviations from Bidding Documents

24.0 CONTACTING THE PURCHASER

NIT: CMC/BY/19-20/RB/SV/008 Page 12 of 71 Bidders seal & signature

26.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT

27.0 THE PURCHASER’S RIGHT TO VARY QUANTITIES